ma^gA^^sgg^ 


/ 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


LESSONS 


IN 


Graphic  Shorthand 


(GABELSBERGER) 


PREPARED   FOR 


THE    AMERICAN    PUBLIC 


BY 


C.  R.  LIPPMANN 


S, 


r 


J         5       ■>        J 
>  •       O*'     « 

J  J       3   >    * 


»  t    *    • 


J  *  -#-  * 


>  J 


J  >    J      J      J      J 

'  >  J    >  ,  J   .  .  ,  J 


J  9  a       > 


J   J  J       i 

J  3        J 


*    J     J        *     J    ' 


,yU 


\' 


PHILADELPHIA 

J.    B.    LIPPINCOTT    COMPANY 
1899 


Copyright,  1899, 
By  J.  B.  LiPPiNCOTT  Company. 


«     » 


•  •  •     '• 

•  •    • 


•  •      «      • 

•  •     •   •    « 

•  «    •    •     •  M 


'    »  • 


•        » 


•  •        •  • 

•  •    •        •  • 

•  •  •    • 


w      ••••        *        a***       •••         • 

*•   •••    •  •    ••*  !••  "      • 

•    •  •  •,-   •  • ;  •  • 


0  o 


PREFACE 


••♦•♦" 


IN  presenting  to  the  pnblic  this  text-book,  it  seems  fitting  that  some  few  words 
concerning  the  system  and  its  inventor  sliould  be  snbmitted  to  the  reader. 

Grajihic  Shortliand,  as  it  now  stands  in  America,  is  an  adaptation  of  the 
system  invented  in  1817  by  Francis  Xavier  Gabelsberger,  of  iMnnich,  and  used  by 
him  and  his  disciples  for  many  years  in  reporting  the  proceedings  of  the  Bavarian 
Parliament,  before  he  issued  it  (1834)  in  book  form  under  the  auspices  of  the  govern- 
ment. The  evolution  of  the  system  from  the  ordinary  script  writing  of  our  own  day 
is  outlined  in  the  lessons  themselves,  and  so  need  not  be  detailed  here. 

As  to  the  general  scope  of  the  system,  however,  it  may  be  said  that  it  has  spread 

bevond  any  Dossible  dreams  of  its  inventor,  being  now  used  in  twenty  lanaruagcs  so 

diverse  in  structure  and  vocabulary  as  English,  Spanish,  German,  Hungarian,  French, 

Italian,  Czechish,   Polish,  Greek,  Norwegian,  etc. ;    furthermore,  it  is  used  in  over 

forty  parliaments  for  purposes  of  official  record,  and  is  taught  in  government  schools 

in  many  countries,  Austria  alone  using  it  in  seven  different  languages  in  her  schools. 

^  The  following  lessons  explain  themselves.     The  aim  has  always  been  to  make 

^  them  interesting  as  well  as  instructive,  and  to  insure  a  good  knowledge  of  the  svstem 

^   by  constant  repetition  of  essential  details,  even  at  the  risk  of  wearying  those  to  whom 

g  such  repetition  is  unnecessary.     The  shorthand  plates  are  taken  direct  from  pen  copv, 

"■  in  whi(;h  no  caligraphic  results  have  been  attempted,  the  object  being  rather  to  produce 

such  outlines  as  would  be  found  in  the  note-book  of  a  fairly  careful  stenographer.     It 

"    should  be  noted  here  that,  in  order  to  bring  out  the  shading  more  emphaticallv,  the 

5  shaded  outlines  have  been  made  rather  heavy.     This  should  not  be  imitated  too  faith- 

fully  by  the  student,  liowever ;  as  is  stated  in  the  lessons,  a  slight  increase  of  pressure 

on  the  pen  or  pencil  is  sufficient  for  this  purpose. 

-J 

\Z  For  the  business  or  professional  man,  who  desires  merely  to  take  })rivate  mem- 

•"  oranda,  the  first  ten  lessons  w^ill  suffice ;  while  the  commercial  or  literary  amanuensis, 
who  may  be  called  upon  to  write  as  many  as  a  hundred  and  twenty  words  a  minute, 
will  need  the  entire  book.  Only  those  who  wish  to  qualify  themselves  for  verbatim 
reporting  (court  and  convention  reporting)  will  be  obliged  to  master  the  full  Reporting 
Style  of  the  system. 

The  author  takes  this  occasion  to  thank  those  friends  whose  encouras^ement  and 
advice  Avere  of  such  assistance  to  him  in  preparing  these  lessons,  which  are  now  offered 
to  the  impartial  criticism  of  a  discriminating  public. 


Philadelphia,  July  1,  1899. 


45       -1 


Lesson  No.  i. 


GRAPHIC    SHORTHAND. 


GENERAL   RULES. 


A  careful  attention  to  these  general  instructions  will  render  your  progress  much  more 
rajjid  and  satisfactory,  bj'  enabling  you  to  spend  all  your  energies  in  the  right  direction,  so 
that  you  will  have  nothing  to  unlearn. 

Do  not  try  to  cover  the  lesson  all  at  one  time  ;  a  good  plan  is  to  divide  the  lessons  into 
sections,  studying  a  section  each  day,  and  reviewing  the  whole  lesson  before  going  further. 

For  the  first  three  lessons  have  the  practice-sheet  ruled  like  the  lesson-sheet,  so  that 
j'ou  may  become  accustomed  to  writing  the  shorthand  characters  the  correct  size.  After 
this  has  been  accomplished,  only  the  bottom-centre-line  (a),  simply  called  the  line,  will  ha 
retained.  The  next  line  above  line  (o)  is  the  top-centre-line  {b),  the  next  one  above  is  the 
to2>line  (c),  and  the  one  below  the  bottom-centre-line  is  called  the  bottom-line  (d). 

Shorthand  characters  reaching  from  the  line  to  the  top-  or  bottom-line  are  called 
large  letters;  those  reaching  from  the  line  to  the  top-centre-line  are  medium,  letters;  And 
those  written  on  the  line,  but  not  reaching  the  top-centre-line,  are  stiiall  letters.  Short- 
hand t,  for  instance,  is  a  large  letter,  6  is  a  medium,  letter,  and  I  a  small  letter. 

In  practising  the  words  given,  trace  them  at  first  with  a  drj'  pen  over  the  printed 
characters  on  the  lesson-sheet,  before  starting  to  tvrite  them  indej^endentli/,  In  this  way 
accustoming  the  hand  to  the  outline.  Practice  each  word  given  until  you  can  readily  write 
it  without  the  aid  of  the  lesson-sheet.  Do  not  attempt  to  attain  speed  for  the  present,  but 
direct  your  efforts  to  writing  the  outlines  correctly  and  gracefully ;  the  violation  of  this 
rule  is  the  cause  of  much  trouble  to  the  student. 

The  outlines  are  shaded  naturally,  just  as  in  longhand  wi'iting.  No  iqy-stroke  is  shaded, 
and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  shade  the  down-strokes  too  heavily. 

Remember  that  we  write  by  sound  only,  and  do  not  write  what  you  do  not  hear.  For 
instance,  "through"  is  written  "thru;"  in  "write,"  the  initial  w  and  final  e  are  omitted, 
leaving  r-'i-t.  This  outline  cannot  be  confounded  M'ith  lorit,  as  we  have  different  means  for 
expressing  the  short  "i",  as  in  "  hit."  Be  careful  to  distinguish  between  a  vowel-sign  and  a 
"vowel-sound".  In  these  lessons  the  signs  will  be  italicized,  while  the  "sounds  will  be 
placed  in  quotation  marks". 

Fix  in  your  mind  thoroughly  the  fact  that  vowel-sounds  are  long  or  short,  according  to 
the  time  needed  to  pronounce  them:  thus,  in  both  "race"  and  "raise"  the  vowel-sow  «cZ  is 
precisely  the  same,  but  in  "race"  the  "a"  is  much  shorter  than  in  "raise,"  the  differ- 
ence being  solely  in  the  time  required  for  pronunciation. 

In  order  to  get  used  to  this  method  of  phonetic  writing,  it  is  advisable  in  the  beginning 
to  pronounce  each  word  slowly  as  you  write  it;  "light",  for  instance,  pronounce  "  1-i-t " 
(not  "el-I-tee");  though,  "th-6". 

Since  every  stroke  in  shorthand  has  a  meaning,  omit  all  superfluous  flourishes. 

Always  read  what  you  write.  It  is  essential  to  practice  reading  as  well  as  writing.  A 
good  stenographer  should  be  able  to  read  his  notes  more  rapidly  than  he  writes  them. 

When  you  have  mastered  a  lesson,  read  the  shorthand  plate  without  the  aid  of  the  text ; 
if  you  come  across  a  word  which  is  not  clear  to  you,  look  up  the  respective  rules  in  the 
lesson  and  refresh  your  memory  on  that  point.  Then  write  in  shorthand  the  numbered 
words  or  sentences  of  the  lesson,  and  compare  your  transcript  with  the  shorthand  plate. 
If  there  is  a  discrepancy  between  your  notes  and  those  on  the  plate,  look  up  and  acquaint 
yourself  again  with  the  rules  under  the  respective  number. 

Remember  that  the  key  to  success  is  perseverance,  which,  applied  to  shorthand,  means 
faithful,  relentless  practice. 

5 


Lesson  i. 

Lessons  in  Graphic  Shorthand* 

By  C.  R.  LIPPMANN. 

C         /'/     ?         3         -f 


r/;;   /TT^.v  i:  i:l  ix  f/y-;.^^ 


U     />-      ^     .^      .^  ^^   ^       -l»     Lb      L^     .^i.     ^=  1       1,      1/1— 7~ 


""37       72        73        3=?     77         73         Ty  37  5^7      7S^  ?7~~  ^a         Jl  ??  ?3^  75~' 


I  he    63^     70/^       7'  7ity^  73       74  TJ  7^         77         /7S 

L\        U      J       \^^     .-^  ■^-\       \^        77.   >-V.    -yC-  — ,  =    '^T.         ^      ^^         Ir^       ^ 


v^^^     U     1/    J     K>^   »y      -^    \^     Tl.T^-jL — ^  =  77.      ^    ^ 


To  T/  Ji  73  Jfl       7^  37  Jf       Jg       J^      Jd       ^7        gzT 


/<5     75i?    /o^fl.  /*f      7?d 


■~    7x3  /«4    iis\ia6        727         'iK/       7i§     73i5      7«7  75g        755  /^4  /3Sy/      /jrf/ 


J^T         737       JS^         7?2  ;*;  7?z  A?S  744  ^  7?3=  77     Til^       7?7 


TiX  745F  755  779  77^^  77g  /j-4  777"  TS?"  /  /J^^  777         /jy      7^ 


M 


-Jk-"^^         Ly^^       ^-^^^         ^-^^         .<^^^r%        ^ ^  «>^-^  A      >i       L- N.        Z- ^    ^^^   ^    C-^^ 


7ti  Tiz  7S3  7^?  7T  TijT     7tt~76f      TtSTtg     773  7/7       ^^      /?»   /74    Z/-*"  f^b   'jy    /Jii 


t 


-^w 


/^^-^.         ^   'U.    y^  ^l  .  J^  .^-^      ^       _y^      y^^ 


-ZtZZ^^ZIZ 


m 777 /SS  y      ^ 


'*3  y  '^f'  y     '9'  I        I        's^        ~        ^ 


2^ 


133 


C^      F.        1      ».^  a  ^  . l^       o    C>o      t?irr  •    . \X        o      m/        f      O V>./    « 


^ 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


The  Theory  of  "Graphic"  Shorthand. 

Let  us  now  analyze  the  ■word  "Vine"  on  the  lesson-sheet.  The  first  letter  reads  (itle 
(1)  :  cutting  down  a  longhand  t  to  its  simplest  outline  gives  us  the  Graphic  t  (oj,  which 
may  be  traced  upward  or  downward,  as  convenience  requires;  using  tlie  initial  hair-stroke 
of  longhand  i  for  Graphic  i  (G),  and  joining  t  and  /,  we  write  the  word  tie  (7)  ;  the  final  e, 
lieing  mute,  is  not  written,  since  we  write  by  sounds  only.  (In  spelling  words  for  short- 
nand  jiurposes  it  is  advisable  to  pronounce  "  t,"  not "  te-ee". )  To  write  iicjht  add  t  to  tie  where 
i  ends  (8),  but  to  save  the  waste  of  time  in  making  the  angle,  continue  the  final  t  in  the  same 
slope  as  /,  thus  obtaining  a  straight  outline  in  the  correct  form  for  fight  (9).  Reducing  an 
I  to  its  smallest  size  gives  us  the  shorihand  I  (10)  :  this  is  practically  an  ordinary  /,  but 
traced  so  small  that  the  loop  dwindles  into  a  mere  dot.  This  letter,  by  means  of  its  initial 
or  final  hair-stroke,  blends  readily  with  others,  as  shown  in  (11).  Here  we  see  separated 
the  letters  which,  when  joined,  form  the  word  title  (12).  In  final  I,  the  final  hair-stroke  is 
omitted.  Now  write  and  read  light  il-i-t)  (13)  ;  the  initial  hair-stroke  is  omitted  in  the 
initial  I :  tile  (14).  You  will  notice  that  in  shorthand  a  letter  is  connected  just  where  the 
preceding  one  ends,  without  regard  to  alignment,  in  order  to  save  time. 

The  shortest  and  most  characteristic  part  of  b  forms  the  shorthand  b  (15).  The  sound 
"a"  (either  short  or  long),  occurs  more  frequently  than  any  other,  and  is  therefore  expressed 
by  the  shortest  possible  outline,  the  initial  hair-stroke  of  a  longhand  a  (16).  By  joining,  i.e., 
blending,  b  and  a  (pronounced  "  ay"),  we  get  bay  (2)  and  (17).  The  a  stroke  cannot  be  con- 
founded with  the  i  stroke  (6),  because  the  latter  is  three  times  as  long  as  a,  reaching 
diagonally,  from  the  line  to  the  top-centre-line:  note  the  diflference  between  bay  (17)  and 
by  (18). 

Now  write  bale  (19)  ;  note  how  the  final  stroke  of  b  forms  the  ay  stroke  and  is  blended 
with  the  initial  stroke  of  I:  bile  (20):  tail  (or  tale)  (21),  and  tell  (22) ;  note  that  the  short 
vowel-sound  is  indicated  by  doubling  the  I ;  the  same  rule  applies  to  bale  (or  bail)  (23) 
and  bell  (24). 

Notice  the  distinction  we  made  between  a  vowel  or  vowel-sign,  and  a  voivel-sound.  The 
vowel  or  vowel-sign  in  bale  is  a,  in  bell  is  e,  but  the  vowel-sound  in  both  words  is  prac- 
tically the  same,  except  that  in  the  former  word  it  is  longer  than  in  the  latter.  For  this 
reason,  in  shorthand  we  employ  the  same  vowel-sign  for  both,  indicating  the  length  of  the 
sound  by  means  of  single  or  double  following  consonants.  As  to  tale  and  tail ;  although 
they  are  written  with  the  same  characters,  we  can  infer  the  right  meaning  from  the  con- 
text, just  as  in  conversation  we  can  distinguish  between  two  words  having  the  same  sound. 

Write  and  read  ale  (25),  and  lay  (26);  note  how  the  a  stroke  blends  with  the  initial 
and  final  stroke  of  I  in  these  words,  expressing  the  vowel-sound  respectively  before  and 
after  I.  Lie  (27):  ally  (28);  "y",  having  the  same  sound  as  "i",  is  expressed  by  the  i 
stroke  ;  when  it  has  the  short  "i"  sound,  it  is  expressed  like  the  short  "i",  as  will  be  shown 
later.  Alight  (29) :  able  (30)  ;  here  the  a  stroke  is  raised  to  join  b  ;  this  is  always  done 
when  the  following  letter  does  not  .start  on  the  line.  Table  (31) :  this  word  illustrates  a  very 
important  rule,  i.e.,  the  a  stroke  between  two  consonants  is  always  made  in  such  a  direction 
as  to  meet  the  following  letter  ;  in  other  words,  the  connecting  stroke  between  two  consonants 
expresses  the  vowel-sound  "a",  j^^'ovided  there  is  no  other  vowel  expressed. 

Bible  (32)  ;  there  are  no  capital  letters  in  shorthand  :  libel  (33). 

(34)  shows  how  g  is  derived  :  gale  (35)  :  beg  (36)  :  get  (37) ;  when  t  occurs  with  only 
one  other  consonant,  a  short  "a"  is  to  be  read  between  the  two.  {Gate  is  written  differ- 
ently, as  will  be  shown  in  the  second  lesson.) 

The  last  stroke  of  longhand  m  is  taken  for  the  Graphic  m  (38):  you  will  now  understand 
game  (3),  which  consists  of  g  and  m,  joined  by  the  vowel-stroke  expressing  "a":  might 
(39)  :  mail  or  male  (40) :  mile  (41) :  lime  (42) :  kune  (43) :  time  (44) :  item  (45) :  note  the  dis- 
tinction between  aim  (46)  and  may  (47) :  melt  (48)  :  belt  (49). 

(50)  shows  the  derivation  of  d,  which,  joined  with  ay,  makes  day.  Note  aid  (51) :  day 
(52)  :  die  or  dye  (53) :  dale  (54)  and  dell  (55)  :  maid  or  made  (56)  :  dame  (57)  :  dime  (58). 
In  debt  (59),  "  b"  is  silent  and  therefore  omitted.  Tide  (60)  :  abide  (61) ;  observe  how,  in 
connection  with  the  /  stroke,  d  stands  half  above  the  line,  as  otherwise  it  could  not  be  con- 
veniently joined  to  i :  bed  (62),  and  bade  (63). 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAXD. 


Graphic  r  is  the  top-stroke  of  longhand  r  (64).  Note  mare  (65) :  mire  (66)  :  rhyme  (67) : 
tear  or  tare  (68) :  better  (69)  :  letter  (70) ;  no  consonant  is  written  double  as  a  rule, — notice, 
however,  the  double  II  in  bell  (24),  dell  (55),  etc.  Rye  (71)  :  lighter  (72)  :  observe  the  differ- 
ence between  air  (73)  and  ray  (74). 

(75)  shows  the  evolution  of  n,  which  is  the  final  half  of  a  quickly  traced,  small,  long- 
hand n.  Men  (76)  :  nail  (77)  :  ten  (78)  :  nine  (79):  mine  (80)  :  nigh  (81).  Demon  (82)  :  iron 
(83) ;  the  "  o"  in  the  last  syllable  of  these  words,  and  in  words  of  the  same  class,  is  not 
sounded  ;  what  we  hear,  and  therefore  write,  is  a  short  "a",  which  we  express  by  simply 
joining  the  two  consonants.     Net  (84)  :  rent  (85). 

Graphic  s  is  an  ordinary  longhand  s,  simplified  in  form  and  reduced  in  size  (86).  Same 
(87):  raise  (88)  ;  s  also  stands  for  c  when  this  letter  has  the  "s"  sound,  but  to  distinguish 
between  "  s"  and  the  short,  sharp  sound  of  "  c"  in  words  like  race  (89),  we  shorten  the  connect- 
ive vowel-stroke,  since  the  sound  of  race  is  shorter  than  that  of  raise.  Where  this  rule  can- 
not be  applied,  we  express  the  sharp  "s"  sound  by  an  enlarged  s  sign,  as  in  rice  (91),  which 
compare  with  rise  (90) :  sale  and  sail  (92)  :  sell  (93)  :  assail  (94)  ;  note  the  initial  hair-stroke 
indicating  the  "ay"  in  this  word.  Sigh  (95) :  say  (96)  ;  note  the  distinction  between  these 
words.  In  the  evolution  of  tlie  sj-mbol  for  the  "  th"  sound,  Graphic  Shorthand  is  even 
more  logical  than  ordinary  script,  which  arbitrarily  establishes  "  th"  to  represent  a  sound 
which  is  neither  a  "t",  an  "h",  nor  a  combination  of  the  two,  being  a  lisped  or  "per- 
verted" "s",  as  shown  in  (97)  and  (98).  You  can  readily  convince  yourself  of  this  by 
saying  aloud  the  word  base  (99)  and  lisping  the  "  s",  M'hich  will  make  the  word  bathe  (100). 
Note  lace  (101)  and  lathe  (102). 

F  (103)  is  the  simplest  part  of  longhand  /,  being  a  straight  stroke  extending  below  the 
line:  it  may  be  traced  upward  or  downward  to  suit  the  convenience  of  the  writer.  In 
order  to  get  the  rest  of  the  word  as  much  as  possible  on  the  centre-line,  t  is  preferably 
traced  downward,  while  /  is  written  upward  when  possible  :  fail  (104)  and  (104-«)  will 
illustrate  this.  In  the  latter  form  /  is  traced  upward  ;  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  the 
connecting  vowel-stroke  between  /  and  I,  as  /I  could  not  occur  as  an  independent  word 
without  a  vowel  between  the  consonants,  and  when  there  is  no  other  vowel-sound  expressed, 
the  vowel-sound  iiyiplied  is  "a".  This  vowel-sound  may  be  represented  in  longhand  either 
by  "a",  "  ay",  "  e",  or  "ey".  Fell  (105) :  fame  (106) :  life  (107)  is  written  on  the  same  principle 
as  l-i-t ;  I  is  written  on  the  bottom-line  and  /  is  traced  in  the  i  direction,  reaching  as  far  as 
the  centre-line.  Note  knife  (108),—/;  is  silent,  and  is  not  written,— and  ^/?e  (109)  ;  in  the 
latter  word,  trace  /  in  the  i  direction,  in  order  to  save  the  angle  in  joining  it  at  the  line 
with  the  i  stroke  ;  this  agrees  with  the  reasoning  in  connection  with  tight  (9).  Fight  (110)  is 
shortened  in  (110-a),  thus  doing  away  with  the  inconvenient  angle.     Fade  (111) :  fare  (112). 

IT  is  derived  from  the  longhand  h  as  shown  in  (113)  ;  this  outline  has  a  bolder  sweep 
than  g,  and  ends  with  a  slight  curve  to  the  left.  Note  hay  (114) :  high  or  hie  (115) :  hail 
(116),  and  Iiell  (117):  hem  (118):  hide  (119):  hair  (120):  haze  (121)  :  "z"  is  also  represented 
by  s  and  a  long  vowel-stroke,  as  shown  in  the  case  of  7'aise  (88).  These  substitutions  of 
related  consonant-sounds  will  be  found  perfectly  safe.  In  a  case  of  this  kind  a  clash  of 
meanings  will  be  found  practically  impossible:  in  hen  (122),  for  the  sake  of  convenience, 
n  is  joined  to  A  by  a  loop. 

Graphic  w  is  simply  the  first  half  of  an  ordinary  longhand  w  (123).  H  after  u>,  in 
words  like  when  (124),  is  superfluous,  even  misleading,  since  this  combination  of  consonants 
is  pronounced  "  hw",  not  "  wh"  ;  i.e.,  the  "  h"  must  be  sounded  before  the  "  w"  can  make 
itself  heard.  Note  wail  (125),  and  well  (126) :  tvhile  (127) :  tvent  (128) :  lueb  (129) :  way  (130),  and 
why  (131) :  ived{lS2),  and  wade  (133);  see  how  the  difference  in  the  vowel-sound  is  expressed  ; 
a  short  sound,  "wed",  by  a  short  connecting  vowel-stroke,  a  long  vowel,  "wade",  by 
a  long  stroke:   wide  (134):  white  (135):  wet  (136). 

V  (137)  is  the  down-stroke  of  a  Gothic  v.  Write  veil  (138) :  vile  (139) :  Dave  (140) :  knave 
(141) ;  k  is  silent,  and  so  not  written :  alive  (142) :  derive  (143).  In  favor  (144)  the  v  is 
shortened  to  save  the  connecting  stroke  between  v  and  r,  thus  suppressing  the  short  "a" 
sound;  no  "  o"  is  sounded  in  pronouncing  this  word, — see  the  note  in  connection  with 
demon  (82) :  (144)  literally  is  spelt  f-a-v-r,  which  cannot  be  mistaken  for  anything  else. 

(145)  shows  the  evolution  of  k.  Deck  (146) :  beck  (147).  Note  the  difference  between 
like  (148)  and  alike  (.149) :  bike  (150) :  kennel  (151) :  care  (152) :  case  (153).     The  last  two  words 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


illustrate  the  use  of  k  to  indicate  the  hard  sound  of  "  c  ",  just  as  s  is  used  for  the  soft  sound. 
When  k  is  preceded  by  a  long  "a"  sound,  its  outline  is  lengthened  to  about  twice  its  usual 
size  (154) :  lake  (155) :  sake  (156)  :  take  (157)  :  make  (158).  In  a  similar  manner  n  is  length- 
ened to  show  a  preceding  long  "a"  sound  (159):  bane  (100):  main  (161):  sane  (162) :  vain, 
vane,  or  vein  (163) :  lane  (164). 

Logograms  ( Word  Signs). 

Of  the  words  in  common  use,  sixty  per  cent,  are  small  and  recur  very  frequently : 
such  words  are  /,  you,  he,  am,  have,  and,  of,  for,  etc.  For  the  puipose  of  increasing  speed, 
these  words  are  never  written  in  full,  being  indicated  by  standard  abbreviations,  called 
logograms.  These  logograms  consist  of  one  or  more  of  the  letters  of  the  word  in  question. 
Those  we  have  passed  in  this  lesson  are:  t,  standing  for  7iot  (165),  b  for  be  (166),  m  for  am 
(167),  d  for  do  (168),  r  for  ever  (169),  n  and  r  joined  for  iiever  (170),  n  for  on  (171),  fh  for 
the  (172),  /  for  for  (173),  h  for  have  or  has  (174),  tv  for  ive  (175),  v  for  very  (176),  k  for  can 
(177),  the  a  stroke  (178)  stands  for  a,  an,  or  at, — there  is  no  danger  that  these  words  may 
conflict.  It  is  very  essential  that  these  word  signs  (of  which  there  are  very  few  in  this 
system)  be  well  memorized,  as  this  will  greatly  help  the  student  to  write  rapidly. 

The  slant  shown  in  the  lesson-sheet  has  been  adopted  as  the  one  most  generally  in  use  ; 
any  slant  may  be  used,  however,  even  the  "vertical  system"  of  handwriting  being  adapted 
to  "Graphic  Shorthand",  since  the  slant  of  the  letters  is  purely  relative.  Use  any  slant, 
whichever  is  most  natural,  taking  care  only  that  the  relative  positions  of  the  letters  shall 
be  correct. 

Exercises. 

Translate  sentences  (179)— (198)  into  longhand,  comparing  them  with  the  translation 
given  beloM- ;  then  transcribe  them  again  into  shorthand,  correcting  your  words  by  a 
comparison  Mith  the  lesson-sheet.  The  principal  factor  in  acquiring  a  good  knowledge 
of  shorthand  is  unwearying  practice,  until  your  hand  instinctively  traces  the  outline, 
without  any  help  from  your  brain.  (179)  I  set  a  day  aside.  (180)  I  gain  my  aim.  (181 )  I 
like  a  fine  fireside.  (182)  I  raise  my  rifle  ;  I  take  aim  at  the  red  men  ;  may  I  fire?  (183) 
Take  the  way  by  the  lakeside,  said  I.  (184)  They  say  they  can  ride  the  bike  well.  (185) 
The  tide  may  rise.  (186)  The  hen  may  have  laid  an  egg.  (187)  May  we  ever  be  as  gay 
again.  (188)  Be  on  the  right  side.  (189)  Then  the  men  may  fight  for  the  game.  (190)  Sell 
the  kite.  (191)  Tell  the  tale.  (192)  Do  they  dye  the  hair?  (193)  We  do  not  like  the  knife. 
(194)  May  the  base  design  fail.  (195)  Write  the  letter  for  the  rent.  (196)  We  like  wine. 
(197)  The  demon  can  never  be  right.     (198)  I  fell  on  the  thigh. 

You  will  now  be  able  to  write  the  following  exercise,  without  the  aid  of  the  lesson- 
sheet.  Compare  what  you  have  written  Avith  the  sheet,  correcting  any  mistakes.  Go  over 
the  ground  until  the  rules  are  thoroughly  impressed  on  your  mind.  The  second  lesson  will 
be  of  no  value  to  you  unless  you  have  mastered  the  first.  This  exercise  will  appear  written 
in  shorthand  in  Lesson  No.  2,  thus  giving  you  an  opportunity  to  compare  and  correct  what 
you  have  written. 

(a)  I  cannot  have  my  way.  (b)  The  men  said  I  might  gain  a  favor,  (e)  I  take  the 
cake,  (d)  I  aim  high,  (e)  I  dare  not  sell  the  lemon,  (f)  The  maiden  has  the  veil. 
(g)   Write  the  letter  right  away,     (h)   I  like  white  wine  very  well. 

(Note. — The  word  demon,  as  written  above,  is  pronounced  "di^niou";  to  write  the  word 
"demon",  as  it  is  most  generally  pronounced,  will  recjuire  a  vowel-sign  which  has  not  yet 
been  illustrated.  The  word  has  been  used  to  show  the  illogical  character  of  English 
spelling :  if  we  write  the  word  lemon,  the  pronunciation  will  at  once  suggest  itself,  the  "e" 
being  pronounced  as  a  short  "ay";  but,  in  donon.  \\v  use  the  same  sign  to  express  :i  sound 
belonging  to  a  totally  ditterent  class  of  vowels. J 


10  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  2. 


Before  you  start  with  this  lesson,  be  sure  that  j-ou  know  the  first  lesson  thoroughly, 
aud  read  again  the  General  Rules,  which  must  be  borne  in  mind  throughout  the  whole 
course.  Compare  the  writing  exercises  of  Lesson  1  with  the  transcription  on  sheet  No.  2 
(a-h),  and  if  j-ou  discover  any  mistakes  in  your  exercise,  go  over  the  respective  rules  again 
until  you  have  mastered  them ;  for  it  is  essential  that  no  new  principle  be  taken  up  until 
those  explained  in  the  previous  lessons  have  been  thoroughly  absorbed.  The  observance  of 
this  rule  is  essential  to  success,  and  failure  to  follow  it  will  be  fatal. 

This  lesson,  which  contains  a  principle  entirely  new  to  you,  is  the  most  difflcult 
of  the  course  ;  but,  as  shown  by  the  reading  exercise,  it  will  bring  you  ahead  considerably, 
and  after  you  have  mastered  it  there  will  be  easy  sailing.  Do  not  be  discouraged  by 
the  constant  difference  between  the  spelling  aud  pronunciation  of  a  word.  Fix  in  mind 
the  sound  of  the  word  ;  then  write  just  ivhat  you  hear  and  omit  everything  else.  Thus, 
"nation",  which  sounds  like  nashen,  is  written  in  that  manner;  "judge"  which  sounds 
like  juj,  is  written  in  that  manner.  Tlie  vowel-sounds  require  close  attention  at  the  begin- 
ning, otherwise  they  may  perplex  you,  but  if  you  will  remember  that  there  is  a  great 
difference  between  a  "vowel-sound" — which  you  hear  pronounced— and  the  vowel-sign — 
which  is  the  alphabetical  representation  of  a  sound — you  will  have  little  trouble.  For 
example  :  Lesson  1  stated  that  a  short,  almost  horizontal  stroke  stands  for  the  vowel-sound 
"a"  (see  Lesson  1,  No.  16) ;  this  is  not  the  letter  a  of  the  shorthand  alphabet,  but  simply 
stands  for  the  sound  which  is  most  frequently  represented  by  «,  e,  ay,  ai,  ei,  or  ear  as  in 
hade  (not  had,  which  is  again  a  different  sound),  hed  (which  has  the  same  sound,  only  of 
shorter  duration),  bay,  bail,  veil,  lead — same  sound  as  veil,  but  of  shorter  duration.  The 
letter,  or  vowel-sign,  a  will  be  shown  later.  Look  again  at  the  words  bell  and  bail  (Lesson 
1,  Nos.  23  and  24)  ;  the  latter  cannot  be  mistaken  for  ball,  which  is  quite  a  different  sound 
(being  of  the  "aw"  class),  and  will  be  shown  later.  The  vowel-sign  of  a  word  does  not  at 
all  affect  the  shorthand  way  of  writing  it,  which  is  governed  entirely  by  sound  ;  thus,  in 
shorthand,  bird  is  written  as  though  it  were  spelled  b-u-r-d ;  girl  is  written  as  though  it 
were  spelled  g-u-r-l,  for  it  is  pronounced  that  way.  It  would  be  entirely  wrong  to  use  in 
these  words  the  diagonal  stroke  which  stands  for  "i",  as  in  bite  or  light  (see  Lesson  1), 
since  this  is  not  the  vowel-sign  for  the  vowel  "i",  but  the  representa^^ion  of  the  sound  as 
you  hear  it  in  tight,  ride,  etc. 

As  was  explained  above,  the  only  difference  of  the  vowel-sounds  in  the  words  "get" 
and  "gate"  is  the  length  of  time  consumed  in  pronouncing  them;  otherwise  they  are 
identical.  Therefore,  we  use  in  shorthand  the  same  vowel-sign  for  both,  indicating  the 
length  of  the  sound  by  means  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke.  Thus,  in  order  to  differen- 
tiate get  from  gate  we  use  in  the  latter  word  the  small  t  (1),  which  admits  of  the  use  of  a 
connective  vowel-stroke  ;  this  small  (!  is  a  medium-sized  letter,  and  can  be  traced  downward 
only.  Tlie  two  characters  for  t  admit  of  nice  distinctions.  A  short  vowel-sound  is  to 
be  read  before  large  t  only  when  it  is  preceded  by  not  more  than  one  consonant — compare 
grt  (37):  belt  (41),  in  Lesson  1;  in  all  other  cases  no  vowel  is  to  be  read  between  large  t  and 
the  preceding  consonant — get  (37)  and  belt  (49),  Lesson  1,  illustrate  this  point  also.  Small 
t,  when  connected  by  means  of  the  vowel-stroke,  is  always  preceded  by  a  vowel-sound,  and 
can  therefore  not  be  used  as  initial  letter.  Note  the  difference  between  let  (2)  and  late  (3), 
get  (4)  and  gate  (5),  debt  (6)  and  date  (7) — as  b  in  debt  is  silent,  it  is  omitted  in  shorthand. 
When  small  t  is  ju-eceded  by  the  i  stroke,  a  short  vowel-sound,  something  like  "a"  is  to  be 
read  before  it ;  right  (8)  and  riot  (9)  will  illustrate  this  point ;  in  the  latter  word  we  hear  no 
"o",  but  a  nondescript  vowel-sound  approaching  a  short  "a"  ;  see  also  diet  (10). 

There  being  no  sound  for  "q"  in  the  language,  there  is  also  no  special  sign  for  it; 
it  sounds  like  "kw"  and  is  represented  by  these  two  letters  (11):  note  quite  (12),  and 
quiet  (13). 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  11 


Symbolical  Vowel  Refresextation. 

Ill  Lesson  1  we  wrote  every  souiul  as  it  occurred  ;  for  example,  to  write  men,  we  joined 
??i  and  /?,  wliile  the  connective  strolve  indicated  tiie  vowel-sound.  The  sound  in  7nan,  Ijeing 
ditlerent,  would  require  a  different  stroke  ;  but,  as  we  do  not  wish  to  lengthen  the  outlines 
of  the  words  by  adding  new  strokes,  we  represent  certain  vowel  sounds  in  a  si/mbolical 
manner. 

When  we  consider  the  "  a"  sound  as  in  7iictn  or  in  mar  from  the  stand-point  of  phonetics, 
we  come  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  the  strongest  of  all  vowel-sounds.  The  "  i"  sound  as  in 
sick  or  in  seeA;— the  latter  has  the  same  sound  as  sick,  except  that  it  is  longer — is  the  highest 
sound  ;  and  the  "  u"  sound  in  mud  or  mood  is  the  loirrnt  sound  of  the  language,  as  will  be 
explained  in  the  following  paragraphs.  This  fundamental  iirinciple  should  be  kept  well  in 
mind,  as  the  structure  of  sj'iiibolical  vowel  representation  is  built  upon  it. 

A  as  in  man  or  in  mar  having  the  strongest  sound,  we  can  indicate  this  sound  by 
"sti'engthening" — i.e.,  shading  (thickening) — the  adjoining  consonant.  For  the  sound  as  in 
man  we  shade  the  lo receding  consonant ;  can  (14) — the  noun,  not  the  verb,  for  which  a  logo- 
gram was  given  in  Lesson  1:  cab  (15)  :  lad  (16)  :  dabble  (17)  ;  distinguish  between  rabble 
and  rebel  (19)  :  tack  (20)— no  "ck"  is  used  in  shorthand.  Note  rat  (21)  and  art  (22)  ;  the 
latter  word  starts  with  the  initial  vowel-stroke  to  indicate  that  the  vowel  must  be  read  before 
the  consonant  (/•)  :  the  same  rule  applies  to  cat  (23)  and  act  (24),  where  the  initial  stroke  of  A; 
is  raised  so  that  it  blends  more  conveniently  with  the  vowel-stroke. 

The  following  consonant  is  shaded  when  the  "  a"  sounds  as  in  bar  (25),  car  (26),  bcdm  (27), 
and  calm  (28).  As  these  examples  show,  only  a  slight  additional  pressure  on  the  pen  or 
pencil  is  necessary  to  produce  shading  ;  only  down-strokes  are  shaded,  and  only  that  part  of 
a  down-stroke  is  shaded  which  could  be  shaded  in  ordinary  handwriting. 

The  sound  of  "i"  as  in  sick  is  the  highest  of  all  vowel-sounds;  i.e.,  the  same  voice  will 
reach  a  higher  pitch  when  pronouncing  this  sound  than  when  uttering  ''a'',  for  instance  : 
this  sound  is  therefore  expressed  by  high  position  of  one  of  the  adjoining  consonants ;  in 
other  words,  it  is  indicated,  but  not  written.  The  main  rule  is  that  the  vowel  sound  is 
indicated  by  the  following  consonant,  which  in  this  case  is  "placed  high".  Note  the 
difference  between  "th"  and  "s"  in  thick  (29)  and  sick  (30),  and  the  difference  between  the 
long  and  short  sound  in  sick  and  seek  (31) :  sin  (32)  and  seen  (38) :  seal  (34)  and  sill  (35) :  deal 
(36) :  mere  (37) :  meek  (38)  :  meal  (39)  and  mill  (40) :  wheel  or  weal  (41)  and  will  (42) :  wick 
(43)  and  weak  or  iceek  (44) :  din  (4-5)  and  dean  (46).  In  all  these  words  (29-46)  the  consonant 
following  the  "  i "  (as  in  bit)  sound  is  placed  high. 

You  will  notice  that  these  words  show  the  tendency  to  indicate  the  "  i"  sound  by  the 
change  of  position  of  the  smaller  of  the  two  consonants  between  which  the  sound  occurs. 
It  is  not  always  the  following  consonant  which  is  placed  high,  as  in  the  above  exam- 
ples ;  when  the  preceding  consonant  is  smaller  than  that  following,  or  when  they  are 
both  medium  characters,  it  will  be  found  more  convenient  to  place  the  preceding  con- 
sonant high,  as  shown  by  the  following  paragraph.  This  rule,  which  enables  us  to  trace 
outlines  more  conveniently,  applies  only  to  initial  syllables,  not  counting  a  prefix  ;  in  the 
word  liver,  for  example,  I  is  placed  high  ;  in  deliver  I  is  also  placed  high,  because  the 
syllable  de  is  a  prefix.  In  all  other  syllables  the  high  position  is  always  assumed  by 
the  following  consonants.  When  in  doubt  as  to  which  consonant  is  to  be  placed  high, 
write  the  word  both  ways,  placing  the  preceding  consonant  high  in  the  first  outline,  and 
the  following  high  in  the  second.  Your  own  common  sense  will  then  tell  you  which  is  the 
more  convenient  outline. 

Note  dim  (47)  and  deem  (48) ;  here  the  length  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke  indicates 
the  length  of  the  sound  :  dig  (49)  :  hid  (50)  and  heed  (.51) :  women  (52)  ;  no  "o"  is  heard  in 
this  word,  which  is  pronounced  as  if  it  were  spelt  w-i-m-m-c-n,  and  the  initial  consonant  is 
placed  high  :  give  (53).  Another  form  of  v,  the  second  half  of  the  Gothic  v,  will  be  found 
more  convenient  in  connection  with  the  "i"  (as  in  bit)  sound  ;  this  sign  is  traced  upward, 
and  the  following  letter  is  naturally  placed  high,  thus  admitting  of  a  saving  in  outline: 
veal  (55) :  vim  (56).  Note  the  difference  between  whit  or  icit  (57)  and  wheat  (58) :  bit  (59)  and 
beat  (60) :  lid  (61)  and  lead  (62) :  need  (63) :  seed  (64) :  sit  (6-5)  and  i^cat  (66). 

The  sound  of  u  as  in  mud  or  mood  is  the  lowest  sound  of  the  vowel-scale  and  is,  there- 
fore, expressed  by  low  position,  i.e.,  by  placing  the  following  small  consonant  below  the  line, 


12  GEAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


and  a  following  medium  consonant  through  the  line.  The  difference  iu  the  length  of  the 
connective  stroke  will  indicate  whether  the  sound  is  "  u"  as  in  mud  (67)  or  "  oo"  as  iu  mood 
(68).  Note  rum  (69)  and  room  (70)  :  cub  (71)  :  love  (72  or  72-a) ;  the  word  is  pronounced  as 
though  it  were  spelled  l-u-v-e:  lug  (73):  duck  (74):  cut  (75).  When  t  changes  its  position, 
the  medium  form  must  be  employed  and  the  length  of  the  vowel  indicated  by  the  connec- 
tive-stroke :  note  boot  (76),  and  butter  (77).  Oun  (78):  fun  (79) — this  word  illustrates  an 
important  rule;  as  shown  in  Lesson  1,  the  shorthand  letters  are  joined  without  regard  to 
alignment,  so  that  when  a  letter  is  placed  low  it  need  not  necessarily  stand  right  below  the 
centre-line,  but  it  must  stand  lower  than  the  preceding  consonant.  iV  in  fun  stands  lower 
than/  and  therefore  expresses  the  "  u  ".  In  ton  (80)  the  vowel-sound  is  the  same  as  in 
tunnel,  and  n  is,  therefore,  placed  low.    Compare  this  word  with  tune  (81)  :  tub  (82)  :  tube  (83). 

An  exception  to  the  above  rule  is  made  when  the  "  u  "  sound  is  in  the  first  syllable  of  a 
word  and  is  between  two  small  characters  ;  as  in  the  case  of  "  i  "  (as  in  bit),  a  prefix-syllable 
is  not  counted  :  cull  (84),  cool  (85),  and  lull  (86)  illustrate  the  point.  When  we  can  indicate 
the  length  of  the  sound  by  means  of  the  connective-stroke,  it  is  not  necessary  to  employ 
double  consonants,  as  illustrated  by  the  three  preceding  words.  Cur  (87) :  nun  (88)  :  null 
(89) :  thus  (90)  :  cook  (91) :  soon  (92).  If  son  were  spelled  s-u-n,  we  would  not  pronounce  it 
any  differently;  therefore  it  comes  under  the  heading  of  the  short  u  ;  son  or  sun  (93). 

If  we  analyze  the  vowel-sound  in  house,  for  instance,  we  find  it  to  be  the  sum  total  of 
two  vowel-sounds, — viz.,  "a"  as  in  art  and  "oo"  as  in  mood.  We  express  this  sound,  there- 
fore, by  the  sum  total  of  the  two  respective  rules,  i.e.,  by  a  combination  of  low  j^osition  and 
shading.  Thus,  in  house  (95),  s  is  placed  below  the  line  and  shaded :  note  the  difference 
between  ton  and  town  (96) :  sour  (97)  :  mouth  (98)  :  loud  (99) :  gown  (100) :  rouse  (101)  :  mouse 
(102) :  noun  (103) :  howl  (104)  :  bout  (105).  To  decide  as  to  whether  the  preceding  or  the 
following  consonant  is  to  be  placed  low,  use  the  rules  given  for  the  "  u"  sound. 

The  preceding  examples  show  how  we  can  write  seven  different  vowel-sounds  without 
any  additional  effort ;  including  the  three  sounds  taught  in  Lesson  1, — viz.,  "e"  as  in  men, 
"a"  as  in  m,ane,  and  "i"  as  in  bite, — we  can  now  write  ten  different  vowel-sounds.  This 
method  of  showing  vowel-sounds  without  actually  writing  them  being  new  to  the  student 
and  totally  different  from  the  methods  of  longhand,  he  should,  above  all,  thoroughly 
familiarize  himself  with  this  important  chapter  of  shorthand,  so  that  he  can  write  the 
proper  outline,  showing  the  vowel-sound  in  a  correct  manner.    For  this  reason  the  following 

Vowel  Drill 

should  be  carefully  studied  ;  observe  in  particular  the  method  by  which  the  different  vowel- 
sounds  are  distinguished,  even  when  the  consonants  of  the  outlines  are  identical. 

In  rag  (106),  rig  (107),  and  rug  (108),  note  the  shading  of  r  in  the  first  word,  its  high 
position  in  the  second  (as  it  is  the  smaller  of  the  two  consonants),  and  the  low  position  of  g 
in  the  third  ;  if  r  were  i^laced  low  in  this  last  word,  the  outline  would  not  be  so  convenient. 
Ben  (109)  :  bane  (110)  :  ban  (111)  :  bin  (112)  :  bean  (113)  :  bun  (114)  :  boon  (115) ;  notice  the 
logical  distinction  between  the  short  and  long  sounds.  As  shown  by  Ben,  no  difference  is 
made  in  shorthand  between  small  letters  and  capitals,  except  that  an  outline  may  be  under- 
lined to  show  that  it  starts  with  a  capital  letter.  Beg  (116)  :  bag  (117)  :  big  (118)  :  bug  (119)  ; 
the  two  last  words  illustrate  well  the  convenience  of  placing  the  preceding  and  following 
letters  respectively  high  and  low.  Bed  (120)  :  bade  (121) :  bide  (122)  :  bid  (123) :  bud  (124). 
Beck  (125) :  bake  (126) :  back  (127)  :  bike  (128) :  buck  (129) :  book  (130).  Cat  (131)  and  kite  (132) ; 
notice  the  diffei'ence  between  the  direction  of  the  t  stroke  in  cat  and  the  i-t  stroke  in  kite : 
Kate  (133) :  cut  (134) :  kit  (135  or  135-a) — here  either  the  long  or  the  medium  t  may  be  used. 
Leg  (136) :  lag  (137)  :  lug  (138) :  lack  (139)— notice  I  shaded  :  lake  (140)  :  lick  (141)  :  leak  (142) : 
luck  (143)  :  look  (144;  :  in  practice  it  will  be  found  that  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to  discriminate 
between  look  and  luke  ;  this  can  be  done,  however,  by  making  the  length  of  k  in  proportion 
to  the  length  of  the  sound.  Notice  the  diffei*ence  between  dame  (145)  and  dime  (146) :  see 
also  dam  (147)  :  dim  (148)  :  deem  (149)  :  dumb  (150) — b  is  silent  and  therefore  omitted  :  doom 
(151).  Tick  (152) :  Teck  (153)  :  tack  (154)  :  tuck  (155)  :  took  (156).  Tin  (157)  :  tan  (158)  :  ten 
(159) :  teen  (160) :  tun  (161) :  tune  (162) :  toivn  (163).  Bet  (164)  :  bat  (165) :  bite  (166) :  bait  (167) : 
butt  (168) :  bout  (169) :  boot  (170) :  bit  (171)  :  beat  or  beet  (172) — these  two  words  are  distin- 
guished in  shorthand  by  the  context,  just  as  iu  conversation  ;  large  t  could  also  be  used  in  bit 
and  beat.    Fate  (173) :  feat  or  feet  (174)  :  foot  (175)  :  fiat  (176).    Fail  (177)  :  feel  (178  and  178-o) 


Lesson  2. 


■~t^=^ 


± 


')    -2^  cz. 


z: 


-C^ — ceqL 


^'^    ^-  ^  A 


y^ 


jsL. 


^   r\<- 


V^       ')^ 


ISIZ^IZIZ 


V- — 77" ' 


/.^:L      'J  ^j    {, 


f- 


\X       ^ 


^ 


S 


"T^TT 


1/^  /T  ■/  .^    y   ^  ^/  /^y  .^"^^ 


"TTT 


^^  ^^   7- .  ^u.   -rv^-^-^^^::^ 


^       ^y.       nY,      /k         v/       -^      r^    -^     /^ 


3 


.^^. ^rv 


/  ^>" 


"77- 


r^   //A   ^^^    ;;>^    ^-    ^  ^   /r 


— 37 


-^rg- 


~7^ 


/         ^      ^        -^      rn^ 


..-/    V 


7* 


7=^=Z 


rf    g     '-g     ^jT — '/  '>."?^ 


^.   -^7    ^  r    ^.-    '/.   /    //"  /    C^ 


~:ft- 


T^ 


Z 


^ ^^ T^V^ /K-^      ^     ^^' 


A j^  >^"w 


A-»    cr^ 


9^ 


/  o  S" 


-tf""-^ — ^^ 5 — ^ xt Jo 


'^- 


:)-     // 


■TJ K7- 


"775" 


//<? 


/'S 


-rrr 


/  2.5- 


vV      V     v;     /--     /^.     Z-^.     ^  /^-    ^     ^       i^r-r;^^^ 7r-7J:    L^    ^..       /^   L^ 


^3d 


r^  /5S- 


s 


/y<7 


^y      ,^/  .//..; 


LC^ 


2;=^ 


_^:ri. 


n 


■^¥- 


.-?  ^«---N 


.^v 


^  ^    y^  /■///T^/^.^^^Ziig 


■7-73^ 


^ZZ^^ZIMUS 


-rjr?^ 


-ry-v- 


//    L      ^^'     /f    If    <^ 


z^ziz^zzz^ 


-77-i- 


:^ 


:z: 


2: 


/: 


/■^tf 


/^^ 


2.00 


::i-^lL^f.jl^l  v^     v/   v/   v^l-^.^-^-^  /;/    .^^    (^>'<f,     ^^    r^^    .^/>    r-^  <,    d^,  ^g~?" 


-2?0 


~ —-^ — _ j~ — .^^ -7 ~yT:^ 


2-  10 


£./S~ 


±Ph 


73S- 


9- 


IHO 


7  '^  V^   r/"  r^  'o-.   -'^P^ 


(3       -^^-^ 


-2X"<? 


^6^  ^  «-^>-  ^^  -0  c:  e 


'0'^  A  ^./.  y^^^^  ^^y^/^.  ^-  ^  ^^  -^/^  ^^^,  ^/L^..zjpL 


2 


-TT. 


^ 


r-  .y  _       r.  -r .  //   .  .  C 


rr\ 


:zzz2~:z^ 


i  <<.2 


.  ^./y  /■  ^  /I 


"2^^" 


-^ 


IZIS 


:^r7x:5^;:?~Z2:7::Ei=2s:32 


7^ 


9-T^ 


:^ 


4- 


3.6  6 


-3- 


-r-^ 


<      '-     oV-    . . 


2^7 


^ 


2l^ 


^^^^^"^-7.      ^^-^     -    ^     -/  /   ^-    -   ^'  '=9-^-^ 


7 


■J  /u 


O     ^^' 


7 7  x"         ^7/ 


■^ 


272 


^ 


■'  \    - 


^T 


j/J     -^ 


(rtP 


-^^^ 


TTv- 


-^ 


P\     --/  .-    --/r.-      ...      P.    ._J^...w-^ 


.y^^  "<^  /(. 


C      P^      ^    ^    -      /^-/     ^ 


-H^ 


-57^ 


z 


I rr -r — -r-^ — 7— 

->-_2,g_— iI3 ■  r>  .^g — ^^  ■  -^ — ^-^ — <-^ 


-^ 


SZI 


14  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


— cau  be  written  with  /  upward  or  downward  ;  file  (179)  :  fill  (ISO) — notice  the  difference  in 
the  direction  of/  in  tliese  two  words  :  fool  (181) — notice  I  placed  low.  Net  (182)  :  gnat  (183) 
—g  is  omitted:  knit  (184)  :  neat  (185) — (186)  and  (187)  the  same  two  words  witli  medium  t: 
nut  (188).  Bat  (189)  :  rate  (190)  :  right  (191)  :  riot  (192)  :  rut  (193)  :  root  (194)  :  rout  (195), 
Debt  (196)  :  date  (197)  :  doubt  (198).  Deck  (199)  :  Dick  (200)  :  duck  (201).  Jl/mse  (202)  :  mess 
(203)— notice  that  s  is  larger  in  mess  than  in  maize  :  r)%ass  (204)  ;  mice  (205) :  ')nuss  (206)  :  moose 
(207)  :  moMse  (208).  i»/an  (209) :  men  (210)  :  ?>iea?i  (211)  :  mane  (212)  :  moon  (213).  J/aid  or 
made  (214)  :  mad  (215)  :  mid  (216) :  «ieed  (217)  :  mud  (218)  :  ??zood  (219).  Met  (220)  :  «ri(//*i! 
(221)  :  mate  (222) :  mat  (223) :  ??ieei;  (224)  :  7nitten  (225)  :  «iOO^  (226).  Hat  (227)  :  Aai-e  (228) : 
height  (229)  :  hit  (230)  :  Aea^  (231)— /m^  and  heat  with  medium  ^  (232)  and  (233)  :  hut  (234)  : 
hoot  (235).     ^i«'eA:  (236)  :  quack  (237) :  quake  (238). 

Before  we  mention  the  logograms  of  this  lesson,  we  must  quote  a  few  words  which  can- 
not be  classed  as  such,  but  whicli  are  not  written  in  strict  accordance  with  the  rules.  H 
placed  high  reads  naturally  he  (239)  ;  this  sign  stands  also  for  him  ;  tlie  context  will  readily 
decide  wliich  of  tlie  two  is  meant.  In  ivho  (240),  h  is  placed  low  and  (silent)  tv  is  omitted  ; 
from  tliis,  hoiv  (241)  will  be  formed  by  shading  h  in  low  position.  These  words  are  formed 
irregularly,  as  the  rule  requires  tliat  the  vowel-sound  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  a  word 
must  be  indicated  or  written,  as  will  be  illustrated  in  another  lesson.  The  same  applies  to 
the  following  words  :  r  for  are  (242)  shaded  and  on  the  line  should  be  preceded  by  an  initial 
vowel-stroke  (on  the  same  principle  as  art)  ;  the  same  sign  placed  low  and  shaded  will  read 
our  (243)  ;  n  below  the  line  and  shaded  (on  account  of  the  "  ow"  sound)  reads  now  (244). 

Logograms. 

B  below  the  line  (on  account  of  the  "  oo"  sound)  reads  your  (245),  and  represents  the  word 
in  full  with  the  exception  of  y.  Medium  t  stands  for  to  or  too  (246).  But  (247) :  could  (248)  : 
such  (249)  :  thus  (250)  :  much  (251)  :  must  (252)  :  ivould  (253)  ;  shoidd  (254)  ;  you  will  notice  that 
the  low  position  of  these  abbreviations  indicates  the  low  vowel-sound  of  the  word  for  which 
they  stand.  Notice,  also,  how  the  vowel-stroke  follows  the  consonant  in  such  and  thits,  show- 
ing that  the  vowel-sound  in  the  word  folloivs  the  consonant,  and  liow  the  preceding  vowel- 
stroke  in  m^nst  shows  tiiat  the  vowel-sound  precedes  s  in  tliis  word.  These  words  show  how 
important  it  is  to  place  the  logograms  in  their  proper  positions.  Had  (255)  is  represented  by 
the  final  d,  shaded  on  account  of  the  "  a"  sound  ;  in  accordance  with  a  rule  of  the  Reporting 
Style,  this  d  is  placed  high  to  show  that  it  is  not  the  beginning  of  a  word,  but  the  final  part ; 
the  high  position  cannot  imply  an  "  i"  sound,  as  the  shading  clearly  indicates  an  "a"  sound. 
Compare  the  length  of  tlie  vowel-strolves  in  this  (256)  and  these  (257),  where  by  high  posi- 
tion and  by  the  preceding  vowel-strokes  the  vowel-sounds  preceding  final  s  are  clearly  indi- 
cated, so  tliat  in  these  words  only  th  is  omitted. 

You  should  now  be  able  to  read  all  the  words  up  to  this  point  without  hesitation,  or  to 
write  them  correctly  from  the  text  (without  looking  at  the  shorthand  sheet).  If  this  is  not 
the  case,  you  should  read  them  and  write  them  until  they  appear  as  natural  to  you  as  though 
they  were  printed  in  type  or  as  though  you  were  writing  them  in  longhand.  Only  then 
should  you  proceed  to  the  following 

Reading  Exercise. 

(258)  Have  they  met  the  mate  on  that  date  ?  They  might  not  have  met  him. — Compare 
might  and  tnet ;  also  notice  th  shaded  and  followed  by  t  in  that. 

(259)  These  good  men  seem  to  be  very  dumb  ;  I  fear  they  may  meet  a  sad  fate. 

(260)  Tell  the  maid  to  get  some  fine  linen  right  now  ;  we  need  the  same  for  the  sick 
sailor. — O  in  some  has  the  sound  of  u  in  sum^  for  which  reason  m  is  placed  low.  O  in  sailor 
is  pronounced  as  though  the  word  were  written  sailer,  and  is  therefore  replaced  by  the  con- 
nective vowel-stroke,  indicating  a  short  e. 

(261)  Tiie  bark  has  a  leak. 

(262)  Could  he  let  her  hear  the  tune  on  the  fiddle? — Her  sounds  just  as  though  it  were 
spelled  hur ;  r  is  therefore  placed  low.  Double  consonants  are  not  written  in  shorthand 
(unless  for  the  purpose  of  making  some  special  distinction)  ;  for  this  reason  only  one  d  is 
seen  in  fiddle. 


{ 


GRAPHIC  SHOllTHAND.  15 


(263)  I  should  like  to  buy  u  ticket  for  the  bout,  but  I  do  not  care  to  meddle  with  the 
rifF-raff.— Observe  ticket,  where  the  vowel  between  k  and  t  is  sliown  by  the  connective  vowel- 
stroke.     Also  notice  ivlth, — w  connected  witli  th  in  higli  position.     Compare  riff  axuX  raff. 

(264)  That  quack  may  kill  the  sick  man. 

(265)  How  soon  may  your  son  have  seen  the  rig? 

(266)  Who  could  now  do  the  same  feat? 

(267)  He  said  we  nnist  get  at  the  root. 

(268)  For  such  a  big  sum,  we  could  not  take  the  hou.se. 

(269)  I  should  not  let  her  look  at  the  book. 

(270)  The  cat  does  not  seem  to  like  our  white  kitten.— As  stated  in  Lesson  1,  Ji  is  super- 
fluous in  ivhite. 

(271)  How  much  mutton  do  we  need  for  our  noon-day  meal?— O  in  mutton  has  the  short 
"e"  sound. 

(272)  Why  should  he  sadden  this  affair  with  such  a  letter? 

(273)  Better  late  than  never  may  be  very  well,  but  better  never  late  wouW  seem  to  be  a 
better  rule. 

(274)  The  dude  had  such  a  vacant  gaze  that  I  had  to  laugh  at  him. — Oljserve  the  length- 
ened k  in  vacant;  also  ^shaded  in  laugh,  where gh,  sounding  like/,  is  replaced  by  the  latter. 

(275)  Good  air,  as  well  as  good  care,  might  make  him  well. — To  be  very  exact,  the 
vowel-sound  in  as  should  be  represented  by  shading  ;  but,  as  the  word  is  .so  frequent,  and  as 
the  outline  as  written  here  cannot  clash  with  anything  else,  shading  need  not  be  used. 

Writing  Exercise. 
{The  transcription  will  not  appear  in  the  following  lesson.) 

(276)  The  man  may  be  lame  on  the  right  leg.  (277)  I  might  not  have  the  time  for  the 
fake  sale.  (-78)  The  less  I  say  on  the  death  case,  the  better  for  the  minor.  (279)  Do  not 
sigh  like  a  babe  ;  be  a  man,  (280)  "  Save  your  life  for  my  sake,"  said  the  wife  ;  "  they  can- 
not let  a  sailor  die  like  this."  (281)  "The  letter  cannot  be  made  lighter,"  said  the  writer, 
when  I  sent  tlie  maid  for  the  mail.  (282)  The  label  on  the  file  may  be  a  fake.  (283)  Dave 
does  not  like  Mabel.  (284)  Let  the  men  guess  at  a  name  for  the  racer.  (285)  My  fame  may 
amaze  the  maiden.  (286)  Can  they  reckon  that  much?  (287)  Can  we  never  bake  the  cake 
on  the  fire?  (288)  They  like  a  hay-ride  on  a  fine  moonlight  niglit.  (289)  Fame  may  make 
men  vain.  (290)  I  desire  five  days'  time.  (291)  I  cannot  take  the  time  for  the  ride.  (292) 
This  does  not  seem  to  be  a  very  quiet  meal.  (293)  To  whom  could  I  liken  the  man  ?  (294) 
Give  her  a  needle  to  darn  the  lace.  (295)  We  must  cart  the  beam  away  with  the  big  wagon. 
(296)  The  wag  made  a  bet  with  the  tinsmith  that  he  could  fool  the  master.  (297)  A  lug-a-l)ed 
cannot  be  a  good  business  man.  [Write  each  word  .separately  in  lug-a-bed.]  (298)  Do  not 
light  the  bad  segar. 


16  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  3. 


Since  the  method  of  representing  sounds  sj'mbolically  is  quite  new  to  you,  and  since  it 
is  entirely  unlike  the  usages  of  longhand,  it  is  advisable  to  review  the  examples  at  length. 
At  the  same  time  we  will  consider  the  remaining  consonants  of  the  shorthand  alphabet, 
which  are  for  the  most  part  large  characters,  reaching  eitlier  from  the  top-  to  the  centre- 
line, from  tlie  centre-  to  the  bottom-line,  or  from  the  top-centre-line  to  the  bottom-line. 
The  respective  sizes  of  the  various  letters  should  be  well  observed. 

(1)  shows  the  derivation  of  y ;  the  sign  is  placed  on  the  line,  so  as  to  join  readily  with 
the  following  letter.  No  particular  size  is  prescribed  for  tl:ie  loop,  which  is  made  so  as  to 
connect  easily  with  the  following  letter,  as  shown  by  year  (2),  yale  (3),  Yule  (4),  yarn  (5) 
and  yacht  (6). 

(7)  shows  the  derivation  of  p^  which  (for  the  sake  of  convenience)  can  be  traced  down- 
ward or  upward  (7a),  just  like  t  and  /.  Note  the  ditference  in  the  outline  oi  peck  (8)— p  and 
k  joined,  pick  (9) — k  placed  liigh,  pike  (10)—^  and  k  joined  by  the  i  stroke,  pack  (11)— p 
shaded  and  puck  (12) — k  placed  low.  Note  how  clearly  the  vowel  is  thus  shown.  Compare 
also  pile  (13),  peal  (14),  and  pill  (15)  ;  tap  (16)  and  tape  (17).  Papal  (18)  shows  p  joined  to 
p,  expressing  the  "  ay"  sound  between  them.  Notice  d  placed  high  in  rapid  (19).  Compare 
paddle  (20)— p  shaded,  and  peddle  (21)  ;  packet  (22)  and  picket  (23)  ;  the  latter  word  shows 
again  that  the  position  is  independent  of  the  writing-line  ;  Ms  on  the  same  (imaginary)  line 
as  that  on  which  the  preceding  k  stands ;  if  t  stood  on  the  writing-line  it  would  be  in  low 
position — (tliat  is,  lower  than  k) — and  would  therefore  indicate  an  "  u"  sound.  When  p  is 
followed  by  large  t,  the  former  must  be  shortened  a  little,  so  that  t  will  not  become  confused 
with  /;  pet  (24),  2J(itent  (25),  See  how  the  vowel-sounds  are  clearly  shown  in  cap  (26),  cape 
(27),  keep  (28),  cup  (29)^/j  placed  low  (starting  below  the  line),  and  coop  (30).  Compare 
also  pen  (31),pa?i  (32),p/«  (SZ),  pine  (34),  pam  (35),  and  pun  (36).  Note  ape  (37),  apple  (38), 
dapple  (39),  ripple  (40),  map  (41),  and  type  (42) — when  y  has  the  sound  of  "i,"  it  is,  of 
course,  represented  by  the  i  stroke  ;  see  also  ripen  (43).  Observe  how  both  p  and  r  are 
shaded  in  parallel  (44) — no  double  I  is  necessary  ;  watch  the  vowels  in  pair  (io),  par  (46), 
peer  (47),  py7'e  (48),  2}Oor  (49),  p«/*  (50),  p>ower*  (51)  ;  and  note  2^<^i''<^(de  (52) — which  sounds 
like  pelade.  Notice  r  shaded  in  park  (53)  ;  and  compare  2^<^ice  (o4),poss  (55),  and  2^€ace  or 
piece  (56).  As  will  be  seen  by  the  examples,  when  p  is  shaded,  it  must  be  traced  down- 
ward ;  as  a  rule,  when  p  starts  a  word,  it  is  preferable  to  trace  the  letter  upward,  so  as  to  be 
on  the  writing-line  to  commence  the  following  word. 

The  sound  of  "sh"  is  neither  an  "s"  nor  an  "h,"  and  we  therefore  establish  for  it  a 
distinct  sign  (57),  which  is  quite  a  familiar  stroke  ;  the  sign  starts  with  an  upstroke,  a  little 
below  the  top-centre-line.  Study  carefully  the  examples  ;  also  note  particularly  how  these 
large  signs  are  placed  high  or  low ;  s/^ape  (58)  :  sheer  (59)  :  share  (60)  :  sure  (61) — here  s 
has  an  "sh"  sound,  and  is,  therefore,  represented  by  the  sh  sign:  lash  (62):  hash  (63): 
hush  (64) — note  ch  placed  low :  shy  (65) :  shun  (66)  :  shine  (67)  :  shake  (68) :  shut  (69) :  shoot 
(70)— notice  the  long  vowel  and  the  long  vowel-stroke:  shout  (71):  sheet  (72)  :  tvish  (73) — 
notice  sh  placed  high  :  Jish  (74) :  dish  (75) :  nation  (76) — sounds  like  nashn :  ration  (77) :  parish 
(78) — note  here  how  p  is  shaded,  and  how  sh,  though  below  the  line,  is  placed  higher  than 
r,  thus  showing  the  preceding  short  "  i"  sound.  Note  also  patient  (79),  rash  (80),  mash  (81), 
mission  (82),  cash  (83),  session  (84),  and  barouche  (85). 

When  ch  has  not  the  "k"  sound  (wliich  is  represented  by  k,  as  in  chaos),  it  sounds  like 
"  tsh,"  and  is  represented  by  sh  turned  into  the  t  position,  as  shown  in  (86).  This  is  also  a 
familiar  stroke,  which  you  have  written  many  times ;  chafe  (87) :  chaff  (88) :  couch  (89) : 
catch  (90):  chain  (91)  :  touch  (92)  :  teach  (93):  beach  (94):  chair  (95):  char  (96):  cheer  (97)  : 
check  (98):  cheek  (99):  chuck  (100):  chicken  (101):  kitchen  (102):  thatch  (103):  ouch  (104)— 

*  When  quickly  uttered  this  word  will  sound  like  powr. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  17 


notice  how  the  initial  vowel-stroke  shows  that  tlie  vowel  starts  tlie  word,  while  the  low 
position  and  shading  of  ch  show  that  the  vowel-sound  in  question  is  "ow."  Nott-  also  ditch 
(lOo),  liitch  (106),  witch  (107),  leech  (108),  jiitch  (109)— compare  the  latter  with  tlie  longer 
sound  in  peach  (110),  cheap  (111),  c//ayj  (112),  batch  (113),  match  (114),  and  fetch  (115). 

In  words  like  leisure,  s  has  a  still  diflerent  sound  from  any  of  tliose  found  so  far;  it  is 
somewhat  like  "sir'  but  is  much  softer;  we  therefore  give  the  outline  a  "softer"  (waved) 
appearance.  Observe  leisure  (117),  measure  (118),  azure  (119)— note  tlie  long  vowel-stroke  for 
the  long  sound,  vision  (120)— see  how  well  the  second  form  of  v  is  used  here,  seizure  (121), 
and  razure  (122). 

When  this  sound  is  preceded  by  a  sound  akin  to  (",  but  softer,  we  swing  it  around  into 
the  t  space,  and  it  then  represents  the  soft  sound  corresponding  to  "ch," — viz.:  ./ ;  the 
outline  (123)  is  waved,  of  course.  Compare  the  waved  outline  for  the  soft  sound  and  the 
rigid  outline  for  the  hard  sound  in  cage  (124)  and  catch  (125),  rage  (126)  and  wretch  (127), 
ridge  (128)  and  rich  (129),  and  the  latter  with  reach  (130) ;  note  also  cheer  (131)  and  jeer 
(132),  char  (133)  and  jar  (134).  Further  examples  are  jail  (135),  ledge  (136),  judge  (137), 
budge  (138),  nudge  (139),  ivager  (140),  rigid  (141),  Jam  (142),  and  gem  (143)— when  g  has  the 
soft  sound,  it  is  replaced  by  J  ;  if  the  g  sign  were  used  in  (143)  the  outline  would  read  game. 
Compare  Jake  (144)  and  Jack  (145),  age  (146),  edge  (147),  and  etch  (148):  agent  (149):  jade 
(150).  Note  jag  (151),  jig  (152),  and  jug  (153) :  Japan  (154) :  jay  (155) :  jealous  (156).  Com- 
pare jet  (157),  jut  (158),  and  jute  (159) :  Jews  (160)  and  choose  (161).  See  also  legion  (162), 
page  (163),  and  cudgel  (164) — the  latter  sounding  like  cujl. 

It  has  been  found  advisable  in  practice  to  establish  separate  signs  for  a  few  very  frequent 
combinations  of  consonants.  (165)  shows  the  sign  for  sjy;  gasp  (166):  spy  (167):  lisp  (168): 
whisper  (169).  Compare  span  (170),  Spain  (171),  spun  (172),  s2DOon  (173),  spin  (174),  and  spine 
(175). 

Observe  how  these  large  signs  change  their  positions  to  indicate  "  i"  (as  in  bit)  or  "  u." 
Those  reaching  from  the  top-  to  the  centre-line  are  brought  a  little  below  the  centre-line 
when  placed  low,  and  their  final  stroke  does  not  reach  farther  than  the  top-centre-line 
M'hen  they  are  placed  high.  Those  reaching  from  the  top-centre-  to  the  bottom-line  are 
brought  a  little  above  the  top-centre-line  when  they  are  placed  high,  and  start  at  the  centre- 
line when  they  are  placed  low. 

The  medium  characters  (such  as  small  t,  b,  w,  etc.)  are  placed  high  by  writing  them 
half-way  between  the  centre-  and  top-centre  lines,  so  that  the  top-centre-line  strikes  them 
in  the  centre.  When  they  are  placed  low  the  centi'e-line  strikes  them  in  the  centre.  Small 
characters  {I,  n,  k,  s,  th)  are  written  just  below  the  top-centre-line  when  they  are  placed  high, 
and  just  below  the  centre-line  when  they  are  placed  low. 

The  double  consonant  ng — a  separate  sound — has  likewise  a  sign  of  its  own,  consisting 
of  an  n  placed  diagonally  across  the  space  occupied  by  ng,  as  shown  in  (175).  Observe  the 
examples /a??^  (1~"),  finger  (178),  rang  (179),  ring  (180),  rung  (181),  spangle  (182),  bang  (183), 
hang  (184),  gang  (185),  pang  (186),  bungle  (187),  jungle  (188),  young  (189),  hung  (190),  and 
sung  (191). 

The  sign  for  nk  (192)  is  the  same  as  that  for  ng,  except  that  it  is  only  half  as  large,— that 
is,  about  the  size  of  k ;  note  the  difference  between  rank  (193)  and  rink  (194),  sank  (195),  sink 
(196),  and  sunk  (197) :  bunker  (198) :  kink  (199) :  link  (200).  Compare  anchor  (201)  and  anger 
(202),  ankle  (203)  and  angle  (204).    See  also  spank  (205),  tank  (206),  bank  (207),  and  lank  (208). 

The  syllable  ence,  represented  by  (209),  is  a  very  familiar  and  convenient  stroke  ;  when 
the  sign  is  shaded,  or  placed  either  high  or  low,  it  is  read  with  the  vowel-sound  ordinarily 
supplied  by  the  shade  or  position  ;  hence  (210) :  sense  (211) :  since  (212) :  whence  (213) :  wince 
(214) :  dense  (215) :  dance  (216) :  dunce  (217) :  ounce  (218) :  counsel  (219) :  cancel  (220) :  tinsel 
(221) :  license  (222) :  fence  (223) :  chance  (224) :  denounce  (225) :  announce  (226) :  renounce  (227), 

Logograms. 
In  the  sentence  "sh  said  sh  would  do  it,"  sh  will  at  once  be  taken  for  she  (228).    Sp 
stands  for  speak  (229),  and  j  placed  low  (on  account  of  the  "  u"  sound)  stands  for  just  (230). 

Reading  Exercise. 
(231)   Benjamin   Franklin   could    chain   tlie    lightning.      Notice  the  shading  of  .;   in 
Benjamin  to  show  the  "a"  sound;  the  word  lightning  illustrates  again  the  fact  that  the 

2 


18  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


position  of  consonants  is  merely  relative  and  does  not  depend  on  the  centre-line ;  nrf  is 
lilaced  half  above  an  imaginary  top-centre-line  of  which  the  corresponding  centre-line 
would  be  at  the  level  of  the  preceding  n. 

(232)  I  cannot  catch  a  fish  when  I  have  not  the  right  bait,  but  a  big  mackerel  bit  on  my 
hook  just  the  same.     Notice  the  shading  of  m  and  k — standing  for  r;k  in  mackerel. 

(233)  Kipling  can  write  such  a  fine  barrack  ballad.  The  final  ng  in  Kipling  illustrates 
the  rule  mentioned  in  (231)  about  lightning.  Notice  in  Kipling  how  closely  I  is  joined  io  -p  to 
preclude  a  vowel-sound  between  them ;  notice  the  shading  in  barrack  and  ballad. 

(234)  Does  she  like  to  dance  to  the  rhythmic  tune?  Notice  how  in  rhythmic — where  h  is 
of  course  omitted  and  y  replaced  by  the  short  "i" — m  is  closely  joined  to  the  preceding 
th,  thus  precluding  any  vowel  between  tliem. 

(235)  Spain  has  not  much  power  ;  she  could  not  keep  the  filibuster  back,  I  think.  Notice 
how  r  in  power  is  shaded  and  placed  lower  than  p  to  indicate  the  ow  sound  :  we  write  no 
w  in  tliis  word,  sivice  we  hear  none.  The  word  filibuster  is  a  splendid  illustration  of  the 
relative  position  of  the  letters  in  a  word  ;  this  is  one  of  the  points  which  give  "  Graphic" 
shorthand  its  superiority.  L  is  placed  high  to  indicate  the  "  i  "  preceding,  then  b  is  placed 
high  on  account  of  the  second  "  i  "  ;  if  the  b  wei'e  in  the  normal  position — that  is,  between 
the  top-centre  and  the  centre-lines — the  word  would  read  filebuster;  the  s  is  placed  lower 
than  b  to  indicate  the  sound  in  "  bus".    Notice  how  nicely  s  can  be  joined  to  t. 

(236)  We  have  seen  the  picket  line  shoot.  Notice  in  picket  the  short  vowel-stroke 
between  k  and  t  indicating  the  "  e  ". 

(237)  The  queen  wishes  to  thank  the  nation. 

(238)  The  tank  may  leak ;  fill  the  i^itcher  with  the  liquid ;  then  let  the  beverage  cool. 
Notice  with^  consisting  of  a  %u  and  th  placed  high. 

(239)  Tell  father  to  sing  a  lullaby  for  the  child. 

(240)  Shut  the  book,  I  do  not  wish  him  to  read  when  he  should  not  be  at  leisure. 

(241)  I  wish  that  our  manager  would  cancel  the  date  for  the  dance.  We  call  your  atten- 
tion to  manager  and  cancel. 

(242)  Does  he  bet  on  such  a  chance  gaine? 

(243)  Let  him  touch  the  button  ;  we  can  do  the  rest.  Notice  the  low  position  of  t  and 
the  short  vowel-stroke  in  button. 

(244)  The  mail  may  lose  such  a  big  package  ;  I  am  sure  they  can  not  deliver  the  same. 

(245)  I  wish  we  could  catch  the  thief. 

(246)  Good  luck  to  the  general.  The  word  good  illustrates  an  important  rule,  i.e.,  when 
there  is  no  clash  of  meanings  between  words  with  "u"  (as  in  mud)  or  "oo"  (as  in  7nood), 
no  long  connective-.stroke  need  be  made  in  order  to  indicate  the  long  sound,  so  that  we  can 
safely  use  the  short  (and  time-saving)  stroke  in  good,  since  there  is  no  word  sounding  like 
"gud".  Note  how  in  general,  j — standing  for  g — is  conveniently  joined  to  n  by  means  of 
the  loop. 

(247)  When  does  the  yacht  sail? 

(248)  Tlie  rabble  does  not  wish  the  j'oung  leader  to  quell  the  riot. 

Writing  Exercises. 

{The  transcription  tvill  appear  in  Lesson  Ji-). 

(a)  I  should  like  to  cudgel  the  thief,  (b)  The.y  must  not  take  counsel,  (c)  Tell  him  I 
should  like  to  have  a  cab.  (d)  I  cannot  run  very  well  since  I  fell  on  the  ladder,  (e)  This 
might  be  a  good  chance  for  her.  (f )  Tell  the  lad  to  leave  the  room,  (g)  Do  not  let  the 
adder  bite  the  cub.  (li)  The  cat  does  not  touch  a  rat,  but  she  can  catch  a  mouse  very  well, 
(i)  How  can  he  act  like  such  a  child?  (k)  I  have  not  seen  the  woman  at  the  tub  for  a 
week.    (1)  Would  he  like  to  read  the  paper? 

{The  transcription  of  the  following  sentences  will  not  appear  in  the  next  lesson). 

(249)  He  wlio  may  never  need  counsel  must  be  a  wise  man.  (250)  How  can  she  let  liim 
feel  her  anger  like  tliis,  wlien  he  says  that  he  cannot  rai.se  the  cash  just  now  ?  (251)  The  sick 
tar  had  a  pale  look  like  a  dead  man  when  he  came  to  our  house,  but  the  good  air,  as  well  as 


^es^  ^^LAJJL^^.:,.^,^,:\,  ^ 


r    I  L   .,  V    ..      -e  .      /"''  ,/  ,r 


I  I     f.    'f.  rt:  ?M /,.    i^^„.  {"  o'  (^'    7   V  T    ->    > 


^=^ 


^ 


35"  V<?  /  ^S" 


^.  /-  ^^  ^""  ^-  /   /"^  /  /  '■  '.'  '7  r  A..  /.-A  /.  x^;= 


.  ^. '- 


6^  <:jr 


J-'  ,'-  J^/-  ?  /  ^^^  7-^^'  /..   /^'-':^^  '^'  ^^ 


^;/  4  ^^^J^yf^V^^J^^^^'^ 


^    .^     ^   ^-  ^V  .^~   -.^  -/  /  ^  .>/./w-" 


~i=^--(^^--^  7  ^/'-/y^>V  ?  7-  /  y-^^^^^ 


./  ./  /  /-  -^/--  /  /  I    /  T  /  4  J    /  VY  .^-  / 


/  t/S" /j"<g /rs" 


/  .f:  /  j'jj'j/  3  A  /  ^/  /'  /  r /z-^ 


^-^^°  ^^"  --''/  -/  wjy-/  //y-  ■  y-  y-/-/ 


;'^ 


^  <?  ^  ^<^^ 


7:'\  A  z"^^-;^  -. /^  ^^  ^^  ^v=^ 


fo  """  7  '7^  JI.OO 


f  ^90  / 


vA    5N    (^  ^.   /p.  w^^  y^  ^^  ^\ 


v^- 


e-    '^^ 


zxz 


//  A  ..   ..v^-y-yyz^i^^^y^yyy;^ 


■ry?Z^  /^\^/  ^^'^^p-^^A^^^jj=f 


^:J?^--.;o-  ^  ^  L  .  ^  .^      .     ^  ^  /  .J  -  /I  ^,    ^  y    A  .^^^  ^.  --<^ 


^  ^^  /  i  J  y 


>^.    7^  ^^  2.^  fn^,.        -y.^  ^  .^^.  -^  ^^  ^;^.    ^7 


^^    ..-      ^      _^     6.^      ^»J^  .  ^      :f    .y^      /f^/Z/r. 


^ • ^^ " ^— -^^/^    .   ^-^y^.       V,      'J    6—    a        /^^.. 


y  ■  -^^y.y^^y^y^^-^-"-  <  -.^.^.-.^y 


S.3/ 


c/JL  /  c^rs   ..   -y2     ^^T^ 2^  ./  ^  r-;r^  n  a  -g/,  <^  .L  z^/  _.  ^^2 


AV<?  /  ^  /  -<V/ 


/f^  ""^'^  .  /       ^  ^  /r/;  -^ 


-^  /  "^x   -^^^^  .  /M^,     J/  -^^,  ^  <^  /  ryj^/w,c.  ^^/7  -jT^      ■^(^;'- 


/         (J  /I  /I     ^v^^    / /y7     y,      sL'f-3  /  ^   /^^ 


^  / 


iVS" 


"^ 


20  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


the  good  care,  made  hiin  well.  (252)  She  speak(s)  to  her  maid  just  like  a  queeu.  (253)  Leave 
your  raueor  aside,  hide  your  auger  ;  thus  much  can  be  doue  for  the  just  case.  (254)  Take 
my  satchel  to  the  cab.  (255)  How  far  must  we  chase  the  deer  to  kill  the  buck  with  a  gun? 
(256)  This  man  does  not  fear  the  iron  chancellor.  (257)  A  wise  man  does  not  care  for  tinsel. 
(258)  The  miser  had  a  fine,  big  ring  on  the  linger.  (259)  We  should  like  to  fish,  but  we 
caunot  get  our  tackle.  (260)  He  may  be  a  mere  lad,  but  he  can  shoot  like  a  man.  (261) 
Our  chain  must  be  loose  ;  I  think  we  had  better  leave  the  wheel  at  the  house.  (262)  These 
men  are  too  weak  to  live  on  such  fare  ;  we  must  give  them  a  better  ration.  (263)  How 
should  your  son  sign  the  letter?  (264)  Could  the  maid  read  the  label  on  tlie  package? 
(265)  He  hit  the  nail  just  on  the  head  with  this  answer.  (266)  May  I  count  on  your  help 
for  the  fight?  (267)  A  pink  ribbon  would  not  match  her  hat.  (268)  Has  she  ever  seen  a 
bag-pipe?     (269)  Can  he  write  a  good  letter  on  the  typewriter  ? 


REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

{Can you  answer  them  correctly?) 

1.  What  is  the  basis  of  Graphic  Shorthand? 

2.  What  are  the  different  sizes  of  the  characters  of  the  alphabet  ? 

3.  Mention  the  characters  of  the  alphabet,  classified  as  to  the  size. 

4.  Are  double  consonants  used  ? 

5.  What  are  logograms  or  word-signs? 

6.  Review  the  logograms  learned  thus  far.     (You  may  use  tlie  text,  but  not  the  shorts 
hand  plates. ) 

7.  What  is  the  rule  for  spelling  in  shorthand? 

8.  Wliat  is  the  difference  between  large  t  and  medium  t. 

9.  Which  letters  can  be  traced  either  upward  or  downward  ;  which  should  preferably 
be  traced  downward  ;  which  upward? 

10.  How  are  the  vowel-sounds  shown  in  the  following  words  :  men,  mane,  mine,  man, 
mar,  bin,  bean,  bun,  boon,  gown  ? 

11.  What  rules  affect  the  position  of  a  consonant  to  indicate  "  i"  ? 

12.  What  rules  affect  the  position  of  a  consonant  to  indicate  "  u"  ? 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  21 


Lesson  No.  4. 


In  the  second  lessou  we  have  learned  to  express  vowel-sounds  without  actually  writing 
them.  Now  we  learn  two  more  vowel-sounds  which  are  written,  but  so  ingeniously  devised 
that  they  will  connector  blend  readily  with  the  adjoining  consonants,  thus  requiriiijc  hardly 
any  additional  effort.  (1)  will  show  how  o  is  derived,  being  part  of  tlie  longhand  o.  As 
will  be  shown  later,  this  letter  may  be  reversed  in  certain  cases  {la).  In  pronouncing  this 
vowel,  and  at  the  same  time  opening  the  mouth  wider,  we  utter  a  broader  sound,  represented 
as  a  rule  in  longhand  by  "  aw"  as  in  law.  The  logical  shorthand  sign  for  this  sound  is,  there- 
fore, a  "widened"  or  "broadened"  o  curve  (2).  (3)  b  and  o  show  how  conveniently  these 
strokes  blend  with  signs  ending  in  a  right-hand  curve.  Note  the  difference  between  bowl 
(4)  and  bawl  or  ball  (5),  dole  (6)  and  dawn  (7),  low  (8)  and  law  (9),  mow  (10)  and  maw  (11), 
no  or  ]<now  (12)  and  gnaw  (13),  x>ole  (14)  and  Paul  (15),  tvoe  (16)  and  irar  (17),  icall  (18),  olioKe 
(19),  though  (20),  and  thaw  (21).  R  and  o  (22)  can  be  blended  conveniently,  but  the  r  must 
be  well  and  sharply  accented  (shaded)  so  as  not  to  disappear  in  the  curve ;  note  row  (22) 
and  raw  (23).  To  s  we  simply  add  the  o  curve  ;  now  (24)  and  auw  (25) — for  the  sake  of  con- 
venience, o  does  not  stand  quite  on  the  line  in  this  case.  This,  like  all  other  rules,  need 
hardly  be  memorized,  inasmuch  as  it  is  indicated  by  common  sense  and  will  suggest  itself  to 
the  student.  Note  t  and  o ;  toe  (26) :  toll  (27)  and  tall  (28) — double  I  is  not  written  unless  it 
is  necessary  to  distinguish  between  short  and  long  vowel-sounds,  as  in  bail  and  bell. 

Signs  Avith  a  left-hand  curve  readily  absorb  o  and  aw  reversed  in  their  curves.  Note  g 
and  o;  go  (29);  goal  (30)  and  gall  (31) — the  "aw"  sound  being  exjtressed  by  the  icidened 
curve  of  g :  hole  or  ivhole  (31)  and  haul  (32) — see  how  the  I  is  joined  to  h.  K  and  o  blended 
become  a  medium  sign  (84)  ;  note  coal  (35)  and  call  (36) :  core  (37).  Observe  the  o  and  aw 
curves  in  show  (38),  shoal  (39),  and  shawl  (40).  The  ng  sign  absorbs  the  o  stroke,  as  shown 
in  (41) :  see  the  difference  between  rang  (42)  and  wrong  (43)  ;  in  the  latter,  the  connective 
stroke  between  r  and  ng  is  vertical,  admitting  of  the  insertion  of  the  reversed  o  before  the 
ng  stroke.  The  o  can  be  more  conveniently  blended  with  r  as  shown  in  (43a),  however, 
and  the  latter  form  is  therefore  preferable,  for,  although  the  outline  is  longer,  it  can  be 
traced  more  rapidly,  owing  to  the  absence  of  the  angle ;  this  word  is  a  good  illustration 
of  the  fact  that  the  shortest  outline  is  not  always  the  speediest.  Note  long  (44)— o  absorbed 
in  ng,  and  length  (45).  i^and  o  can  conveniently  be  shortened  by  curving  the/'  in  o  fashion 
(46),  making /oe:  notice  foal  (47)  and /a/^  (48).  V,  by  means  of  a  loop  which  it  assumes, 
also  absorbs  o  readily,  as  in  vote  (50) ;  vault  (51)  shows  that  the  aw  curve  must  be  written, 
as  it  could  not  be  conveniently  blended  with  a  loop.  Looped  outlines,  therefore,  can  be 
blended  only  with  o,  which  they  show  by  means  of  a  icidened  loop.  (52)  shows  how  ./  and 
0  are  blended,  reading  Joe ;  not  Jake  (53)  and  joke  (54) :  compare  jaw  (55)  and  Joe  ^52). 
In  sp,  also,  o  is  shown  by  the  enlarged  loop  (56) ;  compare  sjoort  (57)  and  s}nirt  (58).  Fand  o 
(59)  ;  note  yore  (60)  and  yoeman  (61). 

The  pronunciation  of  o  in  such  words  as  god,  dog,  etc.,  varies  considerably  in  various 
sections  of  the  country,  and  with  it  must  also  vary  the  short liand  outlines  fen-  these  words. 
For  example,  if  ^od!  is  pronounced  like  "gawd"  (62),  the  aw  curve  must  be  employed;  if 
pronounced  like  "  gad"  (62a),— o  sounding  like  "a"  as  in  father,— d  must  be  shaded.  When 
o  has  this  sound,  which  is  a  decided  "a"  sound  in  many  instances,  it  must  be  written  in 
accordance  with  the  rule  for  this  sound  of  a,— i.e.,  by  shading  the  following  consonant. 
Note  tot  (63)  and  taught  (64),  dot  (65),  dote  (66),  and  date  (67),  Kate  (68),  cat  (69),  and  cot 
(70).  When  t  is  shaded  or  changes  position,  the  medium-sized  (short)  t  must  invariably  be 
employed,  and  in  words  like  cot  this  t  cannot  imply  a  long  "  a"  sound,  since  there  is  no  long 
sound  of  that  sort  in  English. 

The  initial  use  of  o  is  self-explanatory  ;  oak  (71)  :  ode  (72) :  07nen  (73) :  obey  (74). 

The  sound  of  o  as  in  ^ocp— practically  a  short  "  u"  soujid,  or  in  morf— a  long  "  u"  sound 
— has  been  explained  in  a  previous  lesson. 


22  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Observe  caught  (75)  and  talk  (76)  ;  gore  ijl)  and  rogue  (78) :  compare  check  (79)  with 
choke  (81)  /  also  coach  (80)  and  choke  (81) ;  and  the  latter  with  chalk  (82). 

The  sign  ko  stands  also  for  the  prefix  con  (83) ;  see  how  conveniently  s  can  be  joined 
to  con:  concise  (84):  consider  (85):  conceive  (86):  note  content  (87),  where  both  ^'s  are 
shortened  a  little  to  facilitate  the  outline  ;  contain  (88) :  conspire  (89) :  consequence  (90) — see 
kw  used  for  qu.  Com  is  derived  by  tracing  the  final  stroke  of  con  with  an  m  wave  (91) ; 
commence  {Q2.) :  comment  i^Z):  commingle  [^o). 

When  we  lower  the  voice  as  much  as  possible  in  pronouncing  by,  we  change  it  to  boy, 
so  that  "oy"  is  therefore  represented  by  placing  the  i  stroke  low.  Compare  by  (96)  and  boy 
(97)  ;  tie  (9*8)  and  toy  (99)  ;  file  (100)  and  foil  (101)  ;  ally  (102)  and  alloy  (103)  ;  line  (104)  and 
loin  (104«) :  joy  (105) :  coin  (106)  :  foible  (107) :  i^oint  (108)  ;  these  words  illustrate  the  logical 
rule  that  in  order  to  place  the  i  stroke  low  the  preceding  consonant  must  be  placed  low. 

Blended  Consonants. 

We  have  seen  in  this  lesson  how  two  signs  can  be  merged  into  each  other  without  sacri- 
ficing the  characteristic  part  of  either,  thus  obtaining  a  speedy,  yet  easily  legible,  outline. 
This  principle  also  applies  to  consonants  when  no  vowel  comes  between  them  ;  for  example, 
if  we  join  n  and  d  by  means  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke,  the  outline  will  read  Ned  (109), 
but  if  we  blend  n  and  d  (110)  by  starting  d  with  the  n  wave,  we  obtain  nd.  By  this  means, 
while  nothing  essential  to  d  is  sacrificed,  n  is  also  clearly  apparent  and  we  gain  in  sjjeed. 
The  vowel-stroke  preceding  nd  will  make  the  word  end  (111) :  note  lend  (H2)  and  land  (113) : 
wind  (114) :  tend  (115). 

In  regard  to  blended  letters,  the  following  two  rules  hold  good  without  exception,  viz. : — 
(1)  As  to  position,  they  must  of  course  be  counted  as  one,  i.e.,  when  one  letter  is  aflTected  by 
position  the  other  must  likewise  be  placed  high  or  low,  as  otherwise  the  letters  could  not 
remain  blended :  for  example,  in  bundle  (116)  not  n  alone,  but  nd,  must  be  placed  low  to 
express  the  short  "  u"  sound.  (2)  In  regard  to  shading,  however,  only  the  one  letter  affected 
by  the  respective  rule  on  shading  comes  into  consideration  ;  in  lard  (118),  for  instance,  where 
r  and  d  ai-e  blended  by  starting  d  with  the  r  stroke,  as  shown  in  (117),  only  /■  is  shaded  to 
express  the  "a"  sound,  but  in  word,  which  is  pronounced  as  though  spelled  ivurd,  rd  is 
placed  low  (119)  ;  compare  this  with  weird  (120).  Note  bird  (121),  beard  (122),  and  bard 
(123)  ;  there  is  no  "  i"  sound  in  bird,  beard  has  a  decided  "ee"  sound,  and  /•  is  shaded  in 
bard  to  indicate  the  "a"  :  compare  also  heard.  (124)  and  hard  (125). 

D  and  r  are  blended  by  finishing  d  with  the  r  stroke  (126)  :  observe  drum  il27)  and 
dream  (128j :  drunk  (129)  and  drink  (130) :  drone  (131)  and  drawn  (132) ;  see  how  the  r  is  ac- 
cented in  these  Avords  by  shading,  so  that  it  clearly  stands  out  before  the  o  and  aiv  curves,  as 
in  row  (22).  Note  the  difference  between  drive  (133)  and  derive  (134) — no  recognition  is  taken 
of  the  short  "  e"  sound  in  prefixes  (such  as  "  de"  and  "re").  Ndr  can  be  blended,  without 
sacrificing  the  characteristics  of  either  n,  d,  or  r,  by  ending  nd  with  the  r  stroke  (135)  ;  this 
will  not  impair  the  legibility  of  the  outline.  The  same  principle  applies  to  I'd  and  r  (136) ; 
in  this  manner  tender  (137)  is  really  spelled  tendr  (137a),  which  is  just  as  legible.  Note  in 
retarder  (138)  the  first  /•  of  rdr  shaded,  and  in  murder  (139)  how  i-dr  is  placed  low  ;  see  how 
nicely  the  letters  join  in  sender  (140) — sendr. 

S  and  t  are  blended  by  starting  t  with  the  s  circle,  as  shown  in  (141)  ;  this  initial  stroke 
is  made  from  right  to  left,  and  there  is  no  danger  of  a  clash  with  ih,  since  there  is  no  combi- 
nation like  iht.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  make  the  s  circle  too  large.  Stain  (142)  :  stale 
(143) :  stone  (144) :  the  following  words  offer  a  good  opportunity  for  voAvel  drill :  stack  (145) 
— t  shaded  to  express  the  "a"  (as  in  cab) ;  stock  (146) — k  shaded,  since  the  sound  is  practically 
the  same  as  in  balm  (except  as  to  its  duration)  ;  stcdk  (147)— observe  the  aw  curve  between  st 
and  k  ;  stick  (148)— note  k  placed  high  to  show  short  "  i"  sound  ;  stake  (149) — see  the  long  k, 
which  prevents  the  word  from  reading  stcck  ;  stuck  (150)  —k  placed  low  gives  the  short  "  u" 
sound.    Compare  the  p  and  b  in  staj^le  (151)  and  stable  (152)  :  steer  (153) :  steel  (154). 

Tand  /•  are  blended  by  ending  t  with  the  r  stroke  (155)  ;  obser\'e  how  tlie  angle  is  done 
away  with,  by  blending  into  a  curve  :  train  (156) :  trim  (157) :  trend  (158) :  compare  try  (159) 
and  tray  (160)  ;  observe  the  shading  of  r  in  tramivay  (161).  From  the  foregoing  it  will  be 
seen  that  st  and  /•  may  be  blended  by  ending  st  with  the  r  stroke  (162) :  strain  (163)  :  strive 
(164)  :  note  how  r  is  accented  in  stroll  (165),  straiv  (166),  and  in  strong  (167).  In  the  second 
form  (167«)  of  this  word,  o  is  absorbed  by  ng,  but,  for  reasons  given  under  wrong  (43),  the 


Lesson  4. 


-Of, 


t^ 


jqL 


^^        ^^  '"^  I  ^  ■ — /  Ct* 


7=?^ 


I  ^  ^     I *i g     /  /■ — ^    ^J '  *** 


J. 


^ 


TJL 


£.  ^ 


YZlcr^ 


^=^^^ 


J,    /Ya 


s 


2^ 


/-^-'     o 


:^ 


^;7^ 


-^ 


,     if  /  J  a  -^     (y    o  ^yIZ 


^-^ 


.-CL 


,.^-7  ^  ^.  ^  ^j  /r^  ,  ;) 


^ 


/^  -^  ^^  .  /. 


^  f^  ^     y-  J  I  r-  .  r^  ^  ^  Z     ^  ry  V  V    '^  /  '-^'"^ 


jj :2. 


7^ 


..  >^^ 


7-^ 


=  r//y;  /  ^^  .  A  />  /  >  A  ^  ^  . .  .  .   ?-7 


.^ /~^^  r--» ^^ 


Z 


ztzli 


2: 


^LS 


Tzrr 


T=n=i 


30 


J. LtQ P_y       g^^-^.^^^_^     >^^    /»^     >-»^ 


.i-,...f.(,  (  ,  u"^-,n  'i^i--T^ 


ssr 


fo 


VS" 


r^-t^  -n  r^r  r^  r^ 


^r'U'i?. 


^  --^.  j\.  j^.^v  A.  y\../v 


JI'.^^J'LlLt' 


Jh-^    ^    A   rfTT 


3 


r"y^r 


1 


"  i^  -  ^^ 


^ 


Ts- 


3 


7" 


<^  ^y  /^  /-v/  <V  ^^y  (  ^^    I.  ^   ^  /^  V  >/^ 


2 


"xt:^ 


^  /^  ..^/^-y^^  r>^^^^-;^r^  //^  '>L  >^  ^^.  =  ^<|  '^d^  (^_  ^(^^  c 


ifi.[r..nrj 


ns 


ii^   P^^   ^^..-P  )S-,.-.^  M- 


inp^-h>  l\> 


i<^a 


//y)     fix    /^   •/•/'! 


•1'  .      U .gT , 


^  >g  /^^  Pa 


^ 


.L.^ Si  ,   if' S-    g  if V    -^ 


.  c  -t:  A^..^/^  =  .^  j: 


n 


^ :^ 


TTC 


'10 


D  /T?   ^ /TP   ^  ^^^         ^y^ 


JL^ 


-^ 


9_  >» 


;^„,  ^  r,<  A./^  J\  ^z. 


, Cj/2r, , 6 L 


/X/\   n'U. 


9^^  l/f-^. 


ru\    fi^^r^ 


^y^  .,  ./Ul    -     C.    7.  Al~ 


T 


^  ■ Co-i 


% 


iL.^\'^  L ,  .fi^  '  'J\  In  J.  ^ ..  .ji.Th^^f.-  n  /I  ?  rnt^ZZZ^ZZ 


24  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


first  form  is  better:  compare  (167a)  with  (168)  strength— notice  how  couveniently  the  final 
th  is  joined  to  the  7ig.  The  initial  vowel-stroke  preceding  s  stands  for  the  vowel-prefix  "a" 
or  "e".(when  the  latter  has  the  short  "a"  sound) ;  examples  are  astride  (169),  estate  (170), 
esteem  (171),  and  astonish  (172)— where  o  has  the  sound  of  a  as  in  calm. 

Logograms. 

The  logograms  of  o  are  almost  self-explanatory.  On  the  line  it  stands  for  of  (173) :  aw 
apj) roaches  the  medial  sound  of  ivas  (174),  and  standing  above  the  line  represents  that  word. 
You  will  notice  that  medial  and  final  abbreviations  are  placed  above  the  line  to  indicate  that 
they  do  not  begin  the  word,  except  in  cases  where  they  are  placed  low  to  indicate  the  "  u" 
sound.  Aw  on  the  line  stands  for  all  (175),  from  which  although  (176)  is  formed  by  adding 
though  to  the  word-sign  :  s  is  omitted  in  also,  aw  and  o  being  joined  (177).  As  shown  above, 
o  can  be  turned  around  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  and  we  do  this  in  the  word  so  (178), 
which  is  written  in  full ;  compare  this  with  the  verb  sow  (24).  Always  (179)  is  formed  by 
joining  aw  and  w.  Ko,  when  standing  alone,  represents  course  (180)  ;  of  course  (181),  con- 
sists of  of  and  couise  joined.  In  alone  (182)  only  the  n  is  dropped.  Often  (183)— where  t  is 
silent — is  represented  hy  fn.  Over  (184)  is  a  shortened  upward  v — admitting  of  the  o  curve- 
joined  with  r. 

M  above  the  line  is  the  last  part  of  them  (185),  for  which  word  it  stands.  Among  (186)  is 
represented  by  n^^  placed  low,  indicating  the  "  ung"  sound.  Fes  (187)  is  y  and  s  blended, 
and  yet  (188)  is  t  with  the  y  wave.     What  (189)  is  a  shaded  iv. 

You  will  now  be  able  to  translate  without  difficulty  the  following 

Reading  Exercise. 

(190)  Was  this  the  fiend  who  found  the  fund  the  miser  was  so  fond  of?  Yes,  he  was 
among  those  men  whom  the  watchman  caught  long  ago ;  I  have  heard  the  policemen  talk 
of  the  matter. — Note  how  the  respective  vowel-sounds  are  expressed  in  fiend — nd  placed 
high,  found— nd  placed  low  and  shaded,  fund — nd  placed  low,  /'o»d— which  is  an  "a"  sound, 
nd  shaded  to  indicate  the  "a"  sound.  Notice  the  o  curve  between  th  and  .s-  in  those,  and  see 
how  o  is  absorbed  by  the  ng  wave  in  long.  Observe  the  initial  a  stroke  and  the  o  curve  in 
ago.  In  x^oUcemen,  note  how  closely  s — standing  for  c — and  m  are  written  together  to 
preclude  any  vowel-sound  between  them. 

(191)  A  pint  of  milk  with  a  pint  of  wate?  must  give  a  quart  of  milk ;  this  we  might 
call  the  main  point  of  the  milk  business. — Note  the  words  2yint  and  2)oint ;  in  the  latter  /  is 
placed  low  to  indicate  the  "  oi"  sound :  notice  the  aw  curve  in  water  and  quart. 

(192)  She  never  saw  this  kind  of  locomotion. — Observe  the  three  o's  in  locomotion,  the 
last  syllable  "  tion"  being,  of  course,  written  as  shen  ;  the  word  is  written  thus,  lo-co-mo-shen. 

(193)  We  may  vote  for  the  measure  to  let  the  children  have  more  leisure,  I  heard  the 
minister  whisper. — See  how  closely  I  and  dr  are  joined  in  children,  to  preclude  any  vowel- 
sound  between  them.  Observe  the  difference  between  sj  in  ineasure  and  leisure,  and  s})  in 
whisper ;  sp  having  a  straight  down  stroke,  while  sj  starts  with  a  waved  down  stroke  (it  is 
practically  a  j  turned  into  the  sh  position).  Note  in  minister  the  s  placed  higher  than  the 
preceding  consonant  to  indicate  the  second  "  i". 

(194)  Go,  tell  the  boy  not  to  start  the  old  topic. — Observe  how  in  start  both  fs  are 
shortened  a  little  and  the  st  is  traced  upward  ;  the  word  could  also  be  written  by  starting 
st  on  the  top-centre-line  and  tracing  it  as  far  as  the  centre-line,  then  connect  the  r  (on  the 
line)  by  means  of  a  vowel-stroke,  and  trace  the  second  t  upward,  which  will  make  it  full 
length.  This  outline  is,  however,  much  longer  than  the  one  given  on  the  plate.  In  topic, 
o  has  the  "  a"  sound  and  ji  is,  therefore,  shaded. 

(195)  I  can  always  listen  to  the  "Old  Oakei/  Bucket".— Note  hoAV  ^'  is  placed  low  in 
bucket. 

(196)  No  word  but  the  one  we  told  him  could  hurt  him  more.  See  how  one  is  written  ; 
we  could  write  the  sound  more  faithfully  by  following  ?<^  with  the  o  curve,  and  then  shading 
n,  which  would  give  us  the  sound  "  woan(e)".  However,  it  is  safe  enough,  and  much  shorter, 
to  write  the  word  as  on  the  shorthand  sheet,  tv  and  n  placed  low. 

(196a)  Show  her  this  coat  once  more  ;  then  she  might  not  want  the  jacket,  said  I,  for  I 
know  her  foible  well. — Note  once,  which  is  written  on  the  same  principle  as  one  ;  w  followed 
by  o  and  the  ence  stroke  shaded  would  be  a  more  faithful  representation,  but  the  other  way 
is  just  as  safe  and  much  shorter. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  2.5 


(197)  Washington  could  not  oppose  the  war  feeling  of  the  colonies. — The  first  o  in 
colonies  sounds  like  "a"  (in  calm)  and  the  second  is  scarcely  audible;  the  word  sounds 
practically  like  "  colenies".  For  this  reason  t  is  shaded,  and  the  second  o  is  replaced  simply 
by  the  conuective-vowel-stroke,  representing  the  short  "e"  sound. 

(198)  Napoleon  was  the  hero  of  France. — Note  in  Napoleon  that  I  and  the  second  o  are 
not  blended,  the  connective-stroke  between  them  representing  the  short  "e"  sound.  Observe 
in  hero  the  r  placed  high  and  blended  with  the  following  o. 

(199)  We  were  awestruck  by  the  silence  of  the  Kremlin. — Notice  in  awestruck  how  the 
aw  curve  and  the  st  are  blended  conveniently. 

(200)  Put  your  hat  on  the  rack,  not  on  the  rocking-chair. — Observe  tlie  r  shaded  in  rack 
to  represent  the  "  a"  (as  in  man)  sound,  and  the  k  shaded  in  rocking  on  account  of  the  short 
"o"  sound. 

(201)  I  always  like  a  candid  word,  but  I  hate  a  hot-headed  man.— Note  the  difference 
between  hate,  hot,  and  headed. 

(202)  The  loss  of  respect  for  the  laws  of  the  State  must  cause  a  nation  to  totter. — See 
the  difference  between  loss  and  laws,  the  former  having  a  sharper  sound,  and  therefore  a 
larger  s  than  the  latter.     Notice  the  shading  of  the  second  t  in  totter. 

(203)  The  offence  of  the  officer  was  that  he  would  not  shoot  the  offender  on  the  spot. — 
Note  offence,  offender,  and  officer — s  placed  high  in  the  latter. 

(204)  Why  don't  they  join  the  mob?  said  the  king. — There  is,  of  course,  no  apostrophe 
used  in  don't.     See  the  b  shaded  in  mob. 

Before  you  begin  to  practice  the  following 

Writing  Exercise 

be  sure  that  you  can  write  all  the  numbered  words  of  the  text  correctly  and  rapidly,  without 
the  aid  of  the  lesson  sheet. 

(a)  Does  the  widow  mourn  much  ?  (b)  Has  her  father  bought  the  boat  ?  I  do  not  know, 
I  have  not  read  the  paper,  (c)  To  judge  bj'^  the  coat  I  saw  the  old  man  wear,  he  does  not 
seem  to  be  rich,  (d)  He  would  not  dream  of  such  trouble,  but  I  gave  him  warning,  (e)  Tell 
the  maid  to  leave  the  door  open,  (f )  Does  he  consider  the  consequence  when  he  may  start 
the  ball  rolling?  (g)  I  told  him  so  ;  yet  he  said  he  must  go  over  alone,  although  the  stroll 
might  end  with  a  murder,     (h)  The  rogue  does  not  want  to  go  home. 


X 


Lesson  5.  ^v^v^.  A..  .  I   ')  J ..  c  J^u'^  y ^.  L..  X') /jrz~: 


T 


iM       (y  n    /\L 


(^^ Q. 


.J  I  L  _  7^/-///^. 


-if- 


6  H  u 


'M  ^(  ..r-'  L.y/  /-i.r  .^  .^e  ^ri  r.frv9 c  ^t  I  ^-QTzJ^. 


:l 


x^ 


f^f 


tf 


zz 


-^   -<-^ 


— ^ 


^ 


-/^V  ^j^^/^/../y^/c^y-;"7^ 


^ 


/o 


'H  ^.(^,r^^j\fv,t  N/\;^v 


rs  -f-  s  --  rx   ^. 


^ 


-s" 


"^sr 


V 


;io 


g/N  =Q 


12: 


\£^ 


4n   =  Vo    ^^^yj 


4,   /V     ^ 


xs;. 


^ 


+  ^  -"a 


3o 


"5T 


-^--i »-C; 


z-^^ 


-TT 


t,.\ 


/.  -M  /'/\   I'X  L  'U.-.1'L.   r~  'L  .  Ul  h  .-,'/') /A..  Z,J 


S-o 


ex. 


rr 


C  t^-  (   (^    /^    i^    IX\A  ^  ^i    'L    C  ^    K  -tJ  -  )  w^  rJ^    r\^   vy   J  t.  --f^J 


86 


/)J ^^  u-ai/JJ^.,  ,-.7 (^( ^  k  (y?.  ^l J-  [''■  c 


/oo 


'0S~ 


/fO 


r>S 


-ts 


^ 


4  :p  'u.  -i 


7. 


Ajr 


/3-0 


12-S- 


l3o 


/3J- 


..^-.^  ^      /T'/^  ^    f:^^A  -/  ---7  ^^^-A  ^^^  ^yi'^z  y.r.Qoj. 


~d^ — " ■   ■    -o\ 


i¥S- 


^c"/:cja^:^'^'c6 


/so 


6^  (W) 


r\t  r^   -      /7^     rr^      gv-A      ,<V.^     -^    ■/- ,    ^ 


IS'S- 


..^-^Ct^7   ^ 


c.  .^  /f -,////r/./../^¥T^j;//.^f^, 


z;© 


^^TTTJ 


2 


93'!' 


.-x^  T^fT 


rr 


-^ 


^ 


/9V 


F 


/  oS" 


iT  (Tva 


z: 


o  i^  cf^-^ 


-^'.  ^/i! '''r.  .(y  „      ..^^ 


2i 


« Q 


T 


-^ 


^-(/v^.^nZM: 


^ 


ztt; 


^99' 


ioc? 


.^^Si 


nsz^ 


^•>- 


zz^^isiz 


;//  '■v; 


o  X/fTV    L>*. 


^^2-n^ 


T' 


/  "^      ^-  )d^  ^    "   ^"^    -^  C/lv^  g^    C-  /       U>/  ^     /    o  A    w    r,     /       C  I    L^J      <      O     '^~^     ^ 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  27 


Lesson  No.  5. 


(On  the  shorthand  sheet  will  be  fouud  the  transcription  of  the  writing  exercise  to  Lesson 
No.  4;  this  is  the  last  lesson  to  be  so  transcribed.  Compare  your  outlines  carefully  with 
those  on  the  sheet,  making  such  corrections  as  are  necessary,  and  studying  anew  the  rules 
under  which  the  respective  corrections  are  treated.  Bear  in  mind  always  the  fact  that, 
though  the  system  is  easy,  it  cannot  be  acquired  without  earnest  effort  and  systematic 
practice.  To  attain  the  best  results,  you  should  make  it  a  rule  to  take  up  no  new  M-ork  until 
the  old  has  been  thoroughly  assimilated.) 

As  mentioned  before,  only  the  ordinary  writing  line  is  used  in  shorthand  after  the 
student  has  become  accustoined  to  the  respective  proj)ortions  of  the  characters.  You  are 
now  so  far  advanced  in  this  respect  that  we  are  justified  in  dispensing  with  the  top-  and  the 
bottom-line,  retaining  only  the  line  and  the  centre-top-line.  However,  if  you  do  not  feel 
sufficiently  sure  without  the  omitted  lines,  do  not  fail  to  rule  them  on  your  practice  sheet, 
for  it  is  very  important  that  the  outlines  be  made  correctly. 

BLiExded  Consonants  {continued). 

Looking  at  the  word  Kremlia  in  sentence  (199)  of  the  previous  lesson,  you  will  notice 
how  /•  is  joined  direct  to  k  (1)  ;  this  rule,  like  all  those  pertaining  to  the  blending  of  conso- 
nants, is  so  logical  that  it  need  hardly  be  memorized.  The  /•  stroke  of  this  combination  will 
of  course  come  below  the  line,  but  no  u  sound  can  be  inferred  from  this  position,  since  the 
absence  of  the  vowel-stroke  between  the  consonants  plainly  precludes  any  vowel-soumi 
between  them  :  crime  (2) — e  being  of  course  replaced  b^'  k  ;  note  creak  (3)— second  k  placeil 
high  and  lengthened,  and  crook  {\)—kr  placed  low.  Observe  how  kr  is  placed  high  in  creed 
(o),  which  compare  with  crude  (6).  R  preceded  by  a  short  vowel-sound  is  the  most  frequent 
final  syllable  in  English  words,  and  as  the  vowel-sound  is  scarcely  audible,  it  may  be  omitted, 
blending  the  r  with  the  consonant  preceding  it,  as  shown  in  baker  (7)— observe  the  long  k, 
and  cracker  (8) — note  the  shading.  When  kr  is  followed  by  o,  as  in  crow  (9),  the  o — as  shown 
by  ko  in  Lesson  4 — is  absorbed  by  ^/  compare  this  outline  with  core  (10).  The  same  prin- 
ciple is  applied  in  the  case  of  "aw"  ;  for  example,  craw  (11)  and  crawl  (12).  When  an 
initial  vowel-sound  precedes  kro,  its  initial  stroke  is  to  be  raised,  in  analogy  with  the  case 
of  act  (see  Lesson  2,  No.  24)  ;  this  is  illustrated  by  across  (13). 

With  the  other  small  characters  r  is  blended  in  a  similar  manner.  For  example,  when 
the  th  circle  is  complete,  the  outline  is  continued  to  form  an  r,  so  that  the  character  for  f/ir 
(14)  ends  likewise  under  the  line:  thrive  (15)  :  threat  (16)  :  thrash  (17) — note  the  shading  of 
r.  Mother  (18),  in  wliich  the  o  has  the  short  u  sound,  is  contracted  to  muthr,  r  being  blended 
with  th;  see  also  how  th  is  shaded  and  blended  with  r  in  rather  (19). 

B  and  th  (20)  are  logically  blended  by  starting  th  with  the  ;•  stroke  ;  as  shown  in  north 
(21)— note  also  how  n  and  the  aw  curve  are  joined  :  berth  or  birth  (22)— see  rth  placed  low  ; 
farther  (23)— note  the  shading  of  the  first  r  and  the  blending  of  rthr. 

R  and  .s  are  blended  by  ending  r  with  the  s  circle,  as  shown  in  (24)  :  matters  (25)  :  tears 
(26)— observe  how  rs  is  placed  high.  As  we  have  previously  seen,  no  recognition  is  made  of 
the  vowel-sound  of  the  prefixes  de  and  re  ;  we  are  therefore  justified  in  omitting  the  vowel- 
stroke  in  this  case,  thus  shortening  receive  to  rceive  (27),  which  is  just  as  plain.  The  difTer- 
ence  between  rs  and  rth  is  well  illustrated  by  the  words  ivorse  (28)  and  worth  (29),  foi'ce  (30) 
and  forth  (31). 

R  and  r  are  blended  by  adding  the  first  r  at  the  top  of  the  second,  thus  making  a  middle- 
length  sign  (32).  This  enables  us  to  shorten  hearer  (33),  analogous  to  tender:  demurrer  (34) 
— note  double  r  in  both  cases,  in  the  latter,  placed  low.  Observe  tlie  difference  lietween 
tearcr  (35)  and  terror  (36) ;  in  the  latter  word,  just  as  in  ordinary  script,  the  double  con- 
sonant is  employed  to  indicate  the  sharp,  short  vowel-sound. 


28  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


O  aud  r  (37)  are  blended  by  adding  /•  to  the  final  stroke  of  ^,  continuing  in  tlie  direction 
of  the  final  stroke,  in  order  to  avoid  an  angle  :  grain  (oS) :  green  (39) — see  long  n  phiced  high  : 
groan  (40)— observe  the  o  absorbed  by  g.  Tiger  (41)  shows  liow  gr  is  employed  finally. 
When  placed  high  tlie  outline  will  of  course  reacli  almost  to  the  centre-line,  while  g  placed 
high  will  not  reach  down  so  far  :  grim  (42). 

To  write  rg  (43),  r/  is  started  with  the  /•  stroke.  The  r  in  bargain  (44)  is  also  shaded  on 
account  of  the  "  a"  sound.  The  vowel-sound  in  the  prefixes  de  and  re  being  ignored,  we  can 
conveniently  shorten  words  like  regain  (45)  and  regale  (46),  to  rgain  and  rgale.  Notice  rgr  in 
regret  (47),  which  is  spelled  rgret ;  observe  that  t  in  this  word  is  partly  retraced  over  the  gr. 

B  and  r  (48)  are  blended  b.y  adding  r  to  b  in  a  manner  analogous  to  the  Ijlending  of  /■  and 
gr,  but  at  the  beginning  of  b  in  the  direction  of  the  initial  stroke  ;  just  as  h  is  the  reversed  g, 
so  hr  is  the  reversed  gr.  Note  the  difference  between  broom  (49)  and  boom  (50) — also  observe 
the  long  vowel-stroke  in  these  Avords  and  the  low  position  of  m  :  compare  bright  (51)  and 
bite  (52).     See  how  neighbor  (53),  in  which  no  "o"  is  audible,  is  contracted  to  neighbr  (53a). 

B  and  b  are  blended  by  simplj^  joining  them  without  any  intervening  vowel-stroke,  so 
that  the  change  of  position  cannot  imply  a  vowel-sound  :  m^arble  (54) — observe  the  shading 
of  r  ;  ivarble  (55) — notice  the  aw  curve. 

B  aud  V  are  blended  by  writing  the  second  form  of  v  (see  Lesson  2,  54a)  downward  and 
starting  it  with  the  r  stroke  (56)  :  carve  (57) — note  the  shading  of  r:  nerve  (58)  and  curve  (59) 
— note  rv  placed  low  ;  see  in  reserve  (60)  rs  aud  rv  blended,  and  the  latter  placed  low. 

Fand  r  (61)  are  blended  in  the  usual  manner,  by  joining  r  direct  to  the  first  (waved) 
form  of  v,  so  that  the  outline  is  prolonged  below  the  centre-line  :  rover  (62) — spelled  rovr  : 
cover  (63) — note  vr  jjlaced  low,  since  the  o  has  the  short  "  u"  sound.  Care  should  be  taken  to 
curve  the  final  part  of  v  well  to  the  left. 

B  and  rn  (64)  are  blended  in  accordance  with  the  usual  rule  applied  to  letters  with 
curves,  that  is,  by  starting  the  ?/i  with  the  r  stroke  :  note  the  difference  between  form  (65) 
and  foam  (66)  :  storm  (67)  :  warm  (68).  Observe  the  initial  vowel-stroke  jireceding  the  shaded 
r  in  orm  (69),  to  show  that  the  voivel-sound  begins  the  zvord.  Words  like  remain  (70)  are,  of 
course,  shortened  to  rmain  (70a)  :  remind  (71).  Observe  the  difference  between  r  and  6, 
blended  by  means  of  a  sharp  angle,  and  r  and  m,  blended  by  means  of  a  curve. 

M  and  r  are  blended  by  changing  the  final  curve  of  7n  into  the  r  stroke  (72) ;  by  this 
means  we  obtain  a  brief  outline  for  the  final  syllable  mer  as  in  steamer  (73),  spelled  steamr  ; 
compare  this  with  streamer  (74)  :  hammer  (75).  Bmr  is  merely  the  sum  of  the  two  rules 
above,  and  is  formed  by  starting  and  finishing  m  with  the  r  stroke :  warmer  (76)  :  armor 
(77)  :  murmur  (78) — note  rmr  placed  low.  In  this  case  the  initial  and  final  strokes  of  m  must 
of  course  be  parallel,  since  they  both  represent  the  same  letter,  r.  None  of  these  outlines, 
rg,  rm,  rmr,  etc.,  is  difficult  to  make,  if  you  bear  in  mind  that  the  character  is  begun  or 
ended  with  the  r  stroke  ;  the  form  will  then  come  naturally. 

Medium  t  and  r  (79)  are  blended  by  adding  r  to  t  at  the  beginning  and  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  the  t  stroke,  so  that  tr  starts  above  the  top-centre-line.  Like  medium  t,  medium  tr 
cannot  be  used  initially  :  penetrate  (80)  :  concentrate  (81)— note  how  in  this  word  the  vowel- 
sound  between  n  and  t  is  precluded  by  retracing  t  over  the  connective  vowel-stroke,  Avhich 
is  thereby  eliminated ;  the  same  applies  to  electric  (82).  The  final  use  of  tr  is  illustrated  by 
ivaiter  (ivaitr)  (83)  and  traitor  (84)  :  observe  the  difference  between  latter  (So)— I  shaded— and 
later  (86). 

P  and  r  are  blended  by  finishing  p  with  the  r  stroke  (87) ;  when  this  character  is  used 
initially,  and  initially  only,  it  is  7-educed  to  a  medium  sign  (87a),  of  course  retaining  its 
shape.  In  all  other  cases  the  long  sign  must  be  employed  :  jyroud  (88)— note  d  placed  low 
and  shaded,  expressing  the  "ow"  sound:  prw??e  (89)— observe  the  loug  n  placed  low,  on 
account  of  the  long  "oo"  sound  :  j^rimer  (90)— ^jr  placed  high  :  prime  (91)  :  print  (92) :  taper 
=  tapr  (93)  :  paper  (94) :  reprieve  (95).  See  how  the  second  pr  is  shaded  in  proper  (96),  to 
express  the  "a"  sound  of  o ;  observe  how  the  r  is  accented  in  propose  (07)  and  how  conve- 
niently the  second  syllable  is  joined  to  the  first.  The  outline  for  ^j/'o  cannot  be  mistaken 
for  wro  ;  for  shorthand  purposes,  there  is  no  ivr  in  English,  since  iv  in  that  combination  is 
always  silent,  as  in  wrong,  write,  etc. 

B  and/)  are  blended  by  joining  them  without  a  connective  vowel-stroke,  as  in  war})  (98) 
and  sliarp  (99)— observe  the  r  shaded  in  the  latter. 

F  and  r  are  likewise  blended  by  joining  them  without  a  vowel-stroke;  this  rule  is  so 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  29 


self-evident  that  the  combination  has  already  been  employed  in  previous  lessons.  When  the 
vowel-sound  "ay"  (long  or  short)  occurs  between  /and  r,  the  connective  vowel-stroke  must 
be  employed,  and  /  must  therefore  be  written  downward  ;  note  the  difference  between  fair 
(100)  and  fra^  (101)  :  ferret  (102),  freight  (103),  and  fret  (104)— here  a  short  vowel-sound 
("ay")  must  be  read  between  //•  and  t,  since  blended  letters  count  as  one  (see  rule  under  37, 
Lesson  1)  :  freeze  (105)  :  friend  (106).  Fr  can  also  be  traced  downward,  as  in  heifer  (107), 
really  spelled  hefr. 

Sh  and  /•  (108)  are  blended  by  tracing  the  downward  part  of  the  initial  stroke  of  sh  in 
the  /•  direction  ;  compare  shr  in  shriek  (109) — where  long  k  is  placed  high — with  ah  in  shake 
(110) :  note  the  same  difference  in  shrive  (111)  and  shave  (112). 

jB  and  sh  are  blended  by  omitting  the  connective  vowel-stroke  between  them  ;  for  this 
Ijurjjose  the  initial  stroke  of  sh  must  be  brought  down  to  the  line,  so  that  in  this  case  sh  duos 
not  reach  the  top-centre-line  as  shown  in  marshal  (113)  and  harsh  (11-4)— since  the  vowel- 
sound  of  this  word  is  already  expressed  by  the  shading  of  r,  no  vowel-stroke  is  necessary 
between  sh  and  r.  Compare  sh  in  the  latter  word  with  the  same  sign  in  fresh  (115),  where 
it  is  joined  with  /■  by  means  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke. 

Sjy  and  /■  (116)  are  treated  according  to  the  same  rule  as  sh  and  /•,  i.e.,  the  initial  stroke 
(which  is  written  downward)  is  traced  in  the  /•  direction  :  note  the  difference  between  sixr  in 
sprat/  (117j  or  sjori/  (118),  and  the  sj)  in  sjjij  (119). 

(S'  blends  also  very  conveniently  with  the  other  consonants  with  which  it  occurs  ;  with  k, 
for  instance,  by  starting  the  latter  with  the  s  circle  (120).  Of  course,  when  s  is  used  initiallj-, 
its  initial  stroke  is  always  omitted.  Observe  the  difference  between  scale  (121)  and  skull 
(122)— it  is  not  necessary  to  write  double  I  in  the  latter  word,  the  short  vowel-sound  being 
indicated  by  the  short  connective  stroke  between  sk  and  /.  Note  disc  (123) — sk  high,  desk 
(124)— 6-A-  on  line,  and  dusk  (125)— sA;  low.  See  how  skr  in  describe  (126)  is  formed  by  start- 
ing kr  with  the  s  circle  ;  observe  the  difference  between  sA-/m  (127)  and  scream  (128). 

<S'and  i'  are  likewise  blended  by  omitting  the  vowel-stroke  between  them,  thus  making 
the  I  as  soon  as  the  s  circle  is  finished,  as  shown  in  (129)  :  sit/  (130)  :  sleigh  (131)— compare 
this  with  sale  (132),  where  the  vowel-stroke  is  between  s  and  I. 

Starting  m  with  s  forms  S7n  (133)  :  S7nell  (134) :  small  (135) :  prism  (136). 

Starting  a  with  s  results  in  sn  (137)  :  snail  (138)  :  compare  syiore  (139)  and  sore  (140)— note 
the  sharp  angle  between  s  and  o  in  the  latter  word,  and  the  blending  of  sn  with  o  in  the 
former. 

S  and  p  (141)  are  blended  by  commencing  downward  j)  with  the  s  circle  in  the  same 
manner  as  with  t,  i.e.,  by  making  the  circle,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  in  the  th  direction  ; 
there  can  be  no  clash,  since  there  is  no  combination  th}).  This  blended  group  cannot  be  used 
in  place  of  the  aJ phcd)etieal  sign  sp  (116),  but  represents  the  short  syllables  usually  found  at 
the  beginning  of  words,  such  as  separate,  support  (142),  supreme  (143)  ;  sj)  in  support  is  short- 
ened so  as  not  to  reach  the  bottom-line,  on  account  of  the  t  following. 

>iS'  and  s  are  blended  by  making  the  s  circle  larger,  so  that  it  becomes  a  medium  character, 
representing  the  short  syllable  ses  (144)— when  in  normal  position,  .s/s— when  placed  high, 
and  ,sws— when  placed  low  :  j^ossess  (145)  :  pieces  (146) :  system  (147)  :  sustain  (148)  :  assist 
(149) — note  the  initial  stroke  :  sister  (150)  :  note  the  difference  between  i^rice  (151)  and  p)rices 
(152) — the  latter  word  (like  pieces)  shows  that  this  large  s  circle  is  a  brief  way  of  expressing 
the  plural  of  words.    It  cannot  be  used,  however,  where  the  "s"  sound  is  soft,  as  in  prizes. 

Sw  (153),  formed  by  starting  iv  with  the  s  circle,  cannot  be  confounded  with  d,  as  you 
will  see  by  comparing  swell  (154)  and  dcde  (155),  swim  (156)  and  dim  (157) ;  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  make  the  .s-  circle  too  large. 

Chr  and  jr  do  not  occur  initially,  but,  when  contracted,  they  form  a  brief  final  syllable. 
Chr  can  be  conveniently  blended  by  ending  eh  with  the  r  stroke,  as  shown  in  stretcher  (158) 
and  pitcher  (159)— see  how  chr  is  placed  high  in  the  latter  word.  To  J,  ending  in  a  waved 
line,  /•  must  be  joined  without  a  connective  vowel-stroke,  thus  reducing  ledger  to  ledjr  (160)  : 
dodger  (161)— note  the  J  shaded,  owing  to  the  "  a"  sound  of  o. 

In  the  reverse  case,  r  and  ch  and  /•  and,/  are  blended  by  starting  them  with  the  r  stroke, 
as  shown  in  (162)  and  (163)  ;  observe  the  difference  between  ;)«/Y7i  (1(U)  and  porridge  (165)— 
in  the  latter  word  note  the  connective  vowel-stroke  between  ;•  and  j,  also  the  shading  of  r, 
owing  to  the  "a"  sound  of  o,  and  the  high  position  of./  to  express  the  short  "1"  sound. 
Note  search  (166)  and  serge  (167)  ;  see  how  in  sergeant  (168)  r  is  shaded — as  ser  is  pronounced 


3U  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAXD. 


sar — and  blended  with  j,  and  how  conveniently  n  is  joined  to  the  latter  by  means  of  a  loop, 
which  is  always  employed  when  n  joins  a  waved  line  ;  r  in  this  word  is  not  to  be  considered 
as  placed  high,  since  it  is  absorbed  by  j  (which  stands  for  the  soft  sound  of  g).  If  the  word 
was  pronounced  like  surgeant,  rj  would  of  course  have  to  be  placed  low. 

To  the  stroke  for  ence,  r  is  joined  in  the  same  manner  as  to  j :  dancer  (169). 

In  the  preceding  lesson  we  have  seen  how  «  and  long  t  ai'e  blended  ;  s  and  medium  t  are 
blended  in  a  similar  manner,  as  shown  in  (170),  but  the  sign  cannot  be  employed  initially, 
just  as  in  the  case  of  medium  /.  This  combination  is  also  used  to  difierentiate  between  the 
long  and  the  short  vowel-sounds  ;  note  how  it  is  connected  with  the  preceding  consonant  in 
tante  (171)  and  test  (172),  leant  (173)  and  IL'it  (174),  waist  or  ivante  (175)  and  West  (176). 

<S'and  (medium)  tr  (177)  are  consequently  blended  by  joining  s  at  the  top  to  tr  ;  note  the 
shading  in  jwostrate  (178),  on  account  of  the  "a"  sound  of  o:  observe  the  short  "  u"  sound 
in  frustrate  (179)  and  the  long  "  oo"  sound  in  rooster  (ISO),  both  expressed  by  sfr  placed  low. 

You  are  famihar  with  the  word-signs  for  your  and  our,  shown  in  Lesson  2 ;  s  added  to 
them  will  of  course  make  them  read  yours  (181)  and  ours  (182).  Their  (183),  formed  by 
blending  th  and  r,  is  hai'dly  a  word-sign,  since  thr  cannot  occur  alone  without  a  vowel,  and 
therefore,  according  to  the  rule,  the  "a"  sound  must  be  read  between  them,  unless  there  is 
another  vowel-sound  expressed. 

Logograms. 

Stv  (184)  shaded,  stands  for  somewhat :  gr  (185)  for  great :  fr  (186)  for  fro7n  ;  after  (187)  is 
t  reduced  in  size  and  joined  to  r  :  ko  with  the  initial  stroke  raised,  reads  "  acco,^^  and  stands 
as  the  word-sign  for  according  (188)  :  acraw  (189)  stands  for  across,  and  craiv  for  a-oss  (190) — 
o  having  a  decided  '■'■  a^v^''  sound  in  the  last  two  words.  Pr  (long)  stands  for  j^^'^sent  (191), 
and  2)h  for  perhaps  (192). 

You  will  now  uiiiUrstand  the  following 

Reading  Exercise  (without  the  aid  of  the  key). 

(193)  "How  was  the  harvest  last  year?"  said  the  former  farmer  to  the  owner  of  the 
home.  "  We  had  a  fair  crop,"  was  the  answer,  "  prices  were  much  firmer  ;  however,  labor 
was  so  scarce  that  we  could  not  grind  much  sugar-cane." — Note  the  word  harvest,  illustrating 
well  the  difference  between  h,  which  always  shows  a  curve  at  the  top,  and  rv,  which  con- 
nects with  the  preceding  letter  by  means  of  a  sharp  angle  ;  r  is  shaded  in  this  case.  Com- 
pare the  words  former — notice  the  o  curve  in  f  farmer — observe  the  straight /and  shading 
of  the  first  r  of  rmr,  and  firmer — r7yir  placed  low,  on  account  of  the  short  "u"  sound. 
Observe  the  shading  of  ^5  in  crop  ("a"  sound  of  o),  also  the  shading  of  the  ence  stroke  in 
answer,  w  being  silent  in  that  word.    Look  at  the  contraction  of  labor,  spelled  labr. 

(194)  The  traitor  shot  the  president  at  the  theatre. — Notice  th  placed  high  in  the  word 
theatre,  implying  the  short  "  i"  sound,  and  medium  tr  following,  implying  the  short  "a" 
sound.     [See  Lesson  2,  rule  under  (9)  and  (10),  which  present  a  similar  case.] 

(195)  The  torrid  zone  reaches  from  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  to  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn. — 
Observe  the  shading  of  r  in  torrid,  the  rei>lacing  of  z  by  s  in  zone,  the  shading  of  k  in  Cancer 
and  of  x>  i'l  Tropic.  The  word  Capricorn  illustrates  how  well  Graphic  Shorthand  is  able  to 
write  names  ;  notice  the  shaded  k,  followed  by  pr,  the  latter  connected  with  ko,  placed  high 
to  indicate  the  short  "  i"  sound. 

(196)  The  preface  of  the  professor  praises  the  process,  but  says  the  electrical  one  may 
penetrate  the  metal  better. — Observe  the  diflference  between  preface  and  professor,  praises 
and  process,  the  ses  circle  in  the  latter  being  shaded,  owing  to  the  "a"  sound  of  o ;  if  the 
word  is  pronounced  like  pro-cess,  o  having  the  same  sound  as  in  go,  the  o  curve  must  be 
employed.  Note  how  the  connective  vowel-stroke  is  omitted  between  k  and  t  in  electric  to 
preclude  the  vowel-sound,  while  it  is  shown  between  n  and  t  in  peiietrate,  to  indicate  that 
the  vowel-sound  is  to  be  inserted. 

(197)  The  speaker  was  a  senator  from  Kansas.— Note  in  speaker,  long  k  blended  with  r 
placed  high.  Look  at  the  word  senator,  wliich,  in  accordance  with  the  pronunciation,  is 
written  senetr,  employing  the  medium  tr  for  a  convenient  ending.  See  how  advantageously 
the  ence  stroke  is  employed  in  Kansas;  the  second  syllable  of  this  word  sounds  like  ses,  and 
no  shading  is  tlierefore  necessary. 

(198)  "We  should  protect  the  cruiser  with  a  strong  armor,"  said  the  commander  of  the 
torpedo  boat,  to  the  crowd. — Observe  the  word  protect,  where  eacli  t  is  shortened  (on  the 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  31 


same  principle  as  start  was  written).  Notice  how  the  r  is  brought  out  clearly  in  ^>/-o  (of  jrro- 
tect)  and  in  strong:  note  the  shading  of  m  and  the  blending  of  ndr  in  commcmder,  and  the 
d  placed  high  in  torjiedo. 

(199)  Hoist  the  streamer  to  the  highest  point. — Note  the  difference  between  hoist,  where 
the  consonant  preceding  the  i  stroke  is  placed  low,  and  highest,  where  medium  t  {sf)  fol- 
lowing the  i  stroke  implies  a  short  vowel-sound  preceding  it.     (See  Lesson  2,  No.  10). 

(200)  We  regard  this  matter  a  criminal  offence,  so  guard  the  rascal  well ;  they  should 
not  grant  a  pardon  to  the  culprit ;  such  men  deserve  the  gallows. — Compare  regard  and 
guard;  note  kr  placed  high  in  criminal,  k  placed  low  and  t  placed  high  in  culprit. 

(201)  The  torture  of  thirst  may  cause  fever,  but  the  fervor  of  the  heroes  does  not  decrease 
after  the  crisis. — Note  rehr  in  torture,  see  rst  placed  low  in  thirst ;  compare  fever — vr  placed 
high,  with  fervor — rvr  placed  low.    See  how  the  sis  circle  is  placed  higli  in  crisis. 

In  the  subsequent  lessons  no  more  shorthand  transcriptions  of  Writing  Exercises  will 
appear,  and  you  are  therefore  urgently  requested  to  send  in  for  correction  the  following 

Writing  Exercise. 

(202)  Do  not  cast  thy  bread  on  the  waters.  (203)  A  cover  of  snow  hid  the  ground  from 
the  eyes ;  the  pond  was  frozen  ;  I  could  not  hear  the  murmur  of  the  brook,  or  the  warble 
of  a  single  bird  ;  the  grove  was  silent  like  a  grave.  (203a)  I  found  no  trace  of  spring ; 
perhaps  winter  may  last  longer  than  we  think.  [Do  not  forget  to  shade  n  and  place  nd  low 
in  ground,  to  shade  the  n  of  nd  in  x>ond — "  a"  sound  of  o  ;  accentuate  well  the  r  in  frozen, 
place  rmr  low  in  murmur,  also  k  in  brook  ;  note  the  difference  between  grave  and  grove — o  in 
the  latter  being  absorbed  by  the  initial  g  curve]  (204)  The  storm  tore  the  streamer  from 
the  mast  of  the  schooner,  wave  after  wave  sent  the  spray  of  the  brine  over  the  deck,  so  that 
we  were  all  driven  down  to  our  cabin.  (205)  "We  must  reach  our  aim  by  hook  or  crook," 
was  the  order  given  by  the  leader  of  the  robbers.  [In  robbers  shade  the  b — "a"  sound  of  o, 
and  blend  the  final  r.s].  (206)  Tell  the  waiter  to  serve  the  dinner  at  the  table  that  I  told 
him  to  reserve  for  the  guest.  (207)  At  the  present  stage  of  the  matter  the  defence  can  have 
no  chance  to  win  ;  but  I  think  the  game  cannot  be  worth  the  candle.  (208)  The  wounded 
man  was  brought  home  on  a  stretcher  after  the  doctors  had  found  that  he  had  broken  a 
leg.  [Use  a  long  n,  blended  with  d  in  wounded ;  o  will  fit  in  easily  between  br  and  k  in 
broken}.  (209)  We  propose  to  assist  the  marshal  to  keep  order.  [Place  k  high  in  keej)}. 
(210)  The  tiger  was  the  cause  of  much  terror  to  the  village,  but  a  rifle-ball  from  a  sharp- 
shooter brought  death  to  the  beast,  relief  to  the  village.  [In  shooter  use  the  long  connective 
stroke  and  place  medium  tr  low  ;  place  the  sj'llable  rcl  high  in  7-elicf}.  (211)  Tell  the  tailor 
to  baste  the  coat  with  the  best  thread  he  can  buy.  (212)  A  sick  rooster  does  not  crow.  (213) 
Remind  father  that  he  should  prune  the  trees  of  our  garden.  (214)  Do  not  let  j'our  brother 
brood  over  the  hard  luck  he  had.  [Use  long  connective  stroke  and  place  d  low  in  brood]. 
(215)  Grim  war  cannot  be  worse  than  the  rule  of  this  tyrant.  [In  tyrant  no  shading  is 
necessary,  "a"  having  a  very  short  sound].  (216)  We  have  a  fine  pitcher  on  our  i^ase 
ball  team,  but  we  need  a  good  catcher.  (217)  "We  despise  a  spy,  but  we  need  him," 
said  the  proud,  brave  commander.  [Use  the  sign  for  .sp  in  des2)ise'\  (218)  The  man  who 
can  tortui'e  a  live  creature  must  be  a  brute.  [Remember  the  chr  sound  in  torture  and 
creature']. 


Lesson  6.      ^  "^^  V^/  ""  ^^^^  ^"^  ^  ^'^  ^^^    ^  V    '^^ '   ^  "^  "^  ^^^ 


-  ^  ^   y  ^    n  ')  /^y^  ^9  o  /r-.     'J  c^.  /r-  ^  ^^    yj'  .  -  r-s..    ^.^. 


Let -W^      O <^    . 2= tf '    ^^^ ^yg     /— ^-r< c=w^ C2 L »       -  ^        O/  - (      w^ 


y^  ^y   U)  -w^  o   <^y — a-  <r — '  ^^ — <^  >^--^^   —   .?  (  V>  ^  ^    ^   o .        '^  (  J^    ''  r . 


y'       ^^    X  -        r;  ^"     "ZT  ^    "^     ^-    "    ' — /  "*  V 


^  ..  /  .  /v  ^  ^^r^  ^  '>>  ^i'  ^  /^^-^  c  ^  n  ^    ^ 


^ 


^  / r:    C4    (T    <y    J  ^^ f  ^  n    L^ — ==a_L» — =^2 — C^    « 6  ^.  ^^  ^  ^   .^  C-    ~r^    ^      J.  . 


-1^  ^  ^  .-^^  r^  ^'    /I  ^^  "  ^'^^  °         ""  ^""^  ^  r,  r^  CA  ^^    /_ 


^.^  '^    ^  y.    ';^  r.^     u.     ^-  ^  ^  .  ^  y,  ^y  /^  w^       o  ^  ^    7  -  V^ 


c  . . ,.  I  ^    ^    -,  .  /^//.     <r  ^-.^-r?  . .  /^V^^  ^  <^  ^  ^  "^^^   ^" 


-J2. 


^    y«^-     ^    '     ^,    ,     .T-^^^      ,   ^     .     ^     gl.  .  o     a/   r.^^      -    /   .     0       //,  C     s^J  / 


/7  /  /.^ 


^i^.^  ^y;  /  7/// .  ;>/.^  /  r.  A    ^  -r^.  ^   ^!  .,    ..  -  v^. 


iiL <^  a-    (.yj.  /    /y^''   ^   /y ^^ /  <x^  \. a <w^  . /?   /? 


^'  .    /^^^  ■       C    /^  ..    ^k      ^    '^^  ^    ^      .A  .    .   -^J^-^  /^    6r-"3ry 


— p  <y    v-^ 


XS-  26  ^ ^ 


'-'j     (/f7^  .9    ^   A        ^    O     ^^^^      -^    />^        ^Vv^    >.    <    /    /f  .^     ^^/  ^^>     '  >fe^ 


7 ^^  /  . 


-^     x7^  '    '>^^'^'         ^'"y"^   .^V^^  -   ^/  <J^-(A^i    .^    (^7  V^y^ 


^f  /  A  ^° 


^  c^  -A^.  ""1  ^  z::^  /  //\. .  A^^,      .  . . .  ^  /^y  -^^ 


-S=:=i — i*i^ ±3S__, 12 (•VX    U^ ^ kl \j O    .-.^ j_/ o      -^    jn s__c — C3 to i^.// !==::-• ^ 

7^         /  <;y 


-g  V^ /      if-^         y        n       /^      V-<       C!!,^-— S^.  ^      <-n"^-^^     Uf      -^o-     -       C-^        <^^ -^^- 


r — '    /    .  y 


^O"^.  i/^'^-j./^    ^^,.   ^  ^,,,/'- ^  ..  ^'    .  ^- ^  ;>,.-zia.x.,.-i:l^ 


^^^w (I ^,^^»^ ^        -^     • ^       ^  <^ ^-^ ^ 


.  ^/  '^  /  >  ,^  / "',  ""^  v/^  ^  -  y€  ^^^'  "^'^^  --  ^-^.->  ^  ^ 


Wf^y  /.       Sy'  /^     n^     ^\'^--  --c^^-l  /  ..In  ^^\: 


y^  ,  r//  /w,  ^  -r^     ,  —-  --c^^  ^  /,^, 


-:e. 


0  r-^J?  . ^     ^'      ^    ^  •^'^'^     "  7"  /y^  ^~^     "^ — —Si- a ^^yC- = — -^ 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  33 


Lesson  No.  6. 


In  the  preceding  lessons  we  have  learned  how  to  express  the  majority  of  the  vowel- 
sounds  (with  the  exception  of  those  of  u,  as  in  fume)  when  they  occur  medially.  This 
lesson  will  afford  reading  material  embodying  these  vowels ;  the  examples  given  should 
therefore  be  carefully  studied. 

(1)  What  may  be  sport  for  a  wicked  boy  may  cause  much  pain  to  a  poor  bird. — Note 
how  the  o  in  sport  is  shown  by  the  enlarged  sp  loop,  which  has  absorbed  it.  See  also  how  r 
in  2^oor  is  placed  lower  than  p. 

(2)  I  saw  the  cat  act  like  a  sneak  ;  I  think  she  has  done  away  with  the  milk.— Compare 
cat  and  act;  see  how  the  initial  vowel-stroke  clearly  indicates  that  the  latter  word  starts 
with  a  vowel-sound. 

(3)  Have  they  ever  seen  a  pipe  made  from  a  corn-cob  ? — Observe  how  well  the  i  stroke  is 
shown  in  pipe,  and  how  nicely  it  can  be  joined  with  both  p'a.  In  cob,  o  has  the  "  a"  sound, 
which  must  be  shown  by  shading  the  following  consonant. 

(4)  The  police  could  find  no  trace  of  the  murder  ;  they  saw  no  blood-stain  on  the  tall 
pole,  althougli  Paul  had  told  them  so. — Compare  aw  in  fall  and  o  in  fo/cl;  also,  pole  and 
Paul.  If  it  is  desired  especially  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  Paul  is  a  proper  name,  the  out- 
line may  be  underlined. 

(5)  We  must  steer  the  boat  so  that  she  can  go  with  the  tide  as  well  as  with  the  wind  ; 
thus  alone  can  we  avoid  the  shoal ;  I  consider  this  the  best  course. — This  sentence  shows 
well  how  conveniently  o  blends  with  letters  ending  with  a  right-hand  curve,  and  how  well 
it  is  absorbed,  when  reversed,  by  letters  with  a  left-hand  curve  ;  compare  sh  of  she  with  s/io 
in  shoal ;  also  bo  in  boat,  and  go  in  go. 

(6)  The  bell  rang  at  the  'phone. — As  double  consonants  are  used  only  for  purposes  of 
distinction,  double  I  in  bell  may  well  be  omitted.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  mention  that  an 
apostrophe  is  superfluous  in  'phone  and  that  ph  is  replaced  by  /. 

(7)  Does  the  child  know  how  cocoa  grows? — You  will  have  observed  that  ko  has  two 
meanings, — viz.,  co  or  ko  as  in  cocoa,  or  the  prefix  con;  the  two  will  not  clash,  as  will  be 
found  in  practice.    Koko  could  not  be  concon,  as  there  is  no  such  word. 

(8)  We  should  always  say  a  kind  word  to  a  helpless  man  ;  a  kind  thought  may  be  good, 
but  the  word  cheers  him  ;  yet  a  kind  deed  does  more  good  than  both. — See  how  close 
together  I  and  p  are  placed  in  helpless,  thus  precluding  any  vowel-sound  between  them. 
Notice  also  rs  in  cheers,  and  see  how  the  long  vowel-sound  in  deed  is  well  shown  by  the  long 
connective  vowel-stroke. 

(9)  Maud  says  the  dress  shows  neither  taste  nor  style. — See  how  the  long  sound  in  taste 
is  shown  l)y  the  use  of  tlie  medium  st,  thus  admitting  of  the  use  of  a  long  connective  vowel- 
stroke.    If  large  t  were  used  in  this  connection,  the  word  would  read  test. 

(10)  Those  who  have  at  heart  the  welfare  of  the  town  should  vote  for  the  rapid  transit 
bill.^See  how  the  short  "  i"  sound  in  transit  is  shown  by  the  high  position  of  t.  No  double 
I  is  necessary  in  bill,  since  beal  has  no  meaning,  and  there  can  be  no  clash. 

(11)  What  kind  of  chromo  do  they  give  with  the  spices? — When  ch  has  the  sound  of  k 
it  is,  of  course,  replaced  by  k,  whicli  is  here  blended  with  r  and  at  the  same  time  has  absorbed 
the  0/  see  also  how  o  is  well  shown  at  the  end  of  the  word,  and  how  readily  it  can  be  joined 
to  m.     Note  how  the  plural  is  shown  by  the  use  of  the  .se,s  circle  in  spices. 

(12)  I  doubt  that  they  ever  were  on  your  side ;  for  they  are  our  men. — This  sentence 
shows  the  five  logograms  formed  by  r :  above  the  line  for  were  ;  on  the  line  for  ever  ;  below 
the  line  for  your  ;  on  the  line  shaded  for  are  ;  and  below  the  line  shaded  for  our.  See  also 
medium  t  placed  low  and  shaded  in  doubt,  where  b  is  silent  and  therefore  omitted. 

(13)  The  forester  broke  a  sprig  from  the  hedge. — O  has  the  "a"  sound  in  forester,  and  r 
is  therefore  shaded  ;  see  how  the  vowel-sound  preceding  sir  is  shown  by  the  connective 
vowel-stroke.    See  also  how  the  r  is  shown  in  sprig  by  the  initial  part  of  s/j. 

3 


34  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


(14)  We  ought  to  resent  the  recent  speech  of  the  orator.— Note  the  difference  between 
recent  and  resent :  in  the  former,  the  first  syllable  is  not  accented,  and  we  may  therefore 
blend  r  and  s,  writing  rsent ;  in  the  latter,  s  is  placed  high,  clearly  showing  the  "ee"  sound 
of  the  syllable.  See  how  conveniently  medium  tr  can  be  used  in  oretr  (spelled  in  accordance 
with  the  sound). 

(15)  Have  they  made  an  analysis  of  the  water?— Note  the  word  analysis,  and  see  how 
well  the  last  syllable  is  represented  by  the  ses  circle  placed  liigh,  indicating  at  the  same  time 
the  short  "  i"  sound  preceding. 

(16)  Have  tliey  ever  ridden  a  chainless  wheel  or  tried  a  tandem?— No  double  d  is 
necessary  in  ridden. 

(17)  The  brave  sailors  had  to  grope  their  way  to  the  powder-room  to  get  the  grape-shot. — 
No  o  is  audible  in  sailors.  Compare  grope  with  grape.  O  has  the  "a"  sound  in  shot,  and  t 
must  therefore  be  shaded.     See  also  how  dr  is  placed  low  and  shaded. 

(18)  With  a  firm  grasp  the  man  took  the  grappling  iron. — Notice  the  shading  in  gr. 
Also  rm  placed  low  in  firm. 

(19)  The  sharp-shooter  had  target  practice  all  week. — Observe  r  shaded  and  blended  with 
g  in  target.  Note  tr  placed  low  in  shooter,  also  the  long  vowel-stroke,  indicating  the  long 
"u"  sound.  It  might  be  said  here  that  tr  is  not  very  plain;  but  even  if  the  outline  is 
written  carelessly  it  -tnust  read  sharpshoot,  and  can  hardly  be  taken  for  anything  else. 

(20)  One  swallow  does  not  make  a  summer. — Note  mr  placed  low  in  summer. 

(21)  Do  they  wish  to  arbitrate  the  matter  or  to  prolong  the  quarrel  ? — See  how  r  and  b 
are  blended  in  arbitrate,  and  how  shaded  r  is  preceded  by  the  vowel-stroke ;  compare  tr 
with  t  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  word.  Notice  how  well  o  is  shown  preceding  and  following 
I  in  prolong.     See  also  the  clear  outline  for  quarrel. 

(22)  The  supply  of  an  article  should  not  exceed  the  demand. — In  supply  p  is  shortened  a 
little,  as  is  usual  when  the  identity  of  the  /  stroke  sliould  be  preserved.  See  also  how  the  ini- 
tial vowel-stroke  precedes  shaded  r  in  article.    Both  vowels  are  also  clearly  shown  in  exceed. 

(23)  What  brand  of  cigars  does  he  smoke? — Note  s  placed  high  and  r  shaded  and  blended 
with  the  second  s  in  cigars. 

(24)  The  speech  of  the  lecturer  was  not  so  precise  as  that  of  her  predecessor. — Double  r 
can  be  employed  conveniently  in  the  final  syllable  of  lecturer;  the  same  applies  to  double  s 
in  predecessor. 

(25)  The  throng  at  the  gate  was  enormous. — See  how  the  r  is  clearly  shown  in  throng, 
and  how  it  is  blended  with  m  in  enormous. 

(26)  What  kind  of  a  watch  do  they  wish  to  buy, — a  stem-winder? — Note  ndr  placed 
high  in  ivinder. 

(27)  We  must  find  a  scape-goat  for  this  error. — See  how  nicely  double  r  can  be  used  in 
error. 

(28)  She  would  like  to  have  a  bonnet  with  a  broad  brim  or  with  big  ostrich  feathers. — 
See  how  n  is  shaded  and  how  the  vowel-stroke  preceding  t  is  shown  in  bonnet,  M^here  o  has 
the  "a"  sound.  Note  also  braw  in  broad.  See  how  conveniently  o  and  str  are  joined  in 
ostrich.  Observe  thrs  blended  in  feathers.  Medium  t  in  ostrich  will  be  found  more  con- 
venient than  long  t ;  though  the  latter  would  not  be  wrong.  It  should  be  remembered  here, 
that  the  student,  having  decided  which  of  two  possible  outlines  to  use,  he  or  she  should, 
always  use  the  same  outline  for  the  same  word. 

(29)  The  prisoner  tried  to  snatch  the  weapon  from  the  hand  of  the  keeper. — No  o  is 
heard  in  prisoner.     Observe  n  shaded  in  snatch.    Keeper  is  actually  written  keepr. 

(30)  Not  all  those  who  go  to  the  gold  region  come  back  with  gold. 

(31)  The  murderer  tried  to  strangle  the  victim,  but  the  approach  of  the  men  drove  him 
away. — See  how  well  upward  v  can  be  used  in  victim,  and  how  clearly  r  is  brought  out  in 
appi'oach  and  in  drove.  Note  also  how  nicelj'  double  r,  blended  with  d,  can  be  used  in 
murderer. 

(32)  I  like  the  frank  manner  of  tiie  man  ;  yet  he  may  be  a  fraud.— No  double  n  is 
necessary  in  manner. 

(33)  I  told  him  to  get  some  witch-hazel  for  the  sprain. — In  witch-hazel  ch  and  h  can  be 
joined  conveniently,  and  s  and  I  are  blended. 

(34)  The  rope  was  too  slack  for  the  tight-rope  walker. — See  s  and  I  blended  and  I  shaded 
in  slack.     Also  k  and  r  blended  in  xvalker. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  35 


(35)  How  can  this  broker  trade  ou  such  a  small  margin? — Note  h  anrl  r  and  k  and  r 
blended  in  broker.    No  "  i"  sound  is  heard  in  marfjin,  the  word  sounding  like  marjn. 
(3«i)  She  had  taught  the  tot  to  say  "  Hello." 

(37)  How  often  does  he  count  this  sujn  over? 

(38)  The  sick  man  has  much  cause  for  anger,  for  the  doctor  was  very  rude  to  him.— 
Compare  sick  with  the  outline  for  so  (in  4  above). 

(39)  General  Harrison  was  a  good  commander. — Note  the  outliue  for  Harrison,  where  no 

0  is  audible. 

(40)  Take  care,  my  son  ;  the  bad  habit  may  spoil  your  chance  to  reach  your  end.— Note 
t  placed  high  in  habit.    Also  the  initial  ay  stroke  in  end. 

(41)  There  was  quite  a  tussle  for  the  tassel  the  king  had  thrown  among  the  crowd. — 
Compare  tussle,  st  placed  low  and  blended  with  tassel,  t  shaded.  Note  how  ;•  is  clearly  shown 
in  thrown. 

(42)  The  widow  does  not  like  the  appearance  of  the  window.— Compare  the  outline  of 
widow  with  that  for  window. 

(43)  The  cripple  was  a  fraud.— Note  kr  placed  high  in  eripi^le. 

Wbiting  Exercise. 

(44)  Signal  to  the  boat  to  make  for  the  shore.  (45)  "Who  would  conceive  the  notion  to 
write  such  a  letter?"  (45a)  "Perhaps  the  book-keeper  or  the  manager,"  replied  the  office 
boy.  (46)  The  days  of  yore  have  gone  by,  never  to  come  back.  (47)  A  fine  young  man 
was  among  the  rabble.  (48)  He  was  chosen  to  lead  them.  (49)  Can  he  leap  over  the  stile? 
(49a)  He  said  he  could,  but  he  would  like  to  avoid  that  w'alk.  (50)  I  think  the  maid  need 
not  trim  the  wick  for  a  week.  (51)  This  corn-stalk  does  not  seem  to  be  very  high.  (52)  We 
saw  the  poor  old  woman  weep  with  joy.  (53)  "  He  was  always  a  tender  son,"  she  said,  with 
a  sob.  (54)  I  do  not  feel  well  just  now,  but  I  hope  to  be  all  right  for  the  wedding-day.  (55) 
Does  the  child  know  the  shape  of  a  cone  or  a  cylinder?  (55a)  She  may  know  both.  (56)  I 
cannot  decide  such  a  grave  matter  so  soon  ;  as  a  consequence,  the  man  may  have  to  wait  a 
while.  (57)  A  strong  gale  tore  the  main-sail  off  the  mast ;  yet  we  made  rather  good  head- 
way. (58)  We  can  send  this  bundle  by  mail.  (59)  We  all  must  learn  to  obey  the  laws.  (60) 
The  age  of  dotage  may  make  a  man  or  a  woman  as  weak  or  as  helpless  as  a  child.  (61)  The 
spinster  was  so  fond  of  her  lap-dog  that  she  said  she  could  never  part  from  her  pet.  (62)  We 
should  all  strive  for  a  high  aim.     (63)  This  strong  man  can  bend  a  coin  with  his  hand.     (64) 

1  can  draw  a  straight  line  with  a  good  ruler.  (65)  "The  tale  was  not  meant  for  a  joke," 
said  Jake.  (66)  May  I  offer  the  patient  a  cup  of  cocoa?  (67)  How  can  we  thank  the  Lord 
for  all  the  good  he  has  shown  our  cause?  (68)  How  could  she  find  the  name  of  the  writer 
on  this  card?  (69)  Take  the  bone  away  from  the  dog.  (70)  The  officer  of  the  guard  gave 
orders  to  tear  down  the  tent.  (71)  Should  I  order  a  keg  of  beer,  or  a  barrel  of  wine?  (71a) 
Neither  should  be  sent  here  ;  we  can  drink  water.  (72)  The  boy  was  caught  hy  the  fender 
of  the  car.  (73)  I  must  sharpen  my  pencil ;  tell  him  to  send  me  a  knife.  (74)  Who  won 
the  tug-of-war  game?  (75)  I  fear  this  may  be  a  trap.  (76)  Do  they  know  how  to  skate? 
(77)  She  has  lost  her  purse.  (78)  The  rider  had  drawn  his  sabre.  (79)  Take  the  trunk  from 
the  track  ;  I  do  not  like  such  a  trick.  (80)  Why  should  I  toil  like  a  slave  for  a  lost  cause? 
(81)  A  crank  does  no  harm,  so  long  as  he  does  not  annoy  the  public  with  speeches.  (82l  This 
may  look  like  a  game  of  grab  for  the  settlers.  (83)  Let  him  chase  the  dog  from  the  side- 
walk. (84)  According  to  what  the  woman  told  the  guard,  she  must  have  seen  the  ghost. 
(85)  Tlie  progress  of  the  small  boy  was  rather  slow  at  first.  (86)  I  do  not  want  to  go  near 
the  fire  ;  the  smoke  would  take  my  breath  away.  (87)  We  have  set  aside  a  snug  corner  for 
the  knick-knack.  (88)  The  guide  fell  dead  near  the  brink  of  the  chasm.  (89)  What  was 
the  sense  of  the  message?  (90)  I  need  a  chisel  to  widen  this  hole.  (91)  According  to  what 
I  heard,  this  report  would  seem  somewhat  queer.  (92)  The  author  sat  at  the  desk  when  I 
came  to  visit  him.  (93)  Do  not  scare  the  child  ;  she  might  shriek  from  fright.  (94)  I  could 
read  this  letter  just  like  print.  (95)  The  woman  said  she  struck  a  bargain  down  town  at 
the  ribbon  counter,  but  when  I  said  T  should  like  to  look  at  the  pattern,  she  could  not  find 
the  sample.  (iKj)  The  maid  cannot  sweep  the  room  with  this  old  broom.  (97)  We  must 
never  swerve  from  the  path  of  right.  (98)  The  policemen  came  to  arrest  the  swindler.  (99) 
The  priest  prayed  aloud  to  God  to  help  our  cause.  (100)  We  derive  no  good  from  the 
precious  stone  ;  yet  we  should  not  like  to  sell  the  keep-sake. 


36  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

1.  What  are  the  sounds  of  o,  and  how  are  they  shown  ? 

2.  How  do  you  show  the  vowel-sound  as  in  law  f 

3.  How  do  we  write  the  vowel-sound  as  in  toil  f 

4.  What  are  blended  letters? 

5.  According  to  what  rules  are  they  blended,  and  to  what  rules  are  they  subject  in 
regard  to  position  and  shading? 

6.  Review  the  logograms  used  thus  far  (using  the  text  only,  not  the  shorthand  plates). 

7.  Mention  the  groups  of  blended  consonants  used  thus  far. 

8.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  sp  sign  and  sp  blended? 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  37 


Lesson  No.  7. 


As  may  be  seen  by  the  explanation  of  the  blended  letters  shown  thus  far,  there  is 
practically  nothing  new  to  learn.  The  problem  is  simply,  to  join  to  best  advantage- 
without  intervening  vowel-stroke — the  two  consonants  to  be  blended.  In  Lesson  No.  5,  we 
have  seen  how  s  is  blended  with  other  letters  which  succeed  it ;  now  let  us  look  at  the 
opposite  case,  where  other  letters  precede  it. 

iS  can  be  blended  very  conveniently  with  a  preceding  consonant,  but  care  should  be 
taken  to  make  the  "s"  a  loop  rather  than  a  circle,  so  as  to  avoid  any  possibility  of  confii^^ion 
with  th.  There  ai'e  two  important  rules  on  this  point.  In  aigns  ending  with  an  upstroke, 
such  as  6,  d,  I,  m,  n,  ng,  and  nk,  the  looj)  is  made  ujiivard,  on  the  right-hand  side,  as  shown 
in  the  plate,  and,  being  a  loop,  cannot  clash  with  the  th  circle.  Look  carefully  at  the  ex- 
amples :  ribs  (1)  :  leads  (2) :  ivails  (3) — notice  here  that,  owing  to  the  nature  of  I,  the  loop 
remains  open  :  a  comparison  between  Is  and  Ith  will  show  the  diflTerence  plainly  ;  skims  f4) : 
sips  (5)  :  sins  (6)  :  sinks  {7)  :  bangs  (8).  Compare  these  blended  consonants  carefully  with 
the  groups  where  th  has  been  blended  with  a  preceding  consonant  ending  with  an  upstroke  : 
bth  (9)  :  dth  (10)  :  Ith  (11) :  mth  (12) :  nth  (13) :  ^j^A  (14).  When  the irreceding  consonant  ends 
with  a  downsfroke,  the  blending  of  .s-  or  th  is  effected  on  the  left-hand  side  of  tlie  letter,  the 
difference  between  the  s  loop  and  the  th  circle  being  observed  as  before.  The  best  way  to 
render  this  distinction  clear  is  to  make  the  s  loop  in  the  direction  of  the  movement  of  the 
hands  of  a  clock,  and  th  in  the  opposite  direction  ;  this  rule  is  invariable.  Compare  the  ex- 
amples of  words  ending  in  s: — legs  (15)  :  hose  (16) — note  how  the  o  is  absorbed  by  h  ;  tax  or 
tacks  (17) :  seats  (18)  :  leaves  (19) :  laughs  (20),  with  those  ending  in  th :  gth  (21)  :  hth  (22)  : 
tth  (23)  :  vth  (24).  You  will,  no  doubt,  be  inclined  to  think  that  such  groups  of  consonants 
do  not  occur,  but  a  later  lesson  will  show  how  convenient  they  are  in  obtaining  brief  outlines. 

Special  attention  should  here  be  given  to  the  blending  of  upward  long  t  with  s,  as  shown 
in  (25),  where  s  is  made  like  a  loop.  Note  the  difference  between  ^jar^s  (26)  a.i\di  parties  (27). 
In  the  latter  word,  s  is  a  circle  and  admits  of  a  short  vowel-stroke,  indicating  a  short  vowel- 
sound  between  t  and  s.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that,  when  long  t  is  followed  by  a  short 
i  and  another  consonant,  it  is  sufficient  to  connect  the  latter  immediately'  with  t,  without 
making  any  distinction  in  regard  to  high  position  ;  tactics  (28)  is  a  good  illustration  of  this 
rule. 

In  words  like  bench  (29) — which  sounds  like  bensh—sh  is  blended  to  n  in  the  usual 
manner  (see  Lesson  5,  113).  Compare  bench  with  banish  (30),  where  b  is  shaded  and  the 
vowel-stroke  between  n  and  sh  is  very  plain,  since  sh  is  also  placed  high.  The  same  principle 
applies  to  the  softer  sound  also — as  in  range  (31) — which  is  treated  in  the  same  way.  Notice 
the  absence  of  the  vowel-sti'oke  between  n  and  g  in  strange  (32),  and  its  presence  in  drcdn- 
age  (33) ;  notice  the  same  difference  in  manger  (34) — where  the  long  n  is  employed,  and  in 
manager  (35). 

Pand  t  (36)  are  blended  on  the  usual  principle,  viz.,  by  ending ^j  witli  the  t  stroke  ;  this 
sign,  however,  assumes  and  retains  under  cdl  conditions  the  medium  size,  thus  producing  a 
very  brief  outline,  particularly  when  it  is  joined  without  an  intervening  vowel-stroke. 
Looking  at  kept  (37),  for  instance,  we  cannot  mistake  this  outline  for  kipt,  since  there  is  no 
vowel-stroke  between  k  and  pt.  This  would  indicate  the  absence  of  any  vowel,  but  for  the 
important  rule  that,  when  two  or  more  consonants  are  joined  without  an  intervening  vowel- 
stroke,  and  when  ordinarily  these  consonants  cannot  occur  without  a  vowel-sound  between 
them,  a  short  "ay"  sound  must  be  implied  between  them,  unless  there  is  another  vowel- 
sound  expressed  (by  either  shading  or  position).  This  rule  is  self-evident  and  a  glance  at  the 
shorthand  illustration  will  make  it  plain.  Kpt  cannot  occur  alone  ;  it  is  therefore  not  neces- 
sary to  write  e — sounding  like  a  short  "  ay"— between  k  and^j^  to  make  the  word  read  kept. 
When  k  is  shaded,  the  sound  to  be  implied  is,  of  course,  "a"  as  in  captain  (38).  Note  the 
vowel-sound  in  script  (39),  expressed  by  the  vowel-stroke  and  high  position  of  skr. 


452=^61 


38  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


R  is  added  to  thep<  combination  on  the  same  principle  as  in  the  case  of  medium  t,  that 
is,  lengthening  the  stroke  a  little  above  the  ceutre-top-line,  which  produces ^J^/",  as  in  captor 
(40)  ;  here  no  "  o"  is  audible  and  no  o  stroke  is  written. 

M  and  /  (41)  are  blended  by  ending  m  with  the  /  stroke  :  emphasize  (42)  :  lymph  (43j : 
nymph  (44).     It  is  hardly  necessary  to  say  that  j?/*  is  replaced  by/. 

i/and  t  are  blended  in  the  same  manner,  shown  in  (45),  and  in  exempt  (46),  literally 
spelled  eksemt ;  in  this  connection,/ and  t  must  always  be  traced  downward.  We  have  seen 
in  start  (Lesson  4,  194)  that  each  t  lost  some  of  its  length  to  obtain  a  brief  outline ;  this 
principle  is  applied  whenever  two  ^'s  occur  in  a  word  and  are  separated  by  only  a  few  letters, 
as  shown  in  attempt  (47).  This  word  could  also  be  written  with  two  full  sized  ?".s,  but  would 
have  a  longer  outline.  P  may  safely  be  omitted  in  the  consonant-group  mpt*,  for  words  like 
tempt  (48)  are  pronounced  as  though  p  were  omitted. 

3/ and  p  are  blended  by  ending  ???.  with  the  p  stroke  (49)  :  camj^aign  {50)  :  lump  (51) — note 
how  mp  is  placed  low. 

Mpr  is  formed  by  ending  mp  with  the  r  stroke,  as  shown  in  temper  (52)  and  hamj^er  (53). 
To  m  in  com,  p  orpr  is  blended  in  the  same  manner  :  compress  (54)  :  comprise  (55)  — note  that 
in  this  wordpr  is  shortened  a  little  to  show  that  the  "  i"  stroke  is  not  intended  to  be  placed 
low  (which  would  give  it  the  "  oi"  sound). 

Another  letter  which  occurs  very  frequently  in  blended  groups  is  I,  and  the  rules  in 
regard  to  blending  it  ai'e  so  simple  and  logical  that  we  have  in  some  cases  employed  this 
combination  before.  When  I  follows  signs  ending  with  a  downward  stroke  it  is  wintteu 
close  to  the  left  of  this  stroke,  as  shown  by  glad  (56) :  ichole  (57) — where  o  is  absorbed  by  h  : 
claim  (58)  :  tackle  (59) :  girl  (60)  :  little  (61)  :  scuttle  (62)  :  devil  (63)— spelled  devl :  cudgel  (64)— 
spelled  cujl :  cancel  (65) — spelled  cancl.  This  rule  also  applies  to  sp — as  shown  in  splice  (66), 
to  .s7i— as  shown  \n  flash-light  (67),  and  to /—whether  traced  upward  or  downward.  Flis 
preferably  traced  downward,  as  shown  by  flare  (68)  :  flour  (69) :  when  followed  by  t,  it  is 
advisable  to  trace  _/?  upward,  observing  well  the  difference  between /e^  a.nd  fl :  Jtighi  (70): 
flat  (71),  which  compare  with  felt  (72).  Note  that  when/  is  made  upward,  I  is  not  written  at 
the  top  of/,  but  a  little  below.  The  pen,  however,  must  not  be  lifted  when  tracing  this  outline. 
With  all  other  letters  I  is  blended  by  writing  them  as  closely  together  as  possible  :  compare 
blast  (73)  with  ballast  (74),  ptaee  (75)  with  palace  {76),  play  (77)  with  pail  (78)— notice  how 
pi  can  be  written  either  upward  or  downward.  Observe  how  closely  I  is  connected  with  the 
adjoining  letter  in  bald  (79)  and  overwhelm-  (80)— note  that  in  this  word  over  is  joined  to  the 
root  ivhelm  :  straddle  (81) :  ankle  (82)  :  angle  (83) — which  compare  with  angel  (84). 

To  blend  t  and  w  simply  join  them  without  intervening  vowel-stroke,  as  shown  in  twine 
(85) :  twin  (86)  :  twice  (87). 

F  and  t,  when  blended,  might  simply  be  written  together,  as  shown  in  (88),  except  that 
this  outline  would  be  too  long  for  convenient  use.  For  this  reason,  a  shorter,  but  equally 
clear,  outline  has  been  adopted  ;  this  is  written  by  shading  the/  stroke  cd  the  bottom  only 
(88o),  since  to  shade  it  for  its  entire  length  would  be  to  indicate  an  "  a"  sound.  This  is  prac- 
tically equivalent  to  retracing  the  t  over  the/,  thus  making  the/ doubly  heavy.  Notice  the 
difference  between  left  (89)  and  laugh  (90)  :  deft  (91)  :  draft  or  draught  (92).  This  shading  is 
easily  accomplished  by  slightly  increasing  the  pressure  in  tracing  the  lower  part  of/. 

jTand  ence  stroke  are  blended  by  ending  the  latter  with  the  ^stroke,  (93)  as  shown  in 
spinster  (94),  where  this  group  is  also  placed  high. 

When  we  analyze  the  sound  of  the  ending  ("-ed")  of  the  past  participle,  as  in  headed, 
aimed,  sli2:>2^ed,  etc.,  we  find  that  it  is  not  pronounced  alike  in  all  these  words.  "  Ed"  is  dis- 
tinctly heard  in  headed,  e  is  silent  in  aimed,  while  in  slipped  the  final  syllable  has  a  dis- 
tinctly hard  sound,  as  though  the  word  were  spelled  slipt.  For  this  reason,  we  write  this 
class  of  words  with  a  lending :  sbpped  (95)— notice  how  conveniently  the  2^t  blending 
is  used:  clipped  (96):  shipjied  (97):  stepped  (98).  Owing  to  the  absence  of  the  connec- 
tive vowel-stroke,  the  low  position  does  not  indicate  an  "a"  sound.  The  syllable  "ed"  is 
plainly  audible  practically  only  when  it  follows  a  t,  and  is  then  written  by  blending  t  and 
d  (of  ed)  as  shown  in  parted  (99),  started  (100),  and  acted  (101).  In  many  other  eases  ed 
is  pronounced  like  an  indistinct  t,  and  is  therefore  replaced  by  the  t  stroke,  which,  how- 
ever, is  not  made  so  long  as  the  regular  t.  The  object  of  this  substitution  is  to  save  time, 
since  the  t  stroke  can  be  traced  more  rapidly  than  the  d.  (When  the  d  is  employed,  how- 
ever, an  outline  loses  in  brevity  but  is  entirely  correct.)     Compare  the  sizes  of  t  strokes 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  39 


in  lined  (102)  and  lint  (103),  tacked  (104)  and  tact  (105).  Since  the  t  stroke  is  used  in  this 
connection,  it  can  also  be  conveniently  employed  blended  with  the  enoe  stroke  :  danced  (106) 
— notice  the  shading  d :  pranced  (107) — the  siiading  of  iw :  winced  (108) — notice  the  liigh 
position  of  the  enced  stroke.  The  substitution  of  the  t  stroke  for  d  also  enables  us  to  use  the 
medium  t  where  it  can  be  conveniently  blended  with  s,  but  only  when  the  latter  has  the 
soft  sound.  Note  the  difference  between  praiHcd  (109)  and  pi-cssed  (110)  :  creased  (111)  : 
teased  (112)  ;  pleased  (118).  Of  course  it  would  not  be  wrong  to  use  the  shortened  t  stroke 
in  this  connection,  but  the  outline  with  the  medium  t  is  briefer  and  more  convenient. 

Vowels    {Initially  and  Finally). 

When  tlie  sound  of  /,  as  in  bit  or  beat,  occurs  medially,  it  will  present  no  difficulties  to 
the  beginner.  Now  let  us  consider  this  sound  initially  or  finally,  and  also  as  vowel-sign. 
While  we  have  thus  far  seen  only  the  symbolical  expressions  for  this  sound,  that  is,  the 
vowel-stroke  in  connection  with  the  high  position  of  the  adjoining  letter,  we  now  become 
acquainted  with  the  alphabetical  equivalent  of  i  (114),  which  is  an  ordiuai'y  longhand  i, 
reduced  in  size  and  deprived  of  all  flourishes,  even  of  the  dot.  Tliis,  the  letter  i  of  the 
shorthand  alphabet,  is  used  only  when  symbolic  expression  for  its  sound  is  inconvenient ; 
it  stands  as  logogram  for  in,  and,  connected  with  r,  for  the  pretix  inter:  intervene  (115) — 
notice  the  convenient  use  of  upward  v.  interdict  (116)  :  interfere  (117)  :  infect  (118)  :  infest 
(119).  We  have  already  seen  that  the  vowel-stroke  is  used  initially  (as  in  ale,  for  instance) 
— implying  "  ay,"  and  that  high  position  is  employed  to  express  the  sound  of  i  (short  or  long), 
as  in  bit  or  beat.  Consequently,  wlieu  this  sound  occurs  initially,  the  initial  vowel-stroke  is 
traced  so  as  to  reach  this  high  position  ;  in  other  words,  the  initial  vowel-stroke  is  traced  up- 
ward from  the  centre-line,  as  shown  in  eel  (120),  which  compare  with  ill  (121)  and  isle  (122)  : 
image  (123) — spelled  imej,  in  accordance  with  the  pronunciation  :  ink  (124) — which,  compared 
with  inn  (125),  shows  clearly  the  difference  between  nk  and  n.  See  that  in  imjirint  (126) 
m,pr  is  shortened  on  account  of  the  following  t :  compare  impress  (127)  and  compress  (128). 
When  i  occurs  finally,  we  employ  the  same  principle,  that  is,  we  trace  the  final  vowel- 
stroke  from  the  centre-line  upward  to  the  top-centre-line,  as  shown  by  jne  (129),  which 
compare  with  may  (130)  and  my  (131)  :  compare  lee  (132)  with  eel  (120)  :  glee  (133). 

Just  as  the  vowel-sign  i  is  used  for  the  word  or  prefix  m,  we  can  also  use  the  initial  up- 
ward vowel-stroke  for  the  same  purpose,  so  that  intend  (134)  may  be  shortened  to  itend  (134a), 
which  is  quite  as  intelligible.  This  initial  stroke  should,  however,  be  shortened  a  little,  so 
that  it  has  not  quite  the  length  of  a  medium  sign  (from  centre-line  to  top-centre-line).  Note 
the  diflEerence  between  intend  and  attend  (135),  where  the  vowel-stroke  is  almost  horizontal. 
Observe  the  same  difference  between  invade  (136)  and  evade  (137),  inject  (138)  and  eject  (139), 
inquire  (140)  and  acqtdre  (141).  When  this  initial  vowel-stroke  precedes  d,  it  must  be 
shortened  so  that  it  will  strike  d  where  the  latter  begins :  indict  (142)— pronounced  indlt : 
indicate  (143). 

The  final  sound,  as  in  many  (144),  is  quite  different  from  the  sound  as  in  me,  approach- 
ing more  the  i  sound  as  expressed  by  the  i  stroke  ;  it  is  therefore  expressed  by  a  short  final 
stroke,  traced  in  the  /  direction.  Care  should  be  taken  to  make  this  stroke  slanting  well 
upward  and  not  too  large.  Note  the  diflerence  between  this  final  y  stroke  (it  will  be  referred 
to  under  that  name  in  these  lessons)  in  daily  (145)  and  the  final  ay  stroke  in  delay  (146) ;  see 
donkey  (147)  :  see  also  decay  (148)  and  tidy  {1-19)— tidy  shows  plainly  that  the  final  stroke 
is  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the  i  stroke  :  day  (150)  :  note  the  final  stroke  following/  in 
fay  (151), /ee  (152),  and  taffy  (153). 

After  an  upstroke,  such  as  upward  t,  the  final  y  stroke  must  be  traced  downward :  notice 
the  difference  between  doughty  (154)  and  daughter  (155)  :  unighty  (156). 

By  omitting  the  final  stroke  of  the  i  sign,  thus  giving  it  the  t  ending,  we  obtain  the  sign 
for  the  syllables  ity  ;  brevity  (157)  :  celebrity  (158) :  rapidity  (159)  :  aidhority  (160). 

The  vowel-sign  for  a  (161)  shows  plainly  how  it  is  derived  from  script,  being  a  simplified 
longhand  a,  made  so  small  that  it  dwindles  down  to  a  dot.  This  sign  cannot  clash  with  I, 
since  I  is  made  by  starting  the  dot  from  below,  a  by  starting  the  dot  from  above.  L  never 
occurs  alone  without  either  the  final  .or  the  initial  stroke,  but  a,  when  standing  alone,  is 
always  a  dot  without  final  or  initial  stroke.  The  diflerence  between  I  and  a  is  therefore  very 
obvious  ;  it  is  well  illustrated  by  the  word  Allah  (162)— where  I  is  shaded  and  h  is  silent. 

The  a  dot,  like  the  i  sign,  is  used  when  the  symbolic  expression  of  the  sound  is  incon- 


40  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


veuient  or  impossible,  and  always  finally  for  the  "a"  sound,  as  in  Allah.    Tliis  case  occurs 
frequently  in  connection  with  proper  names  ;  America  (163)  :  Ida  (164)  :  Edna  (165). 

When  this  final  "a"  sound  is  preceded  by  a  short  *  sound,  as  in  idea  (166) — which  com- 
pare with  Ida  (164),  the  logical  way  of  expressing  this  sound  is  to  place  the  a  dot  high  : 
mania  (167).  This  brings  us  to  the  coalescent  vowel-sounds,  as  in  menial  (168),  for  instance. 
In  this  word  we  find  that  the  "a"  sound  is  preceded  by  a  short  i,  consequently  we  express 
this  sound  by  placing  I  high  and  shading  it.  This  shading  cannot  mean  an  "a"  sound,  as 
in  calm,  since  there  is  no  such  sound  preceded  by  this  short  i.  Note  serial  (169) — I  placed 
high  and  shaded  :  idiot  (170)—^  treated  in  the  same  way  (o  =  "a"). 

Considering  the  sound  in  words  like  science  (171),  we  find  that  the  sound  following  i  is 
also  akin  to  the  "a"  sound,  and  therefore  express  it  by  shading  the  ence  stroke  :  reliance  (172) 
— note  how  in  these  words  the  ence  stroke  is  joined  to  the  i  stroke  without  angle  :  irial  (173) : 
theory  (174)— the  word  sounds  more  like  theary  than  theory  :  diary  (175).  To  this  class  of 
sounds  also  belong  words  like  ojiinion  (176) — see  how  the  second  n  is  shaded  and  placed  high 
in  comparison  with  the  first;  there  is  no  "  o"  audible  in  this  word.  Compare  real  (177) — I 
placed  high  and  shaded  with  reel  (178).  To  be  very  exact,  we  could  also  employ  this  rule  in 
words  like  social  (179),  but  in  most  cases  these  words  are  pronounced  like  soshl,  and  are 
therefore  thus  written.  Note  also  in  this  word  how  the  o  is  reversed  and  therefore  joins 
more  easily  with  the  following  sh.  There  is  no  danger  that  o  in  this  connection  would  be 
read  after  sh,  for  a  combination  like ss/io  is  impossible.  Note  this  "a"  sound  initially  :  affect 
(180)— which  compare  witli  effect  (181)  ;  see  the  double  /  used  in  this  connection  to  regain 
the  writing  line  :  alm.ond  (182). 

We  have  previously  seen  how  Jie  and  who  are  written  ;  s  added  to  each  makes  the  words 
his  (183)  and  whose  (184). 

Logograms. 

7(185)  stands  for  in  :  medium  t,  the  Log.  for  to,  preceded  by  the  in  stroke  will  of  course 
read  into  (186).  The  a  dot  above  the  line  stands  for  and  (187)— note  in  this  logogram  the 
absence  of  the  initial  and  final  stroke.  Observe  the  preceding  stroke  in  II  (188),  which  stands 
for  shall,  and  in  the  single  I  (189),  for  will.  As  we  have  seen  before,  the  preceding  vowel- 
stroke  thus  indicates  that  the  vowel-sound  of  the  word  precedes  the  consonant  before  which 
it  is  written.  (See  Lesson  2,  Logograms.)  L  followed  by  the  final  y  stroke  stands  for  only 
(190),  when  above,  and  for  fully  (191),  when  below  the  line— in  consideration  of  the  "  u" 
sound. 

We  have  already  seen  that  r  on  the  line  stands  for  ever  ;  the  final  y  stroke  added  to  it 
will  naturally  make  the  word  every  (192).  The  y  stroke  above  the  line  represents  any  or 
body  (193).  It  will  be  found  in  practice  that  these  two  words  never  clash  ;  anybody  is  con- 
sequently written  by  making  the  final  y  stroke  twice  in  succession.  Ng  above  the  line 
standing  for  thing  :  anything  (194)  is  easily  W'ritten.  It  will  be  well  to  note  in  this  connec- 
tion the  other  combinations  of  thing;  nothing  (195):  something  (196):  everything  (197). 
Kw  on  the  line  stands  for  question  (198). 

Now  practice  the  following 

Reading  Exercise 

until  you  can  read  it  without  any  hesitancy. 

(199)  The  eminent  doctor  informed  me  of  the  imminent  danger  by  the  poisoned  wells 
that  seemed  to  threaten  the  health  of  our  family  and  of  our  friends.— Note  the  difference 
between  eminent  and  imm,i7icnt,  wells,  and  health  and  the  ed  endings  in  informed  and 
seem.ed.  It  is  unnecessary  to  write  double  I,  unless  it  is  desired  to  distinguish  between 
long  and  sliort  vowel-sounds.  In  this  case  there  would  be  no  danger  of  confusiug  wells  with 
whales. 

(200)  Many  a  sum  of  money  is  wasted  in  the  name  of  charity.— Note  the  difference 
between  many  and  money,  n  in  the  latter  word  being  placed  low  on  account  of  the  short 
"  u"  sound.     Observe  the  shading  of  ch  in  charity,  and  the  past-participle  ending  in  ivasted. 

(201)  He  was  such  an  adept  in  the  art  of  speech  that  he  could  adapt  to  his  ends  such 
a  course  as  no  one  else  dared  to  adopt. — Observe  the  difference  between  adept — d  and  i)t 
connected  without  vowel-stroke,  adapt— d  shaded  on  account  of  the  short  "a"  sound,  and 
adopt— p>t  shaded  owing  to  the  "a"  sound  of  o.  Note  cA  placed  high  in  speech.  In  as,  s 
should  be  shaded  ;  however,  it  is  perfectly  safe  to  write  the  word  without  shading,  since 


;  5-  '0 

Lesson  7.     H -^  u  -"^  f  r  i."^  i/v  ^  ^^  l 


iiy 


*     /'  n      /I t.^! a     / — ft b w   \^    la    u  ^    v    ra     .    ,/( sz_^_Q — iL a   t4     a — a/  v    ni    / 


"     "  "1"")  ^  ^i"4      " ^''        /  -^"^ 


'WT7, 


I 


/  /       /  /I  ^^ 


7V^ 


/ )  / )    ;^  o  ^.  A  ^( 


/a — <^  /<t^ 


/^  />Z 


7^ 


<!?<3 


^ 


V 


::vi 


^^ 


/OS-  / 


A 


F^^ 


%>.  h.  U  iJ'.  1/.  ''U  c 


/  Vd 


'^Zy^^^^ 


rn^ 


y^  J  ^ 


I  wsr 


'2^Z'L.y  <^  ^  <^^  (^ 


/  £"0 


'SA 


z 


/  to  o 


j±£i  %.  s 


r/ 


/7^ 


javi 


/^x^ 


//" 


x3l..^  ^  ^^y-^  ^  ^^/  2r^~tl^^ 


//:r- 


/yo 


:r 


*  _■>* »<  "^ 


3L  0  o 


7^ 


-^ 


^ 


Z 


v-^    o 


(C^.  /^ .  ^^c^b  -'  ^ 


zi: 


-^ 


-if 


^ 


S^^ 


—    /I ^    rv^      (^. 


Z2^ 


:..''x 


)^ 


^ 


-i.0  J 


7"^ 


I Y'    ^p'^  e  n^  ^^y^    '^,  ^-~^j . '  ^^  ^ 


jO^ 


z 


Z'.. ..  ^''ci^(^L'' yJ' 


'Jl^C    ^  "  f^f^     I'    ^   ^^,^    0  f^ 


nzz. 


-^ 


'">     XoS- 


zr^ 


JI  ./^^fj,  V.J  // 


iZMUzr: 


^  ..  I 


_. o- 


r 


^ 


r...  .Arrrh 


TA,  c.  / 7.rzL 


\      ) 


^ 


7= 


^ 


^z^ 


/o    ^^    ^ fi     00  ,    f^ 


^ £ 


J')  1^  d 


^H^ 


gyrJ 


^HL. 


.     Q- 


t 


5 


7 


Q^    (_^ V^ 


/^-V^^      •-/ 


J      -    (^    /  n    ^ 


Z^ 


;!.o 


^ 


3^ 


7^ 


/ 


7^   1  .Ij 


i^ 


Z 


^nzi^zn^ni 


i  'f 


^.    -z^     oJ t_ 


1.1 


^ 


Ji/L \^    V 


r 


^ 


2: 


:^ 


^ 


.^/,  /./v/.-/.^^: 


42  GKAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


there  is  uo  word  like  es.     (We  will  And  a  rule  on  this  i)oiut  in  a  later  lesson).     Note  the 
word  else. 

(202)  "The  Islam  should  be  spread  by  tire  and  sword,"  said  the  prophet.— Note  si 
blended  in  Islam  ;  no  shading  is  necessary  in  this  word,  since  the  a  sounds  like  a  short  "e." 
Observe  sirr  in  spread,  and  the  shading  of/  in  prophet. 

(203)  Hawthorne  wrote  many  a  lovely  story  in  his  "Twice  Told  Tales." — Note  hth  in 
Hawthorne. 

(204)  Doctor  Holmes,  one  of  the  foremost  literary  men  of  Boston,  wrote  the  famous 
"One-hoss  Shay."— Note  the  word  foremost,  where  /,  standing  for  logograms  for  for,  is 
connected  with  most.  See  how  conveniently  double  r  is  used  in  literary.  Famous  illustrates 
how  words  with  the  ending  ous  are  written  ;  we  could  write  the  word  more  faithfully  by 
placing  s  low,  which  would  actually  make  it  read  fami<« ;  but  the  sound  approaches  fames 
(e  pronounced)  quite  closely,  which  justifies  us  in  writing  it  as  we  did.  See  also  the  final 
ay  stroke  in  Shay. 

(205)  The  showy  horse  pranced  like  a  dancer.— Note  the  final  y  stroke  in  showy  and 
compare  it  with  Shay  in  the  preceding  sentence. 

(206)  The  naval  battle  of  Manila  took  place  on  the  first  day  of  May,  and  was  a  great 
victory  for  our  navy,  though  little  American  blood  was  shed.— In  bloody,  note  bl  blended 
and  d  placed  low. 

(207)  An  icy  wind  in  Valley  Forge  chilled  Washington  and  his  warriors  to  the  marrow 
of  the  bones  ;  many  a  night  they  had  to  go  to  sleep  with  an  empty  stomach  ;  they  had 
but  scant  shelter  from  the  inclemency  of  the  weather ;  yet  they  bore  every  torture  bravely. 
— Icy  illustrates  well  how  the  final  y  stroke  is  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the  i  stroke. 
Notice  how  f  and  o,  and  r  and  j,  are  blended  in  Forge ;  observe  in  warriors  the  high 
position  and  shading  of  r  and  the  blending  of  rs  ;  n  and  s  blended  in  bones ;  si  placed  high 
in  sleep ;  see  how  conveniently  the  ence  stroke  is  used  in  inclemency.  In  chilled  it  is  not 
necessary  to  write  double  I,  since  II  is  employed  only  where  otherwise  a  clash  would  be 
possible. 

(208)  China  is  a  vast  empire,  but  she  is  helpless  and  will  soon  fall  a  prey  to  the  naval 
powers,  England,  France,  Russia,  Germany,  and  Japan. — Note  that  mp  in  empire  is  short- 
ened a  little  on  account  of  the  I  stroke.  Note  the  initial  i  stroke  in  England,  the  shading 
of  /;•  and  the  ence  stroke  in  France,  the  low  position  of  /•  and  the  high  position  of  a  in 
Hussia,  the  blending  and  low  position  of  rm  and  the  final  y  stroke  in  Germany,  and  the 
shading  of  J  and  p  in  Japan. 

(209)  Australia  was  formerly  a  part  of  Asia. — Observe  the  a  placed  high  in  Australia 
and  Asia,  also  the  soft  "  sj"  sound  of  s  in  the  latter  word. 

(210)  "Man  has  the  gift  of  speech  to  hide  his  thoughts,"  said  the  Prime  Minister  of 
Napoleon.— Note  ft  placed  high  in  gift ;  also  the  blending  of  the  s  (loop)  and  t  in  thoughts. 

(211)  The  pursuit  of  health,  wealth,  and  happiness  is  the  birthright  of  every  man  in 
America. — Look  carefully  at  the  word  pursuit,  which  illustrates  the  important  rule  that  r 
can  safely  be  omitted  in  the  prefix  per ;  perfect,  for  instance,  would  be  written  pfect. 

(212)  "We  emphasize  that  we  intervene  only  for  an  oppressed  nation,  whose  trials  and 
misery  must  be  stopped,"  said  the  leader  of  the  nation  to  the  Congress  and  to  the  people. — 
Note  the  ed  ending  in  oppressed,  and  the  convenient  use  of  jit  in  stopped.  Also  observe  the 
second  p  placed  high  in  people. 

Writing  Exercise. 

(213)  "  A  bachelor's  room,  as  a  rule,  does  not  look  very  tidy,"  remarked  the  spinster.— 
(Shade  b  in  bachelor'' s,  also  blending  r  and  s ;  blend  rm  in  rem,arked). 

(214)  I  am  of  the  opinion  that  many  an  idiot  attempts  to  base  his  ideas  on  the  laws 
of  science.  (Place  t  high  and  shade  it  in  idiot ;  do  the  same  with  s  in  ideas,  and  with  ?i 
in  opinion).  (215)  Necessity  is  a  hard  task-master.  (In  necessity  use  the  double  s  circle 
followed  by  ify).  (216)  The  sun  never  sets  on  the  dominion  of  the  Queen  of  Great  Britain 
and  Empress  of  India.  (In  dominion  place  the  second  n  high  and  shade  it ;  also  place  the 
final  a  high  in  India).  (217)  Celebrity  is  not  always  the  reward  of  toil.  (In  reward  start 
with  r  above  the  top-centre-line  so  that  you  can  continue  conveniently  with  the  w  ;  also  use 
the  CUV  curve  and  blend  rd).  (218)  Small  causes  may  lead  to  great  results  ;  a  single  match 
can  ignite  tons  of  nowder.     (In  results  place  rs  and  I  low;  in  match  m  is  to  be  shaded). 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  43 


(219)  A  dance  is  the  only  social  pleasure  I  care  for.     (In  pleasure  use  the  soft  sound  of  s). 

(220)  "There  is  many  a  slip  'twixt  the  cup  and  the  lip."  (In  slip  place  si,  in  lip  place  I, 
high  ;  in  cup  place  k  low  ;  twixt  is  written  tw  blended,  then  connected  with  knt  placed  high). 

(221)  Imagine  our  delight  when  we  found  at  the  break  of  dayliglit  the  traveller  nearer  our 
home  than  we  had  dared  to  hope.  (Bring  out  well  the  difference  between  delight  [written 
d-l-i-f]  and  daylight,  where  the  ay-stroke  must  appear  clearly  between  d  and  I).  (222) 
May  the  Star-spangled  banner  long  wave  over  the  land  of  the  free  and  the  home  of  the 
brave.  (223)  "  Would  society  consider  this  act  improper?"  inquired  the  foreigner.  (Society 
sounds  like  swsiety ;  place  the  double  s  circle  low,  then  make  an  i-stroke,  and  add  ty  to  it. 
In  improx)cr  the  first  pr  [mpr']  has  to  be  shortened  to  allow  space  for  the  second  pr,  which 
must  be  shaded  owing  to  the  "a"  sound  of  o).  (224)  Henry  Stanley  is  a  fearless  traveler. 
(In  Henry  connect  n  with  the  h  by  means  of  a  loop  ;  Hs  to  be  shaded  in  Stanley  ;  in  fearless  r 
is  placed  high,  so  that/  is  to  be  traced  from  the  bottom-line  to  the  top-centre-line).  (225)  "  To 
be  or  not  to  be,"  is  a  much-quoted  passage  from  Shakespeare.  (In  passage p  must  be  shaded 
and  therefore  be  traced  downward  ;  in  Shakespeare  use  long  k  after  sh,  and  then  «p,  placing 
the  final  r  high).  (226)  "There  must  always  be  two  parties  to  a  quarrel,"  remarked  the 
haughty  Magistrate;  "I  give  him  warning  not  to  let  such  a  thing  happen  again."  fin 
Magistrate  shade  m,  and  use  the  medium  sir  followed  by  medium  t  for  the  final  syllable). 
(227)  The  eel  is  a  slippery  fish,  and  looks  more  like  a  snake.  (In  slippery  place  si  high  and 
write  slipry).  (228)  Every  nation  fights  for  glory,  but  we  always  fight  for  right.  (In  glory 
let  the  o  be  absorbed  by  the  initial  stroke  of  g).  (229)  The  book  of  this  autlioritj^  deals  too 
much  with  wrong  theories.  {Authority  is  written  by  means  of  the  aw  curve  followed  by  th 
and  r  shaded,  followed  by  ity).  (230)  The  density  of  the  fog  nearly  caused  an  accident. 
(Use  the  ence  stroke  followed  by  ity  in  density,  and  a  shortened  long  t  in  the  ending  of 
caused).  (231)  We  all  feel  the  loss  caused  by  the  death  of  our  friend.  (232)  The  traitor  tried 
to  scuttle  the  vessel.  (In  scuttle  blend  s  and  k,  and  t  and  I,  the  latter  to  be  placed  low. 
In  vessel  use  the  upward  v,  which  may  be  shortened  a  little  to  join  conveniently  with  s). 


Lesson  8.     P.  ^  r. --.  f,    f,    &^ 


/o 


K.  /f/Z-K/^-g^ 


iM 


Jts- 


¥ 


rT}      f  ,     ^ 


r 


^r^ 


6  )  ).  V'lniJl   ^^ 


cv 


^/  -^.^..^ , ,  /.  ^ ,,("  '■  ^'  '''■  ''■  ~'-  ^^y^^'^'^^^g=^^=^ 


■*,"-^ 


^=^^=; 


90 


''"' r/ " -tii¥' 


r^  p- 


^^^ 


^ 


^e  r<?    ^ 


//S 


/^ 


X  -v^ 


/ZO 


z 


ij-  (^   '<!/r  /n  yr  <^  t^-  .  ^.^y 


/2.r 


TT 


s 


..a:^^^^!"^  ''^  ^  J  -.fJ  ^^/e^'fri^ 


iz 


^ 


:^ 


/jcr 


^^r^y//^ 


'75-  /  SV 


w7^ 


r/^   (^yy/^  rT^/>  i>0^        S  IS 


/yr 


Tv:  •  •'• 


c "/,  "^'  fi^ 


F=# 


^^       ^    \     T-^s-x^    v^   f^     ^'^// — tf^ 


<--^ 


/9Z 


t^^t::^ 


t? 


4^ 


(7-*V  ^  yvL- ^:v\. 


^ 


Co     ^    ^   ■"     ^^(t    ^   a  ^    X/O 


/?i_ 


:z 


--?»i 


F 


E 


-r^^ 


7y^777Z 


^i:.^  7/^•7V.^.^^^  /-^i<)  .  /i    //  A/n,^  .-r,  ("^Tl 


^ 


'tt 


■tf^ 


-4^^^ 


y  (^yi/yi  ,.  /  >ryy(.  .1  rr 


/9S 


42 


■^/A    -      t^  P   ^/^ 


^ 


^^ 


-r-&- 


r 


nT^^^  ^w.  s(  <^  ^^"vc  ..jjz^n  C  /^a/ .  -  ^- /  ^'''•' 


.^rO 


^  7  ^^/  / 


rjj  I  /P-  J  -  /^^^  '  •//  ^  -x.  ^W^ 


ZZS 


6-"^-^  -^767^'  TV^-;/t 


j2- 


?^^  >^/. 


z^^  ^Jj.^:^n:^zn^i^^r^,^ri.,  'J/,  c  -^^.  <^  <y7^,-  ^  •^4- 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  45 


Lesson  No.  8. 


A  FEW  combinations  of  consonants,  of  rarer  occurrence  than  the  preceding,  still  re- 
main ;  they  are  treated  in  the  customary  manner,  the  vowel-stroke  being  omitted,  thus 
producing  brief  outlines. 

D  and  w  (1)  are  blended  hy  starting  d  above  ii\  so  that  the  final  stroke  of  d  will  join 
readily  with  the  initial  stroke  of  w.  The  sharp  angle  need  not  be  observed  here  ;  dwell  (2) : 
dwindle  (3). 

P  and  sh  are  blended  by  giving  p  the  sh  loop,  as  shown  in  (4)  ;  option  (o) — pronounced 
like  opahun:  capture  (6) — notice  how  r  is  blended  in  the  usual  manner. 

Th  and  xo  are  blended  by  writing  th  to  the  left  of  w,  without  connective  vowel-stroke  ; 
thwack  (7). 

We  know  that  in  the  English  language,  owing  to  its  structure,  certain  groups  of  conso- 
nants cannot  occur  without  an  intervening  vowel  (as  mentioned  before).  Yov  example,  the 
consonant  combinations  k  and  jit  joined  would  have  no  meaning,  if  we  did  not  read  a  short 
"ay"  sound  between  them,  making  the  woi'd  kept  (Lesson  7,  37).  Neither  could  d  and  v 
occur  without  a  vowel  between  them,  excej)t  when  d  belongs  to  the  prefix  (as  in  advance^ 
for  instance)  ;  we  can  therefore  omit  this  short  vowel  ("ay")  and  blend  d  and  v  by  starting 
the  V  wave  with  the  d  loop  (8).  As  /  in  devil  is  scarcely  audible, — the  word  sounding  as 
though  spelled  d-c-v-l, — we  add  I  to  the  v  without  connective  vowel-stroke,  obtaining  thereby 
a  very  brief  and  convenient  outline  for  devil  (9).  Note  also  n,  d,  and  v  blended  in  endeavor 
(10),  which,  although  very  brief,  is  complete. 

Compare  the  lengthy,  large  loop  of  dv  with  the  small  circle  of  sv,  blended  on  the  same 
principle,  as  shown  in  sever  (11).  Care  should  be  taken  to  make  s'  always  small  and  well- 
rounded. 

The /stroke,  being  the  same  as  the  t  stroke  (except  that  it  extends  below  the  line),  sf  (12) 
is  blended  like  st;  sphere  (13) — written  sfere  :  sphinx  (14) — written  sflnks,  showing  sf  traced 
upward. 

D  and  /  (15)  are  blended  by  ending  d  with  the  /  stroke  ;  this  is  a  very  handy  combina- 
tion in  words  like  defend  (16),  deface  (17),  defame  (18),  etc. 

D  and  t  (19)  are  blended  by  starting  t  with  the  d  loop,  on  the  same  principle  as  d  and// 
detain  (20) — w'hich  compare  with  stain  (21) — see  remarks  on  s  under  (11):  detract  (22) — 
showing  dtr  blended  :  detest  (23). 

D  and  j9  (24)  are  blended  on  the  same  principle  ;  depend  (25)  :  depth  (26) :  deploy  (27). 

F  and  v  (28)  are  blended  by  giving  /  the  v  wave  ;  favor  (29)— there  is  no  "o"  audible  in 
this  sound. 

Station  (30)  shows  the  convenient  use  of  st  and  sh  blended. 

3£  and  sh  are  blended  by  ending  rn  with  the  sh  loop,  as  shown  in  machine  (31) :  smash 
(32) — observe  rn  shaded. 

The  principle  of  the  implied  vowel-sound  can  also  be  used  with  the  blended  consonants 
explained  in  the  previous  lessons,  and  will  in  this  connection  shorten  the  outlines  consid- 
erably. Rd,  for  example,  when  standing  alone,  must  be  read  with  a  short  "ay"  between 
the  consonants,  making  tiie  word  red  (33)  ;  raid  (34)— the  longer  sound — will  then  be  written 
by  joining  ;•  and  d  M-ith  a  vowel-stroke.  This  rule  can  be  applied  in  every  case  where  such 
consonants  occur  similarly:  in  straight  (35),  for  instance,  we  can  join  the  medium  t  to 
str ;  for,  owing  to  the  absence  of  the  vowel-stroke,  the  low  position  cannot  indicate  an 
"u"  sound.  Compare  this  word  with  strut  (36).  Note  also  the  absence  of  the  vowel-stroke 
in  travel  (37).  Observe  the  difference  between  t  and  r  joined  without  vowel-stroke,  as  shown 
in  tarry  (38),  and  t  and  r  blended,  as  shown  in  ti'ay  (39).  See  how  r  and  g  are  blended,  and 
how  r  is  shaded  in  rci'g  (40).  Notice  the  shading  of  tlu'  blended  r  in  ram  (\\^  and  martyr  (42)  : 
marine  (43).  Compare  lieb  (44)— standing  for  R<hil — wliere  r  and  h  are  blended,  with  rib 
(45) — where  r  is  placed  high. 


46  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Vowel-Signs  (Concluded). 

The  last  vovvel-sigu  we  have  to  consider  is  "  u"  (46a).  This  sign,  which  represents  the 
sound  of  w,  as  in  fuss,  and  oo,  as  in  foot  or  moorf,— but  7iot  the  sound  in  mute,— is  derived 
from  the  ordinary  longhand  u,  as  shown  by  the  illustration  (46).  The  outline  should  be  well 
practiced,  so  that  the  hand  may  become  used  to  it.  Like  all  other  vowel-signs,  u  is  used 
medially  whenever  symbolic  expression  of  the  sound  (low  position)  is  inconvenient*;  or 
when  "  u"  is  followed  by  another  vowel-sound,  as  in  fluid  (47).  It  is  also  used  finally,  and, 
by  consequence  of  its  shape,  blends  very  conveniently  with  most  of  the  characters  of  the 
alphabet,  particularly  with  those  ending  with  a  right-hand  curve;  hu  =  "boo"  (48)  :  doo 
(49) :  foo  (50) — which  compare  with  2^00  (51),  the  difference  between  the  two  being  that 
f  is  straight  and  p  is  curved  :  2^00  (52)  written  upward  :  ehoo  (53) :  loo  (54)  :  moo  (55)  :  looo 
(56)  :  noo  {bl)  :  too  (58).  The  exceptions,  goo  (59),  shoo  (60),  and  joo  (61),  will  suggest  them- 
selves to  the  student ;  the  u  sign  cannot  be  blended  to  these  strokes  conveniently,  and  is 
therefore  joined  by  means  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke.  In  7-00  (62),  r  and  u  are  blended, 
r  being  "accented"  by  shading  at  the  beginning  of  u,  in  analogy  to  the  blending  of  r  and  o 
(Lesson  4,  22) ;  see  how  r  is  brought  out  clearly  in  through  (63)  and  drew  (64). 

U  also  blends  initially  ;  urn  (65)  :  ug  (66).  These  combinations  are  very  rarely  used, 
however,  the  most  common  being  um,  which,  when  placed  high,  is  the  exact  representation 
of  the  final  sound  in  words  like  odium  (67).  The  contraction  ur  (68),  formed  by  lengthening 
the  u  sign,  stands  for  the  accented  syllable  ur  as  in  fur  orflr  (69)  ;  refer  (70),  which  compare 
with  reefer  (71) :  earn  or  urn  (72)  :  urchin  (73).  It  blends  with  the  other  letters  like  the 
u  sign,  and  is  generally  more  convenient  than  r  placed  low  and  followed  by  a  consonant. 
Words  like  tertn  (74)  and  flrin  (75)  can  therefore  be  written  in  two  ways,  but  the  preferable 
way  is  the  ur  device ;  burn  (76) — note  how  n  is  joined  conveniently  to  ur  by  means  of  a 
small  loop. 

While  the  u  sign  is  used  finally,  as  in  shoe  (60),  2^ooh-]yooh  (77)— compare  in  this  word 
the  upward  jni  with  the  jiur  of  purjjte  (78),  etc,  the  sound  is  expressed  initially  by  means  of 
the  initial  vowel-stroke  placed  low.  When  the  following  consonant  is  a  small  letter,  the  vowel- 
stroke  should  be  made  upward  by  starting  below  the  line,  so  that  the  small  letter  will  be  in 
its  normal  position;  ulster  (79):  uncle  (SO):  us  (81)— the  initial  vowel-stroke  is  here  made 
on  the  same  plan  as  the  initial  "ee"  stroke  in  ink,  but  it  is  in  a  low  position. 

Preceding  medium  and  large  letters,  the  initial  vowel-stroke  is  made  horizontally,  just 
like  the  "ay"  stroke,  the  u  sound  being  indicated  by  the  low  position  of  the  following  con- 
sonant ;  ugly  (82) :  utter  (83):  um2iii'e  (84) — note  how  ?np  is  placed  low  and  shortened  for  the 
i  stroke,  and  compare  this  word  with  en^yire  (85).  Here  it  would  not  be  wrong  to  use  u 
blended  initially,  as  shown  in  usher  (86),  but,  as  the  illustration  shows,  this  outline  is  not  so 
convenient  as  (86a)  ;  compare  the  latter  with  assure  (87). 

When  connected  with  the  following  syllable,  u  stands  for  the  prefix  xip  ;  iqjhraid  (88)  : 
u2^hold  (89)  :  iq^set  (90)— note  how  u  and  s  are  conveniently  connected  :  iqjside  (91)  :  iqyright 
(92)  :  uplift  (93) :  upturn  (94). 

Just  as  "  ow"  (as  in  cotv)  is  a  combination  of  the  "  a"  (as  in  aim)  and  "  00"  sounds,  and 
is  expressed  by  the  combination  of  the  two  respective  rules,  so  its  alphabetical  equivalent 
is  the  combination  of  two  alphabetical  signs, — viz.,  the  u  sign  and  the  a  dot  (95a),  or  tlie 
a  dot  alone  placed  low  to  express  the  "00"  sound  (956).  Like  u  and  a,  this  sign  must  be 
written  at  the  end  of  the  words,  when  the  "  ow  "  sound  occurs;  but  it  is  not  necessary  to 
write  the  u  sign  in  such  a  case,  as  we  replace  it  by  the  low  position  of  the  a  dot.  In  most 
letters  ending  with  a  right-hand  curve,  u  will  form  the  natural  connective  line  between  the 
preceding  consonant  and  the  a  dot  placed  low,  as  shown  by  bow  (96).  Cow  (97)  and  roiv  (98) 
illustrate  further  the  use  of  "  ow".  The  ow  dot,  placed  low,  is  also  written  medially  when 
followed  by  another  vowel-sound,  as  in  toirer  (99)  and  shoiver  (100).  Initially,  the  sound  is 
expressed  according  to  the  rules  for  its  two  components, — viz.,  by  starting  the  word  as 
though  it  were  spelled  with  u,  and  shading  the  following  consonant ;  oust  (101) :  oivl  (102). 

The  oiv  dot  (which,  just  like  the  a  dot,  is  made  without  initial  or  final  stroke,  except 
when  joined  with  other  letters)  stands  as  the  word-sign  for  out,  and  should  be  placed  close 
to,  but  not  connected  with,  the  word  to  which  it  belongs;  note  the  difference  between  look 
out  (103)  and  outlook  (104) :  go  out  (105) :  outside  (106).    When  the  final  consonant  admits  of 

*  Cases  of  this  sort  may  occur  in  writing  proper  names. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  47 


the  blending  of  the  u  stroke,  the  oiv  dot  is  added  at  the  end  of  the  u  stroke,  as  shown  in 
made  out  (107)  and  eo)ne  out  (108) — which  compare  with  outcome  (109).  The  ow  dot  should 
always  be  placed  well  under  the  line,  so  that  it  does  not  conflict  with  the  period. 

If  w^e  analyze  the  sound  of  the  u  in  words  like  fume,  we  find  that  it  is  a  cross  between 
"ee"  and  "oo",  obtained  by  pronouncing  the  "ee",  and  slowly  changing  the  position  of  the 
mouth  until  we  pronounce  "oo".  Its  alphabetical  representation  is  therefore  the  u  sign 
crossed  by  a  short  up-stroke  (110).  This  sign  also  stands  for  the  word  you,  and  is  symboli- 
cally expressed  by  crossing  the  preceding  and  following  consonants,  as  .shown  in  fume  (HI), 
feud  (112),  regular — spelled  r-g-u-l  e-r  (113),  angular  (114),  and  huge  (Ho).  When  one  of 
the  adjoining  consonants  does  not  admit  of  convenient  crossing,  we  add  (blend)  the  n  sign 
for  this  purpose,  as  shown  in  duke  (116)  and  beauty  (117) — which  compare  with  booty  (118). 
Compare  carefully  minute  (119) — meaning  "accurate",  minute  (120)  ;=  ^V  of  ^^i  hour,  and 
mint  (121)  ;  note  also  bugle  (122).  In  none  of  these  words  could  the  crossing  be  so  conven- 
iently accomplished,  if  the  preceding  letter  ended  with  an  upstroke.  In  endure  (123), 
however,  it  will  be  readily-  seen  that  the  up-stroke  is  not  necessary  ;  2iure  (124) :  fury  (125). 

Finally,  the  "  u"  (j'u)  sound  may  be  expressed  by  crossing  the  preceding  letter  with 
a  short  up-stroke,  as  in  nephew  (126)  ;  or,  when  more  convenient,  the  u  sign  can  be  employed 
for  crossing,  as  in  issue  (127)  ;  the  latter  case  will  hardly  occur,  except  after  a  downward 
loop  (as  in  sh  or  sp,  etc.). 

When  the  "u"  (j'u)  sound  occurs  initially,  in  words  like  use  (128),  eulogy  (129),  etc.,  it 
must  be  expressed  by  writing  the  u  sign  and  crossing  it  with  the  connective  vowel-stroke  of 
the  following  letter.  These  outlines  by  themselves  are  not  very  brief,  but,  in  the  majority 
of  cases,  they  will  be  shortened  considerably  hy  resorting  to 

Phrasing. 

Phrasing,  which  consists  of  writing  together  in  one  outline  several  words  which  can  be 
conveniently  joined,  is  a  powerful  speed  device,  when  used  judiciously.  It  is  i^articularly 
handy  in  writing  words  where  the  "  u"  (yu)  sound  occurs  initially.  For  example,  in  tlie 
sentence,  We  have-united  (130  and  131),  note  how,  by  crossing  h  (standing  for  have),  and  n 
of  united,  the  "u"  (yu)  sound  is  expi'essed  without  additional  effort.  The  same  principle 
is  also  applied  to  the  phrase,  To-use  (132),  where  medium  t  (standing  for  t)  is  crossed  Avith 
the  connective  stroke  of  s.  This  is  a  very  convenient  method  of  writing  you,  by  simply 
crossing  the  last  letter  of  the  preceding  word  with  the  first  letter  of  the  following  word,  as 
in  Can-you-see?  (133),  where  k  (for  can)  is  crossed  by  the  connective  stroke  of  s. 

Crossing  h  (for  have)  with  t  (for  not)  j^roduces  Havc-younot?  (134)  ;  crossing  d,  placed 
low  (for  should),  with  t,  will  read,  S'hould-you-not  ?  (135)  ;  d,  shaded,  above  the  line  (for  had), 
crossed  by  t,  is,  Had-you-not  ?  (136).  In  the  last  two  instances  it  is  advisable,  for  obvious 
reasons,  to  add  the  u  stroke  to  d  (see  rule  to  116).  When  there  is  no  opportunity  to  cross 
the  last  letter  of  the  preceding  word  with  the  first  letter  of  the  following  word,  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  use  the  vowel-stroke  for  crossing,  as  in  Can-you  ?  (137)  ;  or  the  u  sign  may  be  used, 
as  in  Show-you  (138).  In  these  cases  the  word  you  is  the  last  of  the  sentence,  and  no  other 
word  is  available  for  phrasing,  since  looi'ds  separated  by  2it(nctuation-7narks  cannot  be 
phrased.    This  is  an  important  rule,  and  should  be  kept  well  in  mind. 

We  have  seen  in  the  preceding  lessons  how  the  vowel-sound  is  written  in  words  like 
real.  This  lesson  will  enable  us  to  write  the  sound  as  in  the  second  sj'llable  of  actual  (139), 
which  is  written  in  a  logical  manner, — viz.,  by  crossing  the  preceding  letter  with  the  con- 
nective vowel-stroke  to  express  the  "  u"  ("yu")  sound,  and  shading  the  following  letter, 
giving  it  thereby  the  "a"  sound  (Lesson  7,  168)  ;  ritual  (140). 

Some  characters  of  the  shorthand  alphabet  admit  of  another  method  of  expressing  the 
"  i"  sound,  as  in  bit,  whicli  can  be  utilized  to  great  advantage  later  on.  We  have  seen  that 
the  tendency  of  letters  expressing  this  sound  is  generally  toward  the  centre-top-line.  Con- 
sequently, d  and  m,  when  lengthened  so  that  they  reach  above  the  centre-top-line,  express 
the  same  sound  :  in  limit  (141),  for  instance,  I  is  placed  high  for  the  first  /,  and  m  is  lengthened 
for  the  second.  Both  f?  and  m  can  in  this  connection  be  blended  in  the  usual  manner.  D 
blended  witli  r  and  lengtiiened  like  )ii  will  therefore  read  dear  (142)  :  divide  (143)— note  d 
and  v  blended  and  lengthened  above  the  centre-top-line;  observe  the  same  usage  with  d 
and/  in  differ  (144).  Tlie  two  letters  thus  lengthened  stand  also  for  the  prefixes  dis  and  mis, 
respectively  ;  dislike.  (145) :  displace  (146) :  misplace  (147)  :  mislay  (148) :  distrust  (149)  :— c?  and 
<  may  be  blended;  distaste  (150):  mi-strumt  (151) — which  compare  with  distrust  (149o)  :  )ni<- 


48  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


take  (152)— when  m  is  bleuded  with  t  in  this  combination,  no  particular  attention  need  be 
paid  to  lengthening  it. 

The  vowel-sound  in  the  word  it  gives  a  sort  of  sharpened  sound  to  ;•,  and  we  can  there- 
fore write  it  by  "  sharpening"  t^ — that  is,  by  shading  t  at  the  top  (153)  ;  the  same  rule  applies 
to  /,  as  in  (/'(154),  to^j>  (155)  as  in  lip  (156  and  156(:0,  and  to  the  second  form  of  v  (157),  which 
must  be  written  downward,  resulting  in  a  brief,  but  complete  outline  for  the  syllable  /re,  as 
in  massive  (158),  active  (159),  and  aggressive  (160).  Care  should  be  taken  to  write  this  form  of 
V  well  from  the  right  to  the  left,  particularly  at  the  top,  and  to  shade  only  the  top  of  the 
letter,  which  can  be  very  easily  accomplished  by  slightly  increasing  the  pressure  upon  the 
pen  or  pencil  at  the  top  of  the  letter. 

If  it  can  be  written  by  shading  t  at  the  top,  ti  ("  te")  can  be  logically  written  by  shading 
t  at  the  bottom  (161),  so  that  tin,  for  example,  is  written  either  as  shown  in  (162)  or  by 
writing  the  unshaded  t  and  placing  n  high.  The  same  rule  applies  to  eyice  (163)  and  a  few 
other  strokes,  which  will  be  explained  later.  The  real  value  of  this  device  will  become 
apparent  as  soon  as  it  is  desired  to  shorten  the  outlines  for  verbatim  reporting. 

The  sounds  of  i  (as  in  bit)  and  short  u  often  occur  together,  as  in  the  final  syllable  of 
words  like  various  (164)  ;  this  syllable  could  be  written  literally  by  placing  the  letters  us 
(joined)  in  high  position,  thereby  expressing  a  short  preceding  I  sound  ;  but,  since  in  this 
case  u  would  have  to  be  written  in  full,  the  outline  would  not  be  very  brief.  For  this  reason 
we  resort  to  substitution  ;  since  various  sounds  almost  as  though  spelled  varias,  we  express 
this  tinal  sound  by  placing  s  high  and  shading  it,  as  shown  by  (164a) :  2^''Gvious  (165) — note 
the  convenient  use  of  the  upward  v.  precarious  (166)  :  salubrious  (167). 

Logograms. 

U,  above  the  line,  stands  for  full  (168), — see  also  fulfil  (169), — and  on  the  line,  for  up  (170). 
U2^on  (171),  composed  of  up  and  on,  can  be  shortened  by  writing  n,  the  word-sign  for  on, 
below  the  line,  in  consideration  of  the  initial  u  sound.  Lmo  (172) — note  how  conveniently 
these  letters  blend — stands  for  utmost.  Out  (173)  is  the  a  dot  ijlaeed  low.  About  (174)  con- 
sists of  the  initial  "ay"  stroke,  placed  right  above  the  out  dot,  so  that  only  b  is  omitted. 
Without  (175)  consists  of  the  outline  for  tvith,  placed  low  and  shaded,  in  consideration  of  the 
vowel-sound  of  out.  D,  lengthened  above  the  centre-top-line,  stands  for  did  (176),  so  that  in 
this  word  only  the  last  consonant  is  missing.  W,  lengthened  on  the  same  principle,  sug- 
gests IV  and  i,  standing  for  which  (177).  F,  sharpened  (178),  reading  literallj-  Iv  ("eve"), 
stands  for  even.  T,  sharpened  (shaded)  at  the  bottom,  stands  for  till  (179),  representing  the 
word  in  full  with  the  exception  of  the  final  U;  the  same  letter,  blended  with  initial  u.  will 
at  once  suggest  until  (ISO)  ;  and,  blended  with  s,  it  is  a  suggestive  abbreviation  for  still  (181). 
The  initial  "a"  vowel-stroke  with  6,  stands  for  above  (182);  with  g,  for  again  (183),  to 
which  t  is  added  for  against  (184).  N,  above  the  line,  is  the  final  part  of  been  (185),  and 
stands  for  that  word.  The  initial  "  ay"  vowel-stroke,  witli  p,  shaded,  stands  for  apart  (186), 
A  long  vowel-stroke,  below  the  line,  represents  the  long  (low)  vowel-sound  of  true  (187)  ;  th 
added  to  this  logogram,  will  make  it  truth  (188). 

We  have  now  arrived  at  a  stage  when  we  can  make  practical  use  of  Shorthand,  as  will 
be  shown  by  the  business  letter  given  in  the  following 

Readi>'g  Exercise. 

In  this  exercise  almost  every  word  is  written  complete,  in  compliance  with  the  rules 
laid  down  in  these  lessons.  In  actual  practice,  however,  it  will  not  be  found  necessary  to 
write  everything  in  full,  and  by  the  rules  to  be  given  in  the  subsequent  lessons,  this  style 
of  writing  can  still  be  considerably  shortened. 

The  attention  of  the  student  is  called  especially  to  the  words  which  are  discussed  at  the 
end  of  the  transcription.  Words-counected-by-hyijhens  in  the  following  paragraphs  indi- 
cate that  the  Shorthand  outlines  are  phrased.  The  Shorthand  outlines  and  the  annotations 
should  be  studied  very  carefully  and  miuutelj',  as  they  embodj'  and  illustrate  very  im- 
portant points. 

(189)  ^Messrs.  Brown  &  Philips, 

New- York. 
(190)  Dear  Sirs:— 

(191)  We  are  in  receipt  of-your  favor  of  the  15th  ult.,  and  would  state  that  the 
order  given  by-your  agent  will  be  shipped  early  next  week  by  express,  prepaid.     (192)  These 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  49 


good(s)  (have)  been  selected  with  particular  care  ;  we  therefore  trust  that  the  purchase  may 
turn  out  as  well  as  the  other  invoices  which  we  have  sent-you,  and  hope  that-you-will  favor 
us  with  further  business  in  the  near  future.  (193j  We  shall  have  our  new  samples  ready 
next  June,  aud  shall  be  pleased  to  put  a-few  dozen  at-your  disposal,  if-you-can-use  them. 

(194)  The  market  has  not  been  very  active  lately  ;  according  to  advices  from  Boston,  it 
is  overstocked  there,  although  we  are  inclined  to  the  opinion  that  our  broker  overesti- 
mat(ed)  the  consequences  of  last  week's  deal.  (195)  Prices  have  advanced  slightly,  but  are 
not  likely  to  fluctuate  to  any  extent  within  the  next  few  days,  in  view-of  the  large  cargo 
which  is  retained  for-you  at  this  port.  (196)  At  this  occasion,  we  again  wish  to  bring  to 
your  notice  that-Europe  will  not  be  a  heavy  buyer  just  now,  as  we  have  pointed-out  to-you 
in  our  former  reports. 

(197)  Our  Mr.  Jones  will  shortly  leave  on  his  annual  trip  and  will  see-you  in  regard  to 
the  matter  about  which  we  wrote-you  a-few  weeks  ago.  (198)  If-you-have  consider(ed)  that 
the  article  is  unknown,  uncommon,  and  untried,  we  have  no  doubt  that  you  will  agree 
with  us  upon  the  terms. 

AxxoTATioxs  to  the  above  letter: — (189)  The  word  3fess/-s.  is  abbreviated  according  to 
the  sound  ;  the  first  syllable,  sounding  like  mesh,  is  briefly  written  by  blending  m  and  sh. 
See  how  the  "  u"  ("yu")  sound  in  New- York  is  expressed  by  crossing  n,  of  New,  aud  Y. 
(190)  The  rule  of  abbreviation  as  in  Messrs.  is  applied  in  the  word  ult.,  which  stands  for 
ultimo  (meaning  "last  month").  See  how  o  {of)  is  crossed  by  r,  reading  of-your ;  this  is 
shorter  than  writing  of  alone,  and  placing  r  below  the  line.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  men- 
tion that  in  shipj^ed  only  one  p>  is  written,  and  that  the  blended  group  ^><  is  employed. 
Early,  in  accordance  with  its  sound,  is  written  as  though  spelled  u-r-l-y.  Note  how  nicely 
k,  s,  and  t  are  joined  in  next,  spelled  n-e-k-s-t.  Observe  that  e  is  omitted  in  prepaid,  which 
is  nevertheless  a  plain  outline. 

Since  the  practical  task  of  Shorthand  is,  not  to  report  faithfully  every  sound  heard,  but 
such  sounds  as  will  enable  the  writer  to  obtain  a  faithful  reproduction  of  the  spoken  words, 
some  unimportant  letters,  syllables,  or  words,  which,  by  the  structure  of  the  language,  are 
necessarily  implied  in  connection  with  other  words,  may  be  omitted.  These  are  placed  in 
parentheses  (  )  in  the  text.  For  example,  sentence  (192)  begins  with  the  words,  "These 
goods  have  been  selected."  The  word  these  evidently  denotes  that  the  word  good  must 
stand  in  the  plural,  as  these  good  would  not  be  correct ;  it  is  therefore  unnecessary  to  add  s  to 
good.  In  a  like  manner,  since  we  could  not  say,  "  These  goods  been  selected,"  we  must  read 
have  between  goods  and  selected,  and  therefore  need  not  write  it.  This  princii"»le  of  abbrevi- 
ation is  applied  to  a  limited  extent  in  the  above  letter,  so  that  the  student  may  gradually 
become  used  to  it.  Note  in  particular  how  k  (for  c)  is  crossed  with  the  initial  I  stroke. 
There,  written  in  accordance  with  rule  (8)  and  joined  to/,  the  logogram  of  for,  will  give 
therefor  or  therefore;  since  the  two  words  sound  alike,  there  is  no  reason  why  they 
should  not  be  written  alike.  See  how  conveniently  the  ur  curve  is  employed  in  2iii''chase 
and  turn.  Observe  how  t  of  that  is  crossed  with  the  initial  stroke  of  ^  (in  will),  reading 
that-you-will.    Also  note  the  crossing  of/  and  chr  in  future. 

(193)  Note  the  "ay"  stroke  standing  for  at,  crossed  by  r,  reading  at-your.  In  disposal, 
see  how  d,  lengthened  above  the  centre-top-line,  is  blended  with  jj.  Note  the  crossing  of 
//with  k  and  the  latter  with  the  connective  stroke  of  s,  reading  if-you-can-use. 

(194)  The  blending  of  d  and  i'  makes  possible  a  brief,  but  complete,  outline  for  advice ; 
in  words  of  this  kind,  where  no  particular  stress  is  placed  upon  the  initial  vowel  a,  it  may 
be  replaced  by  "ay";  in  other  words,  no  shading  is  necessary  (a  rule  on  this  point  will  be 
given  later).  Compare  the  syllables  overst  and  overest  in  overstocked  aud  overestimated, 
illustrating  well  the  difference  between  rst  without  any  vowel,  and  the  same  syllable  with 
a  vowel  between  /•  and  s.  The  prefix  in,  of  inclined,  is  replaced  by  the  initial  "  ee"  vowel- 
stroke  (which  has  been  explained  in  Lesson  7,  134) ;  the  word  reads  practically  iclined, 
which  is  just  as  legible.  In  consequences,  s  and  ence  are  blended  in  accordance  with  rule 
(8).  An  apostrophe  placed  above  A-.s  in  weeks  would  indicate  the  exact  grammatical  manner 
of  writing  it;  this  is  unnecessary,  however,  the  sense  of  the  sentence  indicating  plainly 
that  only  one  week  is  meant,  so  that  s  is  indicative  of  the  possessive  case. 

(195)  In  advanced,  note  the  shading  in  dv,  in  consideration  of  the  second  a;  observe 
also  how  nicely  the  ence  blended  with  the  f  stroke  can  be  employed  in  this  word.  Fluctuate 
is  written  in  accordance  with  rule  (139).     Within  consists  of  the  outline  of  with,  joined  with 

4 


50  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


the  logogram  for  in,  but,  to  save  time,  in  is  added  to  with,  uo  attempt  being  made  to  gain 
the  writing  line.  Notice  v  and  o  (for  of)  crossed,  reading  view-of.  Look  carefully  at  the 
word  cargo  ;  in  this  word  the  widened  curve  of  g  is  employed  to  indicate  the  o,  and  is  at 
the  same  time  blended  with  r  (sliaded),  resulting  in  tlie  syllal)les  orgo,  wliicli,  joined  to  /.-, 
read  cargo.  Your  special  attention  is  called  to  the  outlines  of  few  (195)  snxA  for-you  (195), 
wliich  also  compare  with  a-few  (193).  In  few,  f  is  crossed  with  the  u  sign  on  the  line,  to 
distinguish  tlie  word  from  a-few,  where  the  "ay"  vowel-strolie  (for  a)  is  crossed  by  the/ 
stroke  ;  in /or-?/o/<,/ (log.  of  for)  is  crossed  by  the  u  sign  below  tlie  line. 

(196)  In  occasion,  notice  the  sj  sign  (used  for  the  soft  sh  sound  of  s).  Observe  the  con- 
venient expressson  of  the  "  u"  ("  yu")  sound  by  crossing  t  of  that  with  the  connective-stroke, 
and  the  latter  with  r  of  ro  in  Europe,  reading  that-Earopc.  Look  at  the  word  buyer, 
written  in  accordance  with  Lesson  7,  rule  (171).  See  how  conveniently  the  full  sign  for  ow 
— standing  for  out — is  blended  to  the  d  of  pointed,  and  how  medium  t  (for  to  )  crossed  by  the 
vowel-stroke  (on  the  same  principle  as  sent-you)  reads  to-you. 

(197)  Mister  is  shortened  like  the  longhand  word  by  writing  Mr.  instead.  It  is  hardly 
necessary  to  mention  that  in  Shorthand  no  periods  are  placed  after  abbreviations  ;  otherwise 
the  same  punctuation  as  in  longhand  may  be  used.  It  is  obvious  that  this  word  cannot  be 
abbreviated  in  analogy  with  Messrs.;  for  the  first  syllable  of  Mister  sounds  like  that  of 
Mrs.  and  Miss.  Look  at  the  word  annual,  where  n  is  shaded  and  starts  with  an  initial 
vowel-stroke  to  show  that  the  "a"  sound  commences  tlie  word;  n  crossed  by  the  con- 
nective stroke  of  I  and  the  latter  shaded,  represents  faithfully  the  final  sound  of  the  word. 
Notice  that  x>  in  trip  is  sharpened  by  shading  it  at  the  top.  See-you  and  wrote-you  are 
written  on  tlie  same  principle  as  sent-you. 

(198)  If,  crossed  by  the  initial  stroke  of  h  (for  have)  which  is  lengthened  a  little  for  this 
purpose,  will  read  if-you-have.  Note  that  in  eonsider{ed)  the  syllable  ed  is  omitted  ;  it  must 
necessarily  be  read,  since  tlie  word  have  in  the  sentence  plainly  indicates  the  past  participle. 
In  agree,  notice  the  initial  vowel-stroke  (horizontal)  for  "a"  and  tlie  final  "ee"  stroke  from 
tlie  line  to  the  centre-top-line.  See  how  conveniently  tlie  prefix  un  is  written  in  unknown, 
(where  k  is  silent  and  where  n  need  be  written  only  once,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  for 
double  consonants),  and  uncommon;  in  untried,  however,  and  in  all  words  where  un  is 
followed  by  downward  t,  it  is  more  conveniently  disconnected. 

Writing  Exercise. 

(The  following  words  afford  further  exercise  on  the  rules  involved  in  this  lesson  : — ) 

Detest,  distaste,  detract,  distract,  distort,  detect,  detonate,  distil,  deprive,  deplore, 
deposit,  depose,  dispose,  depress,  depart  (here  p  should  be  shortened  a  little  on  account  of 
the  following  t),  mute,  moot,  music,  refuse,  refute,  cube,  cure,  dupe,  furious,  curious,  druid 
(bring  out  the  r  through  shading),  numerous,  humorous,  pupil,  tutor  (cross  initial  t  with 
the  connective  vowel-stroke,  which  should  be  followed  by  medium  tr),  blur,  slur,  deter, 
confer  (trace  from  the  bottom-line  up),  flower,  bower,  harmonious,  melodious,  actual, 
actuate. 

Write  the  following  answer  to  the  letter  in  the  Reading  Exercise  :—  (Words  connected 
by  hyphens  should  be  phrased ;  j)arts  of  words  in  parenthesis  need  not  be  written  ;  tlie 
numbers  after  some  of  the  words  refer  to  the  annotations.) 

Messrs.  B.  Jones  &  Co., 
St.  Louis. 

Dear  Sirs : — 

We  have-your  letter  of  recent  date,  and  are  glad  to  hear  that  the  goods  will  be 
shipped  soon,  as  we  need  them  badly  and  await  them  anxiously  (}).  We  hope,  however, 
that-you-will  not  disappoint  ('^)  us  and  that  the  good(s)  will  come  up  to  sample,  so  that  we 
may  have  no  reason  for  complaint  against-you.  We  shall  be  pleased  to  see-your  Mr.  Jones, 
and  assure-you  (')  that  we  are  ready  to  arrange  (*)  full  particulars  with  him.  Perhaps-you- 
can  (^)  inform  us  at  what  time  he  expect(s)  to  arrive,  and  by  what  road,  as  our  Mr.  Philips 
would  like  to  meet  him  at  the  station. 

If-you-think  that  prices  will  not  go  higher  (^),  it  might  be  well  to  let  the  local  dealers 
understand  that-you-intend  (')  to  dispose  of  our  cargo  at  some  other  port.  We  do  not  think 
that  you  can  make  a  mistake,  if-you-hold  on  still  a  little  longer,  at  least  until  the  rumors 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  51 


started  by  parties  (®j  who  are  interested  iu  the  decline  of  the  market,  have  been  found  to  be 
true.  If  they  are  not  quite  true,  we  need  make  no  aggressive  move.  Do-you-not  share 
this  opinion  witli  us?  We  have  the  utmost  confidence  (')  in  your  ability  and  experience  ('"), 
and  trust  that-you-will  do  your  level  (")  best  to  make  up  for  the  heavy  loss  we  sustaiu(ed) 
last  year,  though,  we  must  add,  through  no  fault  of-yours. 

We  shall  not  need  your  samples  until  fall,  and  shall  write-you  when  to  send  them. 

Yours  resp(ectfully). 

Brown  &  Philips. 

The  following  annotations  will  be  found  helpful  in  writing  the  above  : — 

(1)  Anxiously  is  written  as  though  spelled  ankshesly^  by  starting  the  « A;  with  the  initial 
vowel-stroke,  then  blending  sh  and  adding  the  rest.  (2)  Be  careful  to  insert  the  "ay" 
stroke  between  ells  and  point ;  shorten  p  a  little  on  account  of  the  following  t.  (3)  Cross  r 
of  assure  with  the  short  vowel-stroke  to  make  it  assure-you.  (4)  Do  not  forget  to  blend  j 
and  long  n.  (5)  Cross  h  of  perhaps  with  A-  for  can.  (6)  In  higher,  shade  r — see  Lesson  5, 
(175).  (7)  Cross  t  of  that  with  the  initial  stroke  of  intend.  (8)  Use  round  s — see  Lesson  5, 
(27).  (9)  Start  on  the  bottom  line.  (10)  Place  the  ence  stroke  high  and  shade  it.  (11) 
Blend  I  and  v,  and  v  and  I. 

Write  the  following  : — 

Irish  (i^)  Wit. 

The  sons  of  Erin  are  known  for  their  original  wit ;  there  is  no  issue  of  our  comic  papers 
that  does  not  contain  a-few  fruit(s)  of  Irish  humor,  of  which  we  furnish  a-few  specimen (s). 

One  day  a  son  of  the  Emerald  Isle  was  on  a  train  bound  for  Niagara  (")  Falls.  In  the 
same  car  was  a  young  man  of  swell  appearance,  who  annoyed  the  other  passengers  with  his 
braggartly  words.  He  seemed  to  be  very  much  astonish (ed),  when  he  heard  that  this  was 
the  first  trip  which  Pat  had  made  to  see  the  Falls,  and  exclaimed  loudly  : 

"  I  cannot  see,  my  good  man,  how-you-could  ('*)  live  so  many  years  in  this  vicinity  (}^),  and 
not  come  to  see  this  great,  wonderful  (i*)  scenery.    I  have  seen  it  more  than  a  dozen  time(s)." 

"Wonderful,  is  it?"  replied  Mr.  Murphy  (i'),  quite  disgust(ed)  at  the  young  man's  ('*) 
conceited  manners  ;  "  what  is  wonderful  about  it?" 

The  latter  hardly  knew  what  to  answer  ;  such  a  query  had  never  occur(red)  to  him. 

"Why,  just  think,"  he  said,  timidly  {^^),  "all  that  volume  of  water  which  fall(s)  down 
the  rocks.    Isn't  it  wonderful?" 

"That's  nothing  wonderful ;  that's  natural  (™),"  was  the  cool  answer.  "Did-you  ever 
hear  of  water  that  fall(s)  up>  a  rock?" 

Everybody  laugh(ed)  at  the  young  man's  expense.  The  latter  thought  that  if  he  could 
not  impress  those  about  him  with  his  brains,  he  might  do  so  with  his  money. 

"  Perhaps-you-are  i^^)  right,  my  friend,"  he  said  ;  "  therefore-you-ought  ('-^)  to  treat  the 
crowd." 

"  I  think  it  is  your  turn  to  treat,"  retorted  the  Irishman. 

"The  best  way  to  decide  this  jn-oblem,  I  think,  is  this  plan,"  proposed  the  young  man. 
"I  will  put  a  piece  of  money  in  my  hat,  and  you  in  yours,  and  we  will  keep  on  like  this 
until-you-or  (^'^)  I  have  to  give  up.    He  who  win(s)  must  treat  the  others." 

The  plan  was  aceept(ed),  and  the  young  man  placed  a  silver  dollar  in  his  hat;  the 
Irishman  put  in  a  five  cent  piece  ;  out  came  the  young  man  with  another  dollar  ;  the  Irish- 
man put  in  a  penny.  With  a  victorious  (^*)  smile  the  young  man  brought  forth  another 
dollar  ;  but  the  Irishman  said  : 

"  I  am  done,  my  young  friend,  the  treat  is  on-you  C**)."    And  the  laugh  was  on  him,  too. 

Annotations  : — (12)  Place  sh  high.  (13)  Place  n  high,  shade  y,  and  use  the  final  a  dot. 
(14)  Cross  h  (shaded  below  the  line)  with  /o,  which  will  make  it  how-you-could.  (15)  Use 
upward!'.  (16)  Write  ivonder  M\d  place  ?<  close  to  it  above  the  line.  (17)  Use  m,  blended 
with  ur,  which  will  join  naturally  with/.  (18)  Blend  n  and  s;  the  apostrophe  may  be  used, 
but  it  is  not  necessary.  (19)  Shade  t  at  the  bottom,  and  lengthen  m  above  the  line  for  the 
second  i.  (20)  Natural  is  written  as  though  spelled  nachcrel.  (21)  Cross  h  of  ]wrhaps  with 
r  shaded,  which  will  give  2><irhaps-you-are.  (22)  Cross  /  of  therefore  with  the  aw  curve  of 
ought,  which  must  for  this  reason  be  lowered  a  little.  (23)  Cross  t  of  until  with  the  o  curve 
of  or,  reading  Mn^<7-//or<-o?-.  (24)  Use  upward  i'.  (25)  Here  n,  standing  for  o«,  must  be  crossed 
by  the  u  sign,  for  if  it  were  crossed  by  the  vowel-stroke,  the  outline  would  read  new. 


±Jf^ 


Lesson  9.    ^^^^G::^ ^^^^ 


_\-g-     C^O>A- 


(T   ^. 


X-  •» 

^      ^_^. 


-^^^W- 


-^-*^-^ 


^^. 


^    .^t><aa-. ^ 


.^^»A^, 


.^_ 


^r:!-^:^ 


77" 


^. 


1^^ 


J^22i^ 


l_M^^^^^ ^^  <  ^  ,^<i^.  1!<3  ^^  7^ 


j:2l 


// , 


p  — oJ-.n^"  U .,  -7  pA  'i  ^ 


^^ 


y3 


^JL 


V^ 


£^ 


/y 


^ 


^"^^    A-~-^  w^- 


9- 


'^  ^j/?.  \o  A 


r\^  o  J  J  ^y----  -y  /  0^.  '  ^^  ^^  P  -.-^.^v^    '^^  '^^2.  ^ // 


7" 


o 


2^/^ 


7 


I 


e^ 


-i 


7^ 


T 


/.  y  /  2^.^  ^  ^yg 


z. 


^  /»  /  ^, 


/>__    ^^  -,w    Ot^/"^ 


^-.,<^2^ 


^^^^"^ 


nf- 


^^ 


r 


/ 


.i.i 


//  Ji' 


_^2r. 


<3 


vr  zjgc/-  4  ^A_ 


^/ 


_s^ 


.^^^--O- 


^i:vd- 


^^ 


^)L 


-1^    t? 


<<^    ^->^ 


O    ^.^   o    r^/^. ^^-^^(>    ^^,.^- 


_ii^. 


vv 


^ 


/  ^^^ ^^^ I3-. 


^-^^  v>/^ 


r 


4)^ 


-p 


^^, 


^  ^^o 


--?^ .    ^^  /  ^  ^-a^-:r=:,^(^i-i-_-:a^  - 


^  ^<Z-^^^^/r^     p..  ^/L-z? ^_w^-. 


^Jl^^-4^^2  9  y  ^  ^  ^'^ 


^^ 


^-^  o '-sft. 


-,/  >^,  ^?tfo  ^  f.  .^^.^c^^^Ay^^-^^z^. '  yA. 


--V^ 


»/^     ^       ^    ^/^>/ 


..s=<::3_^ 


-yl 


'^ 


._.^.^_ 


f^.^/0^J  ^  ^  ,z^.^    r^.   '^i^//-  /»  /-/T^  .^  -2- 


-z^ 


^/^ 


^^ 


_h3._M-^_ 


^7 


_^__4.-^^ 


_.-r_C^2^^_ 


-t^ 


^^S     ^     ^/r/ 


/VA/^ C^ 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  53 


Lesson  No.  9. 


Lesson  No.  8  is  a  mile-stone  in  the  study ;  for  we  can  now  write  any  sounds  we  may 
hear  in  the  English  language.  This  lesson  will  furnish  reading  and  writing  exercises 
covering  the  ground. 

We  can  now  also  dispense  with  the  last  auxiliary  outline,  retaining  only  the  ordinary 
writing  line. 

(1)  I  wonder  how  the  rebels  could  get  across  the  trocha  so  freely. — Note  Is  blended  in 
rebels.     See  how  clearly  r  is  shown  in  troeha,  which  illustrates  also  the  use  of  final  a. 

(2)  The  delta  of  the  Nile  is  in  the  northern  i^art  of  Egypt.— i>e^^a  illustrates  nicely  the 
difference  between  I  and  a.    Note  well  the  outline  for  Egypt. 

(3)  We  must  gather  some  data  on  this  question,  which  will  bear  on  all  branches  of 
industry. — Observe  the  difference  between  delta  and  data.  In  gather,  note  how  the  con- 
nective vowel-stroke  between  g  and  th  is  eliminated  and  the  "a"  sound  is  shown  by  the 
shading  of  g.  See  medium  str  placed  low  in  industry.  In  the  latter  word  the  alphabetical 
sign  for  i  may  be  replaced  by  the  shortened  initial  i  stroke,  as  shown  in  Lesson  7.  When 
carefully  traced,  this  initial  stroke  is  more  advisable,  because  it  is  shorter ;  but  when  care- 
lessly written,  it  may  impair  the  legibility  of  the  word. 

(4)  What  shall  the  glee  club  play  to-night? — Note  the  final  ee  stroke  in  glee. 

(5)  Will  he  attend  the  ceremony?  (oa)  He  intends  to  be  present. — Note  well  the 
difference  of  the  initial  stroke  in  attend  and  intends;  notice  also  d  and  s  blended  in  the 
latter. 

(6)  We  must  sift  the  evidence  carefully.— Observe  s  placed  high  in  sift. 

(7)  The  doctors  could  not  diagnose  the  case. — Note  the  coalescent  vowel-sound  in 
diagnose,  where  the  i  stroke  is  followed  by  g  shaded. 

(8)  Can  she  draw  a  triangle  on  this  sheet  ?— Notice  the  same  coalescent  vowel-sound 
in  triangle. 

(9)  The  miser  had  soon  amassed  great  wealth. — Compare  Is,  blended,  in  rebels  (1),  with 
Ith,  blended,  in  wealth. 

(10)  The  army  camped  near  the  swamps,  and  many  a  man  was  stricken  with  typhoid. — 
Note  rm,  blended,  in  army ;  also,  shaded  r,  preceded  by  the  initial  vowel-stroke ;  compare 
the  directions  of  the  initial  and  final  strokes  in  this  word.  Observe  mt,  blended,  in  camped 
(=  camt).    Note  nips,  blended,  in  swamps.     Observe  also  the  convenient  outline  for  typhoid. 

(11)  "This  is  an  elegant  allegory,"  remarked  the  negro  minstrel.— Observe  go  in  alle- 
gory, and  gro  in  negro,  where  the  "  i"  sound  is  shown  by  the  high  position  of  the  n.  Also 
note  the  difference  between  el  and  al,  in  elegant  &D.6.  allegory.  See  the  group  str  placed 
high  in  rninstrel. 

(12)  The  blow  cut  the  aorta  near  the  shoulder  bone. — Note  the  combination  ao  in  aorta. 

(13)  Can  we  appeal  to  the  higher  court? — Note  the  coalescent  vowel  in  higher,  shown 
clearly  by  r  shaded. 

(14)  His  manners  plainly  show  his  arrogance.— Observe  liow  o  is  absorbed  by  g  in  the 
last  word  of  the  sentence  ;  also  compare  og  with  go  in  allegory  and  with  gro  in  negro  (11). 

(15)  The  tax-collector  thought  that  our  villa  was  assessed  too  highly.— Note  the  con- 
venient outlines  for  villa  and  assessed. 

(16)  He  said  he  would  assist  us  in  our  claim  for  redress. — Compare  a.ssist  with  assessed 
(15).     Redress  is  shortened  to  rdress. 

(17)  This  fine  atlas  does  not  even  contain  the  map  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. — Note  the 
i  stroke,  followed  by  the  shaded  n,  in  the  last  syllable  of  Hawaiian. 

(18)  The  model  for  the  Madonna  hud  really  an  angelic  face.— Note  the  blending  of  n  and 
j  in  angelic. 

(19)  The  heroic  fighters  lay  in  the  trenches  for  two  days. — Note  the  double  vowel  in 
heroic,  where  k  is  placed  high;  see  also  how  well  r  is  shown  before  o.    Observe  the  blending 


54  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


or  n  and  sh  in  trenches.     Two  is  written   out  in  this  case,  t  and  the  u  {00}  sign   flowing 
nicely  together. 

(20)  The  hyena  is  a  greedy  beast. — Note  the  i  sign  in  hyena.  See  the  difference 
between  the  directions  of  the  connective  vowel-stroke  and  the  final  //  stroke  in  greedy. 

(21)  Hygiene  is  a  very  recent  science. — Note  the  word  hygiene;  here  again  two  "  i" 
sounds  come  together,  the  first  being  represented  alphabetically,  the  second  by  the  high 
position  of  lengthened  n. 

(22)  Diana  was  the  Greek  goddess  of  the  hunters. — Note  the  shaded  n  following  the  l 
stroke  in  Diana.  See  also  how  conveniently  h  and  n  can  be  joined  by  means  of  the  little 
loop. 

(23)  What  is  the  diameter  of  this  sphere? — See  how  well  medium  tr  can  be  used  in 
diameter. 

(24)  The  courier  strapped  the  blanket  on  his  saddle. — Note  the  shading  and  high  posi- 
tion of  the  final  r  in  courier. 

(25)  The  moths  could  not  stand  the  smell  of  the  camphor.— Observe  th  and  s  blended  in 
moths  ;  note  also  mjr  in  cartvphor. 

(26)  The  sound  of  the  trumpet  announced  the  arrival  of  the  emperor. — Note  mp  placed 
low  in  trumpet.     See  double  r  in  em,peror. 

(27)  Everybody  was  amazed  by  the  pomp  of  the  pageant.— Compare  am,azed  with 
amassed  (9).     Note  mp  shaded  for  the  "a"  sound  of  0  in  pomp. 

(28)  The  figure  sliould  be  inverted  to  make  the  problem  right. — Note  how  well  upward 
V  can  be  used  in  inverted,  where  the  alphabetical  /  must  be  used  initially. 

(29)  "  Defiance  to  all  tyrants"  should  be  the  motto  of  all  freemen.— In  motto,  the  first  o 
has  the  "a"  sound. 

(30)  The  great  knowledge  which  the  professor  evinced  soon  silenced  his  opponents. — 
This  sentence  offers  two  good  illustrations  of  the  convenience  with  which  nee  and  t,  blended, 
can  be  used  for  the  past  tense  ;  the  group  is  placed  high  in  evinced  to  show  the  "  i"  sound. 

(31)  Glass  is  very  brittle. — Note  br  placed  high  and  tl,  blended,  in  brittle. 

(32)  According  to  republican  ideas,  an  office-holder  is  an  employee  of  the  people. — 
Employee  is  another  instance  where  the  alphabetical  i  sign  must  be  employed,  because  the 
final  ee  stroke  could  not  be  used  here.  See  how  the  second  p  in  people  is  shaded  at  the  top 
to  show  the  "ee"  sound. 

(33)  I  should  not  like  to  see-you  play  truant,  even  though  the  doctor  said  that-you- 
needed  some  rest.— Note  how  well  the  r  is  shown  before  m  in  truant;  the  u  sign  must  be 
written  in  this  word,  because  the  "  u"  sound  is  followed  by  another  vowel.  In  rest  the 
vowel-sti'oke  may  be  omitted,  so  that  rst  may  be  blended,  since  this  combination  of  conso- 
nants cannot  occur  at  the  beginning  of  a  word. 

(34)  How  could-you-have-utilized  the  fumes  of  the  sulphuric  acid? — Ph  in  sulphuric  is 
replaced  by  /. 

(35)  Have-you-seen  that-unique  display  of  perfumery  at  the  museum? — Que  in  unique 
sounds  like  k,  and  is  therefore  so  written.  Observe  the  final  ay  stroke  in  display.  Also  um 
placed  high  in  museum. 

(36)  The  dude  was  reputed  to  be  very  profuse  in  his  flatter.y. 

(37)  "Not  one  cent  for  tribute,  but  millions  for  defence." — Observe  n  shaded  and  placed 
high  in  millions.     Compare  defence  with  defiance  (29). 

(38)  Austria-Hungary  is  called  the  dual  monarchy.— Observe  a  placed  high  in  Austria, 
where  medium  tr — blending  nicely  with  the  aw  curve — can  be  used. 

(39)  The  King  of  Italy  does  not  recognize  the  secular  power  of  the  Papacy. — See  how 
well  the  initial  shading  can  be  applied  to  Italy. 

(40)  The  strenuous  efforts  of  the  friends  to  prevent  a  duel  proved  futile. — Note  the 
crossing  of  n  and  s  in  strenuous  by  means  of  the  initial  stroke  of  s;  the  latter  must  also  be 
shaded. 

(41)  The  ruins  of  the  ancient  castle  looked  hideous  in  the  moonlight. — Note  s  shaded 
and  placed  high  in  hideoics.  Observe  also  the  combination  rui  in  ruins,  where  n  is  placed 
high. 

(42)  The  bugle  signal  announced  the  capture  of  the  mutineers. — See  ncet  shaded  and 
placed  low  in  announced. 

(43)  Would-you-like  to  see  the  owls  at  the  Zoo? 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  55 


(44)  If-you-are  afraid  to  come-out  of  the  house  in  this  weather,  you-should  not  have 
offer(ed)  your  services  as  uslier. — 7/",  crossed  by  r  shaded,  will  read  if-you-are.  See  how  well 
the  double  s  circle  can  be  used  in  Hcrviccs. 

(45)  Did-you-see  if  the  urn  was  genuine? — The  ur  sign  joins  readily  with  the  n  by  means 
of  a  small  loop.     Look  carefully  at  the  outline  for  genuine. 

(46)  Many  a  negro  fears  the  hoodoo. — The  last  word  offers  a  good  illustration  of  the  "  u" 
sound  as  shown  medially  and  finally. 

(47)  Do-you-think  he  has  amused  the  children?— See  how  conveniently  the  medium  st 
can  be  used  in  amused^  where  the  initial  vowel-stroke  is  also  clearly  shown. 

(48)  Has  he  abused  my  signature?  (48«)  No  ;  for,  though  he  is  impecunious,  he  is  honest. 
— When  signature,  as  it  is  sometimes  pronounced,  has  the  same  final  sound  as  nature  (only 
unaccented),  the  chr  sign  must  be  employed.  Observe  how  all  the  vowels  are  shown  in 
impecunious. 

(49)  In  their  enthusiasm,  the  crowd  nearly  upset  the  carriage  of  the  royal  visitor. — Note 
s  shaded  and  sm  placed  high  in  enthusiasm.  Note  also  medium  tr  placed  high  in  revelation 
to  s  in  visitor. 

(50)  Traces  of  the  Druids  can  still  be  found  in  many  a  grove  of  oaks.— See  how  clearly  r 
is  shown  in  Druids  and  how  the  second  d  is  placed  high. 

(51)  Perpetual  peace  is  the  dream  of  all  good  men  ;  yet  every  patriot  should  prepare  for 
the  eventuality  of  war. — As  shown  before,  r  is  omitted  from  the  prefix  per.  T  is  joined 
{not  blended)  to  the  second  p  in  perpetual,  thus  showing  the  short  vowel-sound  between 
the  two  consonants. 

(52)  Master  Bruin  is  very  fond  of  honey. — Note  hru  blended  and  n  placed  high  in  Bruin. 
O  in  honey  has  the  short  "  u"  sound. 

(53)  Apart  from  his  distrust  toward  me,  he  has  shown  no  hostility  against  me. — In 
toward  r  is  scarcely  audible  ;  we  are  therefore  justified  in  omitting  it,  showing  clearly  the 
following  "  a"  sound  by  shading  d. 

(54)  I  wish  you  a  happy  New-Year. — Note  how  the  u  sign  in  wish-you  affords  a  better 
opportunity  for  crossing  than  if  the  short  up-stroke  were  used.  Note  also  the  crossing  of  n 
and  the  initial  y  in  new-year,  showing  how  a  brief  outline  can  be  formed  when  neiv  is 
followed  by  another  word. 

(55)  His  stupidity  caused  numerous  mistakes. — Observe  how  the  outline  caused  is  short- 
ened by  blending  k  and  s,  yet  how  clearly  the  vowel-sound  of  the  word  is  shown. 

(56)  If-you-do  not  spend  more  than-j-ou  will  earn,  you-will  be  happy. — The  phrase  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence  shows  how  safe  (legible)  such  phrases  are  :  the  outline  reads 
literally  if-u-d,  which  can  have  no  other  meaning.  When  there  is  no  opportunity  for 
crossing  the  preceding  consonant,  the  u  sign  must  be  employed,  as  shown  by  you-will.  It 
will  be  seen  from  the  rules  in  Lesson  8  that  there  are  two  ways  of  writing  the  initial  syllable 
which  has  the  sound  "earn"  or  "  urn"  ;  by  using  either  the  ur  sign,  as  shown  here,  or  by 
preceding  r  by  the  initial  vowel-stroke  placed  low,  as  uncle  or  us  is  written.  The  convenience 
of  having  these  two  strokes  will  be  apparent  later  ;  in  the  present  instance,  it  is  evidently 
more  convenient  to  use  the  ur  sign,  as  the  hand,  before  starting  the  word,  is  in  the  exact 
place  where  the  ur  sign  starts. 

(57)  You-should  always  fulfil  a  promise ;  but-you-should  be  careful  when-you  give  it, 
that-you-can  carry  out  what-you-say. — This  sentence  offers  very  good  examples  of  the  saving 
obtained  in  outlines  by  the  crossing  principle. 

Writing  Exercises. 

(58)  Who  is  the  drawee  of  the  draft?  (59)  Many  famous  men  were  not  graduates  of 
colleges.  (60)  If  you  should  not  deem  it  wise  to  use  a  long  fuse,  you  had  better  not  try  this 
method.  (61)  Cupid,  as  a  rule,  is  depicted  with  a  quiver  and  a  bow.  (62)  "  Have-you-ever 
heard  such  an  impudent  answer?"  asked  the  professor.  (62a)  "  Perhaps-you-never  tried  to 
answer  it-yourself,"  was  the  calm  reply  of  the  student.  (63)  It  is  a  very  true  maxim  tliat 
"  united  we  stand,  but  divided  we  fall"  ;  yet  how  many  a  nation,  many  a  party,  many  a 
family,  seems  to  overlook  it.  (64)  The  vial  was  filled  with  deadly  poison.  (65)  Do-you- 
think  that-you-raight  have  a  better  view  from  the  tower  of  the  church?  (66)  It  is  the 
intellectual  power  that  makes  man  the  master  of  the  beast.  (67)  The  opal  is  quite  a  precious 
jewel.     (68)  The  nephew  and  the  uncle  could  never  agree  about  their  business.     (69)  The 


56  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


joy  of  the  farmers  about  the  capture  of  the  notorious  horse-thief  was  so  great  that  they 
lighted  bonfires.  (70)  We  should  all  try  to  acquire  knowledge  and  to  diffuse  it  as  much  as 
we  can.  (71)  I  warned  him  not  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  that  usurer.  (72)  Have-you-uot 
said  that-you-will  help  me?  (72a)  How  do-you-know  I  said  I  will  help-you?  (73)  Shall  I 
show  you  the  temple  of  the  muse  ?  (74)  The  author  displayed  much  acumen  in  the  article  he 
wrote.  (75)  The  peculiar  pecuniary  condition  of  the  duke  compelled  him  to  bow  to  the 
wishes  of  the  petulant  young  lady.  (76)  Could-you,  would-you,  or  should-you  be  on  the 
side  of  the  oppressed  in  this  quarrel  ? 

The  Natioxality. 

A  Frenchman  and  an  American  once  happened  to  debate  on  the  merits  of  their  nations, 
and  each  claimed  that  his  own  people  was  further  advanced  in  literature,  the  arts,  and 
commerce.  As  may  well  be  guessed,  at  the  end  of  their  battle  of  words,  their  opinions 
were  as  far  apart  as  at  the  start, — that  is,  each  insisted  that  his  nation  was  the  first  on 
the  face  of  the  globe. 

Finally  the  Frenchman  wished  to  end  the  dispute  in  a  polite  manner,  which  would  not 
M'ound  his  opponent,  and  said, — 

"After  all,  sir,  if  I  were  not  a  Frenchman  I  should  like  to  be  an  American." 

"And  I,  sir,"  was  the  proud  answer  of  the  Yankee,  "if  I  were  not  an  American,  I 
should  want  to  be  an  American." 


REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

1.  Show  the  diflference  between  Is  and  Ith  blended  ? 

2.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  blending  consonants  with  s  and  with  I? 

3.  When  is  the  alphabetical  sign  used  for  a;  when  for  i;  when  for  u;  when  for  owf 

4.  How  is  the  u  ( yu)  sign  shown  ?  how  the  ow  sign  ? 

5.  When  is  the  latter  connected  ? 

6.  How  is  the  principle  that  certain  consonants  cannot  occur  together  without  a  vowel 
between  them  utilized  for  shortening  outlines? 

7.  Is  the  vowel  neglected  in  such  cases  ? 

8.  Mention  the  groups  of  blended  consonants  used  so  far. 

9.  Review  the  logograms  used  thus  far,  using  the  text  without  the  shorthand  sheets. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  57 


Lesson  No.  lo. 


Just  as  we  have  logograms  (word-signs)  for  the  words  most  commonly  met  with  (about 
one  hundred  in  all),  we  also  have  standard  contractions  for  some  frequent 

Affixes,  Prefixes,  and  Terminations, 
of  which  a  few  have  not  yet  been  explained  in  the  previous  lessons. 

Ab  and  ad  are  both  represented  by  the  a  dot,  which  is  written  close  to  the  rest  of  the 
word,  but  disconnected  to  express  ab,  and  joined  to  the  rest  of  the  word  to  represent  ad,  as 
shown  by  absence  (1),  abscond  (2)— where  o  is  short,  sounding  like  a  in  father,  admit  (3), 
and  adjoin  (4).  These  words  are  literally  written  a-sence,  a-scond,  a-mit,  and  a-Join,  which 
abbreviations  could  never  be  mistaken  for  words  other  than  those  quoted.  However,  when 
b  and  d  of  the  prefixes  ab  and  ad  are  followed  by  another  6  and  d  (as  in  abbreviate  or 
address),  or  by  a  vowel  (as  in  aborigine  or  adamant),  or  by  a  consonant  with  which  b  and  d 
blend  conveniently'  (as  dv  in  advance),  the  a  dot  is  not  employed  for  the  prefix,  the  initial 
ay  stroke  followed  by  b  or  d  being  more  conveniently  used.  A  trial  of  the  words  given  as 
examples  will  at  once  render  apparent  the  value  of  this  rule. 

Be,  as  in  behold  (5),  bes2oeak  (6),  begin  (7),  and  betake  (8),  is  a  6  reduced  to  about  half  its 
size.  As  the  examples  show,  it  changes  position  if  necessary,  so  as  to  connect  readily  with 
the  following  letter. 

Sk  (for  c-c)  stands  for  the  prefix  circum,  as  in  circumspect  (9),  circumference  (10),  etc. 

^(for  e),  shaded  below  the  line  and  disconnected,  represents  the  prominent  sound  of 
counter  ;  counteract  (11)— note  how  a  is  clearly  expressed  in  act ;  countermine  (12). 

We  have  already  learned  the  sign  for  the  prefix  con  (consisting  of  ko),  as  in  contain, 
concise  (13),  etc.  Just  as  o  may  be  turned  around  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  so  the  con 
sign  is  turned  around  in  all  cases  where  it  is  not  followed  by  a  small  sign  or  an  upward  t  or 
/.  This  rule  can  be  applied  only  when  ko  stands  for  con  ;  in  words  like  coat,  for  example, 
ko  cannot  be  turned  around.  A  glance  at  the  examples  will  show  the  .saving  in  outline 
obtained  by  the  above  rule.  Care  should  be  taken  to  draw  the  initial  stroke  of  k  (reversed) 
well  from  the  left  to  the  right ;  continue  (14)  :  conflict  (15) :  condole  (16) :  congress  (17). 

Contra  is  well  expressed  bj*  the  a  dot  added  to  con,  as  in  contradict  (18). 

For,  or  fore,  is  represented  by  the  logogram  of  for.  As  some  of  the  previous  examples 
illustrate, — adjoin  (4),  bespeak  (6),  etc., — affixes  are  joined  to  logograms  in  the  same  manner 
as  to  other  letters.  This  rule  holds  good  also  in  the  case  of/,  as  in  forgive  (19),  foresee  (20), 
forestall  (21),  etc. 

In  ob  and  sub,  b  is  omitted ;  oblige  (22) :  obstinate  (23)* — note  how  nicely  o  and  st  are 
blended  :  subject  (24) :  submit  (25) — s  must  be  placed  low  in  words  with  sub. 

Super  can  be  written  upward  or  downward  ;  supersede  (26) — note  how  .s  blends  with  r  ; 
superfine  (27).  When  writing  upward,  take  good  care  to  preserve  the  curve  oi  }>,  so  that  it 
does  not  conflict  with  /. 

In  sur,  r  is  omitted,  s  being  placed  low  ;  surmise  (28)  :  survey  (29).  This  prefix  will  not 
clash  with  sub. 

Subter  is  written  in  the  same  manner.  It  will  be  found  that  these  two  prefixes  never 
clash  in  practice,  as  the  few  syllables  found  with  subter  do  not  occur  with  sub. 

In  trans,  ns  is  omitted,  leaving  tr,  r  being  shaded  ;  transjyose  (30)  :  transfer  (31). 

Under  should  be  written  by  placing  ndr  low,  but  no  particular  attention  need  be  paid  to 
position  ;  the  word  therefore  stands  generally  on  the  line  ;  undergo  (32) :  underrate  (33) — 
note  the  omission  of  the  second  r,  on  the  principle  that  double  consonants  are  ordinarily  not 
written. 

*  There  are  a  number  of  variations  corresponding  to  the  sound  of  0  in  different  words,  the  differences  being  as 
great  as  those  between  ode,  on,  and  one,  or  as  delicate  as  that  between  ore  and  or.  For  shorthand  purposes,— as  in 
longhand,— it  is  unnecessary  to  pay  any  attention  to  this  difference,  and  initial  o  is  nearly  always  expressed  by  the  o 
curve.    Tlie  few  words  in  which  any  distinction  is  recessary  (as  in  ode  and  odd)  will  be  discussed  later. 


58  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Uni  is  represented  by  the  vowel-stroke  crossing  tlie  first  letter  of  the  following  syllable, 
thus  representing  the  "  u"  ("yu")  sound;  uniform  (34):  university  (35).  These  are  written 
ti-form  and  u-versity, — note  in  the  latter  word  how  conveniently  the  upward  v  (placed  low) 
is  employed  when  used  initially  and  followed  by  the  short  "  u"  sound. 

In  ultra,  Itr  is  omitted,  so  that  the  prefix  is  represented  by  its  vowel-sounds, — viz.,  the 
a  dot  preceded  by  the  short  initial  vowel-stroke,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  for  the  initial 
short  "  u"  sound  ;  ultramarine  (36) — note  m  and  r  blended. 

The  termination  ing  of  the  present  participle  is  written  in  two  ways:  following  a  letter 
ending  with  an  upstroke,  the  ing  sign  (37)  is  used,  being  made  like  the  u  sign,  with  the  sole 
difference  that  the  latter  is  a  medium,  the  former  a  large  character.  With  other  letters  this 
ing  stroke  blends  as  does  n;  ebbing  (38) :  doing  (39) :  ailing  (40):  gaining  (41)  :  bat/iing  (42)  : 
getting  (43) :  catching  (44)  :  oiving  (45).  After  letters  ending  with  a  down-stroke,  the  ing 
hook  is  employed,  as  shown  in  purring  (46) :  brewing  (47) :  showing  (48) — note  how  o  is 
absorbed  by  the  sh  curve ;  sjyeaking  (49) :  lifting  (50) :  having  (51) :  caging  (52) :  backing  (53) : 
rising  (54) :  living  (55) :  beating  (56).  Where  the  hook  joins  left-hand  curves,  such  as  j 
and  h,  it  will  necessarily  form  a  little  loop.  The  exception,  made  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  is 
r,  which  is  blended  with  the  ing  stroke,  as  shown  in  daring  (57)  and  roaring  (58)  ;  the  out- 
lines will  at  once  show  that  this  method  of  writing  ring  is  shorter  than  r  and  the  i7ig  hook. 
There  may  be  some  little  doubt  in  the  mind  of  the  student  as  to  whether  the  letters  I,  th,  s, 
sp,  sh  end  with  a  down-stroke  or  an  upstroke.  It  is  not  difficult  to  decide :  by  virtue  of 
their  final  strokes,  which  have  an  upward  tendency,  I  and  th  belong  to  the  former  class  ; 
the  others — s,  sh,  sp — belong  to  the  latter  class,  as  they  end  where  the  final  strokes  are  met 
hy  the  downward  strokes. 

It  is  well  to  remember  here  that  the  two  signs  for  ing  are  used  only  for  the  participle. 
The  noun  ring,  for  instance,  must  be  written  by  placing  r  high  and  following  it  by  the  ng 
sign  ;  in  mourning,  the  ing  sign  must  be  employed,  while  in  morning,  ng  must  be  placed  high. 

The  syllables  ical  are  expressed  by  simply  joining  I  at  the  end  of  the  word  ;  practical 
(59),  for  example,  is  really  written  practl.  This  cannot  clash  with  practicable,  as  will  be 
shown  by  that  word  (60). 

Able  is  indicated  by  joining  I  shaded  at  the  end  of  the  word ;  see  ipracticahle  (60) : 
lovable  (61) :  amiable  (62) — note  I  (shaced)  pladed  high  in  consideration  of  the  preceding 
short  "  i"  shound  ;  incontestable  (63) — written  icontestl. 

Ible  is  written  by  adding  I  placed  high,  on  account  of  the  short  "  i"  sound  ;  jtossible  (64) 
—written  either  with  the  o  curve  or  s  shaded,  according  to  the  pronunciation  of  o  ;  feasible 
(65) :   visible  (66). 

Soluble  (67)  shows  how  the  "u"  ("yu")  sound  of  uble  is  written  by  crossing,  the  word 
becoming  solule,  which  is  perfectly  intelligible. 

The  termination  tion  (shen)  is  replaced  by  the  short  n  stroke  when  short,  and  by  the 
long  n  when  long ;  at  the  same  time  the  preceding  vowel-sound  is  indicated  by  position. 
This  rule  does  not  apply  to  words  where  the  termination  is  preceded  by  only  one  syllable, 
as  in  nation  (68) ;  but  it  is  employed  in  donation  (69),  operation  (70),  conciliation  (71) — notice 
how  the  long  n  stroke  placed  high  and  shaded  expresses  the  sound  "  /a"  preceding  tion, 
retaliation  (72),  continuation  (73) — observe  how  the  n  stroke  is  crossed  and  shaded  in  this 
word,  and  intrusion  (74) — note  long  n  placed  low.  Compare  the  examples  of  the  short 
sound ;  impression  (75),  retrogression  (76),  concussion  {11) — see  n  placed  low  on  account  of 
the  short  "  u"  sound,  condition  (78)— see  n  placed  high  for  the  short  "  i"  and  observe  how 
conveniently  con  and  d  join,  2^^>">nission  (79) — we  have  seen  before  that  r  is  omitted  in  the 
prefix  per,  and  jiosition  (80). 

The  terminations  wise  and  tvard  are  both  safely  and  suggestively  represented  by  w 
added  to  the  preceding  syllable  ;  likewise  (81) :  afterward  (82)  :  forward  (83).  The  latter 
two  words  could  hardly  be  read  for  "  afterwise"  or  "  forewise,"  while  the  first  could  not  be 
read  "  likeward." 

In  a  similar  manner,  hood  is  represented  by  h  added  to  the  preceding  sj'llable  ;  knight- 
hood (84) :  hardihood  (85) — note  h  placed  high  on  account  of  the  preceding  "i." 

Fold  is  represented  by/  added  to  the  preceding  syllable;  blindfold  (86) — see  how  con- 
veniently the  blending  can  be  employed  here. 

Ship,  as  in  kinship  (87),  is  represented  byp  being  added,  or  blended  if  convenient,  as  in 
friendship  (88)  and  hardship  (89). 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  59 


Bior  is  written  by  placing  double  r  {rr)  \n  high  position;  inferior  {QQ):  superior  {^l): 
exterior  (92) — see  how  the  initial  vowel  of  this  word  is  clearly  indicated. 

The  termination  meiit  is  represented  by  m,  slightly  diminished  in  size  ;  atonement  (93) : 
statement  (94).  When  following  the  encc  stroke,  m  can  be  blended  with  the  former  by  end- 
ing ence  with  the  in  wave,  as  shown  in  commencement  (95) — literally  written  commencem, 
advancement  (96),  and  announcement  (97)— note  encem  placed  low  and  shaded.  The  termi- 
nation mental  will  be  derived  logically  from  the  above  by  adding  I  to  the  m  of  ment^  as  in 
instrumental  (98j  and  sentimental  (99). 

Omissions. 

We  have  seen  that  certain  letters  can  be  omitted  without  sacrificing  legibility.  One  of 
these  is  medial  i/,  in  words  like  mayor  (100),  layer  (101),  and  slayer  (102),  the  sound  being 
represented  by  a  lengthened  connective  vowel-stroke,  thus  actually  writing  ma-er,  la-er, 
and  sla-er. 

This  principle  of  omission  can  also  be  extended  with  impunity  to  certain  syllables,  thus 
producing  very  brief  outlines  for  long  words.  While  this  may  at  first  seem  somewhat 
puzzling  to  the  novice,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  ultimate  purpose  of  shorthand  is, 
not  to  write  letter  for  letter  what  one  hears,  but  to  take  such  record  of  the  sounds  that  the 
words  can  afterwards  be  accurately  reproduced.  Therefore,  if  the  principle  of  omission  is 
applied  according  to  the  rules,  there  will  be  no  guess-work  in  reading  stenographic  notes. 

Tand  tr  may  be  omitted  before  final  y  ;  liberty  (103)— <  omitted  in  this  word  enables  us 
to  blend  b  and  r,  resulting  in  a  very  brief  outline  ;  plenty  (104) :  country  (105). 

Before  ive  and  if,  t  can  be  omitted  ;  x>luintive  (106),  which  compare  with  j^iciintiff  (107)  : 
attentive  (108). 

Preceding  the  ence  stroke,  t  can  always  be  omitted;  assistance  (109):  sentence  (110): 
distance  (111). 

JEnce  may  be  omitted  before  a  final  y  ;  agency  (112) :  fluency  (113)— you  will  note  here 
that  u,  being  followed  by  another  vowel-sound,  must  be  written:  persistency  (114) — look 
carefully  at  this  word  ;  besides  the  ence,  the  preceding  t  and  r  in  the  prefix  are  also  omitted, 
yet  the  outline  cannot  be  read  for  anything  but  x>ersistency ,  reading  actually  ^jesi-ss^. 

The  medial  syllables  it  and  if  may  be  omitted,  shortening  substitute  to  sustute  (115) — see 
how  .s  of  sub,  though  near  the  top-line,  is  low  in  relation  to  the  following  letter,  and  so  is 
practically  low,  implj'ing  the  short  "  u"  sound,  constitute  to  constute  (116),  institution  to 
insfution  (117) — note  in  the  last  word  the  crossing  of  long  n  for  the  "  ution"  (yushn)  sound. 
As  examples  of  the  omission  of  if,  look  at  modify  (118),  notify  (119),  and  verify  (120). 

Medial  h  is  likewise  omitted  ;  for  example,  comprend  is  written  for  comprehend  (121). 

When  self  occurs  in  connection  with  other  pronouns,  it  is  replaced  l\y  /  blended,  as  in 
myself  (122),  himself  (123),  herself  (124),  yourself  (125),  ouiselves  (126),  and  themselves  (127). 

Cardinal,  Numbers, 

except  round  numbers,  are  written  as  in  longhand,  but  as  devoid  of  flourishes  as  possible ; 
they  should  be  made  a  little  larger  than  medium-sized  letters.  The  following  speed  devices 
can  be  used  advantageously  for  round  numbers  : — 100  is  expressed  hy  a  small  cipher  placed 
high  ;  200  (128) :  1000  is  represented  by  a  small  stroke  above  the  line,  like  an  apostrophe ; 
3000  (129).  This  apostrophe  can  be  blended  to  the  cipher,  so  that  (130)  reads  40,000,  (131) 
reads  500,000,  and  (132)  reads  6,000,000,  being  6  "  thousand  thousand"  ;  also,  (133)  will  read 
70,000,000,  and  (134),  800,000,000. 

The  months  of  the  year  may  be  abbreviated  in  the  same  manner  as  in  longhand,  writing 
Jan.  for  January,  Feb.  for  February,  etc.  In  Sept.  the  vowel-sound  may  be  omitted,  blending 
s  and  pt,  as  will  be  shown  in  the  Reading  Exercise. 

Logograms. 

The  prefix  be,  joined  to  the  first  letter  of  the  following  syllable,  forms  a  very  suggestive 
word-sign  for  words  like  beside{s)  (135) — actually  written  bcs,  behind  (135o)>  before  (135/>), 
between  (135e),  beyond  (135d),  and  because  (135r) — note  how  conveniently  the  vowel-sound 
can  be  expressed  in  this  word. 

I,  standing  for  in,  joined  to  the  last  letter  of  stead,  represents  instead  (136)  ;  since,  in 
practice,  this  word  is  always  followed  by  the  preposition  of,  it  is  unnecessary  to  write  the 
latter,  so  that  (136)  should  be  read  instead  of. 


60  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Note  the  word-sign  for  satisfy  (137),  where  only  /  and  the  first  two  vowels  are  omitted. 
Satisfaction  (137a)  will  logically  be  formed  by  replacing  i  (for  ''y")  in  satisfy  with  n,  and 
satisfactory  (1376)  by  substituting  the  final  y  stroke  for  n. 

Circumstance  (138)  is  expressed  by  adding  st  to  the  prefix,  actually  MTitiug  circumst. 
Notwithstanding  (139)  is  represented  by  t  (for  not)  and  w  (for  ivith).  Mention  (140)  is  expressed 
by  sh  (above  the  line),  its  foremost  sound,  the  word  sounding  like  menshn.  R  above  the  line 
is  tiie  logogram  for  ivere  (141).  Long  n  placed  high  represents  the  final  sound  of  mean  (142), 
and  on  the  line,  of  remain  (143).  In  yesterday  (144),  the  initial  sound  of  yest  and  the  final 
sound  of  day  form  a  convenient  outline.  The  final  sound  ring  (146)  is  the  word-sign  for 
during.  Extra  (146)  is  written  by  omitting  tr ;  extraorditiary  consists  of  exo  (147).  (148) 
shows  the  word-sign  for  setf  when  standing  alone.  Almost  (149)  consists  of  st — of  most — 
joined  to  the  logogram  for  all. 

Derivatives  from  Logograms. 

We  have  seen  before  that  logograms  are  used,  just  like  other  letters,  in  combination  with 
prefixes,  terminations,  etc.  The  general  rule  in  this  regard  is,  to  join  the  affix  with  the 
logogram,  provided  this  can  be  done  conveniently  ;  otherwise,  the  affix  is  written  above  the 
line,  as  closely  as  possible  (but  disconnected)  to  the  logogram,  unless  the  indication  of  a  "  u" 
sound  might  require  low  position.  The  following  words  will  illustrate  the  affixes  attached 
to  logograms  : — If  J  placed  low  reads  Ji/st,  ad  and  er  added  at  the  beginning  and  end  will 
read  adjuster  {150) :  Justiflab/e  (151) — note  how  the  "  i"  sound  is  preserved  bj' tracing  the  i 
stroke  up  to  the  centre-top-line,  as  otherwise  an  "oi"  sound-might  be  inferred  :  iinjust  (152) : 
justice  (153) :  upper  (154)  :  meaning  (155) — where  the  ng  sign  attached  shows  that  this  is  the 
noun  :  remaining  (156) — compare  this  ending  with  the  preceding  one :  onward  (157)  :  cir- 
cumstantial (158)  :  truly  (159)  :  in  untruth  (160),  however,  the  prefix  is  more  conveniently 
detached.  In  greatly  (161),  the  I  of  ly  can  be  blended  with  gr,  while  in  greater  (162)  and 
greatest  (163),  the  terminations  are  disconnected.  To  the  logogram  for  extraordinary^  ly  can 
nicely  be  added  (164).  Ft,  blended,  stands  for  the  word  fit ;  consequently,  preceded  by  the 
out  dot,  it  will  stand  for  outfit  (165)  ;  joined  to  the  prefix  he  and  the  ending  ing,  it  will  read 
befitting  (166).  In  accordingly  (167),  ly  is  detached.  In  practice  it  will  be  an  easy  matter 
to  decide  whether  an  affix  must  be  connected  or  disconnected. 

In  the  preceding  lesson  we  have  resorted  to 

Phrasing 

in  order  to  express  the  "u"  sound;  but  phrasing,  when  judiciously  used,  can  be  employed 
to  a  larger  extent,  and  will  then  be  greatly  conducive  to  speed.  It  is  necessary  to  emphasize 
the  words  when  judiciously  used;  there  is  a  strong  tendency  among  beginners  to  believe 
tliat  the  more  words  they  phrase  together  into  one  outline,  the  higher  the  speed  they  obtain. 
This  erroneous  and  dangerous  idea  is  caused  to  a  large  extent  by  authors  of  text-books  who, 
in  order  to  exhibit  the  "superiority"  of  their  systems,  use  long  and  intricate  phrasings  for 
words  that  seldom  occur  together,  at  times  writing  a  whole  sentence  in  one  phrased  outline, 
which,  by  its  very  phrasing,  becomes  too  awkward  for  speedy  writing.  Upon  closer  exami- 
nation, moreover,  it  is  often  found  that  the  same  sentence  could  be  written  more  rapidly, 
if  only  a  few  words — or  perhaps  none  at  all — were  phrased.  By  experienced  writers, 
phrasing  is  done  by  instinct  rather  than  by  rules ;  and  no  phrasing  is  used,  unless  it 
comes  naturally  to  mind.  In  taking  notes,  it  is  better  not  to  phrase,  if  time  is  lost  in  the 
effort  of  joining  words  ;  and  especially  is  it  better  to  phrase  too  little  rather  than  too  much. 
In  practicing,  however,  exercises  on  phrasing  form  a  most  important  part  of  the  study ; 
in  fact,  in  writing  words  which  frequentlj-  occur  together,  the  student  should  always 
carefully  consider  whether  or  not  he  can  phrase  to  advantage,  as  it  is  only  by  constant 
l^ractice  that  phrasing  becomes  a  natural  factor  in  the  acquisition  of  speed. 

By  keeping  in  mind  the  few  rules  laid  down  in  the  subsequent  paragraphs,  and  by 
following  closely  the  examples  given  in  the  shorthand  plates,  the  student  will  soon  acquire 
that  "instinct"  which  will  tell  him  when  to  phrase. 

The  two  "Don'ts"  following  should  be  well  remembered  : — 

Don't  phrase  words  that  do  not  join  convenientlj'. 

Don't  phrase  words  that,  according  to  their  sense,  do  not  belong  together  ;  this  includes 
words  separated  by  a  punctuation  mark.     For  example,  the  words  for  you  can  be  con- 


GRAPHIC  SHOIITHAND.  61 


veniently  phrased  ;  but  they  should  not  be  phrased  when  they  occur,  for  instance,  in  a 
sentence  like  "Whom  did  they  send  for,  you?" 
The  following 

General  Rules  about  Phrasing 

will  be  all  that  it  is  necessary  to  say  on  the  subject  from  a  theoretical  point  of  view. 

Little  words  that  frequently  occur  together,  such  as  the  articles  and  prepositions,  for 
instance,  should  be  phrased  ;  since  the  ay  stroke  stands  for  both  at^  a  or  «?i,  two  aij  strokes 
joined  will  read  at-a  or  af-aa  (168)  ;  see  also  of-a  (169),  in-a  (170),  and  to-a  (171)— note  how 
the  ay  stroke  is  brought  out  clearly  in  all  these  groups. 

When  they  are  phrased,  logograms  may  leave  their  places  (above,  on,  or  below  the 
line)  :  an  example  of  this  rule  is  found  in  fo-any  (172),  w'here  the  final  y  stroke— for  any— in 
brought  down  from  the  centre-top-line  and  joined  to  ^— for  io ;  compare  this  outline  with 
io-a :  for-any  (173).  To-this  {174:)— this  brought  down  from  above  the  line ;  to-these  (175) : 
of-this  (176)  :  of-fhese  (177) — note  how  well  the  difference  between  this  and  these  is  observed 
hi  these  words  by  the  use  of  the  short  or  long  connective  stroke  respectively.  As-to  (178) 
can  be  written  like  (178«)t  where  s,  preceded  by  the  initial  ay  stroke,  is  blended  to  medium 
t;  as-to-this  (179).  But-the  (180),  to-the  (181),  and  have-the  (182)  show  how  conveniently  the 
article  the  can  be  blended  with  these  little  words.  Look  carefully  at  the  words  end-of-the 
(183) ;  see  how  nicely  o  (for  of)  fits  into  the  final  d  curve,  and  at  its  end  turns  naturally 
into  the  th  (for  the)  circle. 

Phrases  which  occur  frequently  in  the  same  form  should  be  joined ;  for  example,  of- 
course-not  (184),  in-due-course  (185),  not-at-all  (186). 

The  personal  jironouns  and  the  auxiliary  verbs  also  come  under  this  head  ;  I-cannot 
(187)  :  I-have-not  (188)  :  I-{have)-been  (189) — where  have  is  omitted,  because  it  must  be  im- 
plied, as  the  phrase  could  not  read  J6ee/i.-  I-had  ^190):  I-am-not  (191)  and  (191a)— see  m 
and  t  blended.     In  i^-not  (192)  t  (for  not)  is  joined  to  in:  it-is  (193). 

We  have  already  seen  that  the  shortening  power  of  phrasing  can  be  intensified  by  the 
use  of  blending,  when  the  last  letter  of  the  preceding  word  admits  of  blending  w'ith  the 
first  letter  of  the  following  word.  This  is  well  illustrated  by  stand-for  (194),  where  d  and  / 
(for)  are  blended,  and  by  that-she  (195),  where  the  tch  sign  (as  in  catch)  is  employed,  the 
outline  reading  literally  thafsh  {sh  being  log.  for  she). 

Note  with  particular  attention  the  difference  between  ivith-the  (196),  ivith-a  (197),  and 
tvith-any  (198).  Also  note  and-the  (199),  consisting  of  th  (for  the)  in  the  and  position  ;  ajter- 
the  (200),  where  the  two  straight  strokes  are  joined  by  means  of  a  th  circle  instead  of  by  the 
angle  ;  and  in-the  (201),  where  in  is  (as  usually)  replaced  by  the  initial  ee  stroke. 

If  you  find  difficulty  in  reading  a  phrased  outline,  the  best  plan  is,  to  resolve  it  into 
its  components  and  read  each  letter  singly ;  for  example,  in  the  phrase  I-am-not  (191),  the 
meaning  will  readily  suggest  itself,  if  you  read  /,  ?»,  t  sei^arately.  Practice  will  soon  put  you 
at  ease  in  regard  to  phrasing  ;  and  the  phrased  groups  should  therefore  be  carefully  studied 
Avith  the  aid  of  the  annotations  in  the  following 

Reading  Exercise. 

(202)  Dear  Friend  :— 

(203)  I-am  in  possession  of-your-letter  of-j-esterday,  notifying  me  that-the-steamer 
"  Universe"  has-not-yet  unload(ed)  her  freight,  and  that-she  cannot-be  ready  in-a  week  or-so. 
(204)  I-regret-the  situation  ;  but,  owing  to-the  absence  of-my  partner,  I-am-not-in-a  jiosition 
to  give-you  much  assistance,  although  I  do-not-like  to-see  the  ship  detain (ed)  after-the  first 
of  Sept.,  through  the  fauit-of-the  agency.  (205)  I-see  no  way  in-which-I-can-help-you  out 
of-this  trouble  without  transgress(ing)  my  instructions.  (206)  I-have-not-yet-seen-the  owner 
of-the  schooner,  as  he-has  left  for-the  interior  with-the  mayor ;  but  I-shall  send-for-the 
manifest  and  see  what-I-can-do  for-you  in-the-matter.  (207)  I-shall  also  ask  the  Commis- 
sioner whether-j'ou-are  eompel(led)  to  submit  to-this  treatment,  or  whether  it-is-not  tlie 
duty  of-the  adjuster  to  ofier  all-the  assistance  he  can,  instead  (of)  putting  such  obstinate 
resistance  in-your  way, 

(208)  As-to-the  other  complaint  of-which-you  write,  I  do-not  blame-you.  (209)  I-have- 
never  heard-of  such  conspicuous  ill-will  as  that  which-the  constable  now  exhibit(s)  toward- 
you  ;  but  I-have-no  doubt  that  he  will-m)t-l)e  entirely  incontrolhible,  and  that-you-can 
eventually  settle  with-him  upon  your  own  terms.     (210)  After-all,  I-am-not-at-all  pleased 


62  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


with-the  admission  lie  makes  ;  but,  though  I  disapprove  of-it,  I  regret  tliat  I-eannot  dispi'ove 
it.  (211)  Our  new-contract,  whicli-we  conclud(ed)  yesterday  with-the  West  India  Trading 
Co.,  cal(ls)  for  transportiou  of  500,000  bag(s)  (of)  rice,  bound-for  Cuba. 

(212)  Your-since(rely), 

Henry  Miles. 

Annotations. — As  said  before,  these  phrased  outlines  will  be  found  very  easy  to  under- 
stand when  they  are  resolved  into  their  component  parts.  Looking  at  the  phrase  has-not-yet 
in  (203),  we  find  there  h  (for  have  or  has),  t  (for  not),  and  y  (for  yet)  ;  all  these  are  familiar  to 
the  student,  the  only  new  feature  being  that  the  three  logograms  are  joined  into  one  outline. 
Also  note  that  the-steamer,  that-she,  and  cannot-be.    Observe  the  blending  of  r  and  s  in  or-so. 

(204)  Note  I-7'egret-the.  See  long  n  shaded  and  crossing  the  preceding  t  in  situation. 
Observe  the  phrasing  of-iny,  and  the  group  I-am-not-in-a,  where  each  word  is  brought  out 
clearly,  although  the  outline  is  very  brief.  Observe  d  and  t  joined  in  do-not-like  ;  this  out- 
line could  not  be  mistaken  for  debt,  which  word  would  have  no  sense  if  applied  in  this 
sentence.  To-see  should  be  carefully  studied  ;  note  how  conveniently  the  s  of  see  is  formed 
by  joining  medium  t  (for  to),  by  means  of  a  loop,  with  the  final  ee  stroke.  In  to-say,  t  will 
be  joined  in  a  similar  manner  with  the  ay  stroke  ;  in  to-sigh,  with  the  /  stroke.  Notice  the 
outline  for  Sept.,  where  the  vowel  is  omitted  and  s  and  2)t  are  blended,  in  accordance  with 
rule  (37),  Lesson  7.     See  how  well  of  and  the,  phrased,  can  be  added  to  fault. 

(205)  Observe  how  conveniently  s  can  be  joined  to  the  i  stroke  in  I-see,  and  how  clearly 
the  final  ee  stroke  is  brought  out.  In  the  group  in-tchich-I-can-help-you,  the  preposition  in 
is  replaced  by  the  (short)  i  {ee)  stroke,  and  the  u  sign  blends  naturally  with  the  preceding 
p,  which  is  crossed  by  the  short  up-stroke  for  you.  When  without  is  followed  by  a  verb, 
the  latter  must  always  be  in  the  form  of  a  present  participle  ;  therefore,  any  one  who  reads 
"without  transgress  my  instructions"  will  know  at  once  that  this  must  be  "  without  trans- 
gressin^r,"  and  the  syllable  ing  may  be  omitted  with  safety. 

(206)  The  group  I-have-not-yet-seen-the,  though  very  concise,  is  very  plain  ;  note  how 
the  s  of  seen  is  formed  by  joining  n  by  means  of  a  loojx  Observe  the  blending  of  d  and  /  in 
send-for-the,  where  also  the  th  circle  is  conveniently  added  to  /  {for).  In  7nanifest,  the 
medial  syllable  if  is  omitted.  Your  attention  is  also  called  to  the  group  what-I-can-do, 
where  the  i  stroke  forms  a  natural  connective  line  between  what  and  can. 

(207)  Note  the  shading  of  s  in  ask,  preceded  by  the  initial  vowel-stroke.  Your  attention 
is  called  to  the  phrase  it-is-nof,  which  reads  literally  its  not ;  but  as  this  group  would  have 
no  meaning,  it  is  safely  employed  for  it-is-not.  If  it  were  desired  to  write  ifs  not,  the  same 
outline  would  be  used,  and  an  apostrophe  inserted  between  the  two  fs.  The  second  t  must 
of  course  slant  a  little  more  than  the  first ;  otherwise  the  s  loop  could  not  be  formed,  and  the 
second  t  could  not  be  distinguished  from  the  first.  Observe  the  word  conmiissioner,  written 
by  adding  r  to  the  outline  for  commission.  Note  the  difference  between  assistance  (with  the 
initial  ay  stroke)  and  resistance  (commencing  with  r).  Look  at  the  group  in-your,  where  it 
is  more  convenient  to  jilace  r  below  the  line  than  to  resort  to  crossing. 

(208)  As-to-the  forms  a  very  convenient  outline,  as  do  also  of-which-you  and  bkone-you. 

(209)  See  how  easily  n  is  joined  to  h  (for  have)  in  I-have-never ;  as  usual,  in  this  case  n 
and  h  are  joined  by  means  of  a  small  loop.  Look  at  the  outline  for  heard-of,  where — in 
analogy  with  the  case  of  end-of-the — the  o  {of)  curve  is  blended  with  the  final  d.  Con- 
spicuous illustrates  well  the  saving  in  outline  by  reversing  the  con  sign  ;  note  also  the  vowel 
group  in  the  final  syllable  of  this  word.  Tlie  logogram  for  tuill  is  used  for  the  noun  as  well 
as  for  the  verb.  Notice  how  s  is  formed  in  constable,  by  joining  con  (reversed)  to  t  by  means 
of  a  small  loop.  In  exhibit,  s  must  be  implied,  and  is  therefore  omitted,  while  medial  h  is 
omitted  in  accordance  with  the  rule.  Note  the  outline  toward-you,  actually  written  tow-ad- 
you.  In,  of  incontrollable,  is  replaced  by  the  initial  ee  stroke.  Note  the  crossing  of  t  {that) 
and  k,  reading  that-you-can. 

(210)  Observe  how  the  r  of  after  is  blended  with  the  atv  curve  of  all,  reading  after-all. 
The  grou[)  I-am-not-at-all  is  very  clear,  yet  concise.  Notice  the  difference  between  disap- 
prove, with  the  ay  stroke  between  dis  and  x>>'Ove,  and  disprove,  where  dis  and  pr  are 
blended.    Observe  also  the  phrase  of-it,  where  of  leaves  its  regular  position. 

(211)  See  how  n  crossed  by  co  of  contract  reads  new-contract.  Note  the  a  dot  placed 
high  in  India,  on  account  of  the  preceding  short  "  i"  sound.    See  how  conveniently  d  of 


Lesson  lo 


1_ 


yO 


y^^i.^^//. 


.^O.^j 


-^ 


{0  -fr  2jl 


y^-^/^y.-y.A/^ 


Sl-ZO 


-7^ 


g^ 


1^/J^,/^W 


(/.  rw  X  ^/>  drprif  r\  ^r\.   ( r"..  SP//?.^  /j,  -i-^'V  a^  ?^. 


64  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


bound  and  /  {for)  blend  in  the  group  bound-for.  Cuba  eould  also  be  written  by  leaving  k 
on  the  line  and  crossing  it  with  the  connective  voivel-sti'oke  followed  by  6/  this  stroke,  how- 
ever, should  be  omitted  wherever  possible  to  gain  brevity,  which  is  done  in  this  instance  in 
a  very  convenient  manner. 

(212)  Since,  written  at  the  end  of  a  letter  will  hardly  be  read  for  anything  but  sincerely. 
If  such  abbreviations  are  used  in  longhand,  they  are  even  more  permissible  in  shorthand. 
Yours  and  since  are  blended ;  note  how  the  ence  stroke  is  placed  high  on  account  of  the 
Bhort  "i." 

Do  not  fail  to  send  in  for  correction  the  following 

Writing  Exercises. 

(A)  Abject,  absent,  abrupt,  abhor,  abridge,  abode,  absolute  (o,  being  scarcely  audible, 
naay  be  omitted),  adhere,  adjoin,  admonish,  admire,  admiration,  beseech,  beset,  betray, 
besti'ide,  bestud,  befall,  betroth,  bewitch,  circumscribe,  countermand,  countermarch,  coun- 
termark, countersign,  counterfeit,  countercheck,  conscience,  consent,  constant,  congenial, 
confirm  (start  on  the  bottom-line),  condemn,  conserve,  consign,  contempt  (start  at  the  top- 
line  with  reversed  con),  continent,  forbear,  forbid,  foreground,  foregone  (let  the  initial  g 
curve  absorb  o),  forefather  (trace  first  /  downward),  foreclose,  forethought,  forfeit  (consisting 
of  logograms  for /or  and  fit),  object,  obliterate  (write  oblitrate,  using  medium  tr),  observe, 
obstruct,  obtuse,  obvious  (use  upward  v),  subside,  submit,  subdue,  surface,  surname,  transact, 
transfigure  (write  tra  figr,  separating  the  two  syllables),  transfix,  transform,  translate, 
underbid,  underline,  undermine,  underscore,  undertake  (used  upward  t),  unicorn,  bleeding, 
gleaming,  gloaming  (let  g  absorb  o),  tacking,  ticking,  stunning,  shunning,  running,  bang- 
ing, fading,  leading,  bidding,  seething,  wreathing,  ailing,  failing,  going,  waving,  thriving, 
striving,  beating,  feasting,  hoeing,  sifting,  aping,  catching,  gushing,  rushing,  perforation, 
restoration,  consternation  (start  at  the  top-line  with  reversed  con),  obligation,  reputation, 
oscillation,  confusion,  contusion,  conclusion,  transgression,  admonition,  ammunition  (start 
with  initial  vowel-stroke  and  shade  m),  contrition,  perdition,  completion,  adhesion,  appro- 
priation, otherwise,  heavenward,  concealment,  ailment,  emolument,  treatment,  employ- 
ment, boyhood,  falsehood,  perspective  (omit  r),  gentry,  shanty,  scanty,  paltry,  consistency, 
presidency. 

Annotations. — In  writing  long  words — such  as  cq^propriation— the  beginner  may 
become  bewildered  by  the  multitude  of  sounds  that  strike  the  ear.  This  difficulty  can 
easilj^  be  overcome  by  dividing  such  a  word  into  sj-llables.  The  above  word  would  then 
strike  the  ear  in  the  form,  ap-pro-p^-i-a-tion,  which  will  give  the  student  time  to  grasp  the 
sounds.  A  still  better  method  is  to  divide  the  word  into  "stenographic"  or  "outline" 
syllables, — that  is,  so  dividing  it  that  each  group  of  letters  will  be  written  with  one  stroke 
of  the  pen  ;  c(ppropricdio7i  would  then  look  like  this  :  a  {ay  stroke)-pro  (shortened  pro  =^j, 
r,  and  o  blended)-JaYio«  (long  n  placed  high  and  shaded). 

(£)  Mr.  Allan  White, 

Memphis  (spell  Memfis),  la. 

My-dear-Sir : — 

I-am  in-receipt'  of-your-kind  invitation^  to  deliver  the  open(ing)  oration  at-the 
dedication  of-your  new  hospital  and  asylum  f  but-I-regret  to-say  that  just-now  I-cannot-tell- 
you*  whether  I-shall-be  able  to  avail  myself  of-this  chance  to  visit*  your  thriving  county.^ 

However,  allow-me  to  offer  my-congratulations  to-yourself  and-the  merchants  of-your 
county,  for-the  lively  interest  which-you-(have)-shown  in-the  furtherance  and  development 
of-so-humane  an  enterprise.  The  new  institution,  which  owes  its  existence  in-a  large 
measure  to-your  activity,  is-a  credit  to-your  county  and  to-the  association'  vvhich-you  repre- 
sent f  and  show(s)-the  laudable  intention  of-the  Trades  League  to  shelter  our  unfortunate 
fellow-creatures  from-the  hardships  of  adversity.* 

I-shall-let-you-know  in-a-few  weeks  if  I-can  attend-the  celebration  ;  and  hope  to  be  able 
to  give-you  an  affirmative'"  answer." 

With  best  wishes  for-the  welfare  of-your  association  and  your  institution,  I  remain 

Yours-since(rely), 

(Here  sign  your  own  name  in  shorthand). 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  65 


Annotations. — '  Replace  in  by  the  initial  ee  stroke,  joining  it  with  r  (of  receipt).  ^  Use 
upward  v  in  invitation.  ^  Asylum  sounds  as  though  spelled  asylem.  *  In  tell-you  blend  I 
and  M.  *  Use  upward  v.  *  According  to  the  rules  of  this  lesson,  t  in  county  may  be  omitted, 
so  that  the  outline  looks  like  the  one  for  country,  except  that  in  county  k  (placed  low)  is 
shaded.  'In  association  start  with  the  initial  vowel-stroke,  then  use  the  ses  circle,  and 
follow  with  long  n  placed  high  and  shaded.  *  Use  r  and  add  the  logogram  for  present. 
'•Blend  dv  in  adversity,  then  add  rs  blended,  followed  by  ity.  '"Use  double//  omit  t, 
writing  affirmivc.  ^^  Answer  will  be  just  as  plain  if  the  last  syllable  is  missing;  use  the 
ence  stroke. 

(C)  For  a  further  exercise,  we  recommend  "The  Star  Spangled  Banner,"  the  text  for 
which  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  give  here. 

At  this  point  we  must  again  warn  you  that  speed  at  this  stage  should  not  be  attempted  ; 
all  your  efforts  should  be  directed  toward  producing  a  neat,  correct  (and  therefore  readily 
legible)  outline.  You  will  thus  gradually  absorb  the  rules,  and  the  hand  will  finally  trace 
the  outlines  without  hesitation  or  mental  effort,  just  as  naturally  as  though  you  were 
writing  longhand.  Before  that  stage  is  reached,  do  not  write  rapidly  at  the  expense  of  the 
qualities  of  correctness  and  neatness  ;  the  proper  time  for  speed  practice  will  be  mentioned 
in  a  later  lesson.  It  is  also  of  the  utmost  importance  that  you  read  all  you  write.  It  is  very 
easy  to  put  strokes  on  paper,  but  the  actual  test  of  your  proficiency  is  your  ability  to  read 
your  notes  fluently.  Should  you  come  across  an  outline  that  does  not  seena  legible  to  you, 
look  at  it  carefully  for  a  minute  or  two :  if  it  does  not  then  become  clear  to  you,  read  on ; 
the  rest  of  the  sentence  will  probably  give  you  a  clue  to  the  doubtful  outline. 


66  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  ii. 


Up  to  the  previous  lesson,  Graphic  Shorthand  is  presented  in  a  form  in  whicli  it  may 
be  used  in  the  place  of  longhand,  almost  everything  being  written  in  full.  This  must 
be  thoroughly  understood  before  the  shortening  devices  can  be  considered.  Therefore, 
unless  you  have  thoroughly  mastered  Lessons  1  to  10,  do  not  begin  with  this  Lesson  ; 
the  more  you  progress  in  the  course,  the  more  thorough  must  be  your  knowledge  of 
the  previous  Lessons.  The  present  chapter  contains  comparatively  little  new  material, 
treating  chiefly  of  such  shortening  devices  as  would  probably  suggest  themselves  to  you 
in  practice.  In  other  words,  it  gives  you  the  benefit  of  experience  in  the  use  of  speed 
expedients. 

The  shortest  outline  is  not  necessarily  the  best  outline  for  shorthand  purposes,  unless  it 
can  be  traced  conveniently,  and  therefore  swiftly.  This  principle  must  never  be  lost  sight 
of.  We  have  seen  in  the  previous  lesson  that  brevity  of  outline  is  obtained  in  three  ways  : — 
(1)  By  the  use  of  logograms  ;  (2)  By  shortening  words  ;  and  (3)  By  phrasing. 

Little  need  be  said  about  the  logograms ;  being  very  short,  they  cannot  be  contracted 
any  further,  but  they  can  be  used  to  the  fullest  extent  in  phrasing. 

The  shortening  of  words  presupposes  in  the  student  a  familiarity'  with  the  English 
language*;  having  this  familiarity,  he  is  not  forced  to  depend  upon  a  perfectly  complete 
record  of  the  sound  of  the  word.  Ou  the  contrary,  he  is  justified  in  omitting  such  parts  of 
the  word  as  will  gain  him  an  advantage  in  speed  without  sacrificing  legibility'  in  outline. 
It  is  the  purpose  of  this  lesson  and  those  following  to  give  rules  and  examples  for  these 
contractions. 

There  are  a  few  words  where  ng  is  followed  by  a  sound  akin  to  w ;  this  may  be  safely 
omitted,  writing,  for  example,  langage  for  language  (1),  angish  for  anguish  (2),  lingisf  for 
linguist  (3),  etc.  In  a  similar  manner,  medial  w  can  be  omitted  when  it  follows  k  (form- 
ing the  "qu"  sound)  ;  sequel  (4)  and  frequent  (5), — note  how  the  preceding  long  sound  is 
shown  in  these  words  by  the  long  k  :  loquacious  (6). 

The  medial  syllable  ti  may  be  omitted,  producing  very  convenient  outlines  for  words 
like  multiply  (7),  rectify  (8), — where,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  given  in  Lesson  10,  /  may 
also  be  omitted.  T  may  be  omitted  also  in  final  syllables  where  ti  has  the  long  sound,  as  in 
advertise  (9),  dramatize  (10),  etc.  :  also,  in  the  final  syllable  tic ;  dramatic  (11 U 

We  now  consider  the  endings  of  the  words.  There  are  some  words  of  two  syllables 
where  the  final  sounds,  er,  or,  es,  en,  on,  etc.,  are  unaccented,  and  so  may  be  safely  dropped  ; 
captain  (12) — captor  is  as  easily  written  in  full :  reason  (13) :  business  (14)  :  favor  (15) : 
fervor  (16) :  written  (17). 

In  thus  shortening  words,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  outline  so  formed  can  be  con- 
fused with  no  word  other  than  that  for  which  it  is  intended,  and  that  a  real  saving  in 
outline  is  achieved :  this  is  a  fundamental  rule  which  ai)plies  to  all  contractions  and  phras- 
ing, and  must  always  be  observed.  In  saying  that  "  the  outline  is  not  to  be  confused  with 
any  other  word,"  we  do  not  mean  that  it  may  have  no  meaning  bj'  itself;  it  simply  must 
not  fit  into  the  sense  of  the  sentence  :  for  example,  in  the  sentence,  "He  is  a  better  man 
than  his  brother,"  the  syllable  er  in  better  can  be  safely  omitted,  as  bet  (the  remaining 
outline)  cannot  be  taken  in  this  connection  for  anything  but  better.  From  the  foregoing, 
it  follows  that  this  rule  applies  in  all  cases  where  the  comparative  or  superlative  is  clearly 
indicated  by  the  context  (words  like  than,  by  far,  etc.). 

In  the  ending  ary,  a  and  r  are  dropped,  and  we  write  commissy  for  commissary  (18) ;  see 
also  missionary  (19), — note  in  this  word  the  convenient  blending  of  sh  and  the  preceding  m 
(extended  above  the  line  to  indicate  the  "i"  sound)  :  dictionary  (20). 

When  a  word  has  two  or  more  terminations,  only  the  last  need  be  written  :  thus,  we  find 

*  If  he  have  uot  this  knowledge,  he  would  better  not  resort  to  any  contractions  other  than  those  given  in  the 
preceding  lessons. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  67 


exceedingly  to  be  composed  of  three  parts, — exeeed-ing-li/,— and  accordingly  drop  out  the 
ing,  writing  exceedly  (21).  This  is  a  very  important  rule  (applying  also  to  some  few  words — 
like  ladyship  (see  below) — which  are  similar  in  form,  but  not  in  etymological  construction), 
and  the  examples  will  illustrate  that  it  is  safe;  necessurily  (22)  :  endlessly  (23)  :  admittedly 
(24) :  mightily  (25)  :  ladyship  (26)— in  this,  besides  the  omission  of  y,  d  is  blended  with  ^j 
(for  ship)  :  forwardness  (27) — icard  omitted  :  indispensably  (28) :  cleanliness  (29) — where  only 
one  n  is  written,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  double  consonants :  godliness  (30) :  selfish- 
ness (31)  :  faithlessness  (32)— compare  the  latter  with  faithfulness  (33),  where,  by  placing  the 
syllable  ness  low  (in  the  "  oo"  i^osition),  the  vowel-sound  of  full  is  indicated.  Note  likewise 
pitilessness  (34)  and  2^'difulness  (35) ;  strictly  speaking,  these  words  should  be  written  by 
placing  medium  t  high,  but,  as  our  prime  consideration  is  speed,  we  may  employ  the  ity 
sign,  as  it  is  just  as  legible.  The  latter  (the  ity  sign)  frequently  occurs  in  such  groups  as 
ability  and  ibilify,  at  the  ends  of  words,  where,  in  accordance  with  the  above  rule  (since  abil 
and  ibil  signify  able),  only  ity  is  retained  ;  responsibility  (36) :  legibility  (37) :  adiisabilify  (38)  : 
23robabilify  (39):  liabilities  (40)— notice  the  final  s :  cajjability  (41) — which  compare  with 
capacity  (42):  simplicity  (43):  activity  (44)— where  t  and  v  are  omitted.  All  the  foregoing 
outlines  clearly  establish  the  identity  of  the  words,  but  there  are  a  few  words  where  a  clash 
might  be  possible:  for  instance,  lovably  (45),  lovely  (46),  and  lovingly  (47).  Although  in 
most  cases  the  context  will  indicate  which  word  was  meant,  it  is  best  to  write  in  full  the 
endings  of  such  words.  Look  at  the  words  thoughtlessness  (48)  and  thoughtfulness  (49)  ;  these 
illustrate  another  self-evident  rule  :  when  a  letter  which  ends  considerablj'  above  the  line  is 
followed  by  another  letter  or  group  which  should  stand  below  the  line,  it  would  obviously 
be  too  inconvenient  to  drop  the  hand  from  the  top-  or  centre-top-  to  the  centre-line;  low 
position  in  such  cases  can  be  conveniently  indicated  by  starting  the  letter  or  syllable  to  be 
placed  low,  close  to,  and  below,  the  ending  of  the  preceding  letter. 

In  words  where  s  has  the  soft  sound  (as  in  measure),  the  sj  sign  may  be  replaced  by  sh. 
This  will  enable  us  to  blend  m  and  sh,  as  in  measure  (50),  or  to  use  the  tion  ending,  as  in 
decision  (51)  and  adhesion  (52).  In  words  like  vision  (53),  where  no  saving  of  outline  is 
effected,  it  is  not  advisable  to  make  any  substitution. 

This  substitution  of  related  sounds  can  be  applied  with  great  advantage  to  the  vowels: 
the  "a"  sound  (as  in  fact)  may  be  replaced  by  the  ordinary  "ay"  sound,  writing /ec^  for 
fact  (54),  fest  for  fast  (55),  pessage  for  passage  (56) ;  see  also  fantastic  (57) — actually 
written  fentesic.  A  glance  at  the  shorthand  figures  will  at  once  show  the  saving  in  out- 
line ;  for,  if  the  preceding  /  and  j)  in  these  words  were  to  be  shaded,  these  letters  would 
need  to  be  traced  downward,  and  would  therefore  require  a  longer  outline.  In  words 
where  no  particular  advantage  is  gained  by  this  substitution,  shading  might  as  well  be 
employed :  in  stand  (write  the  word),  for  example,  where  st  is  traced  downward,  it  is  just  as 
convenient  to  shade  it.  In  a  similar  manner,  the  "  u"  ("  yu")  sound  can  be  replaced  by  the 
"oo"  sound,  provided  always — and  this  provision  holds  good  for  all  shortening  principles — 
that  no  ambiguity  arises  :  thus,  instead  of  duty  (58),  we  can  write  dooty  ;  instead  of  dispide 
(59),  dispoot ;  but  we  should  not  apply  this  rule  to  beeiuty,  which  would  then  become  booty. 
This  principle  is  especially  valuable  when  the  "  u"  ("yu")  sound  occurs  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence,  where  it  is  not  possible  to  cross  the  preceding  letter  ;  xisage  (60) — actually 
written  oosage,  the  "oo"  sound  being  represented  bj-  the  long  initial  vowel-stroke  placed 
low;  see  also  union  (61),  and  Europe  (62)— written  oorope.  Look  carefully  at  the  word 
vsurpcdion  (63)  ;  here  the  initial  "yu"  is  replaced  hy  the  "oo",  and  the  medial  "  ur"  sound 
is  replaced  by  "er"  ;  from  this  it  follows  that  the  medial  short  "u"  sound  may  therefore  be 
replaced  by  the  ordinary  short  "ay"  sound  (as  in  bet),  so  that  depidy  (64)  is  shortened  to 
depety,  education  (65)  to  edeeation,  etc.  This  rule  applies  to  the  syllable  "ur",  as  well  as  to 
the  short  "u"  sound  proper,  and  the  "  ur"  is  not  indicated  by  low  position  in  words  like 
germ  (66) — note  how  j  and  rm  are  joined  without  connective  stroke,  clerk  (67),  and  dividge 
(68) — actually  written  divelge,  which  is  just  as  plain.  In  a  similar  manner,  u  is  not  written 
in  the  final  syllable  tude,  as  in  magnitudr  (69),  where  d  joins  nicely  with  t. 

Look  at  the  word  regular  (70),  actually  written  regler  ;  here  the  short  u  is  again  replaced 
by  the  "e"  (short  "ay"),  which,  having  a  short  sound  and  being  unessential  to  the  word, 
may  be  omitted,  just  as  it  is  often  suppressed  in  rapid  speaking.  It  may  be  laid  down  here 
as  a  general  principle,  that  the  safest  plan  in  following  these  contractions  is,  to  be  guided 
by  the  voice.    For  example,  it  would  be  unnatural,  if  not  almost  impossible,  to  say  depty 


68  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


and  therefore  we  write  depety ;  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  quite  natural  to  say  petikler  for 
particular  (71),  and  therefore  "  u"  can  be  replaced  by  ay,  and  the  r  can  be  omitted,  joining 
p  and  t  in  the  upward  sweep  (thus  expressing  the  short  "ay"  between  them),  and  saving 
considerable  time. 

However,  when  r  is  clearly  accented,  as  in  partner  (where  it  is  shaded),  it  cannot  be 
eliminated.  The  word  jxtrtieular  shows  also  another  rule  :  when  an  unaccented  letter 
which  may  be  omitted  carries  (by  shading  or  position)  an  unaccented  vowel-sound,  the 
vowel-sound  is  eliminated  with  the  letter.  For  example,  if  brilliancy  (72),  leniency  (73),  and 
resiliency  (74)  were  to  be  written  in  full,  the  enee  stroke  should  be  placed  high  and  shaded  ; 
this  ence  stroke,  however,  may  be  omitted  without  impairing  the  legibility  of  the  word. 
Look  also  at  the  word  participate  (75)  ;  here  r  is  omitted  in  analogy  to  particular,  and  no 
special  attention  is  paid  to  the  short  i  preceding  tlie  second  p  ;  note  how  the  latter  is  con- 
nected with  s  near  the  top-line  ;  thus  the  word  is  written  almost  in  full  at  reporting  speed. 

Again,  in  large  (76),  r  is  scarcely  heard,  and  so  can  be  omitted,  but  the  "a"  sound  is 
very  pronounced,  and  must  be  written  by  shading^'  (for  g),  so  that  the  word  sounds  like 
laage.  The  same  rule  applies  to  words  like  partial  ^ p>aashl  {77), park  (78),  and  sjoark  (79) — 
where  k  must  be  lengthened,  in  consideration  of  the  long  sound.  When  r  follows  a  true 
long  o  sound,  it  may  also  be  omitted ;  sjjort  (80)  :  formation  (81)  :  opjiortunity  (82)  :  fortitude 
(83)— in  the  latter  word  the  medial  syllable  ti  is  also  omitted.  In  words  like  absolute  (84), 
and  resolution  (85),  o  is  often  slighted  by  the  voice,  and  may  therefore  be  replaced  simply 
by  the  connective  vowel-stroke,  expressing  short  ''ay".  This  rule  has  been  employed 
before,  in  writing  words  like  iron,  lemon,  etc. 

From  the  preceding,  we  see  that  an  unaccented  vowel  need  not  receive  the  same  careful 
attention  that  is  given  to  the  accented  main  vowel  of  the  word  :  oprate  cannot  be  taken  for 
anything  but  operate  (86),  opra  must  read  opera  (87),  nachrel  is  natural  (88),  opration  is 
operation  (89) — which  compare  with  oppression  (90).  In  reparation,  however,  p  and  r 
cannot  be  blended,  as  this  outline  would  read  representation  ^  r-]jr({or  2>rescnt)-ation.  The 
omission  of  vowels  is  not  restricted  to  short  e  alone :  captal  is  perfectly  plain  for  capital  or 
cdpitol  (91),  both  of  which  sound  alike  ;  aptite  for  aiypetite  (82),  2^rincipl  for  principle  (93) — 
where  we  see  how  ence  and  p  are  blended. 

There  are  a  few  more  blendings,  of  rarer  occurrence,  but  very  useful  as  speed  devices. 
Upward  v  and  t  can  be  blended  nicely  by  starting  t  with  v  (94),  as  in  veterinary  (95),  where 
ar  of  the  ending  is  omitted  ;  see  also  the  blending  in  vitujieration  (96),  where  vt  is  crossed 
by  jt),  thus  clearly  expressing  the  "yu"  sound.  See  how  ch  and  /are  blended  in  the  phrase 
catch-fire  (97)  ;  the  real  importance  of  this  group  will  become  more  apparent  in  the  reporting 
style.  Look  carefully  at  the  blending  of  w  and  r  (98),  which  reads  wer,  and  is  not  a  frequent 
combination  ;  it  is  formed  on  the  same  principle  as  there,  and  is  used  for  the  word  ivhere. 
Standing  above  the  line,  where  r  represents  were,  it  reads  we-tvere  (99),  and  on  the  line,  with 
r  shaded  (for  arc),  it  reads  we-are  (100).  Tliis  sign  cannot  clash  with  jar  shortened,  as  the 
latter  must  never  he  used  alone,  and  as  ivr  is  used  only  in  the  combinations  shown  here. 
Another  convenient  expedient  is  the  blending  of  m  and  b,  which  is  expressed  by  the  loop  ; 
this  should  be  carefully  practiced.  Mb  (101),  alone,  stands  for  the  phrase  may-be.  This  loop 
can  be  used  to  advantage  in  words  like  nimble  (102),  lumber  (103) — see  how  it  blends  with  r. 
Above  the  line,  wbr  stands  as  the  word-sign  for  member  (104),  and  r  blended  initially  with 
this  outline  will  read  remember  (105). 

We  now  present  the  last  group  of 

Logograms, 

Member  (104),  as  mentioned  before,  is  rejjresented  by  tnbr  above  the  line.  S  blended 
with  wr,  will  read  someivhere  (lOG),  in  analogy  to  somewhat.  The  initial  and  final  letters  of 
luorld  (107)  stand  as  its  word-sign.  Manufacture  (108)  is  represented  by  its  three  most  prom- 
inent letters ;  it  is  unnecessary  to  shade  the  /,  as  the  principle  of  substitution  may  be 
applied.  Manufacturer  will  be  written  by  adding  r  to  k  (of  manufacture).  Reply  (109)  is 
indicated  by  the  i  stroke,  its  final  and  most  prominent  sound.  In  special  (110),  sh  is 
omitted  ;  froin  tliis  word  we  derive  especially  (110«)  by  adding  the  ay  stroke  before  sp,  while 
the  initial  ay  stroke  is  omitted  for  specially.  For  the  same  reason,  specify  will  be  written 
by  replacing  I  of  special  with  the  i  stroke,  as  the  syllable  if  is  omitted,  in  compli:uice  with 
the  rules  of  the  preceding  lesson.  Specialty  will  consequently  consist  of  sp  and  the  final  y 
stroke  ;  speciality  (1106)  is  composed  of  .sp  and  the  ity  sign. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  69 


Ordinal  Numbers 

are  written  by  adding  the  th  circle,  wherever  it  most  conveniently  joins,  to  the  respective 

Arabic  numerals.    Compare  the  first  figure  with  the  second  in  11th,  22nd,  38d,  44th,  55th, 

6t)th,  77th,  88th,  99th,  100th,  and  1000th— in  the  latter,the  th  circle  is  of  course  written  after 

tlie  thousand  mark. 

Phrasing. 

We  have  seen  in  Lesson  10,  that  th  in  the  and  position  reads  and-the  •  this  principle  can 
be  extended  to  a  few  more  expedients.  Shading  i  (for  in)  to  indicate  the  "  a  "  sound  of  and, 
will  make  it  read  and-in  (111).  Placing  o  (for  of )  below  the  line  in  the  u  (for  full)  position, 
— in  analogy  with  the  term  fulness, — we  obtain  full  o/(112).  The  word  fulness  is  written 
by  adding  ness  to  the  logogram  for  full.  Placing  v  (for  very)  low,  in  which  position  much 
would  stand,  we  obtain  very-much  (113).  Writing  v  high,  in  consideration  of  the  vowel- 
sound  of  little,  will  make  it  very-little  (114).  Rejjlacing  the  out  dot  in  about  by  th  (for  the), 
will  make  the  outline  read  about-the  (115).  Writing  th  under  the  line,  reads  under  the  (116), 
and  writing  th  above  a  word  reads  above  the,  as  shown  in  the  phrase  above-the-house  (117). 
It  will,  of  course,  not  be  wrong  to  write  the  outlines  for  under  or  above  as  shown  in  the 
preceding  lessons,  but  the  expedient  here  given  is  safe  and  brief.  When  the  aiv  (for  was) 
curve  is  absorbed  by  h  (for  he),  the  outline — which  of  course  stands  above  the  line — will 
read  he-was  (118),  which  compare  with  was-lie  (119).  By  placing  the  same  outline  low,  we 
will  read  who-ivas,  while  shading  it  in  addition  will  make  it  how-was  (120). 

At  the  beginning,  phrasing  should  be  studied  very  carefully  ;  if  this  is  done  according 
to  the  examples  and  illustrations  given,  you  will  soon  be  able  to  construct  for  your  own  use 
phrases  which  occur  frequently  in  your  particular  line  of  work,  without  being  obliged  to 
memorize  hundreds  of  phrases,  as  they  will  often  be  found  in  shorthand  text-books.  Let 
us  now  consider  a  few  words  which  are  frequently  found  in  all  lines  of  work. 

The  substitution  of  "oo"  for  '.'yu"  will  enable  us  to  write  quickly  such  groups  as  shall- 
you  (121),  which  is  written  shall-oo,  and  is  just  as  plain,  besides  saving  the  cross  stroke. 
See  also  do-you-say  (122),  did-you-see  (123),  inform-you  (124),  and  I-tell-you  (125) — where  i 
and  t,  and  I  and  u  are  blended  ;  as  usual,  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  double  I  in  tell.  The  u 
blending  can  also  be  used  to  advantage  initially,  where  it  is  shorter  than  the  crossing ;  you- 
have-said  (126) :  you-may  (127).  In  you-bake  (128),  you-tell  (129),  etc.,  the  crossing  is  em- 
ployed, as  blending  cannot  be  resorted  to. 

We  have  already  seen  that  medium  t  can  be  blended  with  s  in  phrases  like  to-save  (130) 
and  to-settle  (131) — note  how  t  of  settle  deviates  a  little  in  slant,  as  otherwise  the  s  loop  with 
t  (to)  could  not  be  formed.  In  order  to  join  t  (for  to,  but  not  for  too)  with  all  ujiward 
strokes,  medium  t  is  shortened,  as  in  to-have  (132),  to-him  (133),  to-me  (134),  to-come  (135),  as-to- 
his  (136),  to-which-the  (137)— w  is  included  here  because  its  initial  curve  starts  a  little  below 
the  centre-top-line,  and  is  therefore  traced  upward  for  a  short  distance  before  it  assumes  a 
downward  direction.  Compare  to-go-therc  (138),  to-gather  (139),  and  together  (140)  ;  although 
the  latter  is  one  word  in  longhand,  it  comes,  like  some  other  words,  under  the  heading  of 
phrasing,  being  composed  of  two  separate  shorthand  outlines. 

In  is,  we  have  another  frequent  word  ;  is-great  (141),  it-is-great  (142)* — formed  in  accord- 
ance with  it-is,  see  Lesson  10,  (207) ;  compare  this  outline  with  it-is-so-great  (143),  where  s  of 
so — following  s  of  is — has  been  omitted,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  double  consonants. 
He-is-not  (144),  written  really  his-not,  is  formed  on  the  same  principle  as  it-is-not,  and  will 
not  clash  with  hls-not.  The  sound  of  the  words  this-is  (145)  can  evidently  be  expressed  by 
replacing  the  s  circle  of  this  by  the  double  s  circle  (145a).  Applying  the  double  circle  in  the 
phrase  is-this  (146),  we  obtain  also  a  very  brief  outline.  Look  carefully  at  the  phrase  is-the 
(147a),  which,  if  we  add  th  to  s,  would  look  like  (147) ;  as  the  two  small  circles  in  succession 
are  not  very  handy,  we  consolidate  them  into  one  circle  of  the  same  height  as  the  double 
circle,  but  made  in  the  th  direction,  and  call  it  therefore  the  double  th  circle.  Note  the  difTer- 
ence  between  ivhich-is  (148),  ivhich-is-this  (149),  and  ivhich-is-thc  (150).  The  usefulness  of  the 
double  s  and  double  th  circle  is  well  illustrated  by  the  phrases  is-this-not-so  (151),  ivhy-is-the 
(152),  and  ivhy-is-this-xo  (153).  The  double  th  circle  can  also  be  used  conveniently  in  groups 
like  as-the  (154) — which  compare  with  at-tlic  (155),  and  asthc-same  (156),  which  would  other- 
wise necessitate  three  small  circles  in  succession  ;  note  also  as-fhose  (157). 

*  If  it  is  desired  to  write  it's  great,  an  apostrophe  is  used. 


70  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


We  have  seen  before  that  in  is  often  represented  by  the  initial  ee  stroke  ;  this  can  also 
be  applied  to  phrasing;  in-the  (158),  within-the  (159),  in-all  (160),  in-my  (161),  in-question 
(162),  and  (notice  particularly)  in-full  (163).  However,  the  ee  stroke  cannot  be  employed 
where  it  would  clasli ;  compare  in-their  (164)  with  either  (165)  {either  may  also  be  pronounced 
eyether,  when  it  is  begun  with  the  i  stroke),  also  in-his  (166),  and  in-ivhom  (167),  — wliere  the  ee 
stroke  below  the  line  would  indicate  u.  Compare  in-this-much  (168)  with  in-as-much  (169)  ; 
for  the  sake  of  distinction,  s  is  shaded  in  the  latter  word. 

As  illustrated  by  it-is  and  he-is^  s  alone  can  be  used  to  indicate  is ;  consequently,  by  add- 
ing it  to  there,  the  outline  will  become  there-is  (170)— which  will  not  clash  with  theirs  :  as- 
there-is-not  (171).  Thr  (for  there)  blended  with  was,  will  make  the  outline  read  there-was  : 
there-ivas-not  (172).  Shading  r  of  thr  will  make  it  read  they-are  (173) :  as-they-are  (174)  ; 
compare  this  with  they-were  (175).  Adding  to  tlir  another  r  shaded,  making  thrr  (the 
double  r  being  shaded),  we  obtain  there-are  (176) :  as-there-are  (177). 

In  phrasing,  it  can  be  shortened,  so  that  it  reaches  only  from  the  top-  to  the  centre-top- 
-line  ;  it-{has)-heen  (178) — where  has  is  omitted  :  it-has  (179)  :  it-had-not-been  (180)  :  it-was-not- 
so  (181)  ;  note  also  not-it  (182).  The  auxiliary  verb  have  may  be  omitted  wherever  it  is 
implied  by  grammatical  considerations  ;  ive-must-{have)-heen  (183) :  they-cannot-{have)-been 
(184)  :  they-could-not-{have)-been  (185)  :  we-should-not-{have)-had  (186)  :  you-would-not-{have)- 
bcen  (187)  :  they-should-{have)-had  (188)  :  fhey-should-nof-(have)-had  (189)  :  to  (have)-been 
(190)  :  to-[have)-had  (191)  :  yoa-)night-not-{Jiave)-been  (192). 

Note  have-you-been  (193)— i/o«  expressed  by  the  crossing  of  h  and  n  {been) ;  compare 
this  with  you-{have)-been  (194),  where  h  is  omitted.  See  also  coidd-you-{have)-been  (195), 
shoidd-you-{hav€)-becn  (196),  could-you-not-{have)-been  (197),  should-you-{have)-had  (198), 
coidd-you-{have)-had  (199),  could-you-not-{have)-had  (200).  Compare  carefully  where-{hav()- 
you-been  (201),  how-{have)-you-been  (202),  and  tahat-{have)-you-been  (203)  ;  to  distinguish 
these  from  ivhere-you-{have)-been  (204),  hoiv-you-{have)-been  (205),  and  ivhat-yon-{have)-been 
(206),  we  effect  the  crossing  in  the  latter  three — similarly  to  you-have-been — by  means  of  the 
connective  vowel-stroke,  which  admits  of  placing  been  in  the  regular  position.  These  com- 
binations, which  are  brief  enough  for  verbatim  reporting,  should  be  well  studied,  for  they 
occur  often  and  are  always  uttered  rapidly. 

Ever  should  not  be  phrased  ;  see  the  difference  between  ivhatever  (207)  and  ivhat-ivere 
(208),  luhichever  (209)  and  whleh-were  (210),  lioxvever  (211),  how-were  (212),  and  how-are  (213) 
— showing  that  shading  /•  in  these  groups  will  turn  were  into  are.  When  ever  starts  a 
phrase,  as  in  ever-since,  or  when  it  is  preceded  by  so,  it  can  be  phrased ;  as  the  o  is  not 
accented,  it  can  be  omitted,  admitting  of  blendings  ;  ivhat-so-ever  (214),  which-so-cver  (215), 
where-so-ever  (216),  how-so-ever  (217),  ever-so-much  (218). 

When  .so  occurs  thus  medially  and  its  vowel  has  no  accent,  o  may  be  safely  omitted ; 
so-far  (219) :  so-many  (220)  :  so-great  (221)— which  compare  with  is-so-great  (222),  where  o  is 
accented.  O  always  has  the  stress  of  the  voice  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  in  which  case  it  must 
be  written  ;  I-am-not-so  (223)  :  perhaps-so  (224) :  it-is-so  (225)  :  it-is-not-so  (226) :  if-so  (227)  : 
very-much-so  (228)  :  he-was-so  (229)  ;  observe  how  s  forms  a  convenient  connection  in  all 
these  phrases.  Also  note  who-said-so  (230)  and  must-be-so  (231),  where  s  is  blended  with  d 
and  with  6. 

O  is  slighted  by  the  voice,  and  is  therefore  omitted,  when  it  occurs— as  in  or — between 
two  words  which  can  be  phrased ;  rich-or-poor  (232),  white-or-black  (233)  ;  these  phrases 
sound  almost  like  richerpoor,  ivhitcrblack,  when  quickly  uttered. 

See  how  all  and  over  are  blended  to  read  all-over  (234),  and  how  the  double  r  is  used  in 
moreover  (235). 

It  is  a  fundamental  maxim  in  shorthand,  that  the  more  familiar  a  word  or  a  phrase  is, 
the  more  it  can  be  abbreviated  :  thus,  dears,  at  the  beginning  of  a  letter,  will  hardly  read 
anything  but  Dear-Sir  (236),  while  s  added  to  this  will  read  Dear-Sirs  (237).  J  (for  the  soft 
sound  of  g)  in  the  same  place,  can  read  only  Gentlemen.  Miss  is  well  represented  by  the 
prefix  m,is,  from  which  we  derive  Mrs,  (238),  by  blending  it  with  s.  To  distinguish  this  from 
Misses  (239),  we  use  the  regular  m  and  the  double  .s  circle  in  the  latter.  Dear  ma-  {m  shaded 
is  a  safe  abbreviation  for  Dear  Madam  (240).  Observe  how  the  phrase  in-compliance-ivith 
(241)  admits  of  a  convenient  blending  of  com  and  with,  so  that  only  pliance  is  omitted.  The 
ence  stroke,  starting  from  the  line,  stands  practically  for  ansiver.  Placing  it  high,  to  indi- 
cate the  i  (for  in)  sound,  will  make  it  read  i-answer  =  in-answer  (242),  and  blending  it  witl) 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  71 


the  i  stroke,  will  make  it  I-answer  (243).  The  commercial  abbreviations  inst  {I.  e.,  of  this 
month  and  instance)  are  represented  by  a  shorthand  i.  In-replij-to-you-favor  would  be  incor- 
rect, and  this  phrase  can  only  mean  in-replij-to-your-favor  (244)  ;  consequently,  both  to  and 
the  /■  of  your  are  omitted,  while  you  is  expressed  by  crossing  the  i  of  reply  with  the/ of /avor. 
The  following 

Reading  Exercise 

should  be  carefully  studied  with  the  aid  of  the.  annotations.    The  phrased  groups  should 
receive  particularly  careful  attention  : — 

(245)  Mr.  S.  C.  Owens, 

Detroit,  Mich. 

(246)  My-dear-Sir  :— 

I-am-in-receipt-(of)-your  Hues  of-the  6th  inst.,  and-in-reply-(to)-your  favor, 
I-take-the  liberty  to-say  : — 

(247)  Since-my  last  report,  I  went  myself  to-see  the  driver,  and,  as-said-before,  asked- 
him  what  he-knew  about-the  transaction.  (248)  He-had-no  receipt  to-show-for-the  ship- 
ment ;  I-am-not-sure  whether-or-not  I-told-3'ou-so  iu-my  previous  letter,  and  therefore  I- 
mention-this-again,  so-as-to  remind-you  of-all-the  particulars.  (249)  However,  I-am-sure 
it-will-be-no  impossibility  to-find-out  very-soon  who-is  to  blame-for-the  blunder,  though  it- 
will-not-be  an  easy  task.  (250)  Unfortunately,  this  odd,  so-called  Division  Examiner,  who 
speaks  so-much  about-the  emancipation  of-the  laboring  class,  did-not  want  to-lay-the  matter 
before-the  committee  of-the  federation  to-secure  their  co-operation  in-the  prosecution  of-the 
directors  of-the  corporation.  (251)  He-says  it-is-impossible  to-lose,  and  we-will  win  easily ; 
but  I-am-not-at-all-disposed  to-think  so  because  he-says-so,  though  I-hope  I-may-be  mistak 
(en).  (252)  In-compliancewith-the  request  of-your  committee,  I-send-you  also  a  pamphlet 
for-your  inspection.  (253)  Tiie  local  Union  of  Operator(s)  is-considering  the  advisability 
of  distributing  a-few  thousand  of-them  in-this-city,  and  we-hopeyou-will  send-us  an  organ- 
izer to  systematize  the  movement.  (254)  This-is-the  wish  whieh-all-the  representatives 
expressed,  at-the  last  meeting,  and  we  trust-you-will  see-j^our  way  clear  to-give-us  a  good 
man.  (255)  Under-the  proper  management,  it-seems-possible  that  we-can  accomplish  our 
end. 

(256)  Without-any  further  news  for-the-present,  I-remaln 

(257)  Yours-tru(ly), 

(258)  Herman  Wendel,  Bowers, 

(259)  Secretary,  Grand  Lodge. 

Annotations. — The  address  of  this  letter  shows  how  the  initials  S  and  C  are  distin- 
guished according  to  their  sounds,  the  former  being  written  c.s,  and  the  latter  see.  Z  would 
be  written  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  circle  would  be  smaller.  For  the  other 
initials,  the  Graphic  characters  of  the  alphabet  are  written  just  as  in  longhand  ;  for  g,  its 
alphabetical  (g),  not  its  phonetic  equivalent  {]),  must  be  written.  As  to  the  vowels,  the  a 
dot  (with  initial  and  final  stroke)  stands  for  a,  the  ay  stroke  for  e.  The  others  are  self-ex- 
planatory. In  Owens,  observe  how  the  short  "ay"  sound  after  o  is  expressed  by  the  shad- 
ing of  71.  Look  at  the  brief,  but  complete,  outline  for  Detroit  (dtroif)  :  long  t  is  placed  low 
only  when  it  precedes  an  "  oi"  sound;  otherwise  it  does  not  change  position.  Note  the 
outline  for  Michigan,  abbreviated  to  Mich.,  in  accordance  with  the  longhand  abbreviation. 
This  principle  may  be  applied  to  all  names  of  States  and  Territories. 

(246)  See  how  conveniently  i  and  t  (of  take)  blend  in  the  phrase  I-take-the. 

(247)  Also  notice  the  blending  of  the  ence  stroke  and  «i  to  form  since-my.  In  as-said- 
be/ore,  only  one  s  is  written. 

(248)  See  how  sh  and  /  are  phrased  in  to-show-for-the.  Also  observe  the  group  I-am- 
not-sure,  which,  though  not  brief  so  far  as  actual  length  is  concerned,  can  be  traced  very 
rapidly,  and  represents  all  the  logograms  and  words  in  the  phrase ;  compare  the  blending 
of  sh  with  the  downward  t  (as  in  this  phrase),  and  the  blending  of  th  with  upward  t,  as  in 
that-she,  Lesson  10,  (195).  Whcther-or-not  is  actually  written  whetherernot.  I-told-you-so  can 
also  be  traced  at  verbatim  speed,  likewise  I-mention-thi.^-again,  where  /  is  phrased  with  the 
logograms  for  mention,  this,  and  again.  Note  the  omission  of  o  in  so-as-to,  and  the  con- 
venient blending  of  you  in  remind-you. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


(249)  Compare  I-am-sure,  where  7,  m,  and  sh  are  blended,  with  I-am-notsure\  also 
compare  the  groups  it-will-be  and  it-will-not-be.  Note  the  shortened  t  joined  to  find,  and  see 
how  conveniently  the  out  dot  is  added.  See  also  how  easily  the  long  n  stroke  joins  with  v 
(for  very)  by  means  of  the  s ;  observe  the  same  convenient  joining  in  task.  Blame  is  in 
most  cases  followed  by  for,  which  blends  with  the  former  nicely,  as  shown  in  blame-for-the. 
All  these  phrases  are  of  very  frequent  occurrence,  and  the  fact  that  they  can  be  written  at 
verbatim  speed  will  greatly  help  the  student,  and  will  permit  him  to  write  other  and 
longer  words  in  full. 

(250)  Look  carefully  at  the  word  odd,  starting  with  o,  followed  by  d,  shaded  to  indicate 
the  "a"  sound  of  o  ;  if  this  were  not  done,  the  outline  would  read  ode.  Observe  o  omitted 
in  so-called,  admitting  of  blending  s  and  k.  Division  has  the  soft  sound  of  sh,  but  we  sub- 
stitute the  hard  sound,  writing  the  word  divition,  resulting  in  a  short  outline.  Notice  the 
(unaccented)  /  omitted  in  emancijKition,  where  ence  and  p  are  consequenth'  joined.  The 
phrase  to-lay-the  will  be  found  very  convenient  to  the  hand,  as  is  always  the  case  when  t  is 
followed  by  I  or  th.  Strictly  speaking,  com,  in  committee,  should  be  followed  by  ty  placed 
high  ;  the  syllable  sounds  like  ity,  however,  and  is  therefore  so  written.  In  federation,  the 
second  e  is  omitted.  See  how  conveniently  t[o)  and  s  (of  secure)  can  be  joined.  Compare 
co-operation  and  corporation,  the  first  r  being  omitted  in  the  latter ;  also  see  how  clearly 
the  i  in  directors  is  expressed  by  d{r)  extended  above  the  line. 

(251)  Observe  again  the  convenient  phrasing  of  t  and  I  in  to-lose.  We-will  is  phrased  by 
joining  I  to  iv ;  the  outline  could  not  be  taken  for  tvail,  as  the  latter  Avord  would  have  no 
meaning  in  this  sentence.  In  easily,  you  will  notice  that  only  the  last  termination  is 
written.  I-am-not-at-all-disposed  is  a  frequent  phrase,  and  as  shown  by  the  shorthand  out- 
line, is  completely  written  at  verbatim  speed  ;  see  how  easily  disp>  (of  disposed)  joins  with 
all,  and  how  readily  medium  st  is  employed  in  the  latter  word.  To-think  shows  again  how 
easily  t  and  th  are  phrased, — t  being  written  first,  of  course.  Observe  also  the  groups  it- 
miist-be-so,  he-says-so,  I-hope,  and  I-may-be. 

(252)  See  how  I  and  u  are  added  to  send,  to  form  I-send-you.  Look  at  the  convenient 
outline  for  pamj)hlet,  where  a  mph  is  replaced  by  e  and  m2ih  (=  mf)  blended. 

(253)  Operator  is  literally  written  opratr ;  the  context  clearlj'  indicates  that  the  word 
should  be  operators,  and  s  need  not  be  written.  Look  at  the  phrase  is-considering,  where  is 
is  utilized  to  form  the  initial  part  of  con  ;  this  is  a  perfectly  safe  and  very  convenient  device  ; 
observe  also  how  r,  though  blended,  is  clearly  distinguished.  Also  note  how  the  ity  sign  is 
utilized  in  in-this-eity,  where  .s  is  written  only  once.  Look  at  the  phrase  loe-hope-you-will, 
where  u  blends  conveniently  with  x>  and  is  crossed  by  the  vowel-stroke  of  will.  See  how  con- 
veniently lis  is  added  to  send.  R  is  omitted  in  organizer,  as  is  also  the  second  t  in  system- 
atize. 

(254)  Note  representatives,  formed  by  adding  the  prefex  r  and  the  termination  ives  to  p?' 
(log.  for  present). 

(255)  Compare  it-see7ns-2)Ossible,  where  s  in  seems  has  been  omitted  (because  it  must  be 
implied),  with  the  phrase  it-is-imj^ossiblc  in  (251).  Also,  note  in  accomplish  the  initial  ay 
stroke,  to  indicate  which,  the  initial  stroke  of  com  is  raised  from  the  line. 

(256)  Without,  having  the  same  outline  as  with  (except  that  tvithout  stands  low),  is 
phrased  in  the  same  manner  as  ivith.  I-remain  could  not  be  mistaken  for  I-mean  at  the  end 
of  a  letter. 

(257)  See  how  yours  is  joined  to  true,  which  in  this  connection  can  mean  nothing  but 
truly. 

(258)  In  Bowers,  the  ow  dot  must  be  employed,  as  it  is  followed  by  another  vowel. 

(259)  In  secretary,  ar  is  omitted.  Compare  lodge  with  the  outline  for  large  (76)  ;  the 
latter  has  a  longer  sound,  the  connective  vowel-stroke  between  I  and  J  is  therefore  longer 
than  it  is  in  lodge. 

Before  progressing  further,  you  should  be  able  to  read  the  letter  without  hesitation,  just 
as  though  it  were  printed  in  type,  and  should  also  be  able  to  write  it  at  a  speed  considerablj' 
greater  than  your  speed  for  longhand  writing.  But  never  forget  that  your  outlines  must  be 
clear  and  neat ;  otherwise,  speed  is  useless. 


Lesson  ii.    ^/\ 


I 


/o 


^p  r^ 


/^ 


""w^^^-Tg^  V^^ 


-t^ 


-e^  f /?^  Q/)/--  -> 


3o 


C-f..C^  <.  ^^T-^.^-^.^^^ 


/o6 


1/30.  c  r/. 


^ 


^  </   . 


r; ,/  /^  ^/,  .?^,  ^^-f,  ,T;^  /^  7,/r<T/r,  ^^^  ^,  ^ 


/// 


^  '   x- 


//^ 


//£- 


.  ^  "a.  /^  /^y  3  ^  ^  r^'  ^<^  ^  ;?  ^  /^ 


Vii- 


/^rc 


^^T'o/DA-^^^^r^ 


^/'r^j9.rL2  _a^9^/^/i^/r:  ^..  ;^ 


'^ 


/7(9 


«_y 


=^^- ^0   -^     T^    1, 


Jl 


/7-i 


'7 


A^ 


/So 


^ 


,J^-^ Z^^ 


Z^ 


/S>5- 


jG 


P-^_ 


75- 


<^^    ^.<v6^ 


**^  ^or  i/O  -2'^  ^-iO  ^  ^^11/^ 


1 


:31 


jL 


^ 


^A? 


L 


vp  (y-:z^,  r 


2>^ 


J:^ 


^r^zy 


/(I    ^y^f '^f^  '^    ^' -^    i-^s^ 


^v? 


:ie^ 


V 


^■^     ^ 


^ 


.  7  ^/  (Cv  /^-^  r^Z 


2^0 


^ 


^^""■■i^^^'^^'f^ 


t^ 


^r> 


UL 


^^lOr^ 


y^ 


/^ 


^ 


s^  t^^  /^-w^ 


i^ 


jC^--^    iAa 


-^ 


707r>-v-^   V 


XK 


^^ 


^ 


-^ 


.9^.r^/0     ^^,     (7. 


A  ■  "w^  ^ .^  n^  ^^ 


-^^ 


'% 


/ 


^ 
L 


-o-^^. 


/■^ 


7^ 


-?-g7. 


72^ 


r. 


ilex. 


^^  ^ 


■^^ 


iJ-^ 


^j6 


^ 


xsK 


o 

XS-, 


i 


\  c^  6/t^j  ^^J-y  /€  ^; 


L 


74  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Writing  Exercises. 

{A)  Trenton,  N.  J.,  May  6,  1896. 

Mr.  Arthur^  G.  Spencer'^ 

Toledo,  O. 
Dear  Sir : — 

Permit-me  to  introduce'  the  bearer,  Mr.  L.  F,  Brewer,  of  New- York,  who  visit(s) 
your  city  on  an  extended  tour  through  the  Middle  West.  He  is  especially  interested  in-the- 
manufacture  of  artistic  catalogues*  for  first-class  houses^  in-your  section,  and  would-like  to 
be  introduced  to-the  secretary  of-the  Printers'  Association,  which  introduction  I-hope^-you- 
can  procure  for  hini.  Mr.  Brewer  is-an  old  friend-of-iniue,  and  any  favor  you-raay-be-able 
to-show-hini,  will-be  very-much  appreciated  by 

Yours  truly, 

Frank  Humphrey. 

(B)  Boston,  Mass.,  June  23,  1898. 
Messrs.  Jos.  Fletcher  &  Bros., 

Seattle,'  Wash. 
Gentlemen  : — 

In-answer-(to)-your-favor-of-the  8th  inst.,  we  wish  to-say  tliat  we  should-not- 
(have)-been  so  disappointed  about  the  non-arrival  of-the  goods,  if  we  had-not-had-the  con- 
signment advertis(ed)  in-all-the  papers.  We-are  therefore  exceedingly  sorry  about-the  delay, 
which-will,  in-all-probability,  cause  us-a  great  loss. 

Could-you-not-have  dispatch (ed)  a  special  car,  when  we-telegraph(ed)-you  to-send-us  at- 
least-some-of-the  lots?  We- were  very-much  embarass(ed)  through  your  action;  and  in-as- 
much  (as)  we-are-not  at  fault  in-this-matter,  we-are-not  inclined  to-stand-the^  loss  alone. 
For-this  reason,  we-must  ask-you-for-a'  reasonably  liberal  allowance.  Under-the  circum- 
stance(s),  we  trust  that-you-will-grant  it,  and  that  it-will-be  considerably  above-the-custom- 
ary^°  average. 

We-hope  that-you-will  seethe  advisability  of  shipping  all  goods  in  future  strictly  in- 
compliance-with-our  instructions,  so-as-to  avoid  all  complications  and  delaj'S. 

Yours  trul3', 

Albert  Myers  &  Co. 

(C)  Erie,  Pa.,  July  17,  1898. 

The  North- Western  Navigation  Co.. 

Duluth,  Minn. 
Gentlemen  : — 

Will-you-oblige-us"    bj'^   kindly  giv(ing)-us   what    information    you-may-have 

about-the  ability,  character,  and  financial  responsibility  of  Mr.  Morris  Winner,  of-your  city, 

who-has  appli(ed)  for  our  agency  for-the  territory'^  in-which  we-were  formerly  represent(ed) 

by  Messrs.  Frank  Victor  &  Co.  ? 

We-shall-be-pleased  to  return  the  favor  and  we  thank-you-in  advance  for  giv(iug)  this 

matter  your  attention. 

Await(ing)-your  early  reply,  we-remain, 

Yours  truly. 

The  Lake  Steamship  Co. 

Annotations.— In  Arthur^,  final  r  is  blended  with  th.  Use  ence  stroke.^  Substitute  oo 
for  u.^  Write  kat,  and  connect  g  by  means  of  the  o.*  Use  double  s  circle,  placed  low  and 
shaded.*  Blend  p  and  u.^  Do  not  neglect  to  shade  the  V  Trace  stand  upward.*  Cross  k 
(of  ask)  with  f.^  Place  (he  above  customary}"  Write  es  for  ;/.§."  Omit  the  medial  syllable 
it}^ 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


lO 


Lesson  No.  12. 


As  shown  in  the  preceding  lesson,  two  points  must  be  kept  in  view  when  an  increase 
in  speed  is  aimed  at  :  tliat  the  contraction  of  outlines  niu^^t  be  safe, — that  is,  tlie  full 
outhnes  must  be  contracted  in  such  a  manner  tliat  tlie  sliortened  outline  will  uneciuivocally 
suggest  the  correct  word  ;  phrasing  must  be  attempted  only  in  those  outlines  whicli  readily 
admit  of  it. 

There  are  some  frequently  recurring  words  of  three  or  more  syllables,  which  can  be 
shortened  by  followini^'  the  voice.  In  coDDtinnicalion  (1),  for  example,  uie  is  slighted 
by  the  voice,  and  can,  therefore,  be  omitted  ;  comrau  ation  could  not  mean  anything 
else.  The  same  principle  applies  to  the  section  id,  in  eandidafe  (2) — written  eandate, — 
and  in  dividend  (3) — written  divend.  In  immediately  (4),  very  little  stress  is  laid  on  dicde, 
and  these  letters  can  be  omitted,  leaving  a  suggestive  and  unmistakable  outline.  The  same 
reasoning  applies  to  difficulty  (5) — written  diffy,  and  to  several  (6) — where  sev  has  the  stress 
of  the  voice. 

As  indicated  by  several,  in  some  of  these  words,  the  beginning  indicates  the  word  so 
clearly  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  the  remainder:  it  is,  for  example,  always  safe  to 
write  merely  under,  to  indicate  the  word  understand ;  to  use  the  prefix  inter,  for  interest; 
super,  for  superintendent;  contra  for  contradict ;  to  write  recipro  for  reciprocate  (7)/  quo 
for  quotation  (8). 

This  shortening  of  words  can  be  applied  especially  to  familiar  phrases.  When  less  is 
phrased,  for  instance,  as  in  m,uch-less  (9),  more-or-less  (10),  nevertheless  (11),  unless  (12),  etc., 
s  may  be  dropped,  the  short  ay  stroke,  indicating  the  vowel-sound,  being  retained. 

Instead  of  writing  case  in  full,  we  simply  write  k  (for  c)  ;  this  applies,  however,  only 
when  the  word  is  phrased.  Compare  in-case  (13),  in-a-case  (14) — note  the  ay  stroke  between 
the  two  words,  in-this-case  (15),  and  in-som,e-cases  (16).  In  such  cases  cannot  be  phrased,  as 
such  is  best  written  alone.  See  also  in-no-case  (17),  and  in-all-cases  (18).  In  the  phrase  is- 
this-not-{the)-ease  (19),  the  article  is  omitted,  as  it  is  necessarily  implied  in  this  combination  ; 
the  same  applies  to  if-this-is-{the)-case  (20),  which  compare  with  if-this-is-so  (21)  ;  note  also 
circumstances-{of-the)-case  (22),  where  of-the  may  be  omitted. 

In  accordance  with  the  above  principle,  we  drop  the  ence  stroke  in  at-oncc  (23),  joining 
the  ay  (for  at)  stroke  with  w  placed  low  (indicating  the  "  u"  sound). 

"We  eat  in-o  to  live"  will  certainly  read,  "We  eat  in  order  to  live"  ;  in-order,  therefore, 
can  be  shortened  as  shown  in  (24),  and,  as  this  combination  is  always  followed  by  to,  we 
need  not  write  the  latter,  and  may  read  the  outline  in-o,  "  in  order  to-^'' 

In  the  same  manner,  ivell  can  be  represented  in  familiar  groups  by  its  initial  letter 
alone  ;  not  very  well  (25) :  full  tvell  (26)  :  just-as  well  (27)  :  it-is-ivell-knoivn  (28).  In  none  of 
these  groups  can  tv  be  mistaken  for  ive,  as  the  latter  would  have  no  meaning. 

"  I  beg  to  ha  you"  requires  no  guessing  ;  it  reads,  "  I  beg  to  hand  you"  ;  nd  is  dropped 
in  hand,  and  the  vowel-sound  is  expressed  hy  shading  h,  as  usual ;  to-hand  (29) :  at-hand  (30) : 
in-hand  (31)  :  on-hand  (32). 

Applying  this  rule  also  to  that  (33),  which  is  a  very  frequent  word,  we  can  phrase  the 
latter  very  conveniently ;  that-I-have  (34)  :  that-I-hand-you  (35)  :  thaf-I-{havc)-bccn  (36) — 
which  compare  with  thine  (37)  :  that-I-say  (38) :  that-I-see  (39)  :  that-I-am  (40)  :  that-I-may 
(41)  :  that-I-am-not  (42)  :  that-is  (43)  :  that-is-{to)-say  (44) — where  to  is  omitted  and  s  is  written 
only  once;  the  phrase  will  not  clash  with  that-is-a,  which  would  also  have  a  shorter  ay 
stroke.  Note  also  fhat'f<  (45) — written  on  the  same  principle  as  else ;  that-is-so  (46)  :  that-ii<- 
{the)-case  (47)  :  by-that  (48) :  for-that  (49) :  that-his  (50)  :  that-in-his  (51)  :  that-in-this  (52)  : 
that-this  (53)  :  that-this-is  (54)  :  that-is-the  (55)  :  is-fhat  (56)— note  the  double  th  circle  :  in-that- 
case  (57) — which  compare  with  in-the-case  (58)  :  of-that  (59)  :  ail-that  (60)  :  how-was-that  (61) — 
where  h  has  absorbed  the  aiv  curve,  and  admits  of  being  joined  with  th  (shaded)  :  who-ica-'^- 
that  (62). 


76  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Since  th  iu  the  and  position  reads  and-the,  and  since  th  sliaded  reads  that,  th  shaded 
and  in  the  and  position  will  logically  read  and-that ;  and  the  double  th  circle  shaded  and 
in  the  and  position  will  read  and-that-the. 

Look  with  particular  care  at  the  outline  for  that-the  (63),  where  we  can  evidently 
employ  the  double  th  circle  shaded,  so  that  (63a)  reads  that-the.  Note  the  difference  between 
they  (64),  that-a  {65}— th  being  shaded  in  the  latter,  and  that-they  (66).  In  analogy  with 
the  groups  of  are,  explained  in  the  preceding  lesson,  we  can  now  form  convenient  groups 
for  such  phrases  as  that-they-are  (67),  wliich  compare  with  they-are,  Lesson  11,  (173),  and 
as-they-are  (68)  ;  note  also  that-they-were  (69)  :  there-are  (70)  :  that-there-are  (71) :  that-there- 
are-not  (72j  :  ivas-thai-the-man  (73).  There  are  a  few  cases  in  which  no  advantage  would  be 
gained  by  this  contraction  of  that,  and  it  might  then  be  just  as  well  to  write  it  out  in  full. 
That-you-are  (7-1),  for  example,  can  be  written  most  conveniently^  by  crossing  t  (of  that)  with  r. 

In  the  above  examples,  the  initial  part  of  the  word  has  been  used  ;  the  word  time  (75)  is 
best  abbreviated  by  writing  the  final  part,  which,  in  accordance  with  the  rule,  must  stand 
above  the  line  to  show  that  it  is  the  end  of  the  word.  Time  occurs  in  many  familiar  groups, 
and  can  therefore  be  phrased  ;  such-time  (76)  :  some-time  (77)  :  foi'-some-time  (78) :  every-time 
(79)  :  at-what-time  (80) :  in-ivhich-time  (81)  :  in-all-that-time  (82)  :  at-the-time  (83) :  at-that- 
time  (84) — th  shaded  :  as-that-time  (85)  :  as-the-tirne-for-the  (86) — note  how  conveniently  time 
and  for  are  blended  :  at-thc-time-for-the  (87)  :  in-the-course-{of)-tlme  (88)  :  {a)-question-{of)- 
time  (89) :  from-that-time-on  (90)  :  at-all-times  (91)  :  in-the-'mean-time  (92) :  some-time-ago  (93)  : 
length-{of)-time  (94).  If  next-time  (95)  is  written  in  one  outline,  one  t  would  be  suppressed  ; 
consequently,  t  of  next  is  also  dropped  in  phrasing  (according  to  the  rule  on  double  conso- 
nants) ;  this  rule  applies  to  every  case  where  tiyne,  when  phrased,  is  preceded  by  a  t  stroke  ; 
last-time  (96)  :  night-time  (97).  Both  a-question-of-time  (89)  and  for-the-Vnne-heing  (98)  occur 
alwaj's  in  the  same  combination  of  words ;  in  the  former,  therefore,  a  and  of  are  dropped, 
and  in  the  latter,  for-the  is  omitted. 

The  question  as  to  whether  the  initial  or  final  part  of  a  word  is  to  be  used  is  not  arbi- 
trarily settled  ;  a  comparison  of  the  abbreviations  for  hand  and  that  with  the  contracted 
outline  for  time,  will  show  that  in  the  latter  word  the  final  part  is  smaller  than  is  the  initial, 
and  also  admits  of  convenient  expression  of  the  vowel-sound.  This  rule  should  be  borne  well 
in  mind,  since  it  is  of  great  importance  in  the  contraction  of  outlines,  as  will  be  shown  later. 

Day  (99)  is  another  word  which  may  be  represented  by  its  final  sound  ;  Ave  write  simply 
the  ay  stroke  above  the  line.  This,  again,  aj^plies  only  to  familiar  groups.  The  stroke 
should  be  made  of  good  length,  to  indicate  the  long  sound  of  "ay".  If  we  add  it  to  the 
shortened  to,  we  obtain  to-day  (100).  The  same  stroke  can  also  be  used  in  writing  the  names 
of  the  days  of  the  week  ;  Sunday  (101)  :  Monday  (102)  :  Tuesday  (103)  :  Wednesday  (104).  In 
Friday  (105)  and  Saturday  (106),  day  is  evidently  more  conveniently  written  in  full,  as 
shown  by  the  outlines. 

If  we  place  the  outline  for  to-dny  below  the  line,  in  the  "  oo"  position,  the  vowel-stroke 
will  indicate  the  "  oo"  sound,  so  that  the  phrase  reads  to-do  (107)  ;  to-do-so  (108).  Only  in 
the  phrase  to-do,  however,  is  do  thus  written  ;  in  all  other  cases,  the  logogram  is  employed. 

As  mentioned  in  the  previous  lessons,  icifh  and  without,  having  practically  the  same 
outline,  are  phrased  in  a  similar  manner  ;  observe  especially  ivithout-you  (109)  :  ivithout-their 
(110)  :  without-your  (111) :  without-this  (112)  :  ivithoid-us  (113). 

Note  another  (114) :  one-another  (115)  :  from-each-other  (116)  :  from-other  (117)  :  from- 
one-another  (118).  In  the  last  phrase,  you  will  notice  that  the  lo  of  one  is  omitted,  n 
standing  low,  as  usual.  One  is  phrased  by  simply  adding  n  to  the  preceding  word,  slanting 
downward  (indicating  low  position)  ;  {a)-black-one  {\l^)  :  {a)-great-one  {120) :  {a)-big-one  (121). 

When  n  cannot  be  joined  thus,  this  low  position  may  be  indicated  by  placing  n  under 
the  preceding  letter;  any  one  (122)  :  every  one  (123)  :  no  one  (124)  :  some  one  (125).  In  sucli 
a  one,  the  ay  stroke  would  stand  between  such  and  one,  so  that  such  cannot  clash  with  some. 

We  have  seen  before  that  one  word  may  indicate  another  which  has  been  omitted,  as  in 
the  case  of /w^^o/,  for  example.  This  principle  can  also  be  applied  to  such  words  as  some 
body  else.  Since  some  body  (126)  is  written  by  some  (contracted)  and  the  final  y  stroke  above 
the  line  (for  body),  we  write  some  body  else  (127)  by  replacing  body  in  some  body  with  else. 
In  other  words,  we  write  som,e,  adding  else  in  the  position  in  which  body  would  stand.  To 
write  some  one  else  (128),  we  place  else  in  the  position  where  n  (for  one)  Avould  stand, — viz., 
under  some.    Note  also  any  body  else  (129)  and  any  one  else  (130),  nobody  else  (131)  and  no 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  77 


one  else  (132),  every  body  else  (133)  and  every  one  else  (134).  On  the  same  principle,  we  form 
nowhere  else  (135)  and  everywhere  else  (136),  in  whicli  plirases,  because  of  tlie  "ay"  sound  of 
where,  else  stands  on  tlie  line.  This  I'eversed  s  is  doubled,  of  course,  like  the  regular  s  ;  some 
body  else's  (137). 

Thing  is  phrased  similarly  to  its  logograms  ;  that  is,  in  anyihiny^  the  two  words  must  be 
separated  ;  see  not-for-any  thing  (138),  where  thing,  tliough  below  the  line,  is  placed  high  in 
relation  to  any.  Note  also  for-everything  {lo9),  for- nothing  (140),  and  J'or-soniething  (141). 
Compare  they-can-have-something  (142)  with  they-can-have-some  (143). 

In  such  groups  as  ivhere  about — or  where  abouts{\-ii),  there  about  (14o),  what  about  (146), 
etc.,  the  ay  stroke  may  be  omitted,  the  ow  dot  being  placed  below  the  first  word  ;  no  clasii 
can  be  possible,  as  there  are  no  similar  combinations  with  out.  Note  also  what  about  lite 
(147),  what  about  that  (148),  and  how  about  that  (149).  About  it  (150)  is  formed  in  the  same 
manner  by  writing  it  under  the  ay  stroke,  which,  for  this  purpose,  is  raised  to  the  top-line. 
The  same  principle  is  also  extended  to  such  phrases  as  about  which,  about  what,  about 
them,  etc. 

Since  in-a-u-days  will  at  once  suggest  the  phrase  in-a-few-days  (151),  it  is  unnecessary  to 
write  /  of  few,  the  "  u"  sound  being  expressed  by  crossing  in  with  the  long  ay  stroke  which 
indicates  day  ;  after-a-few-days  (152)  :  in-the-course-{of-a)-few-days  (153)  :  for-afew-dayx  (154). 
Compare  the  last  phrase  with  a-few-days  (155),  where  the  short  ay  stroke  (for  a)  and  the 
long  ay  stroke  (for  day)  have  been  joined  into  one  stroke.  It  is  unnecessary  to  add  s  to  day 
ia  any  of  these  groups,  as  the  plural  is  implied  by  the  word  few. 

In  the  same  manner,  d  may  be  dropped  from  duly,  in  such  familiar  phrases  as  I-have- 
duly  received  (156),  they-have-duly  noted  (157),  etc. 

Wifh-a-u-to  can  be  only  with-a-view-to  (158),  and  the  same  holds  good  of  ivith  a-view-of 
(159) — where  a  and  o  (for  of)  are  crossed. 

When  the  crossing  cannot  be  done  conveniently,  the  words  are  written  in  full. 

The  relative  pronouns  m,yself,  yourself,  themselves,  etc.,  when  referring  direct  to  the 
subject  of  the  sentence,  may  safely  be  replaced  b.y  I  (without  the  final  stroke)  joined  to  the- 
preceding  woi'd,  thus  omitting  my,  your,  them,  etc.  ;  he  may  do  it-himsrlf  (160)  :  we  j^ride- 
ourselves  on  {having)  been  on-hand  in-f ime-for-the-fight  (161)  :  every  one  should  fit-himself  for- 
a  useful  occupation  (162)  :  did-you  hide-yourself  ?  (163). 

There  is  a  number  of  short  phrases,  where  the  first  and  last  words  are  alike ;  such 
are  day-by-day  (164),  {from)-day-to-day  (165)*,  {from)-time-to-time  (166)*,  higher  and  higher 
(167),  by  and  by  (168),  etc.  As  shown  by  the  examples,  the  last  word  may  be  omitted  from 
these  phrases,  the  space  which  it  would  occupy  being  left  blank  to  indicate  plainly  the 
omission.  This  device  can  be  employed  only  when  the  word  omitted  has  previously 
occurred  in  the  same  phrase ;  the  phrase  from  bad  to  worse,  for  instance,  would  not  come 
under  this  rule.  As  said  before,  superfluous  words,  which  must  be  implied  by  the  gram- 
matical construction,  are  omitted ;  under  this  heading  come  such  phra.ses  as  as-soon-{as)- 
20ossible  (169),  as-far-(as)  (170),  as-good-(as)  (171),  etc. 

FRACTION.S  are  written  just  as  in  longhand,  but  the  figures  should  be  made  small,  :iiid 
the  division  stroke  is  omitted  ;  the  fraction  being  indicated  by  the  lower  position  of  the 
denominator :— 2  3  ;  ^  \q. 

Very  little  need  be  said  about 

Compound  Words, 

which  consist  of  two  or  more  primitive  words,  each  of  which  has  a  meaning  when  standing 
alone  ;  for  example,  car-load,  show-case.  Since  words  that  belong  together  can  be  phrased, 
compound  words  will  logically  come  under  the  rules  for  phrasing, — that  is,  thej-  are  written 
in  one  outline  when  they  join  conveniently  ;  otherwise,  each  word  stands  separately.  In 
joining  them,  blending  can  be  resorted  to  as  in  phrasing,  and  when  two  similar  consonants 
meet,  one  is  omitted  ;  observe  the  blending  of  ence  and  ?«,  in  dancing-master  (172),  where 
ing,  being  superfluous,  has  been  omitted.  Note  also  the  blending  of  d  and  ji  in  lead-pencil 
(173),  and  the  omission  of  one  p  in  hip-pocket  (174).  The  same  principle  applies  to  reading- 
room  (175) — written  read-room, — where  d  and  r  are  blended. 

The  usual  attention  and  study  should  be  given  to  the  examples  furnished  by  the  fol- 
lowing exercise  and  explained  by  the  annotations  : — 


*  The  word  from,  being  an  integral  part  of  these  phrases,  may  be  omitted. 


78  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Reading  Exercise. 

(176j  Messrs.  Shoemaker  &  Logan, 

(177)  Chicago,  111. 

(178)  Gentlemen  :— 

(179)  Immediately  upon  receipt-(of  )-3-our  communication,  we-duly  informed-the 
City  Brokerage  Co.  of-your  decision  as-to-the  offer  they-made-you  in-their  letter-of-yesterday, 
telling-tliem  that-their  quotations  were  entirely  too  high.  (180)  We-note  your  statement 
that,  under-the  circumstauces-of-the-case,  we-should  not-(have)-been  so  quielv  to  avail-our- 
selves  of-tlieir  proposition,  but  do-not  under(stand)  what-you-mean-by-that ;  for,  as  \ve- 
wrote-you  before,  we  found,  upon  investigation,  that-there-was-uo-time-for-auy  delay,  and 
that-the-case  called  for  immediate  attention  ;  we  therefore  had  to-act  at-once.  (181)  We- 
Ivnow  full  well  that-the  deal  is-not-so  profitable  as  it-might-liave-been  if-you-could-have-been 
here-yourself ;  but,  after  considei'ation  of-all-the  aspects  of-the-case,  and  of-all-that-can-be- 
said  about-it,  we-cannot  blame-ourselves  for-any  mistake,  as-the  market  at-the-time  did- 
not-show  any  indications  of  a  rise ;  and,  as  we-were  by-no-means  certain  as-to-the  time 
in-which-we-could  make  otlier  arrangements,  we-thought-it-more  advisable  to  be  satisfied 
witii-a  fair  profit,  tliau  risk  a  sale  without-any  benefit  whatever  (182)  Our  experience  in 
similar-cases,  as-well  (as)  the  opinion  of-most  of-the  members  of-the  Exchange,  justify-the 
disposition  we-have-made  in-your  interest.  (183)  According  to-our  observation,  and  to-an 
intimation  frora-a  reliable  source,  the  securities  of-the  Traction  Co.  will-not  sell  at-a  premium 
within-tlie  next-few-days,  as-tlieir  dividend,  payable  just  about-this-time-of-the  jear,  is  now 
overdue  ;  yet,  we-tliink  this-is-a  first-rate  investment. 

(184)  As-per  agreement,  we-shall  re-open  our  accommodation  account  by  accepting  your 
draft  on-the  loth  prox.,  to-cov(er)  your  second  pro  rata  payment,  called  for  by-the-Uuited 
Gas  Improvement  Co. ;  this-will  liquidate-your  obligation,  except  for-a  small  balance  pay- 
able on-the  16th  (of)  August  for-the  remainder  of-the  prefer(red)  stock. 

(185)  Any  further  business  witla-which  you-may- be-good  enough  to  favor-us  will-have- 
our  immediate  attention  at-the  lowest  rates,  even  if  your  order  be  unaccompanied  by  a  cash 
remittance.  (186)  Yours  resp(ectfully), 

(187)  A.  L.  Haines  &  Bro. 

Annotations. — (176)  In  Shoernaker^  note  m  placed  low  and  the  k  long. 

(177)  Compare  o^,  in  Logayi,  with  go,  in  Chicago.  The  latter  is  written  in  full,  Shi- 
kaw-go ;  but  for  practical  purposes,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  write  only  Chie.,  just  as  in 
longhand. 

(179)  See  how  letter  and  yesterday  are  conveniently  phrased, — ?*,  of  letter,  blending  with 
o  (of),  which  forms  the  connective  stroke  between  the  two  nouns.  In  telUng-them,  the 
ending  ing  is  omitted,  and  ra  (for  them)  is  blended  with  tell.  Since  t  is  omitted  in  entire,  it 
will  also  be  omitted  in  entirely. 

(180)  Note  the  saving  by  simply  adding  I  (for  selves)  to  avail,  to  form  the  phrase  avail- 
ourselves.  Compare  the  phrases,  ive-wrote  and  we-note.  In  investigation,  ti  is  omitted  and  s 
is  blended  to  v.  Look  at  the  phi'ase  that-fhere-was-no-time-for-any,  which,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  last  word,  occurs  very  frequently,  and  can  be  traced,  like  the  majority  of  these 
common  phrases,  at  verbatim  speed  ;  au>  (for  ivas)  is  brought  down  from  above  the  line,  and 
the  i  stroke  of  time  joins  easily  to  the  o  curve  of  710.  That-the-case  is  also  self-explana- 
tory and  brief.  Imm.ecliate  will  logically  be  written  like  immediately,  minus  the  final  ly  ; 
im,m,e  is  an  unmistakable  contraction  for  this  word.  See  how  the  initial  vowel  is  clearly 
shown  in  to-act. 

(181)  Note  if-you-could-{have)-been  /  if  we  should  want  to  write  if-yoii-can,  we  should 
have  to  effect  the  crossing  on  the  line,  for  that  purpose,  bringing  the  top  of/  a  little  nearer 
the  top-centre-line.  Also  take  notice  of  the  saving  of  outline  in  writing  here-yourself  and 
blame-ourselves.  Note  the  phrases  of-the-case  and  of-aU-that-can-be-said.  Look  carefully  at 
the  phrase  did-not-show,  where  t  (for  not)  and  sh  (for  shoiv)  are  blended  ;  did-shotr  would  be 
written  by  placing  sh  in  its  normal  position  from  the  top-centre-  to  the  bottom-line.  Observe 
tlie  phrases  by-no-means,  in-which-we-could,  and  ive-thonght-it-more.  See  how  conveniently 
the  logogram  for  fit  can  be  used  in  2^'>'oflt  and  benefit.  Note  how  the  s  in  arrangements  is 
added  to  m  (for  ment). 


/o  /^ 


Lesson  12.  rh^ r^rfyl  Pe  /T/  ^V  '^^  ^  ^  "^  ^^  ^^  r  ^  ^^  -^  r-^ 


'^-'^^"^  "1^  Q  co'^Oc^Zo-  (J^  Q^  \  CI  i^^.  y//r^^r^ 


^0  5^^ 

^^      .^  ryt  f^ /-^'-^  _c^  ji^^  .Ji^  ^ ^  9^\y2 -^^ 


'^5^  /  yes-  /s-6 


^^ 


-.  y2  .Z"^,  ^-  //^-^,  ^  r^^  /?J^  C^Jr\  .X  fjr^y  <^^  _ 


..  y^^  L  ^T,  "^^^^^/g^.  ^  V  ^,  ^^y ^/ ^  "(-^ /i^.oC.   ,^  fM. 


/<?3 


^y.o  ^...X-^  f^/  r^^  ^^  ^^     ^^  /  >  ^^^  •/-  /^^.  .^vv^d^ 


L-^^\^      V>^ f^    — .  "       <^ 


^-..„<l.A^-^^-^/^/^o  ^  ^=y^/,o  .^^  (cr-^ JlA 


"1-y^r^  ^  ^'^^-   -^J  '-^  ?,  f^  /•^  <"-^  ""J  ■  ^^-'(r^/  ^^'^^ 


r^^^,r^^ji-^^^f.,A^//.  /?^,^~^.„  cC  "-^J^r?f.-^-.^ 


L  ^.  /.^,  /,,  s  ^^o„  c^.^^n)//   ')  ^%   -;u^  ■  6 


'L'^^      ^ '  ^ '^;  ^.'  -^  ''■- 2^ "'^"^-^7^ 


80  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


(182)  Look  at  similar-cases^  where  similar  is  written  in  full ;  the  phrase  could  be  further 
contracted  by  omittiug  ilar,  writing  simply  sim-k.     Compare  in-your  aud  inter  (for  interest). 

(183)  Note  the  vfOY^prem,ium^  written  in  full,  with  all  the  vowels  faithfully  represented. 
Next-few-days  and  about-this-tim,e-of-the  are  brief  and  plain  phrases,  about-this  being  formed 
on  the  principle  explained  in  (loO).  See  how  payable  is  written  on  the  same  principle  as 
?na?/or,— Lesson  10,  (100),— the  affix  able  being  expressed  by  I,  shaded.  Note  how  over,  in 
overdue,  is  raised  from  the  line,  so  that  r  can  be  blended  with  d ;  this  rule  applies  to  all 
compound  words.  Also  note  this-is-a  and  first-rate,  t  and  /•  being  blended  in  the  latter,  to 
form  medium  tr ;  this  is  entirely  admissible  in  this  group,  as  first  rate  is  in  a  measure  a 
compound  word.  See  how  v  and  s  are  blended,  thus  eliminating  the  connective  vowel- 
stroke  in  investment. 

(184)  Note  the  initial  ay  stroke  in  agreement;  also  m  (for  menf),  placed  high.  We-shall 
cannot  be  mistaken  for  ivell,  which  would  have  no  meaning  in  this  connection.  In  re-open, 
o  is  placed  high,  because  of  the  strongly  accented  (short  /)  sound  of  re.  Prox  (meaning 
proximo  =  "  next  month")  is,  like  the  majority  of  abbreviations,  shortened  as  in  longhand. 
In  to-cover  (where  o  sounds  like  a  short  u),  er  can  be  safely  dropped.  Pro  rata  is  written  in 
full.  See  how  n  is  conveniently  added  to  th  (the)  in  by-the-  United.  The  title  of  the  company 
is  here  written  in  full ;  in  practice,  it  would  be  sufficient  to  write  simply  the  initials,  just  as 
in  longhand.  W  is  omitted  in  liquidate.  Compare  except  with  accept, — where  the  shading 
clearly  indicates  the  "a"  sound,  and  note  how  the  connective  vowel-stroke  is  eliminated 
between  k  and  s,  since  the  short  vowel-sound  must  be  implied  between  them.  Remainder 
is  logically  formed  by  adding  dr  to  the  long  n  stroke  (for  remain),  which,  in  order  to  facilitate 
the  blending,  is  lifted  from  the  line.     Ed  is  dropped  from  preferred. 

(185)  Compare  further  with  from-other  (117).  Notice  /  placed  low  in  enough.  Observe 
how  the  vowel-sound  following  o,  in  lowest,  is  expressed  by  shading  the  following  conso- 
nant.   Also  note  how  clearly  the  ay  stroke  is  shown  in  unaccompanied. 

(186)  Resp,  at  the  end  of  a  letter,  will  at  once  be  read  for  respectfully. 

(187)  Observe  the  difference  between  A.  and  L.  Bro.  is  the  usual  commercial  abbrevia- 
tion for  brother. 

Writing  Exercises  : — 

(^4)  Tit  for  Tat.^ 

It-is-well-known  that-the-hand-writ(ing)'^  (of)  Horace  Greely  was-not  by  anj'  means  so 
excellent  as-his  sagacity  ;  so  that  sometimes  he  himself  could  not  decipher*  his  notes.  One 
day*,  while-he-was  busy  at-his  desk,  an  apprentice  from-the  compos(ing)  room  show(ed)- 
him-a  page  of  manuscript,  telling-him  that-he-was-sent  by-Mr.  so-and-(so)  to-flnd-out°  what 
it-meant. 

"  I-cannot-make  it-out^,"  said-the  editor,  glanc(ing)  hastily  at-the  sheets  ;  "  tell-the  fool 
not  to-scrawF  so  wretched ly^" 

"That-is-just  what  he  told-me,  when-he-sent-me  In-here,"  repli(ed)  the  boy,  with-a- 
wink  of-his  eye. 

{B)  Portland,  Me.,  Feb.  8,  1898. 

Messrs.  Newton,  Smith  &  Co., 

Macon,  Ga. 
Gentlemen : — 

We-are  very-much  in-need-of-the-goods^  which-you  promised  to-send-us  by-the 
17th  jyrox.  As-we-have-not  heard  from-you  about-the  shipment,  we-should-thank-you-for- 
an'"  immediate  answer  to-this  communication,  advising  us  when-the-consignment  will-go 

forward.  Yours  truly, 

A.  E.  Fink  &  Son. 

(<^')  New  Orleans",  March  17th,  1898. 

Mrs.  Jane  Pembertoni-, 

Tampa,  Fla. 
Dear- Mad  am  : — 

We-have-your-favor-of-the  18th  inst.,  and-the  samples  mention(ed)  have  also-duly 
come  to-hand.    After-a  thorough  examination^*  of-the-article,  we-must-say  that  we-are-not 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  81 


favorably"  impressed  with-its>^  apiiearance,  and  ull-that-ean-be-said  iu-its-favor*^  is-the-price. 
However,  we-do-not-think  it  wise  to-luy-iii"  a  stock  (of-tlie)  goods.  If-you-care  to-let-us- 
have-a  consigniiieiit,  we-shall-do  everything  in-our-power  to  dispose  of-tlieni  to-tlie-best-^ofj- 
your  interest.  Yours  respectfully, 

£d\v.  Warnek  &  Co. 

(Z>)  Philadelphia,  June  14th,  1898. 

The  Walker  &  Jeffris  Mfg.  Co., 

Savannah,  Ga. 
Dear  Sirs: — 

In-reply-(to)-3'our-favor,  we-can  assure-you  that-the-house  in-question  deserve(s) 
all-tlie  confidence  (of  the)  business-community^'*.  Tliere-was  a  rumor  current  that-they-liave 
recently  accept(ed)  another  partner,  wlio-is-said-(to)-be  very  wealthy  ;  and,  upon  investiga- 
tion, we  find-that-this-is-(the)-case. 

Trusting  tliat-this  information  may-be-(of)  service"  to-you,  we-remain. 

Yours  truly, 

Rothermel'"  &  Hutchinson-^ 

{E)  Trenton,  July  18th,  1898. 

Messrs.  Waring  &  Newton, 

St.  Paul,  Minn. 
Gentlemen : — 

We-have-an  order  from  Messrs.  Drake  &  Co.,  amounting  to  a  considerable  sum. 
We-bad  an  order  from-them  the-last-time  our  salesman  went  to-see  them  ;  but,  on  ask(ing)- 
them  for-a  statement  of-their  affairs,  they-wrote-us  that-they-had  concluded  to-cancel  the 
order.  Although  our  impression  of-their  standing  has  always  been  favorable,  we  feel  that- 
in-justice-^  to-ourselves,  we-cannot  assume-the  responsibility  of  open(ing)  so-large  an  account 
without  niak(ing)  the  customary  inquiries.  We  assure-you  ihat-any  information  which- 
you  may  furnish-us  will-be-kept  strictly  confidential,  and  that  we-are  ready  to  reciprocate, 
should  opportunity  offer.  Yours  very-truly, 

F.  Connelly  &  Sons. 

Annotations. —  ^  Shade  t  at  the  bottom  in  Tit,  and  for  its  whole  length  in  Tat. 
^  Join  writing  to  h  (for  hand),  bringing  r  a  little  below  the  line.  ^  Start  at  the  bottom. 
*  Use  the  ay  stroke.  ^  Join  d  and  out.  ^The  hyphen,  indicating  that  out  is  phrased,  does 
not  mean  that  it  should  be  joined  to  t  (of  it),  but  simply,  that  it  is  placed  below  it. 
^  Scr  (=  skr)  will  absorb  the  aw  curve.  ^  Ud  is  dropped,  in  accordance  with  the  rules 
on  endings.  'Only  one  n  is  written  in  in-need.  ^"^ Cross  nk  (for  thank)  with  /,  to  form 
thank-you-for.  '•  Shade  the  consonant  following  I.  '^  Blend  mbr.  '^  Apply  the  same 
principle  as  in  communication;  in  being  unaccented,  may  be  omitted,  leaving  examation. 
"  In  accordance  with  the  rules  on  endings,  favorably  is  written  fr  (blended),  the  final 
y  stroke  being  added.  ^^  With  may  be  raised  to  the  top-line,  so  that  it  can  be  joined 
with  its.  ^^  In  is  raised  to  the  top-line  in  a  similar  manner.  *' /n  should  not  be  blended 
with  a  in  this  case,  because,  according  to  the  sense,  the  two  words  do  not  belong  together  ;' 
the  words  to-lay-in  belong  together,  however,  and  are  phrased;  take  care  that  the  ay 
stroke  is  clearly  shown  between  I  and  i  (for  in).  ■**  Phrase  on  the  same  principle  as  /.•*- 
'onsidering,  in  Lesson  11  (253).  "In  service,  ice  is  dropped  in  accordance  with  rule  (12), 
Lesson  11,  ^"In  Rothermel,  rm  must  be  placed  low,  '^^  The  ence  stroke,  placed  high,  can 
be  employed  in  Hutchinson.  ^^  Justice  is  written  by  adding  an  s  to  Just  (represented  by 
the  logogram  J,  placed  low.) 

The  names  of  cities  may  be  considerably'  contracted  when  they  are  familiar  to  the 
writer.  Thus,  Philadetphia  can  be  shortened  to  Phila  (=  Fila),  as  in  longhand  ;  Ketv  York 
can  be  written  by  crossing  n  with  y ;  Savannah  may  be  shortened  to  Sav,  blending  .9 
(shaded)  and  v.  In  the  case  of  cities  less  well  known,  these  contractions  should  be  resorted 
to  only  when  they  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  correspondence  of  the  writer. 


82  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  13. 


In  the  course  of  the  preceding  lessons,  in  whicli  only  the  most  frequent  words  and 
phi'ases  have  been  abbreviated,  the  student  has  progressed  sufHciently  to  follow  verbatim 
tlie  usual  business  dictation  or  a  slow  speaker.  In  order  to  increase  still  further  the  speed 
of  the  stenographer,  we  will  now  consider  a  few  principles  of  the  reporting  style  of  the 
system,  still  further  reducing  the  outlines,  so  that  he  is  fully  qualified  for  the  duties  of  an 
amanuensis. 

The  Rui.es  for  Reporting  Contractions 

are  based  upon  the  fact  that  all  the  words  of  a  sentence  stand  in  a  certain  relation  to  each 
other,  which  is  so  clear  and  distinct  that  the  sense  of  the  sentence  would  be  destroyed,  if 
one  of  the  main  words  (a  noun,  an  adjective,  or  a  verb)  should  be  replaced  by  another.  For 
example,  the  phrase  "Do  not  put  the  cart  before  the  ho,"  will  at  once  be  read  "Do  not  put 
the  cart  before  the  horse,"  particularly  when  we  know  that  ho — according  to  the  rules  of 
Graphic  shorthand — must  stand  for  a  word  of  one  syllable.  As  said  before,  the  contraction 
of  words  cannot  be  made  at  random,  but  is  governed  by  well-defined  (common  sense)  rules, 
according  to  which  the  missing  part  of  the  word  is  logically  inferred  from  the  written  part ; 
there  is  no  guess-work  whatever  in  reading  stenographic  notes,  provided  they  are  written' 
correctl3\ 

For  purposes  of  contraction,  we  classify  words  into  three  divisions,  viz. :  simple  words, 
compound  words,  and  derivatives.  A  simple  ivord  is  one  that  has  neither  prefix,  suffix,  nor 
termination  ;  for  example,  state.  A  derivative  is  formed,  when  another  syllable  is  added  ;  for 
example,  estate,  or  stately.  When  a  word  is  composed  of  two  or  more  roots,  each  of  which 
has  a  meaning  when  standing  alone,  it  is  called  a  compound  ivord  ;  for  example,  statesman. 

For  the  present,  we  will  consider  only  simple  words  of  one  syllable  (which  includes  also 
some  dissyllabic  words,  in  which,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  previously  given,  the  second 
syllable  is  omitted,  so  that  for  shorthand  purposes  the  word  is  a  monosyllable)  :  for  instance, 
chick,  for  chicken;  smit,  for  smitten;  a.ud  such  words  as  matter,  hither,  etc.,  but  only  when 
the  latter  are  used  in  common  phrases. 

Since  the  contractions  depend  upon  the  relations  of  the  various  words  in  a  sentence  to 
each  other,  it  is  evident  that,  as  a  rule,  words  which  are  thus  related  to  each  other  should 
not  both  be  contracted  at  the  same  time  ;  the  first  is  preferably  written  in  full,  and  will 
then  direct  the  thoughts  of  the  reader  so  that  he  can  readily  read  the  contracted  outline 
following:  for  example,  the  sentence  "the  gra  is  da  this  morning,"  is  not  very  clear;  but 
when  we  write  the  first  word  in  full  and  say  "  the  grass  is  da  this  morning,"  the  shortened 
word  is  easily  understood  to  be  damp. 

Nov/  let  us  look  at  the  shorthand  plate,  to  see  how  this  principle  is  applied  in  practice. 
Particular  attention  should  be  given  to  the  outlines  for  frequent  words  and  phrases. 

We  will  first  consider  only  closed  m,onosyllables, — that  is,  words  which  both  begin  and 
end  with  a  consonant :  such  words  are  tact,  goal,  etc.  Monosyllables  that  begin  or  end  with 
a  vowel,  such  as  act,  ov  go, — are  called  02:>en  monosyllables. 

Initial  Contraction 
is  the  name  of  the  principle  by  which  words  of  one  (closed)  syllable  may  be  contracted,  by 
writing  simply  the  first  consonant  (or  group  of  blended  consonants),  at  the  same  time 
expressing  the  vowel-sound  in  the  usual  manner.  Since  you  are  familiar  with  the  rules  on 
the  vowel-sounds,  no  further  rules  on  this  point  are  necessary  ;  it  remains  only  to  study  the 
illustrations. 

A  (as  in  man).  (1)  I  stepped  on  a  tack. — Tack  is  represented  by  shaded  t,  which  is  the 
whole  word  with  the  exception  of  the  final  k.  Step  is  so  closely  associated  with  the  word 
tack,  that  the  latter  suggests  itself  to  the  mind  as  soon  as  the  eye  sees  the  outline  ta. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  83 


(2)  Cau-you  draw  a  map  of  the  United  States  of  America? — Here  again,  map,  drawing 
and  the  name  of  a  country  are  closely  and  suggestively  associated.  Notice  how  conveniently 
we  phrase  the  abbreviation  U.  S.  A. 

(3)  T-am-glad  to-learn  of-his  success,  but  I-hate  to-hear  him  brag  about-it. — Am  is  neces- 
sarily implied  between  /  and  (jlad,  since  I-glad  would  not  be  English  ;  m  can  be  omitted, 
therefore,  admitting  of  phrasing  /  and  gl  {I  shaded  for  glad).  Notice  also  the  contraction 
for  brag  ;  this  idea  is  readily  suggested  by  the  word  .success. 

(4)  The  poor  man  was  dressed  in  rags,  and  nearly  dead  from  lack  (of)  food.— Note  con- 
tractions of  man  and  lack,  and  see  how  the  vowel-stroke  follows  the  initial  letters,  clearly 
showing  that  the  vowel-sound  is  to  be  read  after  them.  While  this  vowel-stroke  is  made 
with  particular  ease  in  letters  that  end  with  an  upward  stroke,  it  may  also  be  used  in  letters 
that  end  in  the  downward  direction.  There  is  no  need  for  it  in  initial  contractions,  however, 
unless  for  some  particular  purpose,  as  will  be  shown  in  the  course  of  this  lesson.  As  a  rule, 
the  beginner  is  inclined  to  use  it  freely;  but  in  the  majority  of  cases,  he  will  drop  it  in- 
stinctively during  actual  practice. 

(5)  I-regret  that-the-case  is-so  sad,  but-the  fact  is,  that  I-can-do-nothing-in-the-matter. — 
Fact  and  matter  are  very  frequent  words,  and  their  contractions  are  given  in  this  sentence.  In 
the  common  i^hnise  as  a  matter  of  fact,  as,  a,  and  o/ may  be  omitted,  so  that  only  the  two  nouns 
remain  ;  as  phrasing  and  blending  can  be  employed  to  the  fullest  extent  in  familiar  groups, 
a  matter-of-fact  may  be  written  simply  by  phrasing  and  blending  the  outlines  for  matter  and 
fact,  as  shown  by  (6),  resulting  in  a  very  brief,  but  perfectly  legible,  outline.  Another  fre- 
quent phrase  is  facts-{of  the)-ease  (7),  where  fact  and  case  are  conveniently  joined. 

(8)  The  troops  crossed  the  river  on  rafts  and  lighters  ;  but  as  the  night  was  pitch  dark, 
the  major  said  he  would-not-take-the  chance,  to  let-the  men  charge  up  this  liill. — Look  care- 
fully at  this  sentence.  Notice  i-afts,  and  see  how  shaded  r  is  followed  by  the  vowel-stroke,  so 
as  to  distinguish  it  clearly  from  are,  although  the  latter  word  would  not  tit  into  the  sentence 
at  all.  The  contraction  might  read  either  raft  or  rafts ;  but  since  the  singular  would  have 
to  be  indicated  by  a  preceding  singular  article,  and  since  the  word  lighters  (written  in  the 
plural)  implies  that  there  also  was  more  than  one  raft,  the  plural  of  this  word  need  not  be 
indicated.     The  second  part  of  this  sentence  illustrates  contractions  with  the  sound  of 

A  (as  in  bar).  These  are  constructed  like  the  preceding  class,  but  in  order  to  distinguish 
between  the  two  "  a"  sounds,the  contraction  in  the  second  case  is  placed  high.  This  cannot 
mean  a  short  ''1"  sound,  as  the  shading  clearly  indicates  the  "a"  sound,  as  in  dark  (see 
pitch  dark,  above).  Notice  the  difference  between  chance  (shaded  ch  on  the  line)  and  charge 
(shaded  ch  above  the  line). 

(9)  We  shall  guard  our  rights  and  our  flag.— Notice  shaded  g  above  the  line  for  guard  ; 
alsoy?  blended  and  I  shaded  for  flag. 

(10)  I-heard-the-dog-bark,  and  the  watchman  cry  "  Stop  thief." — Note  shaded  ?^  above 
the  line  for  bark.  According  to  the  same  principle,  are  written  also  those  words  in  which  o 
has  the  "a"  sound,  as  shown  by  stop,  in  which  shaded  st  is  above  the  line.  This  is  shown 
by  the  next  sentence  also  : 

(11)  "He-is-a  chip-of-the  old  block,"  said  the  father.  Notice  I  in  block,  shaded  and 
followed  by  the  vowel-stroke. 

I.     IFords  with  i  (as  in  bite)  are  self-explanatory. 

(12)  This-is-not  a  very  sharp  knife,  will-you  grind  it?— Observe  sh  placed  high  and 
shaded.  Although  7id  is  omitted  from  grind,  the  sentence  is  perfectly  intelligible  and  will 
be  read  without  hesitation.  The  word  knife  illustrates  another  principle,  wliicli  must  not 
be  lost  sight  of,— that  is,  it  would  not  be  worth  while  to  contract  knife,  as  the  full  outline 
can  be  written  very  speedily ;  in  all  such  cases,  the  word  is  written  in  full. 

(13)  Be  kind  to-the  blind  man  ;  take  him-home,  for  he-cannot  tind-his- way  alone.— Note 
the  convenient  ])hriiini  find-/iis-iva)/. 

(14)  To-my-mind,  the  child  should-not-be  struck  with-a-stick,  even-though  he-be  full-of 
pranks. — This  sentence  shows  also  a  contraction  with  the 

/short,  as  in  stick.  When  following  a  t,  this  sound  can  be  conveniently  indicated  by 
shading  t  at  the  bottom.  See  how  convenient  and  unmistakable  is  the  contraction  to-my- 
mind.  It  is  not  necessary  to  write  the  plural  of  pranks,  as  the  context  plainly  indicates  it. 
This  word  shows  that  only  the  long  pr  can  be  used  for  contractions,  as  the  shortened  pr 
(being  on  the  line)  might  sometimes  conflict  with  we-are.     Therefore,  all  words  starting 


84  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


with  initial  pr  are  cousidered  as  starting  with  a  large  letter ;  the  importance  of  this  rule 
will  be  apparent  later. 

(15)  Not  only  the  poor,  but  also  the  rich,  are  within  the  reach  of  death;  everybody 
must  leave  this  world  ;  no  one  can  live  forever. — This  sentence  alTords  an  excellent  illustra- 
tion of  the  difference  between  the  final  y  stroke  of  only^  and  the  vowel-stroke  of  rich  and 
live^  and  reach  and  leave.  The  length  of  the  vowel-stroke  shows  whether  the  vowel  follow- 
ing r  and  I  is  short  or  long. 

(16)  Please  keep  the  paper  containing  this  plea,  carefully  under  lock  and  key. — Compare 
the  contraction  for  please  with  the  word  pfea,  and  that  for  kee}:)  with  key.  The  contracted 
outlines  show  by  the  nature  of  their  forms  that  they  do  not  represent  full  words.  Lock 
shows  I  placed  high  and  shaded,  to  indicate  the  "a"  sound  of  o.  Please  occurs  in  frequent 
phrases,  where  it  is  not  necessary  to  pay  any  particular  attention  to  the  vowel-stroke.  This 
is  shown  in 

(17)  I-am-pleased  to-hear  that-he  undertakes  the  task  with  so-much  vim. — Note  to- 
hear :  at  the  first  glance,  the  outline  might  seem  to  be  to-him ;  this  would  be  so  foreign  to 
the  sense  of  the  sentence,  however,  that  the  reader  would  not  take  the  outline  for  anything 
but  to-hear.  Hear  and  him  might  readily  be  distinguished  by  writing  the  vowel-stroke 
after  h  in  hear;  but,  as  was  explained  above,  it  is  not  necessary  to  take  this  precaution, 
unless  there  is  danger  of  confusion  (which  occurs  very  seldom).  See  how  Avell  upward  v 
can  be  used  for  vim,  which  word  is  thus  clearly  distinguished  from  very  little  (Lesson  11, 114.) 

(18)  Enclosed  please-find-the  check. — Please-flnd-the  is  a  very  common  phrase  and  can 
be  traced  rapidly. 

(19)  "  At  the  last  election,  our  side  did-not  lose  a  seat,"  remarked  the  senator. 

(20)  A  stitch  in  time  saves  nine. 

(21)  Observe  the  contraction  of  here  in  heretofore,  and  of  hither  in  hitherto  (22). 
(23)  He-said-he  would  like  to-flnd-out  which-way  the  wind  blew. 

O  and  Aw.  (24)  I-heai'd-the  story  a  short-time-ago. — Short-time-ago  is  a  very  frequent 
phrase. 

(25)  Who  brought  the  package?     (25a)  The  wagon  of-the  bargain  store. 

(26)  Among  well-bred  people,  courtesy  is-a  matter-(of)-course. — Note  how  the  group 
matter-{of  )-course  is  phrased,  of  (a  superfluous  word)  being  omitted. 

(27)  I-should-like  to-have-the  agreement  signed,  merely  as-a  matter  (of)  form. — Observe 
the  group  matter  (of)  form.  In  I-should-like,  d  is  taken  from  its  regular  (low)  position, 
which  is  permissible  in  phrasing.  The  outline  cannot  be  mistaken  for  I-had,  as  d  must  be 
shaded  in  the  latter. 

(28)  What-is-the-cause  (of  the)  trouble?  Breach-(of)-peace,  your  Honor.— Observe  the 
group  ivhat-is-the- cause,  and  the  outline  for  hreach-{of)-peace,  in  which  br  is  placed  high 
and  phrased  with  peace. 

(29)  The  rock  tore  a  hole  in-the  boat,  which  commenced  to-sink. 

(30)  I-should  rather  die,  than  bear  a  yoke. 

(31)  The  day  was  very  hot,  but  it-was  cool  in-the-grove.— Note  h  placed  high  and  shaded, 
on  account  of  the  "  a  "  sound  of  o  in  hot. 

(32)  We-wrote-you  about-this  before  and  consider  the  matter  closed  ;  but  since-you-call 
our  attention  once-more  to-this-fact,  it-seems  you-have-not  understood-us  on-this  point. — 
Observe  the  phrasing  in  this  sentence,  particularly  since-you-call,  once-more,  to-this-fact,  and 
it-seems  ;  see  also  how  safely  under  represents  the  word  understand.  The  last  word  in  this 
sentence  shows  a  contraction  with  the 

Oi  sound.  Point  occurs  very  frequently  in  such  combinations  as  2^oint-{of)-fact  (33), 
point-{of)-view  (34),  to-the-point  (35). 

(36)  When-the  captain  told  the  crew  to-hoist  the  signal  of  distress,  his-eyes  were  moist 
with  tears. — Note  the  contractions  moist  and  hoist ;  in  this  connection,  ti  will  not  read  any- 
thing but  tears. 

U.  (37)  After  last  night's  rain,  the  roads  were  full-of  mud  ;  though  the  flood  did-not-do 
much  damage,  our  carriage  sank  into-the  ruts  many-(a)-tinie. — Note  the  difference  l)etween 
mud  and  m-uch,  the  former  having  a  short— but  distinct — vowel-stroke.  The  context  implies 
the  plural  of  rut  so  clearly,  that  it  is  unnecessary  to  write  it.  Observe  many-{a)-time,  where 
a  is  omitted  ;  the  outline  cannot  be  taken  for  many-times,  since  s  would  be  added  to  m  in 
the  latter. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  &5 


(38)  Money  is-the  root  (of)  all  evil. — Compare  root  with  rut  (87)  ;  see  how  conveniently 
evil  is  written  in  full,  by  shading  v  at  the  top,  bringing  the  final  I  a  little  to  the  left  of  v. 

(39)  It-is-easy  to  write  a  verse,  but  it-is-another  thing  to  write  poetry. — Upward  v  is 
shown  here  in  low  jiosition,  jiroving  that  words  thus  contracted  cannot  clash  with  very- 
much  (Lesson  11,  113.)  Notice  also  how  clearly  the  second  coalescent  vowel,  in  poetry,  is 
shown  by  the  shading  of  the  following  consonant. 

(40)  I-hope-you-are-in-possession  of-the-goods  sent-you,  and  hand-you-the  bill  for-thom 
herewith. — This  is  a  very  frequent  commercial  phrase.  We  have  said  before  that  it  is  not 
necessary  to  discriminate  between  long  and  short  sounds,  where  no  clash  is  possible  ;  it  is, 
therefore,  unnecessary  to  use  the  vowel-stroke  in  goodit. 

(41)  The  rim  of  a  wheel  travels  faster  than  the  hub. — This  sentence  was  chosen  as  a 
good  illustration  of  the  principle,  that  it  is  advisable  to  write  the  initial  part  of  a  sentence 
in  full  and  to  contract  the  following  words.  You  will  read  the  ri,  but  you  cannot  say  what 
word  is  meant,  until  your  eyes  strike  the  word  w/iee^ ;  then  you  will  at  once  read  the  rim 
of  the  wheel.  In  hub,  the  vowel-stroke  is  used,  although  there  is  no  particular  need  for  it, 
as  the  h  (low)  in  this  connection  cannot  be  read  for  loho  or  rvhom. 

(42)  The  bad  news  put  him  in-a  gloomy  mood. — Compare  the  long  and  short  vowel- 
strokes  in  mood  and  mud  (37)  respectively. 

(43)  The  sloop  sprung  a  leak  in-the-gale. 

(44)  The  camera  flend  wished  to  take  a  picture-of-the-group  of  children. — The  contrac- 
tion for  ivished  cannot  read  wishes,  since  s  would  be  written  in  the  latter,  as  will  be  shown 
later. 

(45)  The  foliage  of-the  weeping  willow  always  droops.— Observe  the  coalescent  vowel- 
sound  in  foliage.    Compare  the  contraction  of  iveeiying  with  that  of  tvished  (44). 

(46)  The  cook  said  she  could  not  come  before  Thursday. — Cook,  like  knife,  is  just  as 
easily  written  in  full ;  for  this  reason,  the  second  k  cannot  be  cook  ;  neither  can  it  be  could — 
could  not  could, — because  it  would  have  no  meaning.  K  represents  a  word  starting  with  A-, 
followed  by  a  short  "  u"  sound  ;  instinct  chooses  the  word  come  (where  o  has  this  sound). 

(47)  If  all-those-wlio  work  for-their  daily  bread  in-the-mines  would  merge  their  interests 
together,  I-have-no-doubt  about-the  success  of-our  cause  at-the-present-time. — Notice  luork 
{wurk)  and  merge  (murj),  in  both  of  which  the  ur  blends  readily  with  the  initial  letters. 
Together,  which  should  be  carefully  noted,  is  actually  written  tog.  I- have-no-doubt  is  a 
very  common  phrase,  and  shows  how  words  with  the 

Ow  sound  are  contracted. 

(48)  Please  count  this  money  over. 

(49)  Nobody  could  identify-the  drowned  man  at-the  morgue. — Note  dr  shaded  and 
placed  low. 

Ay,  as  shown  in  the  first  lesson,  is  represented  by  simply  writing  the  consonants  in 
regular  sequence.  Such  words,  unless  they  begin  with  blended  consonants,  should  there- 
fore be  sparingly  contracted,  unless  they  are  phrased,  as  otherwise  they  might  conflict  with 
some  logograms. 

(50)  A  friend  in  need  is  a  friend  indeed. — Fr  in  this  sentence  could  not  read  from,  as 
the  latter  cannot  be  preceded  by  an  article  ;  note  how  the  repetition  of  this  word  is  indicated 
by  the  =  (equals)  mark. 

(51)  On-what-grounds  does  he  base-his-claim? — Note  the  frequent  phrase  on-whaf- 
grounds.  H  [iov  he),  being  phrased  with  does,  cannot  read  have,  although  it  is  not  in  high 
position,  as  the  latter  would  have  no  meaning  in  this  connection.  The  same  applies  to 
base-his-claim  (where  s)  of  his  (and  k)  of  claim,  flow  nicely  into  each  other. 

(52)  A  chain  is-no  stronger  tlian  its  weakest  link. — Chain  is  at  once  suggested  by  strong 
and  link.  It  must  here  be  remembered  that  in  this  class  of  words  the  vowel  is  not  neglected, 
but  is  indicated  by  the  regular  position  on  the  line. 

(53)  It-is-human-nature  to  blame  mistakes  on  other  peojile.— Observe  the  group  it-is- 
human-nature,  where  only  one  n  is  written.    Observe  also  the  contraction  for  blame. 

(54)  This  remark  is  entirely  out  (of)  jilace. — The  latter  group  is  very  common. 

(55)  It-is-easier  to  become  a  slave  to  bad  habits,  than  to  adopt  good-ones.— Observe  the 
contraction  for  slcae.  Note  also  how  ones  is  added  to  good,  as  would  be  done  if  the  word 
was  written  in  full. 

(56)  I-gave  him  ample  means  ;  (at)  any  rate  more-than  enough  to-see  him-through.— As 


86  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


illustrated  hy  I-gave,  words  with  the  medial  "ay"  sound  maybe  safely  contracted  to  the 
fullest  extent,  when  they  are  phrased.  The  frequent  phrase  at  any  rate  can  be  abbreviated 
conveniently,  though  it  cannot  be  phrased  ;  at  may  be  omitted  and  ray  will  hardly  read 
anything  but  rate  in  this  connection. 

(57)  We-beg-(to)-call  your  attention  to-the-fact  that-there-are-few  houses  which-can  sell- 
you  these  goods  as-low-(as)  we-can. — When  phrased,  the  word  beg,  frequent  in  commercial 
]i!irases,  is  safely  contracted  to  b.  Note  also  the  group  that-thereare-feiv ;  if  it  were  that- 
there-are  a-few,  f  would  be  crossed  bj^the  a  stroke  and  could  not  be  phrased  with  that-there- 
are;  the  latter  verb  implies  the  plural  so  clearly  that  it  is  unnecessarj'  to  add  s  to  house. 

(58)  I-beg-leave-(to)-say,  that-I-have-made-out  a  statement,  which-I-believe  is  correct ; 
the  balance  is  |200.— . — This  sentence  offers  some  very  important  illustrations  ;  note  tbe 
difference  between  I-beg  leave  and  which-I-believe.  See  how  made  is  contracted  and  phrased 
with  out  in  that-I-have-made-out.    Also  observe  the  simplified  mark  for  dollars  {a). 

(59)  I-should-be  pleased  to-get  your  check  for  the  amount. — In  this  connection,  to-ge 
cannot  read  together,  but  will  at  once  be  taken  for  to-get,  which  idea  is  closely  related  with 
the  word  check. 

(60)  In  round  numbers,  this  transaction  leaves  about  15  per  cent. — Round  illustrates 
well  the  use  of  the  vowel-stroke  for  purposes  of  distinction  ;  for,  if  it  were  not  used  here,  at 
the  first  glance,  the  word  would  be  taken  for  our.  Note  also  the  simplified  form  for  % 
(a),  where  the  first  cipher  is  continued  to  form  the  diagonal  fraction-stroke  and  the  second 
cipher  is  omitted. 

(61)  Will-you  lilease  let-me-see  the  letter? — Note  the  group  let-me-see,  in  which  let  is 
contracted  and  the  two  long  "ee"  sounds  are  clearly  shown. 

(62)  Can-you  tell-me  when  Mr.  Nansen  set-sail  for-the  North-Pole? — Notice  how  sug- 
gestive is  the  contraction  set-sail. 

(63)  The  wounded  man  asked-me  to-send-for-the  physician. — The  phrase  to-send-for-the, 
though  very  brief,  is  very  clear  {to-se-for-the) ;  if  it  should  be  read  to-say-for-the,  the  ay 
stroke  after  s  would  need  to  be  made  considerably  longer.  The  verb  here  must  asked ;  if  it 
were  asks,  s  would  be  written,  and  would  afford  a  convenient  junction  with  ???. 

(64)  The  thief  fled  across  the  border,  so  that-the  detectives  could-not  lay-their  hands  on 
him. —  Their  implies  the  plural  of  hand,  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  add  an  s. 

(65)  The  stranded  steamer  was  dashed  to  pieces  by-the-waves. — This  sentence  again 
affords  a  good  illustration  of  the  correlation  of  words.  If  you  have  any  doubt  as  to  what 
stra  steamier  may  mean,  you  will  be  set  right  as  soon  as  you  see  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 
The  last  word  in  the  sentence  can  only  be  loaves. 

(66)  He  said  that-I-should  make-good  the  loss.— Note  the  convenient  groups  he-said  and 
that-I-should.  Make-good  is  a  very  current  phrase ;  note  how  make  is  contracted,  so  that 
the  outline  reads  ma-goo  ;  it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  anything  else,  as  there  is  no  such  word 
as  moog. 

(67)  When  the  train  was  wrecked,  I-was  thrown  out  (of  the)  coach  and  received  a  pain- 
ful sprain. — Train,  ivreck,  and  coach,  painful  and  sprain  are  also  closely  connected  in  sense. 

(68)  She-gave-him  a  good  answer. 

In  the  following 

Writing  Exercises, 

the  italicized  words  should  be  contracted.  (Such  words  as  hand,  that,  etc.,  are  not  italicized, 
but  should  be  contracted,  as  shown  before). 

(A)  (Abridged  from  "The  Man  without  a  Country,"  by  E.  E.  Hale). 

"I  try  io  find  heart^  and  life  to-tell-you  that-it-is-all-over  with  dear  old  Nolan.  .  .  .  I- 
could^-see  that-he-was-not  strong,  but-I-had-no  idea  that-the-end  was-so  near.  The  doctor 
bad-been  watching  him  very  carefully,  and  yesterday  morning  came  to-me  and  told-me  that 
Nolan  was-not-so  tvell,  and  had-not  left  his  state-room.  .  .  .  Well,  I-went  in,  and  there-the 
poor  fellow  lay  in-his  berth,  smiling  pleasantly  as-he-^avc-me  his-hand,  but  looking  very 
frail.  I-could-not  help  a  glance  round,'^  which-showed-me  what  a  little  shrine  he-had- 
made  of  the  box*  he-was  lying  in.  The  Stars  and  Stripes  were  triced  up  above  and  around 
a  picture  of  Washington.  .  .  .  The  dear  old  boy  saw  my-glance,  and  said,^  with-a  sad 
smile,  "Here,  you-see,  I-have-a  country."  And  then  he  pointed  to-the  foot  of-his-bed, 
where  I-had-not-seen  before  a  great  maj:)  of-the  United  States,^  as-he-had  drawn  it  from 
memory,  and  which-he-had-there  to-look  upon  as-he-lay.    Quaint,  queer  old  names  were  on 


Lesson  13.    ^^Z.  ,  /   ^  e.  ^p.  .oS5»  .^  J?^.  ^i^"^^,,.^  ^0/J. 


<^     7    ^/  ^~.  I 


,-    p  ^-^^  ^^ )  •-/--  .^^^  >^/ ^^/<^^  /^V.  .^ /^  tv^-v^xL^^-^^-^oZzr^ 


.V    ..'■^^..p.x'^^A./^^^/./^Ay^-r  s.^,^> 


;^. ^^^ ^r^.,  ^^.  ^/y-^.  ^"Y' -^ ^^^-^-/  ^^^' ^/x-- ^ :^-^^'  ^'^-^ 


rJ/^^^L      >>?.       .     ^X^,  -...     %y7.--  n    C-  e/C<^    ^'^'    ^  ^" ^^V-^ 


X  r/— ^.  ./^—  -r^,  ^x^  ^-.^■  '^^^— ^-^/^^^^^  -f^--^.  '^-^f^ 


,--:^  -^  ^^^^^  >^..^.  .  '>^r...-y^  t:i,„ji^c^^ 


7 ^^"^^ 


/^    -    O    ^   ^^/^  ^      ""^^N^    ^^...A   -  c/    ^^  ^  ^— /  ^^  ^  <^^  ^.  ^.  ""^^ 


'^   -/Q^^  ^^J^-  ^  ^^     ^^  ^    '^    "^^o   -^    •  ^/  ^-^^      Cor^   C  ^r^') 


o  1, ..  u'^\n^^  ry/.  ^<  ^^y^^,  e  .J  \_o  ■  c.^^.  /^  e^J  .^  ^  <^^2^- 


^-r-y 


i—  , 


''^..  9^^  ,  ./  ^^J^ /^.-^J,^/^^/^.  .  t^g^  v.^<y--p^^/  %■  ^"^ 


^(/q^o  2 .   r7  <<^^y  ^^  '^^  ^^  ■  "'> ,^y\^  -y--  n.  '^^^.^  /^  ^/A  - 


T 


^^^^.^.^-.^^r^^.  /  <?V^^/  ;?  -^/?yJ,/^.   .^  ,  -^  /^.  ^  o/^^/.^^  y  ^.  ^t^ 


'et  /^..  ^r^i^or^  ^^c^(^^  .^^~^c>^  r^  ■^-^^^^\  ^-p"^. 


88  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


it  in  large  letters:  'Indiana  Territory,'  'Mississippi  Territory,'  and  '  Louisiana  Territory,' 
as-I  suppose  our  fathers  learn(ed)  such  things;  but-the  old  fellow  had  patched'  in  Texas, 
too;  he-had  carried  his  Western  boundary  all-the-way  to-the  Pacific,®  but  on-that-shore 
he-had  defined  nothing. 

"'Oh,^  Danforth,'  he-said,  'I-kno\v  I-ani-dy(ing).  I-cannot-^e^  ^"-/jome.  Surely  you- 
will-tell-nie-something  now?  Stop!  Stop!  Do-not  speak  till  I-say,  what-I-am-sure- 
you-know,  that-there-is-not  in-this-ship,  that-there-is-not  in  America— God  ftfess-her ! " — 
a  more  loyal  7ncm  than-I.  There-cannot-be  a  man  who  loves-the  old  flag  as  I-do,  or  pra3'(s) 
for  it  as  I-do,  or  hopes  for  it  as  I-do.  There-are  thirty-four  stars^'^  in-it  now.  1-thank  God 
for-that,  though  I-do-not-know  what-their  names  are.  There-has-never-been  one  taken 
away  ;  1-thank  God  for-that.  I-know-bj'-that  that-there-has-never-been  any  successful  Burr. 
Oh,  Danforth,  Danforth,'^*  he  sighed  out,  'how-like  a  wretched  night's  dream'^*^  a  boy's 
idea  of  personal  fame  or  of  separate  sovei*eignty  seems,  when-one  looks  back  on  it  after  such 
a  life  as  mine  !    But  tell-me — tell-me  something — tell-me  everything  before  I-die.'  .  .  . 

"Ingham,  l-told-Xww^'"  everything  I-could  ^"^  think-of  that^'  would  show-the  grandeur 
of-his  country  ;  but-I-could-not  make-up  my  mouth  to-telP*-him  a  word  about-this  infernal 
Rebellion  ! 

"And  he  drank  it  in  and  enjoyed  it  as-I-carmot-tell-you.  He  grew  more  and  more 
silent,  yet-I-nevei'-thoiight  he-was  tired  or  faint.  I-gave-him  a  glass  (of)  water,  but  he  just 
wet  his  lips,  and  told-rae  not  to-go  away.  Then  he  asked-me  to  bring  the  Presbyterian 
*  Book  of  Public  Prayer,'  which-lay-there,  and  said,  with-a-smile,  that-it  would  open  at-the- 
right  place, — and  so  it-did.    There-was-his  double  red  mark  down  the  page." 

Annotations. — ^  Heart  might  be  contracted,  if  it  did  not  occur  right  at  the  beginning 
of  the  story.  We  have  seen  before  that  it  is  not  advisable  to  contract  too  much  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence,  before  the  reader  has  become  familiarized  with  the  idea  which  is  to  be 
developed  ;  for  the  same  reason,  contractions  should  not  be  employed  freely  at  the  start  of 
an  article.  ^  /and  coidd  should  not  be  connected  ;  but  k  may  be  placed  under  ^,  so  that  the 
hand  need  not  go  beneath  the  line.  ^  Be  careful  not  to  omit  the  vowel-stroke  following  r 
(below  the  line  and  shaded)  in  the  contraction  for  round:  without  the  vowel-stroke,  the 
word  at  the  first  glance  looks  like  our,  and  though  our  does  not  lit  into  the  sentence,  it  is 
best  to  avoid  such  stumbling-blocks.  *  It  is  best  not  to  contract  &o.r  .•  first,  because  shrine, 
which  is  associated  with  box  to  form  one  idea,  is  contracted  ;  and  second,  because  it  is  not 
usual  for  a  man  to  lie  in  a  box.  ^  Since  it  is  not  always  necessary  to  write  the  past  tense, 
said  may  be  contracted  to  say.  ®  Write  U.  S.,  blending  the  two  letters.  'It  is  best  not  to 
contract  2^atched,  as  it  is  used  hei'e  in  a  somewhat  unusual  connection.  ®  In  Pacific,  a  sounds 
like  short  e;  for  this  reason,  p  may  be  traced  upward,  admitting  of  shading/  at  the  top. 
®  Write  the  h  in  Oli,  to  avoid  a  possible  confusion  with  of.  '"The  outline  cannot  be  mistaken 
for  I'Cannot-gohome,  as  in  that  case,  o  would  be  shown  by  the  enlarged  curve  of  g.  '^  Bl  is 
perfectly  safe  for  bless,  in  the  phrase  bless-her.  ^^  It  is  not  necessary  to  indicate  the  plural  in 
the  contraction  for  stars,  since  it  is  implied  by  the  number  thirty-four.  '^  The  name  need 
not  be  written  the  second  time,  as  it  may  be  replaced  by  the  =  mark.  '*  A  vowel-stroke 
may  be  used  after  dr  in  dream ;  this  is  scarcely  necessary,  however,  as  the  word  is  closely 
associated  with  the  idea  of  a  wretched  night.  '^  Him  need  not  be  placed  high  in  this  phrase. 
^®See  ^  "One  might  be  tempted  to  phrase  think-of-that ;  which  would  not  be  correct,  since 
that  and  of  do  jiot  belong  together  in  this  case.  ^®  Trace  t  (of  tell)  upward  ;  this  is  already 
indicated  by  the  hyphen  between  to  and  tell,  showing  that  the  two  words  should  be  phrased. 
This  could  not  be  done  if  t  were  a  down-stroke.  It  may  also  be  observed  as  a  general  rule 
that,  when  a  tale  like  this  is  related  in  the  past  tense,  and  the  tense  has  been  clearly  shown 
in  the  beginning,  no  special  attention  need  be  paid  to  the  ending  ed,  unless  it  can  be  written 
by  blending  t  to  y,  nee,  etc. 

[B)  Pittsburg,  Pa.,  September  17,  1898. 

Messrs.  Wellington  &  Sons, 

Sioux  City,  la. 
Gentlemen  : — 

In-reply-to-your-favor  (of  the)  12th  inst.,  just  to-hand,  l-beg-leave-{to)-9,diy  that-I- 

am-not  inclined  to  certify '^-the  bill  (of)  goods'^''  which-you-se?ii!-the  firm,  and  will,  therefore 

be-oblig(ed)  to-send-them  back  by  freight  from-this-city.     l-hope-you-wiW-he-kind  enough 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  89 


to-send-us-a  copy  of-the-order  I-gave-you,  as  otherwise  I-shall-not  consider-inyself  bound 
by-the  agreement.  As-soon-(as)-the  paper  comes  ^i  to-hand,  I-shall-go  over  it  carefully,  and 
strike  out^^  all-the-goods  I-have-no-use  for  at-tlie  present-time.  The  balance  of  the  order 
will-be  paid  cash,  either  by  a  sight  ^^  draft  or  by-check. 

Enclosed  I-beg-(to)-hand-you  a  label  of  a  new-brand ''*  (of)  ^roorfs  which-(has)-been 
placed  upon-the  market  here.  Can-you  ^ru'e-me  any  information  about  them?"  I-should- 
like  to-find  out  the  name-of-the  manufacturer,  and  hope-yon  will-be-able  to  trace  this- 
matter '-'«  up.  Yours  very-tru(ly), 

John  P.  Dougherty." 

Dallas,  Tex.,  December  13,  1898. 
The  Texas  Banking  Co., 

San  Anton  io,^^  Tex. 
Gentlemen  : — 

Your-favor  of  a-few-days-ago  has-duly  reached  us,  and  we-?iofe^*  what-you-say 
about-the  draft  which-will  fall-^ne  at-your  bank  on-the  19th  inst.  The  drawee  lurote  us 
some-time-ago  that-he  had-not  7nade-up^^  h\s-mind  as  yet,  as-to-whether-or-not  he  would 
pay  it ;  for,  according  (to)  his-statement,-^'  he-had-made  a  difFer(ent)^^  arrangement  with 
Messrs.  Higgins,  Drake  &  Co.  We-shall-write^^  to-him  again  in-thecour.se-of-a-few-days, 
and  find  out  exactly  what  his  intentions  are  in-regard  to-this-ma^<e;*.  We  fear,  however, 
that-you-cannot  count  upon  him  as-a  man  who  keeps  his  word. 

Yours  very  resp(ectfully), 

The  Southern  Collection  Agency. 

Messrs.  L.  McCaffrey  &  Co.,  Princeton,'*  N.  J.,  February  22,  1898. 

Richmond,  Va. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

In-reply-(to)-your  lines  (of)  yesterday,  would-say  that-I-eaW(ed)  at-the-office  (of  the) 
debtor.  He-said  that-he  declined  to-comply-with-your  offer,  womatter  what-the  outcome 
of-the  affair  may-be.  From-all  I-can  learn,  he-hasno  reason  for  taking  the  ground  he  does, 
and  I-think  the  eJahn  can  be  made.  If-you  will-send  me  the  proper  papers  duly  signed, 
I-shall  proceed  as-per  directions. 

Mr.  Grub  stated  that-he-had-had  some  hard  luck  lately,  which-is-the-cause  of  his  delin- 
quency.^^ 

As-to-the-other-cases,^^  they -are  in  sound  condition  ;  but-I-cannot  give-you  a  report  on- 
them  to-day,  as-there-are-some  who  asked-me  to-call  again  at-the  beginning  of  next  month. 

Yours  very-tru(ly), 

Howard  L.  McMichael. 

Annotations. — ''Omit  tif,  in  accordance  with  rules  given  in  Lessons  10  and  11.  *"  Since 
goods  always  stands  in  the  plural,  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  .s.  "This  sentence  illustrates 
nicely  how  k  below  the  line,  when  standing  as  contraction  for  come,  can  hardly  clash 
with  could,  since  the  latter  always  requires  another  verb  in  the  sentence,  except  when  it 
occurs  in  answer  to  a  question,  as  in  the  sentences,  "Could  you  do  it?"  "Yes,  I  could." 
"Place  the  oid  dot  under/;/  it  need  not  come  below  the  writing-line.  ^^No  advantage  is 
gained  in  contracting  sight,  as  the  word  can  be  conveniently  written  in  full,  by  adding 
a  short  stroke  to  the  contracted  outline.  ^*  Cross  n  and  br  (shaded  for  brand)  to  form  new- 
brand.  ^^  About-them  is  written  on  the  same  principle  as  about-it.  "^^  This  contraction  cannot 
be  mistaken  for  maw,  which  would  in  this  case  be  written  in  full,  as  it  is  not  common  in 
phrases.  "^''Dougherty,  being  a  familiar  name,  can  be  shortened  to  Dog rty,  g  and  /•  being 
blended.  ''^  Place  the  last  o  high,  to  indicate  the  preceding  short  i  sound.  *'This  could  not 
very  well  be  mistaken  for  knoiv,  which  would  not  fit  into  the  sense  of  this  sentence. 
^'^  Made-up  is  a  very  frequent  phrase,  in  which  m  and  u  (for  tip)  can  safely  be  phrased. 
^'  In  his-statement,  one  .s'  is  omitted  and  t  is  traced  upward."  The  beginning  of  the  word 
different  is  so  characteristic,  that  it  will  be  safe  to  drop  the  ending :  blend  d  and  //•,  ex- 
tending d  above  the  top-centre-line.  ^^^  See  ^'.  "In  Princeton,  use  nee  blended  with  t. 
'*In  delim/uenci/,  omit  tv  and  ence.  '^  It  is  not  necessary  to  show  the  plural  in  this  phrase, 
as  it  is  plainly  indicated  by  the  following  thej/. 


90  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  14. 


Lesson  No.  13  has  shown  that  standard  contractions,  such  as  th  shaded  for  that^  and  h 
shaded  for  hand,  are  simply  the  regular  contractions,  made  in  accordance  with  the  rules. 
Comparing  these  outlines  with  the  standard  contraction  for  time,  for  example,  we  notice  that 
in  the  latter  the_^wa^  part  of  the  word  is  written.  This  is  not  done  arbitrarily,  but  according 
to  two  principles  determining  as  to  whether  an  outline  is  to  be  initially  or  finally  contracted. 

We  have  seen  in  the  preceding  lesson  that  the  important  considerations  in  contracting 
words  are  : — (o)  The  brevity  of  the  contracted  outline  and  the  convenience  of  writing  it ;  and 
(b)  The  convenient  indication  of  the  vowel-sound,  which  is  a  very  important  factor  in 
insuring  the  legibility  of  the  writing. 

In  some  closed  monosyllables,  these  considerations  do  not  apply  so  much  to  the  initial 
as  to  the  final  part  of  the  word  ;  such  words  are  therefore  subject  to 

Final  Contraction. 

According  to  the  above  rules,  this  is  usually  adopted  when  the  final  consonant  is  smaller 
than  the  initial,  and  when  at  the  same  time  the  outline  admits  of  a  convenient  expression 
of  the  vowel-sound.  Practice  will  soon  enable  you  to  determine  instinctivelj'  whether  a 
word  is  best  contracted  initially  or  finally  ;  the  illustrations  given  on  the  lesson-sheet  should 
therefore  be  studied  very  carefully.    Final  contractions,  as  a  rule,  stand  above  the  line. 

(1)  How  far  is  it  from  New  York  to  Cuba? — Here  we  notice  that  r  stands  high  and  is 
shaded,  showing  that  it  is  the  end  of  a  word  and  expresses  an  "  a"  sound.  Since  we  know 
that,  in  the  contracted  word,  r  follows  the  initial  consonant, — in  other  words,  since  the  "a" 
sound  is  indicated  by  the  following  consonant, — it  can  be  only  the  sound  as  in  far.  Com- 
pare this  r  with  the  r  followed  by  the  vowel-stroke,  as  in  rich  and  reach,  in  Lesson  13 ; 
both  outlines  show  at  once,  whether  they  represent  the  beginning  or  the  end  of  a  word. 

(2)  The  patient  does-not  feel  well.— The  outline  following  t  literally  reads  eel,  as  indi- 
cated by  the  long  vowel-stroke  (in  high  position)  preceding  I.  The  outline  shows  at  once 
that  it  is  a  contraction  ;  for,  according  to  the  rules  on  the  initial  "  ee"  sound,  if  an  uncon- 
tracted  word  should  be  started  with  that  sound,  the  shorthand  outline  should  be  started 
with  the  initial  ee  stroke  (traced  upward  from  the  line).  The  word  patient  readily  suggests 
the  word  following  it. 

(3)  Thou  shalt  not  steal,  says-the  Lord. — Here  eel  will  not  be  read  for  anything  but 
steal.  You  will  notice  that  in  both  cases  the  final  part  of  the  word  admits  of  convenient 
vowel-expression,  and  can  be  traced  more  readily  than  the  initial  i^art.  The  shorthand  out- 
line for  shall  must  be  written  with  double  I, — that  is,  t  is  added  to  the  logogram  for  shall, — 
as  the  single  I  followed  bj'  t  would  be  uull  -\-  t  ^=  wilt. 

(4)  1900  will-not-be  a  leap  year. — This  sentence  shows  nicely  how  we  can  readily  dis- 
tinguish the  initial  part  of  a  word  from  the  final  part  by  means  of  the  vowel-stroke.  See 
how  the  stroke  follows  I  in  lexqy,  showing  that  the  vowel-sound  follows  I,  and  how  it  2)re- 
cedes  r  in  year,  showing  that  the  vowel-sound  precedes  r.  Year  occurs  frequently  in  such 
phrases  as  years-{of)-age  (5),  years-ago  (6),  {a)  year-or-so  (7),  etc. 

(8)  The  cunning  burglar  thought  he-could  obliterate  all-the  traces  of-his  deed,  but-the 
trick  did-not  succeed,  and  we  soon  found  his  track. — Note  how  k  (for  could)  is  placed  low, 
by  writing  it  lower  than  tlie  preceding  h ;  also,  the  convenient  outline  for  obliterate  (sj^elled 
oblitrat).  Observe  the  contraction  for  trick  and  that  for  track:  in  the  latter  word,  tr  offers 
(by  shading)  a  good  opportunity  of  showing  the  vowel-sound,  which  is  not  the  case  with 
trick ;  the  latter  being,  therefore,  contracted  finally.  See  how  unmistakably  oimd  stands 
for  found.  This  word  shows  how  safe  these  contractions  are  :  we  know  that  the  initial  word 
must  be  a  larger  letter  than  d,  and  we  have  only  the  choice  between  j,  /,  t,  sh,  j),  and  sp, 
none  of  which,  with  the  exception  of/  and  p,  could  form  a  word  in  this  case  ;  and  p)Ound 
would  not  fit  into  the  sentence. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  91 


(9)  I-liave  waited  for-your  arrival  for  weelvs. —  Weeks  is  a  frequent  word  in  s?uch  groups 
as  in-the-course-{of  a)-few-weeks  (10),  after-(a)-J'ew-iveeks  (11),  weeks-ago  (12),  etc. 

(13)  Although  I-am  advanced  in  years,  I-am-not  deaf;  please  do-not  shout  so  in-niy 
ears. — Compare  the  contraction  for  yearn  with  the  outline  for  cars.  Medium  t  placed  low 
and  shaded  represents  shout  in  full,  with  the  exception  of  initial  sh. 

(14)  The  law  should  put  an  end  to-this  usage,  it  does-not  allow  anj-  one  to  shoot  deer  so 
early  in  the  season. — Notice  the  difference  between  the  short  sound  in  pM^  and  the  long 
sound  in  shoot  (distinguished  by  the  length  of  the  vowel-stroke).  A  short  vowel-stroke 
inight  precede  t  in  i^ut ;  this  is  not  necessary,  however,  since  medium  t  cannot  be  used 
initially. 

(15)  The  admiral  said  that-he  should-have  a  stronger  fleet ;  otherwise  he-could-not 
attempt  such  a  bold  stroke. — Observe  the  word  admiral,  where  the  short  "  i"  sound  is  shown 
by  m  extended  above  the  line,  admitting  of  blending  in  and  r.  T  is  shown  in  high  position 
for  the  "  ee"  sound  of  fleet.    Notice  also  the  final  part  of  stroke,  where  k  is  preceded  by  o. 

(16)  Tiie  poor  victim  had  lost  both  feet  by-the  explosion  of-the  steam  pipe  ;  he-was  also 
badly  scalded  by-the  stream  of  boiling  water. — Feet  is  self-explanatory.  Note  again  the  nice 
distinction  between  steam  and  stream.  The  former  is  subject  to  initial  contraction,  as  t  can 
conveniently  show  the  i  by  shading  at  the  bottom.  This  would  not  be  the  case  with  stream, 
where  the  vowel-sound  can  be  well  shown  by  the  long  stroke  preceding  m. 

(17)  Even-a  skilled  artisan  cannot-do  good  work  with-a  bad  tool. — The  connection 
between  skilled  artisan  and  good  work  is  so  obvious,  that  both  good  and  work  can  be 
contracted.  L,  preceded  by  the  long  vowel-stroke,  is  placed  below  the  line  (in  the  "  oo" 
position),  so  that  the  word  reads  actually  ool.  We  see  that  ool  must  be  the  end  of  a  word  ; 
for,  apart  from  the  fact  that  it  has  no  meaning,  if  it  were  the  initial  part  of  a  word,  I  would 
stand  on  the  line  and  the  preceding  vowel-stroke  would  start  below  the  line. 

(18)  Many  a  wise  word  came  from  a  fool. — Here  ool  will  at  once  be  taken  for  fool. 
Notice  also  the  ur  sound  (in  word)  shown  by  the  low  position  of  rd ;  no  vowel-stroke  is 
necessary,  as  no  word  can  start  with  such  a  combination.  Note  how  well  we  can  differen- 
tiate between  ivork  {initial  contraction  more  convenient)  and  tvord  {final  contraction 
preferable). 

(19)  Shows  the  contraction  for  ivortJi  (no  initial  vowel-stroke  is  necessary  in  worth,  any 
more  than  in  tvord)  and  (20)  for  while;  the  two  words  frequently  occur  together  in  the 
phrase  worth  while. 

(21)  It-is-not  worth-while  to  read  a  bad  book. 

When  the  "ur"  sound  ends  a  word,  the  ur  sign  can  be  used,  instead  of  the  contraction: 

(22)  Only  a  rash  man  will  act  on-the  spur  (of  the)  moment. — Compare  the  contraction 
for  rash,  where  no  vowel-stroke  is  necessary,  with  that  for  far  (1). 

The  ur  sign  also  blends  readil3'  with  the  final  letters,  as  in  firm,  for  instance.  This 
blended  group  is  then  used  for  the  contraction  : 

(23)  The  doctor  said  that-the  germs  of-the  disease  were  brouglit  from-the  West  Indies. 

(24)  Our  Arm  (has)  been  in  business  for  20  years,  and  we-can  therefore  sell  goods  at  rock 
bottom  prices. — Note  the  contraction  for  roek :  r,  placed  high  and  shaded,  is  followed  by  the 
vowel-stroke,  showing  that  the  letter  starts  the  word  and  is  followed  by  the  vowel-sound. 
Compare  this  outline  with  far  (1). 

We  have  seen  that  one  of  the  qualifications  which  make  a  Avord  subject  to  final  contrac- 
tion is  the  fact  that  its  final  consonant  is  smaller  than  its  initial  one.  This  will  naturally 
give  rise  to  the  question,  "  But,  if  both  consonants  are  of  the  same  size,  what  then?" 

According  to  the  three  different  sizes  of  the  Graphic  characters,  there  may  be  three 
different  cases : 

(a)  Both  may  be  small,  as  in  rule ;  in  this  case,  the  word  need  not  be  contracted  at  all, 
unless  the  full  form  is  lengthy  (as  in  clerk,  which  is  contracted  initially) ; 

(6)  Both  may  be  medium  ;  the  initial  consonant  has  the  preference, — as  shown  by  deed, 
for  example, — unless  the  final  consonant  offers  a  very  good  opportunity  for  showing  the 
vowel-sound  (as  in  word)  ; 

(c)  Both  may  be  large  ;  in  which  case  the  final  consonant  has  the  preference,  unless  the 
initial  affords  a  better  opportunity  of  showing  the  vowel-sound  (as  shown  by  steam). 

(2"))  We-do-not  always  practise  what-we  preach. — As  said  before,  for  the  purposes  of 
contraction,  all  words  starting  with  pr  are  considered  as  starting  witli  a  large  letter.     The 


92  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


contraction  iov  preach  (note  the  preceding  vowel-strolve)  cannot  be  mistaken  for  teacJi^  since 
t  affords  a  good  opportunity  of  showing  the  vowel-sound,  by  shading  at  the  bottom.  Teach 
is,  therefore,  subject  to  initial  contraction. 

(26)  Poor  goods  at-a  low  price  are-not  cheap  goods.— Here  the  vowel-stroke— and,  there- 
fore, the  vowel-sound— follows  ch  placed  high.  Compare  the  contraction  of  preach  with 
that  of  cheap,  both  sbowing  at  once  whether  they  represent  the  initial  or  the  final  part  of 
the  word. 

(27)  I-regret  that-I-cannot-go  to-church  next  Sunday.— Note  the  group  that-I-cannot-go. 
Church  shows  that  some  words  can  be  contracted  with  equal  facility  initially  or  finally. 
In  both  cases,  the  consonant  can  convenienth'  indicate  the  medial  vowel :  in  the  first 
case,  by  blending  ch  and  lu- ;  in  the  second,  by  placing  rch  low.  In  such  cases,  preference 
is  given  to  the  initial  contraction,  which  will  turn  the  thoughts  of  the  reader  more  readily 
in  the  proper  direction  tliau  will  the  final  contraction. 

(28)  Blind  people  have  a  wonderful  sense  (of)  touch.— Xote  ch  placed  low  and  preceded 
by  a  short  vowel-stroke,  for  touch. 

(29)  We  trust-you-will-be  prompt  about-the  payment  of-this  balance,  as  our  rules  for 
settlement  are  very  strict ;  if-you-cannot  send-us  the  whole  sum,  perhaps-you-can  forward 
a  part-of-the  amount. — Notice  the  outline  for  trust,  which  represents  the  word  in  full, 
with  the  exception  of  the  initial  tr.  Observe  also  the  contraction  for  prompt,  where  only  jj/- 
is  omitted  ;  when  o  has  the  "a"  sound,  mt  will  be  shaded  ;  but,  if  the  sound  is  a  true  "o", 
the  o  curve  must  be  used,  as  shown  in  the  parenthesis.  In  this  sentence,  s,  followed  by  the 
vowel-stroke  and  placed  low,  could  not  be  taken  for  auch,  which  would  not  fit  into  the 
meaning.  See  how  clearly  the  contraction  for  part  indicates  the  whole  word,  and  compare 
the  outline  with  the  phrase  ivere-not  in  sentence  (42).  Notice  also  the  contraction  for  strict, 
formed  on  the  same  principle. 

Since  final  contractions  must  stand  above  the  line  (or  below,  to  express  a  low  sound), 
monosyllables  with  medial  ay  cannot  well  be  contracted  finally.  This  does  not  apply,  how- 
ever, to  lengthened  k,  which,  being  always  preceded  by  a  long  sound,  shows  at  once  that  it 
stands  for  the  end  of  the  word,  and  can,  therefore,  be  used  in  common  phrases,  as  the  con- 
traction for  take  (30). 

(31)  If  we-do-not  hear  from-you  by-the  3d,  we-shall-take-the  liberty  to-draw  on-j'ou-for- 
the  total. 

We  can  also  use  the  final  long  ay  stroke  for  say,  in  such  well-known  phrases  as  I-{am)- 
glad  {to)  say  (32),  I-am-pleased  [to)-say  (33),  we-take-the  liberty-(to)-say  (34),  etc. 

Unless  they  are  phrased,  words  which  end  with  n  preceded  by  the  "ow^"  sound  should 
not  be  contracted  finally,  as  the  n  (w^hich  would  be  shaded  and  placed  low)  might  conflict 
with  the  logogram  for  now.    In  phrases,  however,  no  such  precaution  is  necessary  : 

(35)  The  glorious  deed  of-the  hero  will-go-down  in  history  as-a  shining  example  (of) 
valor. — Note  the  phrase  go-clown,  which  is  quite  common.  Observe  also  the  convenient 
outline  for  history  (spelled  histry). 

Words  ending  with  is  or  eese  are  subjected  to  much  the  same  restrictions  as  are  those 
ending  with  own.  They  should  generally  be  contracted  initially  or  not  at  all,— unless  they 
are  so  phrased  as  to  be  perfectly  plain,— since  they  might  clash  with  this  or  these.  Note  how 
please  is  contracted  initially. 

In  the  same  way  as  t  shaded  at  the  bottom  affords  a  good  opportunity  for  indicating 
vowels  in  combination  with  initial  contraction,  so  t  shaded  at  the  top  will  be  an  efficient  aid 
in  the  final  contraction  of  such  words  as  sjitit,  sit,  etc.  Since  t  thus  shaded  represents  the 
end  of  the  word,  it  stands  above  the  line.  The  following  sentence  shows  how  safe  these 
contractions  are : — 

(36)  The  snake  bit  the  child  before  I  could  hit  it. — In  this  sentence,  there  are  three  fs, 
all  of  which  are  shaded  at  the  top,  yet  each  will  unmistakably  be  read  for  its  proper  word, — 
viz. :  bit,  hit,  and  it. 

The  same  principle  can  be  applied  to  other  letters— as  />- which  admit  of  shading  at 
the  top : 

(37)  I-shall-get  sea-sick  as-soon  (as)  I-set  a  foot  aboard-the  ship. — Aboard  has  the  true  "  o" 
sound,  and  r  may,  therefore,  be  omitted.    Ip  will  hardly  be  taken  for  anything  but  ship. 

The  same  facility  for  shownng  the  vowel-sound  is  afforded  by  t  and  /  in  ite  and  ife.  By 
contracting  such  words  as  light,  life,  etc.,  no  great  saving  would  be  effected ;  hence  these 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  93 


words  are  best  written  in  full ;  the  contractions  ite  and  ife  are  used  only  when  the  word 
starts  with  blended  consonant.-* : 

(38)  Tiie  old  man  said  that-he  would-like  to-die,  for  he-is  weary  of-the  bitter  strife,  and 
should-Iike  to-tind  peace  in-the-other  world.  — Compare  the  final  contraction  for  strife  with 
the  initial  contraction  for  find;  the  two  are  clearly  distinguished  from  each  other,  the 
former  being/  in  the  i  direction,  the  latter,  /  followed  by  the  /  stroke.  As  explained  in 
the  preceding  paragraph,  ife  cannot  be  taken  for  life.  See  how  the  phrase  in-the-other 
shows  ther  placed  lower  than  th  (for  the),  thus  indicating  the  short  "  u"  sound  of  other. 

(39)  The  impression  produced  by-his  speech  was  very  slight. — Ite  cannot  here  mean 
light,  because  that  word  would  be  written  in  full ;  alight  is  the  only  other  word  which  could 
make  sense  in  this  connection. 

The  most  frequent  word  which  comes  under  this  rule  is  quite: 

(40)  Although-my  opponent  says  that-this-is-not-so,  I-am-quite-sure  that-this-is-quite-so, 
and  I-think  I-can  easily  prove  that-he-is-not  quite-right  in-this-matter. — Take  especial  notice 
of  all  the  frequent  phrases  with  quite;  they  are  all  written  very  conveniently  and  rapidly. 
Observe  also  the  contraction  for  2^>'0ve. 

(41)  He-is  too  quiet  a  man  to-care  much  for  sports. 

(42)  It  took  a  good-deal  (of)  effort  to-accomplish  our  end  ;  but  our  endeavors  were-not 
futile. — Note  the  common  i>hrase  good-deed,  showing  the  contraction  of  good  joined  to  that 
of  deal,  in  which  the  "ee"  sound  is  shown  by  the  high  position  of  I. 

As  shown  by  a  good  deal,  our  language  contains  some  frequent  combinations  of  words  ; 
these  combinations  are  in  a  measure  compound  words,  although  they  may  not  be  written 
together  nor  be  connected  by  hyphens.  Of  this  class,  another  is  the  phrase  a  great  deal, 
formed  in  the  saiue  manner  as  a  good  deal : 

(43)  A  good-deal  can  be  gained  by  answering-this  letter  at-once  and  explaining-the-case 
in-an  agreeable  manner. — Compare  good-deal  and  agreeable  (where  the  I  is  shaded). 

A  similar  group  is  a  great  many.  As  the  initial  m  makes  the  outline  rather  lengthy, 
and  as  the  small  consonant  n  is  very  convenient  to  trace,  rn  is  dropped  in  such  groups  as 
a  great-many  (44),  too-many  (4.5),  to-many  {A&)—to  any  would  be  medium  t  (for  to)  and  the 
any  stroke  phrased ;  how-many  is  consequently  written  by  joining  how  and  ny.  This 
preference  for  the  small  letter  is  shown  also  in  phrases  such  as  how-long  (48),  where  the 
larger  consonant  is  dropped  : 

(48)  How-long-have-you-been  in-the-employ  of-this  concern? — Xote  the  brief  outline  for 
how-long  have-you-been. 

(48a)  I-have-been- their  employee  for-many  years ;  about  12,  or-something-like-that. — 
Note  the  word  employee,  where  the  final  ee  stroke  could  not  very  well  be  used  ;  it  is  there- 
fore replaced  by  the  alphabetical  character  for  /,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  that  the 
alphabetical  vowel-signs  nmst  be  employed  when  symbolical  vowel-representation  is  incon- 
venient. Observe  that  years,  though  below  the  line,  stands  high  in  relation  to  for-many. 
Note  also  the  frequent  phra.se  or-something-like-that,  where  both  like  and  that  are  contracted. 

(49)  If-that-is-(the)-case,  I-think-you-will-have  to-get-used  to-the  change.— Note  the 
common  phrases  if-thaf-is-the-case,  I-think-you-ivill-have,  and  to-get-used  (in  the  latter,  get — 
being  phrased— is  contracted). 

(50)  Was-there  any  clause  in-his  will,  which  disposed  of-his  real  estate  to-his  cousin, 
so-far-(as)-you-know?"  asked-the  judge.— The  sign  for  will,  which  has  heretofore  been  treated 
entirely  as  a  logogram,  is  seen  to  be  the  regular  contraction  of  the  word  ;  you  will  notice  that 
this  is  the  case  with  the  majority  of  the  logograms.  The  rules  on  contractions  explain  why 
the  logogram  for  had  stands  above  the  line  and  is  shaded,  why  such  logograms  as  could, 
would,  and  should  stand  below  the  line,  etc.  lical  estate  is  also  a  "  compound-word"  phrase  ; 
the  two  words  may  be  written  conveniently  in  one  outline.  Note  also  the  final  contraction 
in  the  word  judge,  where  J  is  placed  low,  the  preceding  vowel-stroke  indicating  the  short 
"  u"  preceding  the  consonant.     Observe  the  group  so-far-as-you-know. 

(51)  Can-you-tell-us  what-was-done  Mith-reference  to-the  dissolution  (of  the)  firiu? — 
Note  the  convenient  phrase  tvhatwas-done.  In  the  familiar  group  with-reference,  the 
unaccented  syllables  (erence)  are  dropped. 

(51r0  I-cannot  state  the  matter  to-advantage,  as-I-was  absent-from-this-city  about-that- 
time. — In  to-advantage,  Ave  proceed  as  in  with-reference,  and  drop  the  unaccented  part  tage. 
The  outline  could  not  be  mistaken  for  advance,  as  the  cnee  stroke  would  there  be  used 


94  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


instead  of  n.    We  have  seen  before  that  the  prefix  may  sometimes  stand  for  the  whole 
word  :    In  I-ivas  ab  from  the  city,  ab  can  mean  notliing  but  absent. 

The  prefix  ab  can  be  used  in  a  similar  manner,  in  such  stereotyped  phrases  as  absolutely 
positive,  absolutely  sure,  etc. 

(52)  I-venture-(to)-say  tliat  it-is  absolutely-necessary  to  j)reserve  unity  among-us,  and- 
that-the  victory  of-our  cause  can  only  be  achieved  in-this-manner ;  that-that  will-be-the 
case,  and-that-that  can-be  accomplished,  is  absolutely  certain. — In  this  sentence,  ab  cannot 
read  anything  but  absolutely.  In  venture,  in  the  phrase  I-venture-{to)-say,  shr  is  dropjied 
(in  analogy  to  advantage),  as  it  is  slighted  by  the  voice.  The  same  reasoning  applies  to 
accomplish;  accompl  can  hardly  read  anything  else.  Observe  the  substitution  of  "oo"  for 
"yu,"  in  unity.  Further  note  the  groups  and-that-the  (where  the  outline  for  that-the  stands 
in  the  and  position),  that-that,  and  and-that-that  (where  the  phrase  that-that  stands  in  the 
and  position). 

A  safe  and  convenient  method  of  writing  phrases  consisting  of  two  words  which  form, 
to  a  certain  degree,  a  compound  word,  is,  to  write  the  first  syllable  of  the  first  word,  and  the 
last  syllable  of  the  last:  thus,  for  return  mail,  we  write  retmail  in  one  outline;  since  the 
second  word  has  only  one  syllable,  the  whole  syllable  must  be  written.  It  is  hardly  neces- 
sary to  say  that  this  shortening  device  can  be  applied  to  very  familiar  phrases  only.  One 
of  these  phrases — which  is  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  commercial  correspondence — is,  at 
your  early  convenience  (54),  where  at  and  your  may  be  omitted,  since  they  form  an  integral 
part  of  the  phrase.  Note  particularly  how  this  phrase  is  distinguished  from  at  your  earliest- 
convenience  (53«) ;  the  former  outline  reads  literally  earl-ience,  the  latter,  carliest-ience. 

(53)  If-you-cannot  give  us-an  answer  by  return-mail,  please  do-so  at-your-earliest-con- 
venience, 

A  compound  word  of  very  frequent  occurrence  is  furthermore  (55).  We  have  seen  in  a 
preceding  lesson — in  the  case  of  some  body  else,  for  instance — that  a  word  may  by  position 
indicate  the  vowel-sound  of  an  omitted  word  ;  this  rule  applies  to  the  case  o^  furtherm,ore, 
where  the  low  accented  vowel  of  the  (omitted)  first  syllable  is  indicated  by  the  low  position 
of  the  last  syllable  more. 

(56)  We-sent  a  letter  to-the  freight  claim  agent  about-the  missing  goods ;  furthermore, 
we-sent  tracers  in-all-directions. — Note  the  phrase  in-all-directions. 

(57)  The  doctor  thinks  that-he-can  cure-the  child,  if-you-will-take-care  that-he-gets  the 
right-kind  (of)  food. — Note  the  contraction  for  cure,  and  that  for /oofZ.  Since  take  is  con- 
tracted to  a  lengthened  k,  and  since  double  consonants  are  not  written,  lengthened  k  joined 
with  r  will  form  the  outline  for  take-care.  This  cannot  be  confused  with  taker,  in  which 
outline  k  and  /•  would  be  blended.     Observe  also  the  frequent  group  right-kind  (of). 

(58)  At-what  rate  (of)  speed  can-you-take-down  dictation? — The  common  plirase,  at 
what  rate,  will  readily  direct  the  thoughts  of  the  reader  so  that  tlie  outline  eed  is  easily  read 
speed.  Note  the  group  can-you-take-down ;  can  is  crossed  with  the  contracted  outline  for 
take,  which  latter  is  phrased  with  the  contracted  outline  for  down.  Such  phrasing  of  con- 
tractions can  be  done  only  with  familiar  phrases. 

(58a)  I-cannot-say  ;  I-never  tried  to  write  fast. 

(59)  How-long  did-the  strike  last? — Note  the  contraction  for  strike. 

(59a)  It-was-soon  settled  bj^-the-committee. — See  how  the  "  oo"  sound  is  shown  by 
slanting  lengthened  n  downward  in  it-was-soon.  Also  observe  how  the  initial  part  of  com, 
in  by-the-committee,  is  formed  by  the  initial  part  of  the  phrase. 

(60)  It-seems-(to)-me  that-this  blind  beggar  is-a  fraud.— Note  the  group  it-seem,s-(to)-tne. 
Likewise,  the  contraction  for  fraud. 

(61)  I  found  this  freak  (of)  nature  in-the  cave,  and  I  pride-myself  very-much  on-the 
scientific  value-of-the  discovery  of-this  weird  creature.— This  sentence  offers  some  very  perti- 
nent illustrations.  Eek  nature  is  very  plain.  If  myself  can  be  added  to  pride  when  the 
latter  is  written  in  full,  it  can  also  be  added  to  the  contraction,  which  is  the  whole  word, 
with  the  exception  of  initial  pr.  Note  the  convenient  outline  for  scientific,  obtained  bj' 
omitting  tif.     As  rd,  in  low  position,  stands  for  word,  in  high  position,  it  will  stand  for  weird. 

(62)  Did-you-see  the  Prince  (of)  Wales  in  London? — Note  the  contraction  for  pi-ince. 

(63)  An  ounce  (of)  prevention  is  wortli  a  pound  of  cure. 

(64)  The  detective  admitted  that-the-case  is  shrouded  in  deep  mystery. — Observe  how  t 
is  omitted  in  detective.    The  construction  of  the  sentence  implies  the  past  participle  so 


Lesson  14.  '^vA  '^ /t,  ?   t^^/^/-^.  \~^/^,^.^   ''/^^^^-- 

^%     <^  7  8 


T- 


-^--^^  „^_^/.  .   -K^,.  „^-^^_, „-y^-^^..^g/"x9 


^  -,.^   ^^  "rx^   r-^  '-^^  '' ...  ^  -f-/..  -^  //,  r  Jff.  ^yf.'\. 


r^-y 


■-& 


J_£L,  --/ -7  <^ ^^_^-I:l^-^,^9-<-^^  ^-.^  ^//  -^>>^  ""■ 


^_:e_j.r._^.AiU.-£-^  >.      /  -7  '^  ^/^^-g — ^-iL^ — ,^9_<-</^  ^.^ 


r^  ,1  U  '  /^  ^  .    ..A   ^.         '  ^     -^    '  "  "^ 


-2y 


/^  ■  9^  r^"^  /^^  //.  V-  vC  .  .^  A/X^     .,.J.  /-^.^^  ^O 


A£_ 


0^--l^^^l  -r^     a^^  I.         r    ^r^^-^'c/i^  y    y^'/.        ,^  F^^J-,Z/y...^l 


?^^^^^'^,,'^r^^<'^f^'C'^y^^^"  I^L^/^/^/— r 


■    ^■-■^/^j/^^/^^-^ 


^-  >^^,"y^/  "'— -'^i^^vj'^^?-'^-'--"-^/   '^^'^  ^  '^'^ 


-^/^///LaArl 


n 


.^J-Z^^r-..^-^^  '^.m'^^^^yr^J.   l<.,a,^^y^. 


<f? 


^/if  ^..^--^  y^  ^y^   \^^  J./.^r^ /r^  ^^.^  ^^-X-C^/^^-"^-/^^. 


fp-^  ^^/  O  />.</:  r/^^  ^/.y/^r^.  -y/'^.   ^y.n^.  'rJ^A^r.r^  7;^< 


^ 


.  i^cJU  A— ^.  ^  ^  o^*^/^  i-;  M^-^^fi^^- .-^--^^.y^^^. 


/^ 


/;^  A  --^.^'^  ^  -^--^^/^^/.^^^^.r-^y^^^.^^-^   ^/f  .  i^-^.>oo  f' 


96  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


clearly  that,  instead  of  shrouded,  it  is  sufficient  to  write  shroud,  which  is  subject  to  final 
contraction.  See  how  d,  placed  low  and  shaded,  is  preceded  by  the  vowel-stroke,  showing 
that  the  contraction  is  the  end  of  a  word.  Note  also  the  convenient  outline  for  ')nystery, 
spelled  mystri/,  where  medium  str  is  employed  to  advantage. 

(65)  Those- who  toil  shall  reap  the  harvest,  but-the  lazj'  ones  must  starve. — Note  how 
clear  the  final  contraction  oil  is  for  foil ;  observe  how  ns,  for  ones,  is  written  under  the  final 
y  stroke  of  lazy  ;  note  further  the  final  contraction  arv  {r  shaded),  for  starve. 

In  writing  words  which  may  be  contracted,  the  student  should  carefully  consider  the 
i-ules  in  this  respect.  In  this  manner,  the  habit  of  contracting  instinctively,  yet  correetlj', 
will  soon  be  acquired.  When  a  word  is  equally  adapted  to  initial  and  final  contraction, 
preference  is  given  to  the  former.  Having  once  decided  upon  a  contraction  for  a  given 
word,  the  same  contraction  should  always  be  used  for  the  same  word. 

In  the  following 

Writixg  Exercises, 

the  asterisks  (*)  indicate  that  the  words  by  which  they  stand  are  to  be  contracted  :  an  asterisk 
at  the  beginning  indicates  an  initial  contraction  ;  at  the  end,  a  final  contraction  : — 

(A)  Chicago,  111.,  September  15,  1898. 
Messrs.  Sibley,  Ward  &  Co., 

St.  Louis,  Mo. 
Gentlemen  :— 

The  assortment^  of  domestic  fancy^  goods  *pick(ed)  out^  by  our  Mr.  Hellinger  has 
been  received.  We-are  very  proud  of  the  spick*  and  sjian  appearance  of  the  lot,  and  believe 
that-they-will-make  quite*  a  hit*.  However,  we  *find-the  price*  a  little*  high,  a  feature** 
which-will  interfere  to-a  large  extent  with-the  sale.  If-you-could  raake-us  some  conces- 
sions, we-could  offer  them  at  such  figures  as  would  stir*  up  the  *trade.  This  would  also 
spoil*  the  chances  of-our  rivals  to-get  ahead  of  us,  and  would  put*  us  both  in  the  front** 
rank  as-the  leading  dealers  in-this-*kind  (of)  *goods.  As-the  field*  is  comparatively  new, 
and  very  profitable,  we  feel*  that-it-is  worth*-while*  to-*give  this  style*  of  *goods  our  special 
attention  ;  and  if  we  join*  forces,  considerable  advantage  must  accrue  therefrom^  for  both- 
(of  )-us.    We  therefore  *ho]>e-you-will-take  this-matter  up  Avithout  delay. 

Yours  verj'  truly. 

The  Biddle  Dry  Goods  Co. 

(B)  Columbia,  S.  C,  November  19,  1898. 
The  Haines  Optical'  Co., 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Gentlemen  : — 

On-what  terms*  could-you*-furnish-me  with  5  3^i-inch  prisms,  such  as-I-saw 
exhibited  on-the  3d  floor*  of  your  store*,  at  my  *last  visit  to-your-city?* 

As-to-the  patterns  of  frames  which  j'our  salesman  show(ed)  me,  I  must  admit  that  at 
any  other-time  the  prices*  would  tempt*  me  to  buy  ;  but  just-at-present,  business  is  rather 
dull*  with  us,  and  I-do-not  wish  to-make  *matters  worse*  by  increasing  my  stock*,"  which- 
is  (a)  *good-deal*  heavier  than-I-should-like  to-see. 

I  ^?'M.s^you-will-give  this  communication  })rom2)t  attention,  and  *let-me-know  at-once 
about  the  prisms*.ii  ^  Yours  very  truly, 

Fred.  M.  Johnson. 

(C)  Yonkers,  N.  Y.,  December  2,  1898. 
Mrs.  Sarah  Brimley, 

City. 
My-dear-Madam  : — 

Knowing  that-you-are  quite*  fond*  of-the  little  unfortunate  orphans,!^  and-that 
you-have-their  welfare  at-*heart,  I-take-the  liberty  of  directing  your  attention  to-the 
Christmas  Fund*,  which-we-are  try(ing)  to  swell  to  larger  proportions.  If  we-can  raise 
about  $200'-'  *more,  we-can  *give  the  little-ones  (piite*  a  feast*.  Wlth-that-end  in-view,  a 
fair  will-be-*held  at-the  asylum,  and-the  older  pupils  will  perform  a  one  act  farce*  before-the 
*friends  of-the  institution. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  97 


I-think  I-*need  not  plead*  at-length  with-you  in  behalf  of  our  wards,  as-I-know  that- 
your  purse*  is-always  at-tlie  disposal  (of)  Charity,  and  as-there-is-no  field*  iu-which  assist- 
ance can-be  *inore  welcome  just-now. 

If-you  *wish  to-donate  any  articles  for-the  fair,  *please  fix*  a  time  when  our  wagon  can 
call  for-them  ;  if-you  *wish  to-send-a  *check,  *please  make  it  out  to-tiie-order  of  John  Stewart. 
The  older  boys  are  going  to  print*  the  program  for-the  affair;  if-you-can  turn*  any  adver- 
tisements our  way,  they-will-be  very-much  appreciated. 

Thank(ing)-you-in-advance"  for  whatever  favors  you-may-be-able  to-show-us,  I-remain 

Yours  sincerely, 

(Mrs.)  T.  Brooks. 

{D)  Utica,  X.  Y.,  July  18,  1898. 

Messrs.  Carringtox  &  Hutchinson, 

Rochester,  N.  Y. 

Gentlemen  : — 

Mr.  F.  R.  Hearst,  the  witness  for-the  prosecution,  *called  at  our  office  to-day,  and 
made  the  following  statement : — 

My  occupation  is  farming.'*  On-the  evening  of-the  15th  of  *last  month,  I-was  sit(ting)* 
on  the  *back  porch*  of-my  *house,  and  was*  sm()k(ing)  a  *pipe.  Suddenly  I-heard  a  sus- 
picious *sound  com(ing)  from-the  *barn  which  adjoins  the  stable.  Then  I-heard-the  *noise 
of  a  horse's  *hoofs.  I  shoutfed)*  "  Who's  there  ?"  but  received  no  answer.  Then  I-*went  to- 
the  *barn,  and  found*  that  somebody  had  broken"*  into-the  stable  and  stolen*  my  *black 
mare  from-the  stall*.'"  I-call(ed)  my  neighbor  at-once,  and  we  set-out'^  to-*catch  the  *thief ; 
but,  as-he-had  a  *good  start*,  and  as-the  mare  is-a  very  *fast  *horse'',  we-had-no  *chance  to- 
overtake  him. 

The  above  was  duly™  *sworn  to  before-us,  and  we-*hope  that  it-will-enable-you  to-go 
ahead  with-this-case.  ■    Yours  respectfully, 

Francis  J.  Henderson  &  Son. 

{E)  Fresno,  Cal.,  October  4,  1898. 

Mr.  Earl''  Stewart, 

Oakland,  Cal. 

My-dear  young*  *Friend:  — 

I-take*-pleasure  in  inform(ing)-you  that-at''-- the  recent  competition  of  essays  the 
palm* 2^  (of)  victory  was  awarded  to-you.  Your  work  was  found*  so  excellent  that,  as-a 
*mark^*  (of)  distinction,  it- will-be  printed*  and  preserv(ed)  in-the  library  of-our  institution. 

I  *trust  that-these  lines  will-be  an  encouragement  to-j^ou,  and  will  spur*-j'ou  on  in-your 
efforts  always  to-do  your  best.  However,  I-hope-they-will-not  fill-you  with  pride*  or  con- 
ceit, which-have  spoil(ed)*  many  a  *smart  young*-*man.  You-will  no-*doubt  be  inclined 
to  talk*  much  of-your  success ;  but-I-should  advise-you  to  endeavor  to  *curb  this  tendency 
to  self-glorification.  True^*  pride*  is-the  delight  we-take  in  doing  our  *work  honestly  and 
efficiently,'"  and  in  enter(ing)  into-the  task  we-have  set-ourselves  with  *heart  and  soul, 
without  wast(ing)  our  energy  in  mere*  words*. 

I-have-no-*doubt  that-you-will-be  a  credit  to-your  community  and  to-your  family,  just- 
(as)-you-will-always-be  a  credit  to-the  institution  where-you-(have)-been  *trained.  I-wish- 
you"  success  in-all  you-may  under(take).  May  your  career  be  as  promising  (as)  your  work 
was  at  college.  Yours  very  sincerely, 

John  Watson  Clifford. 

{F)  Baltimore,  Md.,  April  19,  1898. 

Messrs.  Haggard  &  Sons, 

Wilmington,  Del. 
Gentlemen  : — 

We  learn  from  newspapers  and  *trade  reports  that-the  peach*  crop  in  your  State 
has  suffered  considerably,  owing  to-the  recent  unexpected  frosts*  ;  and-the  papers  say  that- 
this-was-the  worst*  spell  in  fifteen  years*.  Will-you  please  *give-us  a  statement  of-the 
damage  that-was-done  in-your  section  ? 

7 


98  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


We-should  also  be-pleased  to-have-your  opiuiou  as-to-\vhat  effect  this  weather  will-have 
upon-the  future  delivery  of  contracts. 

Can-you-sell-us  a-few  hundred  baskets  of  choice*  fruit*,  to  be  shipped*^^  early  in  August? 
We-would-be  willing  to  pay  60  cents  for-them,  delivered  at  our  store*. 

Yours  very  truly, 

L.   PiNKERT  &  BrO. 

Anxotations. — ^  In  assortment,  the  ?'  following  o  maj^  be  omitted.  ^  In  fancy,  the 
substitution  of  e  for  a  will  enable  us  to  write  the  convenient  outline /enc^.  ^  The  out  dot 
should  be  placed  right  under  k  (which  stands  in  high  position).  *  If  preach  is  contracted  by 
ch  preceded  by  the  vowel-stroke,  preacher,  feature,  etc.,  will  be  contracted  in  the  same 
manner,  except  that,  instead  of  writing  simply  ch,  we  blend  it  with  r.  *  Front  sounds  like 
frunt.  *  In  order  to  join  there  and  from,  the  latter  should  be  written  downward.  '  Since  k 
va&y  be  omitted  from  the  final  syllable,  cal,  optl  will  form  a  very  convenient  outline. 
^  Cross  k  (placed  low)  with  /.  ^  Blend  r  and  s.  ^^  O  has  the  a  sound  in  stock.  ^^  Prisms, 
being  a  technical  word,  should  not  be  contracted  when  it  occurs  only  once  ;  when  such 
"words  are  repeated,  however,  thej^  may  well  be  shortened.  ^^  i?  may  be  omitted.  ^^  About 
§200  may  be  written  on  the  same  principle  as  about  it,  viz.:  by  bringing  the  a  stroke  of  about 
above  the  figure  3,  and  omitting  the  out  dot.  '*  Cross  nk  (of  thank)  with  the  initial  stroke 
of  in,  and  join  the  final  stroke  of  the  latter  to  advance.  ^^  Farming  could  be  contracted,  if 
it  did  not  occur  at  the  beginning  of  a  paragraph,  the  drift  of  which  is  unknown  to  the 
reader.  ^^  Very  little  would  be  gained  in  outline,  if  broke  should  be  contracted.  ^"  In  stole 
and  stall,  however,  the  saving  is  considerable.  '^The  out  dot  need  not  be  written  under  the 
line,  but  under  the  end  of  t.  ^'■'  The  drift  of  the  paragraph  is  now  so  well  developed,  that  fa 
ho  will  not  be  taken  for  anything  hut  fast  horse.  ^^  See  Lesson  12,  (156).  "It  will  be  seen 
from  Lesson  8,  that  the  syllable  itr  can  be  written  in  two  ways :  by  the  ur  sign,  or  by  r,  pi-e- 
ceded  by  the  initial  vowel-stroke  placed  low.  This  lesson  has  shown  how  conveniently  the 
ur  sign  can  be  used  in  final  contraction  ;  for  initial  purposes,  the  second  method  is  prefer- 
able. ^  Bring  out  well  the  a  stroke  (for  at)  in  that-at-the.  ^^  M,  by  means  of  its  initial  and 
final  strokes,  offers  an  excellent  opportunity  for  showing  (by  adding  the  vowel-stroke) 
whether  the  vowel-sound  precedes  or  follows  the  consonant.  In  palm,  the  initial  stroke 
should  be  plainly  shown  (though  it  should  not  be  made  too  long)  ;  the  high  jjosition  above 
the  line  indicates  the  end  of  the  word,  and  the  shading  indicates  the  "a"  sound  (so  that  no 
"i"  sound  can  be  implied  here).  ^*  Compare  mark,  which  is  an  initial  contraction,  with 
palm,  a  final  contraction.  Mark  is  represented  also  by  m  above  the  line  and  shaded  for  the 
"a"  sound  (as  in  mar),  but  the  vowel-stroke  at  the  end  of  m  indicates  that  the  vowel-sound 
follows  the  consonant ;  this  vowel-stroke  should  be  sliown  plainly.  ^'  True  is  a  logogram  ; 
if  it  were  not,  true  and  j)ride  could  not  be  contracted  simultaneouslj'.  -^In  efficiently,  double 
/  can  be  used  advantageously  to  regain  the  writing  line.  Enf,  being  unaccented,  may  be 
dropped.  "  Wish  is  contracted  by  w  in  high  position  ;  to  this  the  u  sign  may  be  added,  on 
the  same  principle  as  in  would-you.    ^*  Place  pt,  blended,  above  the  line. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  99 


Lesson  No.  15. 


This  lesson  (which  contains  practically  nothing  new)  will  furnish  reading  material 
illustrative  of  the  methods  of  contraction  and  of  the  other  shortening  devices  presented  in 
the  preceding  lessons. 

The  Frog  Farm. 

(1")  A  new  industry  has  been  created  through  feminine  ingenuity  and  enterprise.  (2) 
Miss  Fitch  was  forced  by  ill-health  to-give-up  her  position.  (3)  While  busy  with  plans  as- 
to-her  future  occupation,  she-happened  to-go  into-a  market,  where  she-saw  frog  legs  offered- 
for-sale  at-a  rather  high  price.  (4)  A  fortunate  idea  occurred  to-her  then  :  (5)  If-this  article 
brings  such  good  prices,  why  not  raise  frogs?  (6)  She-found,  upon  investigation,  that-a 
nearby  district  was  full-of  marshes  and  small  ponds,  which-were  filled  with  frogs  during 
spring  and  summer.  (7)  The  land  was-not  thought  worth  very-much,  and-the  owner 
was  consider  (ably)  surprised  at-her  offer  (of)  $1.2-5  an  acre.  (8)  He- was  only  too-glad  to-get 
rid  (of)  25  acres  of  swamp,  which-were  soon  measured  oft"  and  transferred  to-Miss  Fitch,  who 
at-ouce  set  to-work  to-fence-in  her  new-possessions  with  barbed  wire.  (9)  When-the  farmers 
learned  of-her  intentions,  they  shook  their  heads,  and  cracked  jokes  about-their  new- 
neighbor ;  some  even  ventured-to-say  that-they  doubt(ed)  as-to-whether-or-not  the  "School 
Ma'am"  was  of  sound  mind,  while-others  looked  at-her  with-a  kind  but  pitying  glance  (of) 
sympathy.  (10)  However,  she-did-not  pay  much  attention  to-the-comments  (of  the)  village 
folks,  and  went  about-her  business. 

(11)  As  it-was  too-late  in-the  season  when-she-was-done  with-the  work  of  fencing-in  her 
property,  she-spent  the  winter  in  reading  all-the  books  she-could-get  that  treated  of  frogs ; 
and  when-she- was-not  reading,  she-spent-her  time  in-a  barn,  practising  with-a  target  rifle. 
(12)  She-was-so  persevering  that-she-could  soon  hit  anything  she  aimed  at. 

(13)  When  spring  came,  and-the  frog  season  opened,  she-went  out  on-her  grounds  and 
shot  frogs,  wnich-she  shipped  to-the  city.  (14)  Slie-could-not  supply  all-the-orders  she-had, 
and  when-the  season  was-over,  she  found  that-she-had  clear(ed)  from  her  "farm"  some- 
thing-like $1500  for-the  first  year's  "crop."  (15)  Now  it-was-her  turn  to-laugh.  (16)  The 
next  year  there-was-no-need  for-her  to-do  any  shooting.  (17)  Those-who-had  made-fun  of- 
her  shot  frogs  and  sold  them  to-her,  while-she  shipped  them  to-the-market  at-a  nice  profit, 
(18)  At-the-present-time  her  income  is  about  §5000  (a)  year ;  she  employs  several  clerk(s), 
and  has  quite  a  large  business. 

Annotations.— (3)  Note  the  final  contraction  for  frog.  Observe  also  how  at-a  is 
phrased  :  if  this  stroke  is  made  with  a  slight  slant  upward,  while  the  ordinary  dash  is  made 
with  a  slight  slant  downward,  the  two  strokes  will  never  clash.  Note  the  group  offered-jor- 
sale,  where  the  unaccented  part  of  offered  is  dropped,  and  the  remainder  of  the  word  is 
blended  with  for-sale. 

(4)  Substitution  of  e  for  the  u  results  in  a  very  convenient  outline  for  fortunate,  written 
foi'chenat. 

(6)  See  how  well  near  and  by  can  be  phrased,  and  how  nicely  the  blending  principle  can 
be  applied  to  the  group  disfr  (of  district).  Note  r  omitted  in  marshes,  and  observe  the  final 
contraction  for  pond,  where  o  has  the  "a"  sound.  In  "during  ing  and  summer''  the 
missing  spr  will  at  once  be  supplied  by  the  mind  to  the  outline  ing. 

(7)  Note  the  added  y  stroke  in  considerably,  where  the  first  ending  is  omitted,  as  usual. 

(8)  The  phrase  too-glad,  where  glad  is  contracted,  shows  the  wisdom  of  retaining  the 
full  size  of  the  medium  t,  when  the  latter  is  used  for  too.  Thus  we  know  at  once  that  the 
contraction  phrased  with  it  must  be  an  adjective.  If  t  in  this  case  were  shortened  as  in  the 
following  outline  {to-get),  we  would  know  at  once  that  gla  would  stand  for  a  verb  or  a 
pronoun.  Note  the  group  set-to-work,  where  set  and  work  are  contracted  initially.  The 
mentioning  of  the  "  fencing  in"  process  at  once  suggests  the  barbed  wire,  so  that  both  these 


100  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


words  may  be  contracted  in  this  case.     It  will  be  observed  that  barbed  is  considered  a 
monosyllable,  the  ending  ed  being  omitted  in  shorthand. 

(9)  The  word  crack{Qd)  readily  suggests  jokes.  Observe  about  their,  in  which  is  applied 
the  principle  already  used  in  about  it.  Observe  the  group  ivhUe-others,  where  th  of  others  is 
placed  lower  than  the  preceding  I,  thus  clearly  showing  the  short  "  u"  sound. 

(11)  Ij  can  be  blended  nicely  with  t  in  the  phrase  too-late.  In  this  sentence  you  might 
be  tempted  to  phrase  in  and  her,  which  would  not  be  correct,  as  they  do  not  belong  together 
in  sense;  in  is  rather  a  part  of  the  word  fence.  Note  the  convenient  outline  obtained  by 
omitting  t  from  j^^'operty  (which  actually  reads  propry).  The  ending  is  dropped  from 
'''eading,  admitting  of  initial  contraction. 

(12)  Observe  the  phrase  that -she-could.  The  word  soon  might  also  be  phrased  here  ;  but 
this  would  endanger  the  legibility  of  the  outline. 

(13)  The  final  contraction  may  safely  be  employed  for  spring,  since  the  outline  will 
scarcely  be  read  for  thing  in  this  connection.  Note  also  the  final  contraction  pt  for  shipped 
(shipt).  O  has  the  "a"  sound  in  shot,  which  is,  therefore,  well  represented  by  t  shaded  and 
above  the  line,  showing  that  it  is  the  end  of  the  word, — that  is,  it  is  the  (shaded)  consonant 
following  the  "a"  sound  of  the  contracted  word. 

(14)  Observe  /  placed  high  and  shaded,  showing  well  the  "a"  sound  in  farm;  this 
initial  contraction  is  more  convenient  than  the  final  rm  (/•  shaded)  above  the  line. 

(lb)  Note  the  frequent  group  there-was-no.  The  ending  is  dropped  from  shooting,  and 
the  word  is  contracted  finally. 

(17)  Note  the  phrase  made-fun. 

(18)  Observe  the  initial  contraction  for  clerks,  which  actually  reads  clu,  since  er  has  the 
short  ur  sound  in  this  word.  As  the  preceding  word  several  implies  the  plural,  the  latter 
need  not  be  indicated  further. 

There  are  a  few  words  which  are  composed  of  two  syllables,  but  which  are  pronounced 
almost  like  monosyllables,  particularly  in  rapid  speaking.  There  is  very  little  diflference 
between  the  sound  of  /lour  and  /lower,  for  example.  These  words  may,  therefore,  be  con- 
tracted like  monosyllables ;  and  as  the  final  consonant — besides  being  smaller  than  the 
initial — affords  a  good  opportunity  to  show  the  vowel-sound,  such  words  are  subject  to  final 
contraction.  For  this  reason  r  shaded  and  below  the  line  (reading  otir)  may  stand  as  the 
contraction  for  tower,  bower,  shower,  power,  etc.  How  safe  and  suggestive  these  contrac- 
tions are  is  shown  by  the  examples. 

(19)  She  wore  a  flower  in  her  hair. — Here  the  contraction  could  hardly  be  anything  but 
flower.    Note  also  the  initial  i  stroke  for  in,  admitting  of  the  phrase  in-her. 

(20)  Our  City  Hall  tower  is  the  tallest  in  the  world. — This  sentence  shows  again  how 
unmistakable  these  contractions  are.  The  first  one  will  hardly  be  taken  for  anything  but 
our,  nor  the  second  for  anything  but  tower. 

(21)  The  skies  are  clouded ;  I-am  afraid  we-shall-have  a  shower.— ^^  placed  low  {I 
shaded)  could  not  stand  for  cloudy,  and  must,  therefore,  read  clouded. 

In  exclamations,  such  as  ah  (22),  oh  (23),  etc.,  it  is  wise  to  add  h  to  the  vowel,  so  that 
the  a  dot  may  not  be  read  for  ab,  or  the  o  for  of.  No  h  is  necessary  in  such  unmistakable 
exclamations  as  pshaw  (24). 

COLLOQUIALS 

are  formed  in  a  logical  manner,  utilizing  the  various  logograms  and  phrasing  the  words, 
thus  obtaining  very  convenient  outlines.    The  examples  are  self-explanatory. 

Didn' t-you-know  (25)  :  didnH-you  (26)  :  couldnH-he  (27)  :  ivasnH-he  (28)  :  shouldnH-he 
(29)  :  couldn' t-he-{have)-been  (30), — if  we  wish  to  write  couldn' t-have-been,  h  would  be 
omitted:  cou.khi' t-she-{have)-been  (31):  arenH-they  (32):  wonH-they  (33):  wonH-you  (34): 
isnH-she  (35)  :  wasnH-sIie-there  (36) :  they-shan't  (37)  :  it-isn''t  (38) :  it-ainH  (39)  :  it-shouldn' t-be 
(40)  :  it-canH-be  (41) :  it-tvasnH-{to)-be  (42)  :  it-ivasnH-so  (43) :  fhis-ivasnH-the-case  (44)  :  werenH- 
they  (45)  ;  werenH-you  (46) :  donH-you  (47)  :  donH-they  (48)  :  doesnH-she  (49) :  doesnH-he  (50), 
— compare  the  latter  with  donH-they  (48),  where  the  o  must  be  clearly  shown.  In  doesn't, 
however,  n  is  simply  added  to  d,  which  stands  for  do  as  well  as  for  does. 

The  following 

Reading  Exercise 

will  embody  additional  examples  of  colloquial  forms. 


Lesson  15 


■^/    -  ^J  ^  j'^ 


z 


z 


/^  t^^    ^  ?  ,       ^O" 


tJ^T"-'^^ 


# 


7 


-^^--/- 


./^ 


-^v  /'i^^^^-^  M  ^-  ^S^^.^e.  ^ 


l:^-^ 

•r'.    /^  ? 


^ 


-9- 


■^ 


^  ^ 


_C-vf> 


_^=_ 


'^'         s 


^*ei_ —    ^^  /        --^ y^C-^  . 


-^-c>^ 


"O' 


/■P 


if    XoO c 


/ 


^:---^-^^ 


0.-    "^^->     9^   -      -    ^^ 


j>  9  rp.^ 


o^(f\y^ 


^ 


iL^_/^^^l^J>^_ 


///7/,/  '^  6r 


^>^ 


# 


^X 


^n 


L 


-^ 


A^      <9 


b^    \J  C  02/'^ 


^ 


^^g^ 


^="^7- 


^y 


>.  g.  -TT^  ■  .  (^ 


/-  z^^  <<  /?/  r^/  .^  .  ^  /^?— ^^  r^ 


.^^cjU^.^^ 


/^^ 


Jot. 


-cf=- 


_=: /"g^^^-TTO 


L-       ^^     ^ 


:^ 


..(^i^ 


^/ 


_^ 


^,^9^ 


A-^ 


-,        S7 


?...    ^-^c^/-^   /      V-^^  r.^ 


f- 


X/,.    7^- 


^ 


y 


2^^  g,  --^■.  ^y  -^,^^.y^^v^^,•e/^^^./ 


102  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


(51)  Doctor  John  F.  Fleming,  Superintendent  County  Hospital, 
(52)  Youngstown,  O. 
(53)  Dear  Sir  :— 

I-(am)-sorry  that-I-am-compelled  to-notify-you  that-the  trustees  aren't  satisfied 
witli-the-present  state  (of)  things  iu-tlie  woman's  branch  of-tlie  asylum.  (54)  If-the  matron 
was  too-sicl£  to-look  after-the  inmates,  why-didn't-she  let-us-know.  If-she- wasn't  sick,  why- 
wasn't-she  at-her  post?  (55)  Won't-you  tell-her  that  if-she-thinks  she  needn't- be-there  at 
niglit  she-ought  (to)  bear-in-mind  that-she-may-be  punished  severe(ly)  ?  (56)  Won't-you 
be-good-enough  to-see  that  in  future  I-shan't-have  occasion  to-send-you  such  a  communica- 
tion as-this?  Yours  very-truly, 

Donald  G.  Roberts. 

Annotations. — (51)  In  this  connection  super  will  readily  be  taken  for  superintendent. 
Observe  the  convenient  outline  for  hospital  (where  o  has  the  "a"  sound),  obtained  through 
the  omission  of  the  syllable  it 

(52)  Observe  how  clearly  the  identity  of  the  s  is  preserved  in  Youngstoivn  ;  if  the  circle 
were  brought  close  to  the  ng  stroke,  it  would  be  a  tli.  The  outline  shows  the  following  t 
connected  with  the  s  looji  thrown  backward,  as  is  done  when  it  is  blended  finally  with  signs 
ending  with  a  right-hand  curve.  Note  shaded  n  placed  low — that  is,  traced  in  a  downward 
direction — in  relation  to  t. 

(53)  Am  is  an  integral  part  of  the  phrase  I-am-sorry,  and  may,  therefore,  be  omitted. 

(54)  Note  the  phrases  ivhy-dichi' t-she  and  xoliy-wasnH-she.  It  may,  perhaps,  be  thought 
that  these  combinations  of  letters  are  not  very  clear ;  this  is  not  the  case,  however ;  for 
example,  looking  at  the  last  phrase,  we  find  that  the  outline  reads  literally  tvhy-wantsh  ; 
this  has  no  meaning,  while  xvhy-ioasnH-she  fits  very  nicely  into  the  sense  of  the  sentence. 

(55)  Note  the  phrase  tell-her^  actually  reading  teller^  as  it  sounds  in  colloquial  speech. 
Note  also  the  phrase  needn'' t-he-therc,  where  need  is  contracted  initially.  Bear,  in  the  phrase 
bear-in-mind,  is  also  contracted  initially.  In  severely  ly  is  superfluous,  since  it  must  be 
implied, — the  unaccented  first  e  may  be  omitted,  and  s  and  v  may  be  blended. 

(56)  Note  the  phrase  as-this.  In  the  signature,  notice  the  shorthand  g  {j  would  be 
wrong  in  this  case)  ;  b  and  r  are  blended  in  Boberts ;  observe  also  the  shading,  since  o  has 
the  "a"  sound  in  this  word. 

(57)  When  I-asked-the  witness  whether  he  hadn't-seen-the  man  before,  he-said  that-he 
wouldn't-be  sure  about  it.  (58)  I-then  asked  him  why  he-couldn't-be  positive  about  it ;  to- 
which-he  replied  that  if  he-hadn't-known  that-the-place  was  considered  safe,  he  would 
(have)  kept  a  sharp  outlook.  (59)  Under-the  circumstances,  I-don't-think  he-is  to  blame- 
for-the  theft  and  shouldn't-be-held  liable  for  it. 

Annotations. — (58)  Note  k  placed  low  in  the  phrase  he-couldnH-be. 
(59)  Since  held  is  phrased,  it  may  safely  be  contracted  initially  ;  to  be  he  liable  is  very 
safe  and  suggestive. 

Writing  Exercises. 

Growing  Beyond. 

(By  Oliver  Wendell  Holmes.) 
I  *find-the  great  thing  in-this  world  is-not  so-much  where-we  *stand  as  in-what-direc- 
tion  we-are  *mov(ing).  To  *reach  the  port*  of  heaven,  we-must^  sail  sometimes  with-the 
*wind^  and  sometimes  against  it, — but  we-must  sail,  and  not  *drift  nor  lie  at  anchor.  There- 
is-one  very  *sad  thing  in  old  friendships,  to  every  *mind  that-is  reallj^  mov(ing)  onward. 
It-is-this  :  that-one  cannot  *help*  using  his  early  friends  as-the  seaman  uses  the  log  to-*mark* 
his  progress.  Every  now  and  then  we  throw  an  old  schoolmate  over-the  stern  with-a  string 
of  thought  ti(ed)  to-him,  and  look — I-am  afraid  with-a  kind  (of)  luxurious  and  sanctimonious 
compassion— to-see-the  rate  at  which-the  string*^  ^reels'  off,  while  he  lies  there  bobbing  up 
and  down,  poor  fellow:  and  we-are  dashing  along  with-the  white  foam  and  bright*  sparkle 
at  our  bows  ;  the  ruffles  of  prosperity  and  progi-ess,  with-a  sprig  (of)  diamond  stuck**  in  it  : 
but  this  is  only  the  sentimental  *side  (of  the)  *matter ;  for  grow  we-must,  if  we  outgrow 
ail-that  we  love. 

Annotations.— *  i2  maybe  omitted  from  port.  ^S  (standing  for  must)  should  not  be 
phrased  with  the  following  s  of  sail ;  for,  in  that  case,  one  s  would  have  to  be  suppressed, 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  103 


and  the  identity  of  the  logogram  would  be  lost.  If  the  following  word  were  commenced 
with  any  other  letter, — as  in  we-must-know,  for  example,— m?<s('  could  be  phrased  with  the 
following  word.  ^  Wind  may  well  be  contracted  initially,  as  this  idea  is  readily  suggested  by 
the  word  sail.  ''Initial  contraction  for  help  is  perfectly  safe  here,  as  the  phrase  is  a  very 
familiar  one.  ^  could  not  be  mistaken  for  have,  as  the  latter  would  require  a  past  participle 
(used)  after  it,  while  in  this  case  we  have  a  present  participle  {imng).  '"Mark  is  contracted 
as  usual,  and  the  shortened  medium  t  is  added  to  its  initial  stroke.  Tlie  final  vowel-stroke 
should  be  well  shown,  thus  indicating  that  the  vowel-sound  follows  m.  ^String  should  be 
shortened  the  second  time  it  occurs.  Usually  a  word  may  be  shortened  considerably  after 
it  has  occurred  once.  'This  contraction  is  also  very  safe  :  the  outline  could  not  be  taken  for 
reach,  as  the  latter  is  not  connected  with  off.  The  relation  between  string,  reel,  and  off  is 
very  obvious.  *  A  word  like  stuck  cannot  be  contracted  finally,  as  k  below  the  line  might 
clash  with  coidd. 

Story  of  an  Eye- Witness  of  a  Railroad  Wreck. 

I-was  *riding  in-the  front  car*  behind-the  tender  of-the  east  *bound  *train.  My  *seat 
was-the  third  one  from-the  front*  (of  the)  right-hand-*side.'  We-hadn't  *passed  the  bridge 
for  more-than  a  second  when-I-heard-the  whistle  blow.  I  looked  through  the  window  and 
saw  we-were  *side-*tracked.  Just  then  the  brakes  were  put*  on,  and  I-*felt  sure*  something 
was-going  to-happen.  A-few-seconds  after  I-saw  our  fireman  flying  through  the  air,  with 
his  arms  *stretched  out.  I-said  aloud,  "Poor  fellow,  he-has  fallen  from-the  *cab.i»  The 
words*  were  just  out  (of)  my  *mouth  when-I-*felt  a  jarring  and  saw-the  end-of-the  tender 
approach-me  like  (a)  *black  monster.  The-end-of  our  car*  was  gone,  and  in-its-place  was  a 
tender.  Its  edge  was  within-a-few  feet*  of-me.  By-this-time  I-was  on-the  *ground,  wedged- 
in  by  splinters  and  *broken  *seats.  My  first*  *thought  was  to  *break  a  window  and  escape. 
I-*broke-the  window,  but  could-not-get*-out."  I-was  pin(ned)  in.  Then,  how  I-do-not- 
know,  I-*felt  I-was  able  to-*move  my  hands  and  feet*.  I  stood*-up  and  *crawledi2  to-the 
rear  end-of-the  car*,  but  there-was-no  outlet  there,  so  I-came-back.i=*  Now  the  carriage  was 
filling  with  *steani,  and  I-felt  sure  we-should-be  *scalded  to  death.  I-had  *moved  only  a- 
few  feet*  when-I-*felt  the  *steam  all  rushing  one  way.  I  followed  it,  and  found*— thank- 
God— some-others  had-*made  an  outlet.  Thus  they  saved  the  lives  of-all-those  imprisoned 
in-the  front*  car*. 

Annotations.— ^^  (shaded,  for  hand)  can  be  joined  to  t  of  right ;  and  the  connective 
stroke.  betwe:n  /;  and  the  i  stroke  of  side  will  form  the  .9.  i°  Compare  the  contractions 
for  car  and  cab.  "  The  out  dot  should  be  placed  under  g,  which  latter  may  be  joined  to  t. 
^2  Craw  in  this  connection  will  at  once  be  taken  for  crawled.  "  Blend  m  of  came  and  b  of 
back. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

1.  How  are  derivatives  from  logograms  written? 

2.  When  may  the  following  letters  or  syllables  be  omitted  :  t,  tr,  y,  it,  ti,  if,  ence,  r  f 

3.  What  rule  on  omissions  shortens  the  ending  of  words? 

4.  What  is  "  phrasing"  ? 

5.  When  should  words  be  phrased  ?    When  should  they  not  be  phrased  ? 

6.  What  rule  in  regard  to  position  is  applied  in  phrasing? 

7.  When  is  "substitution  of  related  sounds"  applied?    Give  examples. 

8.  When  may  such  vowels  as  i,  o,  or  e  be  omitted  ? 

9.  By  what  should  the  writer  be  guided  in  shortening  long  words? 

10.  What  is  a  contraction  ?    What  is  final  contraction  ?    What  is  initial  contraction  ? 

11.  Into  what  classes  are  words  divided  for  the  purposes  of  contraction  ? 

12.  When  should  initial  contraction  lie  used?    When  final  contraction? 

13.  What  precaution  should  be  taken  in  contracting  monosyllables  with  the  medial 
sound  "ay"  or  "e"? 

14.  What  precaution  should  be  taken  in  contracting  words  with  the  final  sound,  as  in 
toivn,  stuck,  or  peace  f 

15.  In  what  relation  do  logograms  stand  to  contractions? 


104  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  i6. 


The  rules  for  initial  and  final  contraction  having  been  so  mastered  that  their  applica- 
tion becomes  more  a  matter  of  habit  than  of  conscious  effort,  we  can  go  a  step  farther  and 
consider  longer  words,  which  are  based  upon  the  monosyllables  already  explained. 

"We  have  seen  in  the  preceding  lessons  that  the  logograms — the  majority  of  them,  at 
least — are  simple  contractions  of  the  full  outlines  for  the  words,  being  written  in  strict 
accordance  with  the  rules  of  the  Reporting  Style.  We  have  also  seen  that  to  tliese  logo- 
grams other  syllables  can  be  added,  in  the  same  manner  in  w'hich  they  are  added  to  the 
full  outlines.  From  this  follows  the  self-evident  rule  that  prefixes,  suffixes,  and  termina- 
tions may  be  added  to  all  contractions,  thus  forming 

Derivatives 
in  the  usual  manner. 

For  example,  ly  added  to  the  contraction  kind  will  make  it  kindly  (1)  ;  prefixing  un  to 
kind  will  make  it  unkind  (2)  ;  adding  ness,  kindness  (3).  H  added  to  the  contraction  read 
will  make  it  reader  (4),  which  comjoare  with  rear  (5).  You  will  notice  that,  to  a  large 
extent,  these  contractions  are  distinguished  by  their  forms  from  the  outlines  of  full  words. 
Adding  a  shaded  I  (for  the  syllable  able)  to  the  contraction  read  Avill  make  it  readable  (6), 
which  compare  with  real  (write  real).  Adding  r  to  the  contraction  keep  will  make  it 
keeper  (7)  ;  adding  r  to  the  contraction  ship  makes  it  shipjoer  (8) — actually  written  ipper. 
Adding  r  to  the  contraction  build  (9)  will  make  it  builder  (10)  ;  note  the  diflference  between 
the  noun  building  (11)  and  the  verb  building  (12),  and  compare  the  latter  with  the  outline 
for  being  (13),  which  is  precisely  the  same,  except  that  it  stands  on  the  line. 

If  g,  shaded  and  above  the  line,  stands  for  guard  (14),  r  blended  with  it  initially  will 
make  it  regard  (15),  and  ian  added  finally  will  make  it  guardian  (16),  where  onlj'  rd  is 
omitted.  Note  also  the  contraction  of  like  in  likely  (17)  and  likelihood  (18),  and  of  hand 
in  handy  (19) — note  the  final  y  stroke  added,  handiness  (20),  handier  (21),  handsome  (22)— 
o  has  the  short  "  u"  sound  in  this  word,  utihandy  (23).  Compare  with  these  outlines  hearty 
or  hardy  (24),  and  heartmess  (25),  and  compare  the  latter  with  hardness  (26).  R  added  to 
the  contraction  for  rich  will  make  it  richer  (26),  which  compare  with  reader  (4),  where  the 
longer  vowel-sound  is  shown  by  the  longer  vowel-stroke.  B  replaced  in  this  contraction  by 
s  will  make  it  riches  (28). 

The  addition  of  suffixes  to  final  contractions  is  shown  by  weaker  (29),  iveakness  (30), 
weekly  (31),  dealer  (32),  dealing  (33),*  touchy  (34),  touching  (35),  tricky  (36)— compare  this 
with  the  contraction  keep,  trickster  (37),  prompter  (38),  promptness  (39),  and  prompting  (40), 

The  formation  of  outlines  in  this  manner  is  not  restricted  to  derivatives  alone.  Such 
strict  observance  is  not  only  unnecessary,  but  is  impi'acticable,  inasmuch  as  it  would  require 
great  familiarity  with  the  etymology  of  our  language.  For  shorthand  purposes,  therefore, 
we  lay  aside  the  etj-mological  distinction  of  roots  and  affixes,  and  make  instead  that  of  the 
basic  syllable  and  its  affixes  ;  the  basic  syllable  need  not  be  the  etymological  root  at  all. 
Looking  at  the  word  require,  for  example,  we  find  that  it  consists  of  the  prefix  re  and  the 
basic  syllable  quire,  the  contraction  of  which  is  shown  in  (41) ;  to  this  outline  the  prefix  r 
is  added  (42).  In  this  case,  the  rules  which  govern  the  addition  of  syllables  to  logograms 
hold  good  :  for  example,  7'e  can  here  be  conveniently  joined  to  the  contraction.  Note  how 
requirements  (43)  is  formed  from  the  outline  requir'e,  m  (for  inent)  being  blended  with  r  and 
with  s.  Inquire  (44)  and  acquire  (45)  are  formed  in  the  same  manner ;  it  is  not  convenient 
to  join  the  prefix  to  the  contraction  in  the  latter,  and  ire  must  therefore  stand  above  the 
line,  close  over  the  prefix  ac,  where  c  (=  A;)  is  omitted,  as  it  would  form  a  double  consonant 


*  It  should  be  thorou<?hly  comprehended  that  this  outline  may  also  stand  for  feeling,  whreUng.  or  any  other  similar 
■word,  the  same  principle  applying  to  all  the  other  coutractions  as  well.  Although  an  outline  in  this  shortened  form 
may  have  two  or  more  meanings,  the  correct  one  is  readily  determined  by  the  context. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  105 


with  qu.  How  safe  these  contractions  are  is  sliown  by  tlie  fact  that  they  have  no  meaning 
by  themselves.  lie-irenienf,  for  example,  can  hardly  be  taken  for  anything  else  but  require- 
ment. 

"Words  with  the  basic  syllable  gress  afford  further  examples  ;  congress  (46),  where  final 
s  is  omitted,  leaving  a  perfectly  plain  outline ;  see  how  congressional  (47)  is  formed  from 
this;  compare  p?-o^/-e.ss  (48)  and  egress  (49),  transgress  (50),  transgression  (51),  and  retro- 
gression (52)  ;  observe  how  the  prefix  2^J'o  (shortened)  is  clearly  distinguished  from  tlie  prefix 
con  (reversed). 

Note  likewise  the  words  formed  from  the  basic  syllable  sped;  asj^ect  (53) :  resj^eet  (54)  : 
insjiection  (55) :  retrospective  (56) :  respective  (57)  :  pirospect  (58). 

Let  us  look  at  the  words  with  tract,  which  are  contracted  to  tr  (r  shaded).  Adding  con, 
we  obtain  contract  (59),  contractor  (60)  being  formed  by  adding  r  to  the  latter ;  replacing  r 
by  n,  we  obtain  contraction  (61)  ;  note  the  position  of  the  a  dot  in  abstract  (62),  and  compare 
tlie  s  circle  in  the  latter  with  the  d  loop  in  the  following  outlines  ;  note  also  the  distinction 
between  cle  and  dis,  as  shown  by  the  length  of  the  d  loop  in  detract  (63)  and  distract  (64). 

We  have  seen  before  that,  unless  a  monosyllable  with  the  medial  "ay"  sound  starts 
with  blended  consonants,  caution  should  be  used  in  contracting  it.  This  restriction  is 
entirely  removed,  and  contractions  in  general  are  more  freely  employed,  when  a  word  starts 
with  a  prefix,  no  matter  whether  its  base  is  a  monosyllable  or  is  composed  of  two  or  more 
syllables  ;  initial  contraction  is  generally  prefei'red,  as  in  offence  (65),  for  instance,  which  is 
derived  from  the  basic  syllable  fence,  in  which  both  the  initial  and  final  consonants  are 
large  signs.  Note  the  derivative  defender  (66),  which  cannot  be  confused  with  defer,  as  the 
ur  sign,  blended  with  /,  would  be  employed  in  the  latter.  See  also  the  contraction  defen- 
sible (67). 

Analogous  are  the  derivatives  of  the  syllable  pend ;  depend  (68):  dependence  (69): 
dependent  (70)  :  independent  (71).  As  shown  by  the  latter  word,  in  the  majority  of  cases 
where  the  prefix  consists  of  two  or  more  syllables,  it  may  be  used  for  the  whole  word, 
especially  if  the  last  letter  of  the  prefix  can  be  blended  with  the  first  letter  of  the  basic  syl- 
lable, when  no  further  letters  of  the  word  need  be  written  ;  thus,  indep  is  absolutely  safe  for 
either  indep>endent  or  independence;  the  context  will  readily  determine  which  is  meant. 
As  shown  by  the  two  outlines,  either  the  regular  in  sign  or  the  initial  *  stroke  can  be  used 
in  these  words. 

The  syllable  feet  also  illustrates  the  above  rule :  it  cannot  be  contracted  unless  it  is 
preceded  by  a  prefix.  Compare  affect  (72),  cffection  (73),  and  effect  (74)  ;  here  the  double 
consonant  may  be  written,  as  the  hand  must  make  the  stroke  in  order  to  regain  the  writing- 
line.  When  the  second  stroke  is  not  made  by  the  return  of  the  hand  to  the  writing-line, — 
that  is,  when  the  next  syllable  starts  below  the  line,  as  in  effectual  (75), — double  /  need  not 
be  written.  Note  the  common  phrase  to-that-effect  (76).  Infect  {11)  should  show  the  prefix 
in  cleax'ly.  From  the  prefix  pter,  r  may  be  omitted,  as  in  perfect  (78)  ;  note  also  perfection 
(79),  obtained  by  adding  n  to  tlie  former  outline;  see  also  imperfection  (80),  perfectly  (81) 
and  perfecting  (82). 

Another  illustration  is  furnished  by  the  syllable  Jee< ;  abject  (83) :  object  (84)  :  objection 
(85) :  objectionable  (86)  :  inject  (87)  :  pii'oject  (88)  :  projecting  (89) :  projector  (90)  :  projectile  (91). 

Note  the  examples  of  tend;  attend  (92)— which  compare  with  attempt  (93)— where  final 
contraction  is  employed  :  intend  or  intent  (94)  :  attentive  (95) :  retention  (96) :  content  (97). 

Examples  with  the  medial  "  o"  sound  are  furnished  by  the  syWable  form  (98) ;  reform  (99) : 
reformer  (100)  :  inform  (101)  :  conform  (102)— showing  that/o  may  be  traced  downward  as  well 
as  upward  :  co7iformitg  {103) :  transform  (104) — here  it  is  more  convenient  to  separate  the  two 
syllables:  j^^^form  (105):  performance  (106):  formation  (107):  mUform  (108):  misinform 
(109)  :  uniforvi  (110)— note  how  the  little  cross-stroke  (for  uni)  stands  close  to  the  beginning 
of /o,  showing  that  the  former  is  to  be  pronounced  first ;  in  the  phrase  form-you,  where  fo 
is  traced  upward,  the  crossing  would  be  effected  near  the  centre-line, — that  is,  near  the  end 
of  the  outline, — since  the  cross-stroke  is  made  last. 

Illustrations  with  short  "  u"  are  furnislied  by  the  syllable  duct ;  the  latter  is  contracted 
by  writing  d  in  low  jiosition,  showing  tlie  vowel-stroke  following.  Thus  we  derive  conduct 
(111),  where  con  is  reversed,  and  its  second  half  is  sliorteiied  a  little  to  admit  of  convenient 
joining  with  d:  conductor  (112) :  2^>'oduct  (113)  :  productive  (114)  :  production  {lib)  :  reduc- 
tion (116) :  inductive  (117)  :  abduct  (118). 


106  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


A  case  of  medial  "oo"  is  furnished  by  prove;  approve  (119)  :  approval  (120):  disap- 
prove (121) — note  how  the  "a"  is  clearly  brought  out;  compare  the  outline  with  disprove 
(122).  Note  also  irnj^rovement  (123),  niisimx)rove  (124),  reprove  (12-5),  reproviny  (126),  and 
irreprovahle  (127). 

As  some  of  these  examples  show,  when  no  ambiguity  can  arise,  and  when  it  is  con- 
venient, prefixes  may  also  be  joined  to  final  contractions.  In  this  respect  the  tendency  of 
the  beginner  will  be  the  same  as  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the  vowel-stroke  in  contractions 
where  it  is  not  ne(;essary  :  in  the  beginning  he  will  be  inclined  to  disconnect  the  prefix  from 
the  final  contraction  ;  but,  as  his  practice  increases,  he  will  gradually  and  unconscioush- 
connect  the  two  outlines,  when  it  is  safe  to  do  so.  Take  the  case  of  disprove^  for  example  : 
when  prefix  and  contraction  are  joined,  the  outline  reads  dis-oove.  The  same  usage  applies 
to  'inisprove  (=  mis-oove)  ;  if  mis  Avere  carelessly  written,  the  outline  might  read  move  ;  but 
even  then  there  is  no  danger  of  confusion,  since  move  is  subject  to  initial  contraction. 

Note  the  group  with  the  basic  syllable  verse  or  vert ;  advert  (128) — notice  the  low  position 
and  the  vowel-stroke  preceding  d  (for  the  initial  a)  ;  also,  the  stroke  following  d  in  low 
position,  to  indicate  the  short  sound  of  vert.*  Compare  avert  (129)  with  advert.  See  how 
the  d  loop  is  extended  in  divert  (130)  ;  further  words  of  this  group  are  invert  (131),  obvert 
(132),  revert  (133),  subvert  (134),  pervert  (135),  and  convert  (136). 

All  the  usual  devices  can  be  employed  to  show  the  vowel-sounds.  We  knoAv  that  in 
words  like  limit,  for  example,  m  may  be  extended  above  the  top-centre-line  to  show  the  "  i" 
sound.  This  can  also  be  done  in  the  basic  syllable  mit,  as  in  permit  (137),  transm,it  (138), 
remit  (139),  commit  (140),  omit  (141),  and  submit  (142). 

As  shown  by  these  examples,  in 

Words  with  Prefixes, 

the  prefix  (or  prefixes)  is  written  as  usual,  while  the  rest  of  the  word  is  contracted  according 
to  the  rules  which  would  govern  it,  if  it  occurx'ed  without  the  prefix,  extending  these  rules 
to  all  monosyllables,  M-hether  or  not  they  are  contracted  when  they  occur  as  independent 
words.  In  arrive  (143),  for  example,  the  prefix  can  be  joined  to  the  contraction  for  rive  ; 
adding  I  to  this  contraction,  we  obtain  arrival  (144).  Note  around  (145) ;  here  the  vowel- 
stroke  following  r  is  not  necessary,  as  there  is  no  word  that  could  read  a-our,  and  if  the 
outline  were  meant  for  our  alone,  the  preceding  a  stroke  would  not  be  used.  Compare 
aside  (146)  with  astride  (147),  where  final  contraction  is  used  ;  see  how  well  the  vowel-sounds 
are  shown  bj^  means  of  final  contraction  in  assure  (148)  and  acquit  (149).  In  ctbuse  (150), 
"oo"  is  substituted  for  "u"  ("yu").  Compare  absent  (151)  with  absurd  (152).  See  how  the 
"  i"  sound  is  shown  in  abridge  (153).  Words  with  prefix  admit  of  retaining  the  line,  which 
is  an  advantage  in  speedy  writing. 

Mire  is  subject  to  final  contraction  ;  joining  to  the  latter  the  a  dot  (for  ad),  we  obtain 
admire  (154),  where  only  m  is  omitted.  In  adjoin  (155)  the  a  dot  is  joined  to  the  final 
contraction  placed  low ;  the  same  applies  to  adjudge  (156) — prefix  and  final  contraction, 
which  compare  with  adjust  (157) — prefix  and  initial  contraction.  No  a  dot  is  used  in  addict 
(158),  address  (159),  and  advance  (160),  as  none  would  be  used  in  the  full  outlines. 

If  leave  is  contracted  by  omitting  the  final  v,  believe  (161)  will  be  written  by  adding  the 
prefix  be  to  the  contraction  ;  the  outline  might  also  read  belief,  but  the  context  will  readily 
decide  the  proper  meaning.  See  also  behalf  (162),  befriend  (163),  bedeck  (164),  behave  (165), 
behavior  (166).  Compare  begin  (167),  began  (168),  and  begun  (169).  Note  the  final  contrac- 
tion in  bestir  (170).  As  shown  by  the  prefixes  illustrated  thus  far,  they  may  leave  their 
places  in  order  to  admit  of  convenient  joining  with  the  rest  of  the  outline,  just  as  in  the 
ease  of  the  logograms. 

The  vowel  in  i^aet  can  be  shown  by  shading  jj,  which  applies  also  to  compact  [IIW. 
Observe  combat  {Vi'2)—mb  blended.  See  how  the  r  blended  with  m  is  shown  in  com,rade 
(173).  Note  the  contraction  for  compress  (174),  which  cannot  stand  for  comprise,  as  pr 
would  be  shortened  a  little  in  the  latter  outline,  in  consideration  of  the  i  stroke.  Prefix  with 
final  contraction  is  shown  by  comjyile  (175),  comiyound  (176),  and  compete  or  complete  (177). 
Con  can  be  turned  around  as  usual ;  condemn  or  condeiise  (178),  from  which  is  formed  con- 
demnation or  condensation  (179) :  confess  (180) :  connee^(181) :  connection  (182) :  concern  (183) — 

*  Even  if  this  stroke  were  made  carelessly,  and  its  low  position  therefore  not  plainly  apparent,  there  would  be  no 
danger  of  a  clash,  as  the  "er"  sound  (as  in  dare)  may  be  substituted  for  the  "ur"  sound  (as  in  verse). 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  107 


here  the  "  ur"  sound  is  replaced  by  the  "  er"  sound:  congest  (184),  which  compare  with 
object  (84)  :  conscience  (185)  :  conscientious  (186)  :  contact  (187)  :  convex  or  convent  (188) — the 
ay  stroke  must  be  written  in  convey :  confide  (189).  See  how  the  "yu"  sound  is  shown  in 
confuse  (190)  and  confute  (191).  When  words  witli  the  "yu"  sound  are  phrased,  the  final 
consonant  may  be  dropped,  and  the  crossing  may  be  effected  by  means  of  the  initial  conso- 
nant of  the  following  outline,  as  shown  by  the  groups  confuse-the  or  confute-the  (192).  (193) 
may  read  confusion  or  confusion.  Note  con  and  final  contraction  in  contempt  (194)  and 
confer  (195) ;  compare  the  latter  with  confirm  (196).  Compare  commend  (197)  with  command 
(198),  and  the  latter  with  countermand  (199),  which  is  well  distinguished  from  countermarch 
(200),  where  the  consonant  showing  the  "a"  sound,  as  in  march,  must  be  placed  high. 

Compare  command  and  demand  (201),  debar  (202)  and  debark  (203).  Note  degrade  (204) 
and  degradation  (205),  which  latter  compare  with  digression  (206).  D  in  the  prefixes  de 
and  dis  blends  conveniently  with  the  large  letters,  and  since  in  this  way  a  large  part  of 
the  word  is  written  briefly,  these  contractions  are  particularly  safe  and  valuable  :  in  depart 
(207),  the  blended  group  dp  must  stand  high,  and  p  must  be  shaded  to  show  the  "a"  sound 
of  0/  adding  to  this  an  m,  we  have  department  (208),  which  compare  with  deportment  (209), 
where  dp  is  in  normal  position.  As  shown  by  these  examples,  when  the  initial  letter  of  a 
syllable  ordinarily  subject  to  final  contraction  admits  of  blending  it  with  the  prefix,  initial 
contraction  is  preferable.  Such  words  as  deter  and  defer  are  just  as  easily  written  in  full, 
as  the  ur  sign  blends  well  with  t  or  /*.  See  how  the  d  loop  is  blended  with  sp  in  despair 
(210).  In  despond  (211),  where  d  and  sp  are  likewise  blended,  the  group  must  be  placed 
high,  and  sp  must  be  shaded  to  show  the  "  a"  sound  of  o.  In  discharge  (212)  ch  must  also 
be  shaded  and  placed  high.  While  p  must  be  shaded  in  dispatch  (213),  no  high  position  is 
required  ;  compare  this  outline  with  depart.  Compare  also  debark  (203)  and  disband  (214). 
Note  also  discount  (215),  disclose  (216),  and  disgrace  (217).  Compare  displace  (218)  and  dis- 
please (219).  The  words  most  frequently  found  with  the  prefix  de  are  desire  (220)  and  decide 
(221)  ;  these  outlines  may  be  considerably  shortened  by  the  principle  of  substitution  :  since 
these  words  sound  like  disire  and  diside,  the  i^refix  dis  can  be  conveniently  used,  writing 
desire  in  this  form  in  full,  and  omitting  final  d  in  decide.  When  phrased,  desire  may  also 
be  shortened  by  dropping  /•. 

In  prefixes  witli  e,  the  initial  vowel  must  be  plainly  shown  by  the  "  ay"  stroke  ;  engage 
(222) — here  the  ng  sign  cannot  be  employed,  for  n  and  g  are  not  blended  by  the  voice.  Note 
also  engraft  (223)  and  enchant  (224).  See  how  well  e  and  s  blend  in  estrange  (225),  which 
compare  with  estate  (226)  ;  see  how  well  the  latter  is  distinguished  from  esteem  (227),  where 
the  "  ee"  sound  is  shown  by  shading  t  at  the  bottom.  Note  how  clearly  initial  e  is  shown  in 
extreme  (228),  where  the  basic  syllable  is  subject  to  final  contraction,  the  outline  reading 
actually  ex-eme.  Note  also  extent  (229)  and  extension  (230),  exchange  (231)  and  exhale  (232). 
See  how  well  the  "ee"  sound  is  shown  in  exceed  (233),  and  the  "  ur"  sound  in  expert  (234) 
and  emerge  (235),  where  the  ur  sign  can  be  blended  with  the  initial  letters  of  the  basic 
syllables.    Note  also  entertain  (236)  and  enterprise  (237). 

Compare  forbear  (238)  and  forbid  (239)  ;  note  foremost  (240)  and  forgave  (241),  which 
compare  with  forgive  (242). 

Compare  impeach  (243)  with  impede  (244)  ;  in  both  cases  prefix  and  final  contraction 
may  be  joined  without  impairing  the  meaning  of  the  words.  This  could  not  be  said  of  all 
the  examples  given  in  the  preceding  paragrai^h  :  if  we  join  /  and  b  (the  latter  placed  high) 
in  forbid,  for  example,  the  outline  will  become  fib  ;  and  forgive  would  become  fig. 

The  prefix  in  can  be  replaced  by  the  short  initial  ee  stroke  in  many  cases  ;  cai*e  should 
be  taken,  however,  that  this  does  not  impair  the  legibility  :  in  that  case,  the  regular  /  sign 
is  preferable,  although  it  is  a  little  longer.  Note  instinct  (245)  or  (245a),  and  compare  instate 
(246)  with  estate  (226).  Observe  initial  contraction  in  inside  (247),  and  finnl  contraction  in 
insure  (248).  Since  it  may  be  omitted  from  institute,  and  "yu"  may  be  replaced  by  "oo," — 
so  that  the  word  becomes  instoot, — the  basic  syllable  is  subject  to  final  contraction,  in  con- 
nection with  the  prefix  in,  as  shown  in  (249),  from  which  we  derive  institution  (250). 

Let  us  look  at  the  examples  with  the  prefix  mis ;  mismatch  (251)  :  misdeed  (252)— note 
how  the  "ee"  sound  is  shown;  compare  this  outline  with  inisdeal  {25S),  where  the  basic 
syllable  is  subject  to  final  contraction,  and  which  is  actually  mis-eal,  compare  the  latter  witli 
mislead  (254).  Note  jnisfake  (255)  and  mistcach  (256).  Observe  the  blending  of  jyiis  and  /• 
in  m.isrule  (257),  admitting  of  a  clear  indication  of  the  "oo"  sound.     Note  also  the  final 


108  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


contraction  in  misjudge  (258)  and  tnistreat  (259) — Avhich  outline  compare  with  tneat  (260). 
Compare  mischief  (261),  wliere  chief  is  contracted  finally  on  the  same  principle  as  ship,  with 
misfit  (262),  where  mis  and  /  are  blended. 

When  ob — where  b  is  omitted — cannot  be  convejiiently  connected  with  the  basic  sj'l- 
lable  (which  is  very  rarely  the  case),  care  should  be  taken  to  write  the  two  parts  of  the  word 
close  together,  so  that  o,  for  ob,  will  not  clash  with  of ;  obtrude  (263).  In  oblige  (264)  and 
obtuse  (265)  the  two  parts  of  the  word  are  connected. 

Out,  by  the  nature  of  its  form,  cannot  be  connected ;  while  its  low  position  should 
always  be  clearly  shown,  it  need  not  necessarily  stand  below  the  line,  but  it  must  stand 
below  the  beginning  of  the  following  character ;  this  is  shown  by  outwit  (266),  oidspoken 
(267),  outreach  (268)  ;  compare  outstare  (269)  with  abstract  (62),  and  note  the  difference  in 
the  position  of  the  a  dot.  In  outface  (270)  and  outj^ost  (271),  the  dot  is  in  its  regular  position. 
Compare  oidcast  (272)  and  outcome  (273)  ;  also  outlive  (274)  and  oidlast  (275),  oidbreak  (276) 
and  break  out  (277),  outburst  (278)  and  burst  out  (279). 

Examples  with  over  are  shown  by  overcharge  (280)— note  the  vowel-stroke  at  the  end  of 
the  outline  ;  overreach  (281)  and  overhead  (282),  which  compare  with  overhear  (283). 

a  is  omitted  from  per,  as  usual;  2^6>'C€i*^6  (284) — note  how  the  "ee"  sound  is  shown 
clearly.  It  must  be  thoroughly  comprehended  that  the  omission  of  r  does  not  apply  to  the 
initial  syllable  of  such  words  as  jnirchase,  pturpose,  etc.,  where  the  ur  sign  is  used.  For  the 
prefix  pre,  the  short  or  the  regular  sign  may  be  used ;  pretend  or  pretext  (285) :  prevent 
(286).  Compare  precede  (287)  and  proceed  (288) — note  how  the  vowel-sounds  are  shown. 
Observe  proceeds  (289)  and  procedure  (290).  In  progra'ms  (291)  s  is  added  to  the  initial 
contraction  of  the  basic  syllable  ^ram.  Note  prolong  (292),  propose  (293),  protect  (294),  and 
protection  (295). 

Examples  with  re:  rebound  (296),  which  compare  with  rehut  (297);  while  r  may  be 
joined  to  the  contraction  in  the  former  word,  it  cannot  be  joined  in  the  latter,  as  it  would 
then  become  rub  ;  recall  (298) :  redeem  (299)  :  redress  (300)  :  regain  (301)  :  regret  (302)  :  relax 
(303)  :  remark  (304)  :  relieve  or  re^ie/(305) — the  context  will  readily  distinguish  between  the 
two  words  :  repair  (306)  :  replace  (307)  :  reward  (308).  Note  the  difference  between  retrieve 
(309)  and  relieve  (305)  ;  see  also  rebuke  (310),  refund  (311),  refute  (312),  reverse  (313),  rejoice 
(314),  repeat  (315) — which  compare  with  repeater  (316)  and  requital  (317).  When  the 
initial  and  final  parts  of  a  word  are  not  connected,  they  shoitld  be  written  closely  together. 

Note  how  the  vowel  is  shown  in  succeed  (318).  Compare  the  outline  of  substitute  (319) — 
formed  similarly  to  institute — with  suit  (320)  ;  see  subjoin  (321),  subside  (322),  and  submerge 
(323),  and  compare  the  latter  with  surmount  (324).  Note  also  surround  (325).  Since  r  is 
omitted  from  the  prefix  sur,  in  words  like  surprise,  s  and  p  are  blended,  as  shown  in  a 
previous  lesson. 

Note  transshi])  (326),  where  the  final  contraction  for  shi})  is  used,  and  can  be  conveniently 
blended ;  also  transpose  (327),  translate  (328),  and  translator  (329). 

Illustrations  for  under  are  furnished  by  undermine  (330),  undersell  (331),  and  underbid 
(332).  Words  with  un :  imfair  (333),  tmfold  (334),  imdoubtedli/  (335)— note  the  initial  vowel- 
stroke,  unman  (336),  and  unhitch  (337).  As  shown  by  the  latter  word,  the  prefix  un  may 
safely  be  raised  above  the  line  for  the  sake  of  convenience.  It  cannot  clash  with  in,  as  the 
latter  is  represented  by  the  i  sign  or  by  the  initial  i  stroke.  Words  with  ?<p  .•  upbraid  (338)  : 
uphill  (339)  :  u2Jhold  (.340). 

As  a  general  principle,  initial  contraction  can  also  be  emploj^ed  in  a  few  basic  syllables 
which  would  be  subject  to  final  contraction  when  standing  alone ;  in  these  cases,  so  much 
of  tVie  word  is  written  in  connection  with  the  prefix  that  it  is  hardly  necessarj^  to  pay 
attention  to  the  vowel  of  the  basic  syllable :  confl  is  perfectly  safe  for  conflict  (341),  for 
example,  as  also  is  constr  for  construct  (342),*  which  compare  with  obstruct  (343).  The  same 
applies  to  overturn  (344),  overstocked  (345) — where  the  vowel  is  clearlj'  shown,  and  return 
(346) — which  contraction  has  already  been  used  in  the  phrase  return-mail.  The  bulk  of  the 
word  being  written  in  subscribe  (347),  increase  (348),  combine  (349),  etc.,  it  is  unnecessary  to 
indicate  the  vowel-sound  of  the  basic  syllable.  In  a  few  other  words,  the  basic  syllable 
would  be  subject  to  initial  contraction  when  standing  alone;  but  the  initial  contraction 
would  be  inconvenient  to  write  when  preceded  by  a  prefix,  and  it  will  then  be  found  more 

*Even  if  the  contraction  for  constnxt  is  carelessly  written,  the  loop  could  not  be  mistaken  for  d  blended  with  t, 
since  there  is  no  word  that  starts  with  condet. 


Lesson  i6.  . 


-r^ 


yS- 


-^ 


0-     >^    Oo 


30 


i^  tf-c  /  ^->y-.^^ 


^ 


3S- 


VA      V'O 


T 


^ 


>'>/ 


V 


*<? 


IL  I 


'7^^-^^^»    -^      -^ 


^T^, ==. 


Zi. 


^^ 


z. 


y  ^  ^  '^  ^^^  y {ifT^-^f^rf-r-f-rmA 


^,-,^^  /■  /.7 .  /  V/-//r/r/zixXz  // r;  ^^^^ 


^  ^  ^  -^    f  .^l  .^  -^  7/  ^_^^  ^-^  J^ -f/  -^  -f  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^ 


^. 


jp  /^  n  n 


A  CO 


-fT 


XoS 


^ 


^^ 


V  ^^ 


^- 


/.  .^    /- 


z 


;2  .7<i' 


70 


-^-^  A  (/  (/(  a  <J.  c  ^  rJ  c^  c^  r 


30  o 


Jo^ 


V    <^  ^^  -6  -^~^   ^   "P  1) 


\i^ 


TT 


^-   r 


3f  O 


^    ^  ^:;)  > 


/     / 


.^:2_X X 


3KO 


3Z: 


^     ^  o-/  -v  ^^y^  ^  ^-^  ^  e^-i — y 


3vjr 


^r^  -^v-^-i^  0  ^i^  'Cy  yy^ 


3C3 


7 


36 


c^  ,-^^^.r>^  ^j 


ix_.£^_.^ 


7^7 


-?<J. 


!/L^  'LUju. 


iUiS. 


r 


^ 


Jy^    n  V  H^.  -y„    ./J^-?  ^^fl^<^.J"j'./V  iry  .  ^^^^ ^'  ./^ e^,jSz^ 


110  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 

convenient  to  use  the  final  contraction,  as  in  presume  (350)  and  presei've  (351),  actually- 
written  pre-ume  and  pre-erve ;  note  also  conclude  (352),  absence  (353),  incense  (354),  and 
iinirerse  (355),  which  compare  with  reverse  (313),  where  the  final  contraction  is  used. 

If  the  last  syllable  can  be  contracted  in  such  -words  as  program,  it  can  logically  be  con- 
tracted also  in  telegram  (.356)  and  such  words.  This  contraction  may  also  be  used  for  the 
syllable  graph,  as  in  phonograph  (357)  ;  but  when  it  is  desired  to  distinguish  between  the 
two  syllables,  the  latter  is  written  in  fall. 

As  a  rule,  when  the  prefix  of  a  word  consists  of  more  than  one  syllable,  it  may  safely 
stand  for  the  whole  word.  "  I  cannot  under  you,"  for  example,  is  quite  plain  for  "  I  cannot 
understand  you"  ;  while  in  the  sentence  "Overwork  has  under  his  health,"  under  will  at 
once  be  taken  for  undermined.  The  folloAving  words  illustrate  cases  where  the  prefix  (or 
prefixes)  may  safely  stand  for  the  whole  word  :  discontent,  excommuniccde,  entertain,  incon- 
sistent, indiscreet,  inexcusable,  interdict,  introduce,  misbelief,  misconstrue,  preconceive,  re- 
instate, reproduce,  and  uninteresting.  To  this  class  belong  also  those  words  where  the  initial 
letter  of  the  initial  contraction  of  the  basic  sj-llable  blends  with  the  prefix ;  examples  are 
indefinite — where  inite  may  be  drojiped,  indisposed — where  sed  may  be  dropped,  and  mis- 
proportioned — where  mis  and  pro  should  be  blended,  and  in  this  form  stand  for  the  whole 
outline. 

The  following 

Reading  Exercise 

contains  also  the  contractions  for  some  words  which  do  not  come  under  the  heading  of  those 
discussed  above  ;  but  the  words  occur  so  frequently,  and  the  outlines  used  for  them  deter- 
mine the  identity  of  the  word  so  clearly,  that  these  contractions  maj'  be  emploj-ed  without 
special  comment.  Every  outline  in  the  following  letter,  therefore, — particularly  those  in 
italics, — should  be  very  carefully  studied  : 

(358)  Mb.  L.  X.  Fletcher,  (359)  Attorney-at-Law, 

City. 
Dear  Sir  :— 

(360)  I-beg  (to)  acknowledge  receipt-(of  )-your-favor,  asking-me  to  be-good-enough 
to-explaiu.  (361)  In-answer  thereto,  I  desire-{to)-call  your  attention  to-the-fact  that-f?j- 
conseguence  (of)  a  custom  long  established,  a  director  of-this  Company  is-not  permitted  to- 
make  such  agreements  without-the  consent  (of  the)  others.  (362)  I-regret-(to)-say,  there- 
fore, that-you-cannot  obtain  the  loan  for-the-pmpose  stated  in-your  letter.  (363)  I-am-not 
indifferent  to-your  appeal ;  and  though  perhaps-you-may-be-inclined-(to)-thiuk  harshly  of- 
me,  I  assure-you  that-I-cannot-do  better.  (364)  Were  I  to-do  this  for-you,  it-would-be 
entirely  contrary  to-our  rules.  (365)  I-shall  submit-the-matter  to-the  Board  (of)  Directors 
next  week,  but  cannot-tell  what-the  outcome  of-it-will-be ;  at-all  events,  I-shall-make  a 
strong  fight  for-you.  (.366)  In-the-meantime,  I  would  suggest  that-you  continue  the  old 
arrangement,  and  that-you-write-me  again,  giving  full  liarticulars  of-the-new  proposition. 
(367)  I-shall  let-you-hear  from-me  as-soon- (as)-possible. 

(368)  With-kind-regards,  Yours  truly, 

Lawrence  Duncan, 

(369)  General-Manager. 

Annotations. — (359)  Attorney-at-laxv  is  one  of  those  compound  words  which  can  be 
represented  bj' the  first  and  last  syllables,  so  that  the  outline  reads  •^xa.aixcixWy  At-law ;  at 
being  the  first  syllable  of  attorney,  and  not  the  logogram  between  the  two  words. 

(360)  No  stress  of  the  voice  is  laid  upon  j  (=  edge)  in  acknowledge,  and  it  may  therefore 
be  dropped.    Note  the  phrase  be-good-enough,  where  good  is  contracted. 

(.361)  Observe  the  word  thereto,  formed  by  phrasing  there  and  to,  the  smaller  of  the  two 
outlines  leaving  its  place  to  admit  of  joining  with  the  other.  All  similar  words,  such  as 
thereat,  therefrom,  thereof,  etc.,  are  formed  in  the  same  manner. 

Note  the  group  desire-{to)-call,  actually  written  desi-ca{ll),  the  /  stroke  of  desire  forming 
at  the  same  time  the  first  half  of  the  caiv  sign.  This  group  is  very  common  in  commercial 
correspondence,  and  the  outline  for  it  is  very  plain.  Observe  that-in-consequencr  ;  in  conse- 
quence is  likewise  a  familiar  phrase  ;  since  very  little  stress  of  the  voice  is  laid  upon  quence, 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  Ill 

this  syllable  may  be  dropped,  consek  (=  eonseq)  representiug  the  full  word.  A  custom  long 
esta  will  at  once  suggest  a  custom  long  established  ;  esfa  shows  the  accented  and  character- 
istic part  of  the  word,  so  that  the  rest,  blish,  may  be  dropped.  Observe  also  the  contraction 
for  consent,  written  conse- 

(362)  I-regrei-{to)-say  is  formed  on  the  same  principle  as  the  phrase  I-am-pleased-{to)- 
saij ;  this  outline  should  be  borne  well  in  mind.  Observe  the  contraction  for  obtain.  For- 
thc-pur2iose  is  another  common  phrase,  where  the  last  (unaccented;  syllable  is  dropped,  so 
that  the  outline  reads  J'or-the-pur . 

(363)  Note  how  clearly  the  full  word  is  suggested  by  tlie  outline  indif ;  observe  the  con- 
traction for  appeal.  Consider  particularly  the  common  phrase  {perhapsYyou-may-be- 
incUn{ed)-{to)-think ;  here  inclined  is  contracted  to  in-ine,  and  to  is  omitted,  as  it  is  implied. 
Note  also  that-I-cannot-do. 

(364)  See  the  phrase  it-ivould-be ;  note  the  convenience  of  the  outline  contrary,  when  ar 
is  omitted. 

(365)  The  group  submit-the-matter  will  be  found  especially  easy  to  the  hand.  Note  also 
the  phrases  cannot-tell,  of-it-will-be,  and  at-all  evetits. 

(366)  Observe  the  contraction  for  suggest;  if  s  were  placed  low  and  J  were  in  normal 
position,  the  contraction  would  read  subject.  Look  carefully  at  the  outline  for  continue;  here 
the  first  and  last  syllables,  con  and  ue  (represented  by  the  cross-stroke),  are  clearly  shown  ; 
as  the  crossing  is  effected  in  high  position,  the  short  "i"  sound  is  also  indicated,  so  that  the 
outline  reads  practically  con-i-n,  leaving  only  t  and  n  to  be  supplied  bj-  the  reader.  The  old 
arrange  will  hardly  be  read  anything  but  the  old  arrangement ;  when  a  verb  like  this  is  pre- 
ceded by  an  adjective,  thus  plainly'  indicating  the  noun,  the  ending  may  safely  be  omitted. 
No  guessing  will  be  required  to  read  j^cirticulars  for  2^€tik  (=  j^ca-tic) ;  the  substance  of  the 
word  is  so  clearly  shown  that  the  rest  may  be  dropped.  The  same  principle  applies  also  to 
the  last  word  in  the  phrase  as-soon-{as)-x)ossible.  Note  the  contraction  of  hear  in  let-you- 
hear  ;  if  the  phrase  should  have  been  let-you-have,  h  would  have  crossed  t  nearer  the  line. 

(367)  As-soon-{as)-po  is  very  plainly  as-soon-as-possible,  and  the  two  unaccented  final 
syllables  may  be  dropped.  In  order  to  illustrate  both  pronunciations  of  o  in  possible,  the 
outline  here  is  written  with  the  true  "o"  sound. 

(368)  Consider  well  the  phrase  with-kind-regards,  w'here  kind  and  regard  are  contracted. 

(369)  Note  also  the  last  word  on  the  Shorthand  Plate  :  in  general,  as  in  several,  the  first 
syllable  is  accented  very  strongly,  while  the  rest  is  quickly  uttered ;  gen  is  therefore  the 
logical  abbreviation ;  the  same  applies  to  the  word  manager,  where  the  last  two  syllables 
are  dropped.  Both  outlines  are  joined  in  the  common  phrase  General- Manager ;  the  last 
half  of  this  outline  could  not  be  man,  as  it  would  have  no  meaning  in  this  connection. 

Writing  Exercises. 

{A)  Write  the  following  words,  contracting  the  basic  syllables  in  the  usual  manner : 
— Abide,  abjure,  aboard,  award,  abound  (here  the  initial  ay  stroke  must  be  separated 
from  b),  abreast,  advice,  becalm,  become,  bedaub,  beget,  begrudge,  behalf,  behoove,  benumb, 
beseech,  befool,  behold,  bereavement,  bereft,  complain,  conduce,  conducive,  confront,  con- 
script, consort  (reverse  o  of  the  last  syllable),  contort,  control,  contrive,  convene,  convict, 
countercheck,  countersign,  counterpart,  countermine,  countermark,  debase,  debouch,  de- 
ceive, declaim,  deform,  deport,  depose,  disbelief,  disburse,  discard,  discompose,  decompose, 
disconnect,  disinfect,  evade,  excise,  exhort,  expand,  expansion,  expensive,  expel,  expire, 
forebode,  foreclose,  foreground,  foretold,  imbibe,  importer,  impress,  imprint,  ineffectual, 
Inflect,  install,  mi.smate,  miscount,  misguide,  misspell,  offset,  outbid,  outmarch,  outrage, 
outride,  outset,  outshine,  outspread,  predict,  prediction,  prescribe,  pretend,  profile,  profound, 
propound,  profuse,  promote,  protrude,  provide,  rebuild,  recast,  recede,  reclaim,  recur,  re- 
deemable, refuse,  reflect,  refract,  remind,  reminder,  remote,  reserve  (final  contraction  is 
better  here),  resume,  reside,  retouch,  retrench,  sublime,  submerge,  subtract  (bring  out  the 
low  position  of  .s,  which  should  start  below  the  top-WwQ,  so  as  to  join  readily  with  the  follow- 
ing t),  transpire,  transfuse,  transfix,  unbound,  unchanged,  undefended,  underground,  under- 
shirt, undress,  unfound,  unguarded,  unkempt,  unload,  unsound,  unspent,  untried,  unveil, 
unwise,  untimely,  upholding,  uplifting,  upright,  uproot,  uprising,  l)adly,  badness,  worthy, 
worthiness,  wortliily,  trial,  homely  (ly  must  be  disconnected  from  ho,  as  otherwise  the  out- 
line would  read  ivholly),  foolish,  foolishness. 


112  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


(B)  ^Independence  Day. 

The  United-States  is-the  only  country  witli-a  known  birth*-day.  All-the-rest  *began, 
they  know  not  when,  and  grew  into  power,  *they  knew-not  how.  If-there-had-been  no 
*Independence-Day,.  England  and  America  *eombined  would-not-be  so-great  as-each  actu- 
ally is.  There-is-no  "Republican,"  no  "Democrat,"  on-the  Fourth  of  July  ;  all  ax-e  Ameri- 
cans,    All  feel*  that-their  country  is-great(er)-thau-their  party. 

(James  G.  Blaine.) 

(C)  Cincinnati,^  April  14th,  1898. 
Mr.  John  F.  Trumbull, 

Allegheny,  Pa. 
Dear  Sir: — 

We-are-in-*receipt-(of  )-your-favor  (of)  recent-date,  and-in-reply-thereto  we-*regret- 
that  we-cannot  *make-you  a  better  offer.  We-are  fully  aware-of  your  promptness*  in^- 
*meet(ing)  obligations,  but-you-will  remember  that-this-is  a-special-case.  We-shall  *attach 
the  *draft  to-the  *bill  (of)  lading,  as- was  originally  *suggested,  and  *hope  this-will-be  satis- 
factory. Yours  very-truly, 

Vulcan  Machine  Works,  Limited.* 

(^)  Louisville,  Ky.,  March  15th,  1898. 

The  F.  Watson  Co., 

Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 
Gentlemen : — 

Having*  heard*  that- there-is-a  steady  *demand  in-your  market  for-the-*kind  (of) 
goods  whicli-we-manufacture,  and  having  learn(ed)  through  our  *friends,  Messrs.  Churcliill 
&  Dunlap,  of-tliis-city,  that-you-do  a  *general-conimission  business,  and  that-you-are  well 
acquainted**  with-the  *trade  in-your  section,  we-take-the  liberty  of  asking  whether-or-not- 
you-would  accept  a  *consignment  of  50  pieces,  *comprising  an  *assortment  of  12  different 
patterns.  Tliese  woollens  are  manufactured  esiiecially  to-*meet  the  *demand  for  fine  styles* 
at  reasonable  prices*.  We-had  quite*  a  successful  season  last  year* ;  and  so-far  (as)  we-can 
judge*  from-the-present  *prospects,  we-have  every  reason  to-expect®  a  large  *increase  in  our 
shipments*  this  fall*.  We-have  ad(ded)  another  wing  to-our  factory,'  and  have  put*  in 
some  new-machinery,  which-will-enable-us  to-increase  our  output*  so-as-to-meet  all  require- 
ments* for-the  growing  demand*. 

Will-you-*kindly  *let-us-know  whether-or-uot  we-shall  send  on  the  bales  at-once. 

Yours  truly. 

The  Chattam  Woollen  Mills. 

i-E)  Wilmington,  Del.,  Sept.  5th,  1898. 

Mr.  John  Underhill, 

25  *Exchange  *Place,  New  York. 

Dear  Sir: — 

Will-you-have-the  *goodness  to-insure*  the  *Steamship*^  "Boston,"  now  ly(ing) 

at  Green  Street*  wharf,  for-the  amount  (of)  $50,000. — .    She-has  *discharged  her  cargo,  is 

now  ready  to-sail  for  Liverpool,  and  will  probably  do-so  in-the  *begiuning  (of)  next  month. 

,  Trusting*-you-will  *give-this-*matter  your  immediate  attention,  we-remain 

Yours  very  truly, 

William  Irv^n  &  Sons. 

{F)  New  York,  July  15th,  1898. 

The  Western  *Banking  Co., 

Omaha,  Neb. 
Gentlemen  : — 

Upon-the  *recomniendation'  of  our  mutual  *friends,  Messrs.  J.  L.  Morrison  &  Bro., 
we-send-you  to-day  $7,000.—  in  Railroad  *Securities,i°  against  which-we-shall-draw  (from) 
time-to  (time)  to-suit'^  our  requirements*.  What-rate  (of)  inter(est)  will-you-allow-us  on 
our  average  deposits,  provided*-that  our  withdrawals  do-not  *exceed  $3,000. — ? 

Yours  truly, 

G.  H.  LocKwooD  &  Co. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  113 


(^)  Elkhart,  Ind.,  November  19th,  1898. 

Mr.  R.  J.  Stanton, 

Sun  Frau Cisco,  Cal. 

Dear  Sir  :— 

Messrs.  Johnson  &  Monroe  have  *expressed  their  desire  to  obtain  a  loan  to-the- 

*extent  of  $12,000. —  against  first  mortgage'*  on  the  premises^^  which-they  occupy.    Although 

our  ^instructions  are  not  to-g()-high(er)-than  $10,000,  we-consider-this  such  a  safe  *invest- 

ment  that  we-should-not-like  to  refuse-the"  loan.    P\)r-this  reason,  we-ask  for-your  approval*, 

which-we-trust*-you-\vill  *let-us^Miave  by  return-mail. 

Very  respectfully, 

Eastburn  Real  Estate  Co. 

Annotations. — It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  asterisk  (*)  at  the  beginning  or  at 
the  end  of  a  word  indicates  whether  the  banle  syllable  is  contracted  initially  or  finally.  For 
example,  the  asterisk  at  the  end  of  requirements  does  not  signify  that  ments  is  the  contraction 
for  this  word,  but  that  quire,  the  basic  syllable,  is  to  be  contracted  finally.  ^  Cincinnati  can 
be  abbreviated  to  Cin.,  just  as  in  longhand,  ^  Use  in  sign.  ^Limited  is  abbreviated  as  in 
longhand,  writing  lim.  *The  ing  hook  should  be  used  in  having,  as  the  word  occurs  at  the 
beginning  of  a  letter,  and  the  subject  is  not  yet  developed.  ^  The  use  of  final  contraction 
will  make  the  outline  a-aint ;  ed  may  be  dropj^ed.  ^  Show  the  initial  vowel-stroke  in  expect. 
'Since  the  basic  syllable  in  factory  is  fact,  the  ending  may  be  added  to  the  contraction  fa. 
The  novice  may  be  inclined  to  think  that  in  writing  rapidly  he  will  have  no  time  to  reason 
all  this  out.  This  is  quite  true  ;  but  if  he  will  practise  suffleiently,  he  will  arrive  at  a  stage 
where  he  will  use  all  these  contractions  without  being  aware  of  any  mental  effort  in 
planning  the  outlines.  "The  shading  of  t  at  the  bottom  and  p  at  the  top  should  be  clearly 
shown.  ^  Here  another  prefix  is  added,  so  that  the  word  may  safely  be  represented  by 
reeom  ;  but  if  the  termination  also  is  added,  the  outline  will  read  recom-afion.  ^"The  basic 
syllable  of  secure  (from  which  is  derived  securities)  is  cure,  subject  to  initial  contraction. 
This  contraction  is  also  applied  in  securities,  where  k  is  crossed  by  the  ity  sign.  ''  This 
phrase  can  be  so  conveniently  written  that  no  advantage  would  be  gained  in  contracting 
suit.  ^'^  R  may  be  omitted  from  mortgage,  and  t  (being  silent)  is  also  dropped.  '^  The  double 
s  circle  can  be  used  conveniently.  "  Cross  ?'  (for  re)  with  the  connective  stroke  of  th.  '*  Con- 
tracting let  in  this  phrase  will  make  the  outline  read  les-have,  which  is  still  perfectly  plain. 


114  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  17. 


We  may  now  also  dispense  with  the  writing  line.  As  to  whether  or  not  this  line  is  to 
be  used  in  practice,  each  stenographer  must  decide  for  himself.  It  will  be  found  that  notes 
written  on  unruled  paper  are  perfectly  legible,  and  such  paper  is  preferred  by  many  expe- 
rienced stenographers.  It  is  not  advisable  that  the  shorthand  student  should  use  it  in  the 
beginning  of  his  career,  however,  although  he  should  accustom  himself  to  read  notes  on 
unruled  paper;  the  initial  experience  may  be  obtained  from  the  remaining  lessons,  which 
will  furnish  reading  exercises. 


'o 


Open  Monosyllables, 

which  consist  of  a  vowel  followed  by  two  consonants,  may  be  contracted  by  omitting  the  last 
consonant, — reducing  act  to  ao  (1),  for  example, — the  derivatives  being  formed  by  adding 
the  affixes  to  the  contraction  as  usual:  acting  (2):  actor  (3):  action  (4):  counteract  (5). 
Compare  acute  (6)  with  actuate  (7)  ;  note  actual  (8)  and  activity  (9) — in  the  latter  one  ending 
is  omitted. 

(10)  This  great  painter  had  shown  a  taste  for  art  ever-since  his  boyhood.— The  first  word 
that  will  occur  to  the  reader  when  he  sees  shaded  r  on  the  line  is  the  word  are  ;  the  latter, 
however,  cannot  be  preceded  by  the  preposition /o?-/  and,  besides,  the  context  points  strongly 
to  the  noun  art. 

(11)  Will-you-please  give-your  seat  to-this  old-man  ;  for  we-should  always  show  such 
courtesy  to  old-age. — It  requires  no  guessing  here  to  read  ol-man  for  old  mail,  and  oUage  for 
old  age. 

When  we  look  at  the  word  actual,  for  example,  or  at  a  word  like  eventual  (12),  we  notice 
that  the  word  is  written  almost  in  full,  and  how  the  vowel-sound  of  the  medial  syllable  is 
clearly  shown  by  crossing  the  consonant  of  the  first  syllable  with  the  initial  stroke  of  the 
last  syllable.  This  principle  may  also  be  extended  to  other  words  of  similar  construction  ; 
for  example,  gra-ual  will  readily  be  taken  for  gradual  (13).  See  also  graduation  (14)  : 
manual  (15), — written  ma-ual :  stimulant  (16)  :  stipulation  (17), — note  how  in  the  latter  two 
words  the  i  is  well  shown  by  shading  t  at  the  bottom.  Another  illustration  is  offered  by  the 
words  occupy  (18)  and  occupation  (19).  The  following  examples  show  that  a  prefix  added 
does  not  impair  the  general  rule  :  congratulate  (20) :  congratulation  (21)  :  evacuation  (22)  : 
infatuation  (23) ;  all  tliese  outlines  could  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  words  :  congra-uate 
could  not  read  congraduate,  since  there  is  no  such  word.  Note  aXso population  (24),  distribu- 
tion (25),  and  contribution  (26)  ;  in  the  latter  two  the  i  is  indicated  by  the  tion  stroke  crossing 
t  in  high  position. 

(27)  The  acting  chairman  said,  that-though  he-was  actuated  as-much  by-human  feelings 
as-the-other  members  of-the-board,  yet  under-the  present  regulations  of-the-house,  he-could- 
take-no  action  in-the-matter ;  nor  could- he  appropriate  any  money  for  distribution,  unless 
the  actual  state  of  things  was  brought  before-the-committee  in-the  usual  manner. — This 
sentence  shows  how  safe  these  contractions  are,  since  every  outline  in  it  suggests  very 
strongly  the  word  it  represents.  Observe  the  phrases  that-though,  as-the-other,  and  he- 
could-take.  Note  how  the  low  position  of  the  initial  vowel-stroke  is  substituted  for  u  in 
usual,  written  ooshl. 

Logograms 

have  all  been  shown  in  the  previous  lessons.  They  have  been  collected  in  this  lesson, 
however,  and  are  arranged  alphabetically  witii  a  view  to  convenience  of  reference.  On  the 
shortliand  sheet  they  are  arranged  according  to  their  shorthand  signs*,  so  that  they  may 


*  Such  words  as  again,  across,  etc.,  in  the  shorthand  sheet  are  found  among  the  .c's  and  c's,  as  the  latter  are  more 
conspicuous  than  the  ay  stroke  which  also  forms  a  part  of  them.  Words  like  above,  however,  where  the  ay  stroke  is 
very  obvious,  are  found  among  the  e's,  the  a  stroke  being  the  alphabetical  sign  for  e,  the  second  vowel  in  the  alphabet. 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


115 


readily  be  referred  to  when  the  eye  meets  them  ;  in  the  list  below  they  are  arranged  according 
to  their  initials.  For  practical  work  it  is  very  important  that  the  stenographer  be  perfectly 
familiar  with  the  logograms,  and  a  lack  of  this  knowledge  will  greatly  impair  his  speed. 

Reference  List  of  Logograms  and  Related  Outlines. 


A  (41) 
about  (43) 
above  (42) 
according  (61) 
across  (62) 
after  (121) 
again  (49) 
against  (-50) 
all  (91) 
almost  (94) 
alone  (70) 
also  (93) 
although  (95) 
always  (96) 
am  (75) 
among  (87) 
and  (28) 
any  (147) 
apart  (44) 
are  (103) 
be  (30) 
because  (32) 
been  (82) 
behind  (33) 
besides  (34) 
between  (35) 
beyond  (36) 
but  (31) 
can  (65) 
circumstance  (114) 


could  (66) 

course  (67) 

cross  (68) 

did  (40) 

do,  does  (37) 

during  (106) 

even  (136) 

ever  (99; 

every  (104)   . 

everything  (105) 

extra  (63) 

extraordinary  (64) 

fit  (45) 

for  (46) 

from  (48) 

fulfil  (132) 

full (131) 

fully  (74) 

great  (51) 

had  (88) 

has,  have  (52) 

he,  him  (53) 

how  (55) 

in  (56) 

instead  (57) 

into  (58) 

just  (60) 

manufacture  (79) 

mean  (89) 

member  (78) 


mention  (117) 

much  (77) 

must  (110) 

never  (84) 

nobody  (86) 

not  (122) 

nothing  (85) 

notwithstanding  (125) 

now  (83) 

of  (90) 

often  (47) 

on  (80) 

only  (73) 

our  (102) 

out  (29) 

over  (187) 

perhaps  (98) 

present  (97) 

question  (69) 

remain  (88) 

reply  (59) 

satisfy  (115) 

shall  (71) 

she  (118) 

should  (39) 

something  (111) 

somewhat  (112) 

somewhere  (113) 

speak  (119) 

special  (120) 


still  (116) 
such  (107) 
the  (126) 
them  (76) 
these  (109) 
this  (108) 
thus  (127) 
till  (124) 
to,  too  1 123) 
true  (128) 
truth  (129) 
until  (133) 
up  (130) 
upon  (81) 
utmost  (134) 
very  (135) 
was  (92) 
we  (138) 
were  (100) 
what  (140) 
which  (142) 
who  (54) 
will  (72) 
without  (141) 
world  (143) 
would  (139) 
yes  (144) 
yesterday  (146) 
yet  (145) 
your  (101) 


Reading  Exercise. 
(148)  Mr.  L.  F.  Sweeney, 

(149)  Baltimore,  Md. 

Dear  Sir : — 

(150)  I-have-made  a  careful  examination  of-the  books  of-the  Celluloid  Mfg.  Co., 
of-which  firm  I-am-the  assignee,  and  am  now  ready  to-supply-you  with-the  information 
desired.  (151)  The  cause  (of  the)  present  trouble  seems-(to)-be  a  loan  which-the-company 
had  obtained  against  collateral  security.  (152)  The  latter  declined  rai>idly  in-value,  where- 
upon-the  bank  at-once  demanded  the  return  of-the  money.  (153)  Although-the  books  of-the 
company  show  quite  a  large  amount  on-the  sinking  fund,  they-were-not  able  to-meet-the 
obligation  in-the-short-time  which-the-bank  granted,  as-the  collections  on-their  outstandings 
had-been  very  poor  lately.  (154)  Eve n-tlie- fact  that-their  treasurer  is-also-one-of-the  stocks 
holders  of-the  Clearing  House,  could-nbt  induce-the  bank  to-change  its  decision  ;  as-there- 
were  rumors  current  that  some-few-weeks  ago,  the  company  was  compelled  to-dishonor  a 
draft  for  quite  a  large  sum  owing  to-lack  of  funds.  (155)  The  C.  M.  Co.  claim,  however, 
that-it-was  owing  to-a  dispute  about-a  shipment  which-they-say  they-had-bought  f.  o.  b., 
while-the  shipper  claims  they-did-not. 

(156)  The  assets  of-the  Company  by  far  exceed  the  liabilities,  and  if  matters  are-not 
rushed  too-rauch,  the  creditors  will-get  100  cents  on-the  dollar.  (157)  It-is  only  (a)  question' 
(of  )-time,  when-the  available  property  can-be  realized  ;  and  so-far-(as)-I-know,  I-do-not-thinb 
that-you-will-lose  a  cent.  (158)  It-is-altogother  probable  that,  with-the-good  prospects  which- 
have  lately  stimulated  the  market,  it-might-be-well  to-let-them  resume  business  at-au  early 


116  GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


date.  (159)  There-is-no-doubt  that-if-they-could-make-the  coutemplated  improvements  in- 
their  machinery,  as-they-were  about  to-do  when-tlie  unfortunate  turn  of  matters  interfered 
with-their  plans,  they-could  very  rapidly  satisfy  all  claims  against-them. 

Yours  very  truly, 

Robert  B.  Erbing. 

Annotations. — (150)  In  is  omitted  from  examination,  in  analogy  to  communication. 
As  is  illustrated  by  the  word  celluloid,  there  are  some  few  outlines  in  which  it  would  be 
inconvenient  to  express  the  "oi"  sound  by  placing  the  i  stroke  low;  in  cases  of  this  sort, 
the  general  i^ractice  is  to  substitute  "i"  for  "oi."  See  how  well  the  "ee"  sound  of  assignee 
is  shown.  Look  at  the  phrase  to-supply  ;  since  s  starts  with  an  upstroke,  the  medium  t  may 
be  phrased  with  it,  and  s  may  be  ti'aced  in  the  direction  in  which  it  is  most  conveniently 
joined  with  the  following  p. 

(151)  Note  the  phrase  seenis-{to)-be,  where  seems  is  contracted.  See  how  mp  is  placed 
low  in  company,  where  o  has  the  short  "u"  sound.  Company  has  been  abbreviated  to  Co. 
in  the  succeeding  sentences.  Unaccented  e  is  omitted  from  collateral,  admitting  of  blending 
t  and  r. 

(152)  See  how  where  and  upon  are  joined,  the  low  position  of  n  being  indicated  by  its 
downward  direction. 

(153)  The  out  dot  (in  outstanding)  is  clearly'  shown  to  be  in  low  position,  although  it  is 
not  placed  below  the  writing  line. 

(154)  Observe  the  outlines  for  even-the-fact  and  is-also-one-of-the.  In  stockholder,  where 
both  words  are  contracted,  the  ending  er  is  added  to  the  contraction  for  hold,  to  form  the 
derivative  [holder).  See  how  r  and  ing  are  blended  in  the  final  contraction  of  clearing.  The 
u  is  replaced  in  induce  by  "  oo."     Note  also  the  phrase  some-few-iveeks-ago. 

(155)  When  the  name  of  a  firm  is  repeated,  the  initials  alone  need  be  used.  The  out  dot 
is  replaced  by  the  "a"  stroke  in  about  a;  care  must  be  taken  that  the  two  strokes  are  not 
of  equal  length,  however,  so  that  the  outline  cannot  be  mistaken  for  an  equal-mark.  The 
commercial  abbreviation  /.  o.  6.  is  phrased. 

(156)  The  phrase  are-not  illustrates  again  how  safe  the  phrases  are,  even  though  they 
may  sometimes  combine  into  an  outline  that  has  a  meaning  of  its  own.  Are-not  has  the 
same  outline  as  rat,  which  does  not  fit  into  the  sense  of  the  sentence.  See  how  100  cents  is 
written. 

(157)  In  this  connection  avail  can  be  nothing  but  available.  Note  the  short  outline  for 
so-far-{as)-I-know.    One  I  is  omitted  from  that-you-ivill-lose. 

(158)  Note  the  phrasing  of  all  and  together,  resulting  in  altogether.  See  how  clearly  the 
is  shown  in  ivith-the-good.  Look  at  the  phrase  it-might-be-well,  where  w  can  hardly  read 
anything  but  well.  The  initial  contraction  for  date  cannot  be  taken  for  day,  as  the  latter 
would  be  written  by  the  long  ay  stroke  above  the  line. 

(159)  Observe  the  phrases  that-if-they-could-make  and  about  to-do ;  also  the  substitution 
of  er  for  ur  in  turn. 

Writing  Exercise  on  Logograms. 

Letter  to  a  Young  Man  who  has  just  Left  College. 

My  Dear  Henry  :— 

I  understand  that-you-are  about  to^  leave  *school  and  to-enter-the  field*  of 
commercial  activity.  According  to-what-I-heard,^  you-have  *well  fulfilled-your  duties 
during-your  stay  at-the  school,  and  have  graduated  with  honors,  upon  which  I  sinc(erely) 
congratulate-you.  Ou-my  *last  visit,  I-*told-you  that  I-should  probably  not  see  you-again  ^ 
for-sonie-time,  and  I  therefore  take*-this  opportunity  to  write-you  a-few  fatherly*  lines,  and 
to-warn-you  against-the  dangers  that-may  beset-your  *path.  I-did^-so  when  your  older 
brother  started*  on-his  career,  and  he  appreciated  my  words*  so-much  that-I-am  inclined* 
to-do-the  same  in-your-case. 

In-order  to-*achieve  success  in  life,  it-is-not  necessary  to  be  possess(ed)  of  extraordinary 
talents,  or  to  be  favor(ed)  by  a  special  stroke*  (of)  *good-luck.  Never  *couut  on  such 
*chances.  Instead  of  waiting  for  success,  *work  for  it  from-the  very  start*  ^.  Just  do  your 
duty  manfully  and  *conscientiously.  I-could'  mention  many  instances,^  where  men  with 
ordinary  intellect,  but  with-an  extra  supply  of  persistency,  rose  in-the-world  ;  while-many 
a  genius  lias  remained  unknown,  because  he  *relied  too-much  upon  his  ingenuity.    If-the 


Lesson  17.    -^^^  ^  ^  ^^  ^  ^  -^ /^_/^^'-^/.  .  /^^ 


Reference  List  of  Logograms  and  Related  Outlines. 


2-9      i/ 


ia     Ju    J/  -^^        ^3      Jy    ^i"     J^Y    ^^    ^^t^f     '■'o     ^/     ^-2     ^-^    ^-Z    ^^     ^^     ^^7    ^<^ 


<i   ^..    .y^A  ^   ^  t^     -^  e.:^.  ^0  ^  -   7   -.  ^    , 


fy^       S-o       o-/     J-^      ^-J     ^V     S£-     S%    S-7     ^«P      J-^     60       6,      <^;Z.     <^j      ^V         ,^^      ^6        /?  ^5*       ^_^ 


? 


70      7/       7^    7^       7^       7^       7^      77      7^     7^       ^0     ^/      :f^      i-J      iH      8  5-         ^6        s~i        SX         Sf        90 


--•       */ 


^_y    .-^    "-zr    ,      z?     >  ...\  .._^..    ..^ ...     X      K.    .r\^ 

/oy      /Of      /Of        //o       ///■         //X.      / 

7  /  . . ..-  _.  _..  s  ..1.  s    ;  i  /  / 


■6-       ^  ^^-       " 


/J5>  /Vo  /V/  'V^  /yj       /Vf^  'VJ.        /<<v<$  'V7 

-  C  <^         J         J       J-        ^ 


-'^.         O      (f     ir\      ^     -ys    <^-t      ^  /^      ^/        ^      ^     ^    /^    "^"^    ^^      ^""^^^ 


^ 


^  ^  '  ^  ^  o7^  -^.    /-^  c^  c(2^  cy  op  ^  o  e^  ^x^ ^  ^ 


118  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


opportunity  for-the  proper  employment  of  your  talents  does-not  preseut-itself  right-away, 
do-not  *become  discouraged ;  it  often  comes  *unexpectedly,  and  then  proves*  a  boon  to 
those- who-are  ready  for  it.  I  presume*  ^  that-you  want  to-*become  a  useful  member  of  your 
community,  and  ^"-that-you-are  as  ambitious  a  *young  *man  as  ever  left  college.  For-this- 
reason,  it-is  perhaps  *hardly  necessary  that-I-say  anything  further  on-this-point,  taking*  it 
for  *granted  tliat-you-are-not  *afraid  to-use  your  best  endeavors  to-accomplish  your  purpose. 

There-are-some-tliings,  however,  which-most  men  learn  only  through  the  bitter  school*  " 
(of)  experience.    It-is-of-these  *points  that-I-will-speak  : 

Above-all-things,  be  true  to-your  honorable  principles ;  be  true  to-them  until-the-end 
(of)  your  days.  You-ean-have-no  bet(ter)  model  in-this-*respect  than  your  father,  who-was- 
one'^  (of  the)  most  *respected  manufacturers  of  your  city.  If-you-live  up  to-his  standard, 
you  will  indeed  be  a  worthy*  son.  Beware  of  an  overindulg(ence)  in  pleasure  and  amuse- 
ments,^^ which-will  *sap  your  energy  and  *distract  it  from-the  channel  in-which  it-ought  to 
run.  When  *invited  to-a  social"  affair  which-takes*-*place  during  business  hours,  reply, 
courteously  but  firmly*,  that-you-cannot  *attend  ;  such  recreations,  no-*matter  how  tempt- 
ing* they-may-be,  should  always-be  left  to-the  leisure-hours. 

Never  be  idle  ;  many  a  man  has-gone  astray  for  *want  of  something  to-do.  Our  talents 
and  powers*  must-be  exercised,  lest  we  lose  them.  It-is-not  necessary,  of-course,  that-you- 
should-spend  evei\y  minute  of  your  life  at  work.  But  be  as  careful  in-the  choice*  of  your 
recreations  as-you-should-be  in-the  choice*  of  your  *friends.  A  pastime  should  always  mean 
improvement*  of  some  *sort ;  it  should  *divert  the  *mind  from  the  routine  of  business,  yet 
*enrich  its  craving  for  everything  that-is  good,  true,  or  beautiful. 

Physical  recreation  should  be  used  to  strengthen  your  muscles  and  *give  health  to  your 
body. 

As-to-your  *work,  do  not  put  off  till  to-morrow  what  you  can  do  to-day  ;  "  to-morrow" 
is  an  uncertain(t)y,  to-a  very  large  *extent. 

Remember-also  that,  whlle-the  ambition  to-accumulate  wealth  is  laudable,  since-much  '*- 
good  can-be  accompl(ished)  by-those-who  possess  it,  money  is-not  everything.  Repudiate 
by  your  career  the  vicious  saying  that  "  every  man  has  his  price*."  Nothing  would  *drag- 
you  down  more-than-the  *consciousness  of  having-swerved  from-the  path  (of)  duty  for-(the)- 
sake  of  material  gain,  or  of  anything  else  that-might-be  held-out'^  to-you  as-a  reward. 

You-will-no-doubt  remember  the  story  of-the  man  who-*went  to-town*^' with-his-son, 
*leading  a  mule,  and  who  followed  the  *advice  of  everybody  who  chose  to-*give  it  to-him, 
until-he-saw-the  folly  of  such  a  course.  *Advice,  particularly  from  somebody  older  and 
more  experienced-than  yourself,  is-always  valuable  and-should-be  gratefully  *received.  But 
do-not  depend  entirely  upon-the  opinions  of  anybody  who  offers  *advice  ;  for  nobody  knows 
your  business  as-well-(as)-you-should. 

Be  unselfish  and  generous.  Believe  that-men,  as-a  rule,  are  honest ;  but  be  eauti(ous) 
not  to  *place  yourself  in-the  power*  of  others,  since  selfish  *intentions  may  lurk  behind- 
the  professions  of  apparent  *friends.  Try  to-have  only  such  *friends  as-you-can-be  proud* 
of;  have  few  whom-you-know  to  be  true  rather-than-nciany  whom-you-know  but  super- 
(ficially).  This-may  *sound  somewhat  skeptical.  I-do-not  *wish-to-sa5',  however,  that-you 
should-be  filled  with  suspicion  of  everybody  with  whom  you  come  into  contact,  as  trust- 
worthy* people  are  in-the  majority  ;  yet  even  trustworthy*  people  may-be-caused  by  a 
tempting*  opportunity  or  harsh  necessity  to-*east  aside  all  consideration  for-others.  For-this 
reason  be  careful  as-to  your  confidants. 

Wherever  you-may-go  and  with-whomever  you-may  deal*,  try  to  *leave  behind-you  a 
pleasant  impression,  by-being  courteous  to  all  alike.  The  *man  who  *crouches  before-his 
superiors  and  tyrannizes  his  subo(r)dinates  is  especially  detestable.'® 

Never  *indulge  in  gossip,  nor  speak  ill  about-other ''  people,  without-having  just-cause. 
Much  trouble  can  thus  be  *avoided,  and  you-can  *live  in-peace  with-all-the-world.  Not- 
withstanding-these  precautions,  you  may  occasionally  *come  across  quarrelsome  persons 
with-whom  you-will-have  to-cross  *swords  ;  for,  while-you-should  never  *attack  unjustly, 
neither  should-you  *give-in  before  unjust  *attacks.  But  be  careful  to  repulse*"*  them  in-a 
dign(ifi)ed  manner,  without  l)itterness"  or  malice,  and  with-the  sole  pur(pose)  of  assert(ing) 
and  maintaining  the  right. 

Never  say  "Yes"  when-you  feel*  that-you-ought  to-say  "No"  ;  even  if  at  first*  it-may- 
not-be  easy  for-j'ou  to-do-so.    Let-nothing  inter(fere)  with-what  careful  *reflection  has  con- 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  119 


vinced  you  to  be-the  right  *path  for-you  to  pursue.^*  Let  yesterday  be  the  *teacher  of  to-day, 
and  see  that  to-morrow  *finds  you  better-than  to-day.  Always  *live  within  your  *income, 
and  sothat-you-can  put*  *aside  a  penny  for-a  rainy  day.  If-this-rule  were  heeded  by 
everybody,  there  would-be  a-good-deal  less  uuhappiuess  in-the-world. 

Remember  that  Richelieu  said,  "  There-is-no  such  word*  as  fail."  While  it-is  beyond- 
human  power*  to-accomplish  the  impossible,  honest,  earnest,  persevering  ^efforts  must 
surely  *bring  a  reasonable  amount  of  success.  That-you-may-have-a  full  measure  of-this 
success  is-the  sincere  wish  of 

Your  uncle 

William. 

Annotations. — ^  Place  the  a  stroke  over  the  t  in  about.  ^  Nothing  would  be  gained  here 
bj'  contracting  heard,  since  i  forms  the  natural  connective  line  between  ft  and  7'd.  '  Cross 
see  with  the  initial  a  stroke  of  again.  *  Father  (where  er  may  be  dropjied)  is  well  contracted 
initially  by  shading  /  and  placing  it  high.  *  Blend  d  of  did  with  s  of  so.  ®The  words  start 
and  stop  illustrate  the  nice  distinctions  made  by  initial  and  final  contraction  ;  the  former  is 
more  conveniently  contracted  finally,  while  initial  contraction  is  employed  in  the  latter. 
'Place  k  of  could  under  the  i  stroke,  instead  of  below  the  writing  line.  *Use  the  i  sign. 
^The  basic  sj'llable  of  presume  is  more  conveniently  contracted  initially'.  '"  Th,  shaded  and 
above  the  line,  may  be  followed  by  the  t  sti'oke  in  and-that,  so  as  to  facilitate  crossing  with 
are.  "  The  term  "  school  of  experience"  is  so  well  known  that  school  may  well  be  contracted 
finally.  '-  One  may  be  shown  well  b^-  tracing  n  downward,  joining  it  with  h  by  means  of  a 
small  loop.  "Substitute  "oo"  for  t<.  "Let  o  be  absorbed  by  the  initial  curve  of  sh.  ''3/ 
may  be  blended  with  the  <?»ce  stroke,  which  must  be  extended  below  the  line  to  show  the 
low  position  of  much.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the  high  position  of  s  is  also  clearly  shown. 
^^ H  on  the  line,  with  the  out  dot  below  it,  is  perfectly  clear  for  held-out.  "As  said  before, 
words  like  totvn  may  be  contracted  when  they  occur  in  phrases.  ^^Show  well  the  shading 
of  I  for  able.  ^*  Place  the  a  stroke  above  other.  ^"Use  the  short  vowel-stroke  to  show  the 
short  sound  of  the  basic  syllable  pulse,  contracting  the  word  to  re-uls.  ^^  Bitterness  is  spelled 
bitrnes.  -*  Ur  is  not  accented  in  pursue,  and  ma^-,  therefore,  be  replaced  by  er,  when  r  is 
omitted,  as  usual. 


REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

1.  Review  the  logograms. 

2.  How  are  derivatives  formed  from  contractions? 

3.  What  is  the  " basic  syllable"  of  a  word? 

4.  How  are  words  with  basic  sj'llables  contracted  ? 

5.  How  are  prefixes  treated  in  connection  with  words  having  a  basic  syllable? 

6.  When  may  open  syllables  be  contracted  ? 

7.  What  is  done  to  shorten  the  outlines  for  words  that  contain  a  medial  "  u"  sound? 


Lesson  i8.  yJ^ 


^  ^^_  ^^-^  .  .  c^    -  -€^ ^ -.^  2J ^  r\  ^  c^  j^^  c^(^C 


6/ 


5,  5"  _  2.  e/ 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  121 


Lesson  No.  i8. 


Reading  Exercise. 
Liquid  Air. 

(1)  One-of-the  latest  wonders  (of;  science  is  liquid-air,  (the)  first  ounce  of-which  cost 
something-like  three  thousand  dollars.  (2)  A  scientist  has  recently  succeeded  in  manu- 
facturing it  on  a  commercial  basis,  however,  consuming  only  about  fifteen  minutes  for- 
the  process.  (3)  He  reduced-the  air  to-about  300°  below  zero,  and  subjected  it  to  a  pressure 
so-great  that-it-took  800  cubic  feet  (of)  atmosphere  to  j^roduce  1  cubic  foot  of  liquid-air.  (4) 
The  new  substance  is  practically  colorless,  but  has  a  slight  bluish  tint,  suggesting  the  blue 
of  the  skies.  (5)  There-are  in-fact  two  liquids,  liquefied  nitrogen  and  liquefied  oxygen. 
(6)  If  kept  cool,  liquid-air  may-be  preserved  for  36  hours,  and  can-be  shipped  to  other 
cities  in  specially'  prepared  tin  cans.  (7)  Unless  very-great  precautions  are-taken,  it-will 
gradually  mingle  with-the  surrounding  air. 

(8)  Owing  to  its  powerful  tendency  to-evaporate,  it-will  boil  vigorously,  when-takeu- 
up  in-a  cup.  (9)  The  inventor  asked  his  friend  to  dip  his  finger  into-the  liquid,  cautioning 
him  to-withdraw  it  quickly.  (10)  "When-this  advice  is  followed,  no  harm  can  result,  as-the 
moisture  of-the-hand  under-the  influence  of-the  frightful  cold  forms  a  thin  vapor  cushion, 
which  protects  the  hand  like-a  glove.  (11)  But  a  second's  delay  would  cause  a  severe  burn, 
or  a  frost  bite  at-the  least.  (12)  Iron  dipped  into-the  liquid  becomes  very  brittle,  while 
its  tensile  strength  increases,  in-which  conditions  it-remains  for  a  short-time.  (13)  Copper, 
silver,  gold,  and-the  majority  (of)  other  metals  are-not-so  affected;  neither  is  leather,  but 
rubber  becomes  as  brittle  (as)  a  china  plate. 

(14)  We-can  form  an  adequate  idea  (of  the)  enormous  amount  of  cold  developed  by 
liquid-air,  when-we-are  told  that-it-will  freeze  mercury  and  alcohol  perfectly  rigid,  and- 
that  meat  or  butter  left  in-the  fluid  a  few  minutes  will-be  frozen  so-hard  that-thej^-can-be 
pulverized  into-a  fine  dry  dust  with-a  hammer.  (15)  This  suggests  the  usefulness  of  liquid- 
air,  when  applied  to  refrigeration.  (16)  With  its  aid,  meat  or-other  perishable  eatables  can 
easily  be  shipped  to-any  distance.  (17)  By  means  (of)  a  properly  regulated  apparatus, 
it-could-be  used  for  cooling  houses,  theatres,  etc.  (18)  The  War  Department  has  ordered 
tests  for  its  application  in  cooling  guns  in  action.  (19)  Since  it-will  easily  boil,  it-may  yet 
supplant  steam  and  electricity  as-a  motive  power ;  and  as  it-can-be  confined  to-a  small 
space,  it-would-be  of  great  advantage  in  submarine  or  aerial  navigation.  (20)  In-short, 
as-soon  (as)  it-cau-be  practically  applied,  it  bids  fair  to-work  another  revolution,  as-great 
as-that  caused  by-the  advent  of-the  steam  engine  or-the  utilization  of  electricity.  (21) 
While-this-may-be  only  the  dream  of  inventors  just-at-present,  there-is-no-doubt  that-the 
future  has  still  some  marvelous  possibilities  in  store  for-us.    (From  McClur^s  Magazine.) 

Annotations.— Observe  how  the  outline  of  liquid  is  simplified  by  the  omission  of 
tv  (of  gu). 

(1)  Note  the  frequent  group  one-of-the.  The  words  liquid  and  air  occur  frequently 
together  in  this  article  and  may  therefore  be  phrased,  as  they  belong  together  in  sense. 

(2)  Note  comrsh  blended  in  comrncrcial ;  a  short  vowel  must  be  read  between  com  and 
rsh,  as  no  wo'-d  could  start  with  the  combination  comrt<h. 

(3)  Notic3  the  phrasing  in  to-about,  which  is  justifiable  inasmuch  as  the  a  stroke  in 
about  is  made  with  a  slight  upward  tendencj'.  The  final,  unaccented  syllable  is  dropped 
in  pressure.  Look  at  the  phrase  that-it-took  ;  nothing  would  be  gained  here  by  omitting 
the  t  of  that,  as  the  hand  must  go  up  to  the  top-line  in  order  to  start  the  it  stroke.  Note 
the  difference-between  the  cipher  for  100  and  the  degree  mark. 

(4)  The  i-t  stroke  above  the  line  can  only  mean  stight,  as  quite  (the  only  other  word 
which  might  come  into  consideration  here)  would  come  before  the  article,  instead  of 
following  it.     Instead  of  "a  slight  bluish  tint,"  the  phrase  would  then  be  "quite  a  bluish 


122  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


tint."     Observe  sh  placed  high  in  bluish.    lu  skies,  the  final  contraction  is  more  convenient 
than  is  the  initial. 

(5)  The  outline  for  liquefied  is  further  simplified  by  the  omission  of  zv  (of  qti),  of  the 
medial  syllable  ef  (which  in  this  word  is  pronounced  almost  like  if),  and  of  ed  (the  past 
participle  ending).  Observe  also  how  well  the  sign  of  equality  indicates  the  repetition  of 
the  word  liquefied. 

(6)  Note  the  initial  contraction  for  tin  and  cans;  the  plural  is  here  so  obvious  that 
it  need  not  be  indicated  in  the  contraction. 

(7)  Note  the  frequent  and  convenient  phrase  are-taken,  where  the  ending  of  taken  is 
dropped  ;  the  outline  is  unmistakable.  The  only  other  meaning  that  Jiiight  suggest  itself 
at  the  first  glance  would  be  rack;  but  there  could  be  no  long  k  in  this  word.  The  con- 
tracted outline  for  surrounding  could  not  be  taken  for  sour :  s  would  stand  below  the  line 
and  would  be  shaded  in  the  latter. 

(8)  The  ending  must  be  written  in  oiving,  as  o  by  itself  would  be  mistaken  for  of.  Note 
the  contraction  oi  jjowerfid.  Observe  also  the  phrasing  of  medium  t  and  the  suppression 
of  the  unaccented  o  in  to-evaporate  {evaprate).  On  the  same  principle,  grand  r  are  blended 
in  vigor  (which  sounds  like  vigr)  ;  to  this  outline  is  added  ly  to  form  vigorously,  the  first 
ending  {ous)  being  omitted.     Observe  also  the  convenient  phrase  when-taken-up. 

(9)  See  how  the  final  syllable  or  {=■-  er)  is  added  to  the  contraction  for  invent,  forming 
inventor.  Ip,  in  connection  with  finger  and  liquid,  will  readily  be  taken  for  dip  ;  and  fing 
can  mean  nothing  but^^n^rer. 

(10)  See  how  ivhen  and  this  are  phrased.  Observe  the  contraction  for  result  (resu) 
where  the  short  vowel-stroke  following  s  indicates  that  the  vowel-sound  follows,  showing 
plainly  that  this  outline  is  an  initial  contraction.  Moist  is  subject  to  initial  contraction, 
to  which  cher  {ture)  is  added  to  form  moisture.  Influ  will  at  once  suggest  influence.  The 
ending  in  cushion  may  likewise  be  dropped. 

(11)  Note  the  final  contraction  in  frost. 

(12)  Pt  (showing  the  end  of  the  word)  followed  by  into-the-liquid,  will  at  once  suggest 
dipped  (dipt). 

(13)  Oo  will  not  be  read  for  anything  but  gold  in  this  connection.  Br  (placed  low)  can 
be  used  to  advantage  in  rubber  (rubr). 

(14)  Adequate  is  simplified  by  the  omission  of  iv  (of  qu).  In  mercury  the  substitution 
of  related  sounds  is  applied  so  that  the  word  becomes  nierkery.  Since  the  vowel  in  the  last 
syllable  is  obscure,  we  may  write  it  merkry  ;  and  since  no  word  can  start  with  the  combina- 
tion mr,  we  may  blend  the  latter  and  join  it  to  kry,  writing  mrkry.  H  being  omitted  from 
alcohol,  o  is  not  repeated,  so  that  the  outline  becomes  alcol.  Observe  the  phrase  so-hard, 
where  ha7'd  is  contracted  initially  ;  the  phrase  reads  literally  s-ha,  a  sounding  as  in  hard, 
as  is  indicated  by  the  shading  and  high  position  of  h.  See  how  well  medium  st  placed  low 
is  employed  in  dust. 

(15)  Note  the  difference  between  suggest  and  the  outline  for  subject:  the  prefix  sub  is 
placed  low,  while  j  is  low  in  suggest. 

(16)  Note  the  phrase  or-other.  See  how  clearly  the  initial  ee  is  showm  in  eatables,  where 
the  syllables  able  are  represented  by  shaded  a.  Pt  above  the  line  in  this  connection  will  at 
once  suggest  shipt. 

(17)  Note  the  contraction  for  regulat(ed) ;  also,  the  outline  for  used,  written  oosd.  Etc. 
is  abbreviated  as  in  longhand. 

(18)  War  Department,  tests,  and  in  action,  point  unmistakably  to  the  meaning  of  g 
placed  low,  which  can  only  be  guns. 

(19)  Ic  in  electric  being  an  ending,  it  may  be  omitted  when  the  ending  ity  is  added. 

(20)  Observe  the  initial  short  ec  stroke  for  in  in  the  phrase  in-short.  In  revolution,  rv  is 
blended  ;  the  r  should  be  carefully  shown,  however,  and  the  rest  of  the  v  should  be  joined 
almost  at  an  angle,  so  that  it  ends  well  to  the  left.  Even  if  this  outline  were  traced  care- 
lessly, it  could  read  only  regolution,  which  word  has  no  meaning.  U is  replaced  by  "oo"  in 
utilization,  and  "  e"  takes  the  place  of  the  second  /. 

(21)  Note  the  common  phrase  rohile-this-may-be.  Future  is  practically  a  monosyllable, 
since  no  syllable  is  added  iofuch  where  ch  ends  with  the  r  stroke  ;  we  can,  therefore,  contract 
it  finally,  crossing  its  initial  stroke  with  the  preceding  word  (if  possible),  as  shown  in  that- 
the-future.     See  again  how  clearly  the  blending  rv  is,  shown  in  marvelous;  this  blending 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  123 


should  be  done  very  carefully,  so  as  not  to  conflict  with  rg.    Observe  the  ending  ities  in 
possibilities. 

New  York,  September  5,  1898. 
(22)  Messrs.  Palmer,  McCarthy  &  Co., 
Worcester,  Mass, 

Gentlemen  : — 

(23)  We-beg-(to)-acknowledge  receipt-(of )-your-favor  (of)  recent-date,  and  shall 
promptly  comply-with-your  request,  although  we-doubt  whether-the  underwriters  would 
accept  such  a  risk,  as-they  (have)  been  exceedingly  particular  for-some-time-past.  (24)  But 
we-shall-do-all  in-our  pow-er  to-arrange  this-matter  to-your  satisfaction. 

(25)  As-to-your-other  inquiry,  we-beg-(to)-state  tliat-tlie  duty  on-this-class  (of)  goods  is 

34  per  cent,  ad  valorem^  according  (to  the)  new-tariff.     (26)  We-shall-be-pleased  to-take- 

charge  of-the-consignment  as-soon-(as)-the  steamer  arrives.     (27)   According  (to)   reports 

received  from-the  Maritime  Exchange,  she-is-expected  toward-the  latter-part  (of  the)  w-eek. 

(28)  We-shall  advise-you-by  wire  of-her  arrival.     (29)  The  inspector  promised  to-accommo- 

date-us,  we-think  we-can-get-the  shipment  through  (the)  Custom-House  in-a  week-or-so, 

and  shall  then  forward  it  by  fast  freight. 

Yours  truly, 

Hayward  Simpson  &  Co. 

Annotations. — (22)  See  how  well  the  medium  str  (placed  low)  can  be  used  in  Worcester. 

(23)  In  such  familiar  phrases  as  we-beg-{to)-acknowledge,  no  particular  attention  need  be 
paid  to  the  initial  at/  stroke  in  the  syllable  «c^•.— Observe  how  well  t  of  recent  and  d  of  date 
flow  into  each  other.  See  how  the  is  added  to  r  in  whether-the\  if  we  should  blend  th  on 
the  right  side  of  ?•,  the  latter  would  lose  its  identity.  One  r  is  omitted  from  underwriters. 
Look  at  the  brief  phrase  for-some-time-past;  the  phrase  for-some-time  is  familiar,  and  past 
(contracted  to  p«)  is  added,  p  (shaded)  being  blended  with  the  m. 

(24)  Note  the  phrase  ive-shall-do-all,  and  see  how  safe  the  flnal  contraction  is  in  the 
phrase  in-our  our,  which  will  at  once  be  read  for  in  our  power. 

(25)  See  how  large  t  and  medium  t  are  joined  in  the  phrase  ive-beg-{to)-state.  Note  also 
the  phrase  on-this-class,  the  latter  word  being  contracted.  D  and  v  are  blended  in  ad- 
valorem;  the  phrase  is  abbreviated  as  in  longhand  ad  val.  Since  to  is  always  required  after 
according,  it  may  be  omitted. 

(26)  In  the  frequent  phrase  to-take-charge,  the  last  word  (contracted  initially)  is  joined 
to  take.    The  vowel-stroke  after  ch  shows  that  it  is  an  initial  contraction. 

(27)  It  is  omitted  from  the  word  maritime.  The  ay  stroke  in  she-is-expected  is  treated  in 
the  same  manner  as  in  the  phrase  we-beg-{to)-acknowledge.  Note  the  phrase  ta<fer-par</ 
instead  of  latter,  we  write  simply  lat,  which  is  joined  with  the  final  contraction  oi  part. 

(28)  See  how  nieelj'  you.  is  shown  by  crossing  in  advise-you-hy. 

(29)  Observe  the  contraction  fast  freight.    Note  how  n  is  connected  with  s  in  Simpson. 

Writing  Exercise. 
\_Bxtract  from  a  Speech  of  President  McKinley  cd  the  Atlanta  Peace  Jubilee, 

November,  1898.'] 

"  Sectional  hues  no-longer  mar  the  *map  (of  the)  United-States^ ;  sectional  feeling*  no- 
longer  *holds  *back  the  love  we-*bear  one-another.  Fraternity^  is-the  national  anthem, 
sung  by  a  chorus  (of)  45  *States  and  our  Territories^*  at-*home  and  beyond  the  seas.  The 
Union*  is  once-more-the  common  altar  of-our  love  and  loyalty^  our  devotion^  and  sacrifice'. 

The  *old  *flag  waves  again  over  us  in  peace  with  new  glories  which  your  sons  and  ours 
have  this  year*  ad(ded)  to  its  sacred  folds.  W^hat-*cause  we-have  for  rejoicing*  *saddened 
only  by-the-*fact  that  so-many  of-our  *brave  men  fell  on-the  field*  or  sicken(ed)  and  di(ed) 
from  *hardship  and  expo(sure),  and  others  returned  bring(ing)  *wounds*  and  disease  from- 
whieh-they-will  long  suffer.^ 

The  memory  of-the  dead  will-be  a  precious  legacy,  and-the  disabl(od)  will-be-the  nation's 
care.  A  nation  w  hich-cares  for  its  disabled  soldiers* •"  as  we-have-always-done  will  never  lack 
future  *defenders.  The  national  cemeteries  for-those-who  *fell  in  battle  are  proof"  that-the- 
dead  are  car(ed)  for,  and-the  *living  have-our  love.  What  an  army  of  silent  sentinals  we- 
have  ;  and  with-wiiat  loving  care  their  graves  are  kept.  P^very  soldier's  *grave  *made  during 
our  unfortunate  Civil'^  War  is-a  tribute'*  to  American  valor. 


124  GEAPHIC   SHORTHAND. 


And  while,  when-those  *graves  were  *made,  we  differed'*  *widely  about-the-future*  of- 
this  Government,  these  diflfer(ences)  were  long  ago  settl(ed)  by-the  arbitrament'^  of  arms, 
and-the  time  has  now  *come  in-the  evolution'^  of  sentiment  and  feeling*  under-the  provi- 
dence of  God,  when,  in-the-spirit  of  fraternity',  we-should-share  with-you  in-the-eare  of-the 
graves  of-the  Confederate"  soldiers." 

Anxotatioxs.— ^  Shorten  U.S.  ^  Here  the  "  er"  sound  may  be  substituted  for  the  "  ur" 
sound.  ^  The  medial  syllable  it  is  omitted  in  territories.  *  Substitute  "  oo"  for  u  in  Union. 
^  Omit  t  in  loycdtu,  in  accordance  with  rule  given  in  Lesson  10.  ^  O  in  devotion  is  shown  by 
means  of  a  loop.  '  Omit  if  in  sacrifice.  *  Bring  out  well  the  long  "oo"  sound  by  means  of 
the  long  vowel-stroke.  *  Drop  r.  ^^  The  word  soldier  presents  a  case  which  occasionally 
confronts  the  writer  of  any  shorthand  system.  If  this  word  is  written  in  full,  it  will  be 
found  a  rather  lengthy  outline  ;  and  we  therefore  use  its  Reporting  Style  contraction. 
Soldier,  being  a  word  of  the  same  class  as  preacher  and  future,  so  far  as  pronunciation  and 
accent  are  concerned,  we  contract  it  finally  by  writing  the  last  syllable  (jr)  above  the  line, 
thus  showing  that  this  is  the  end  of  the  word.  "The  brave  jer  was  wounded  twice"  is 
perfectly  plain,  when  we  liuow  that  ier  is  the  end  of  the  word.  This  word  was  chosen  for 
the  purpose  of  showing  hoAv  shorthand  deals  with  cases  of  such  long  words.  ^'  Proof  is 
easily  written  in  full,  by  blending  p,  r,  and  u.  ^"^  In  analogy  to  dear,  sv  blended  may  be 
lengthened  above  the  line.  "  Cross  tr  with  medium  t  in  high  position.  "  Blend  df,  extend- 
ing the  d  loop  above  the  line.  ^^A  is  almost  silent  in  arbitrament.  '^  O  in  evolution  is 
slighted  by  the  voice,  and  therefore  need  not  be  written.  "  Blend  d  and  r  in  Confederate, 
omitting  the  e  between  these  letters. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  125 


Lesson  No.  ig. 


Reading  Exercise. 
News  Gathering  in  War  Time. 

(1)  The  man  who  hands  his  penny  to-the  news  boy,  and  then  leisurely  glances  over-the 
news  gathered  from-all-over-the  world,  has  scarcely  an  idea  what  costly  things  these  news 
items  are  to-the-great  paper  that  gets  them  at  first-hand.  (2)  The  latter  point  has  been  well 
illustrated  by  the  experience  of  these  papers  during-the  Spanish-American  troubles.  (3) 
When-the  Maine  was  blowu-up  in  Havana,  a  New  York  paper  at-once  telegraphed  instruc- 
tions to  its  representatives  in  Cuba  and-in  Key  West,  to-engage  divers  to-examine-the  wreck. 
(4)  A  thousand  dollars  had-been-spent  by-the-time-the  divers  were  brought  to-the  spot, 
ready  to-go-down  into-the  water ;  the  government  would-not  allow  the  examination,  how- 
ever, and-the  expedition  was  abandoned,  [o)  After-the  catastrophe  reporters  rushed  into- 
the-city,  where-the  Spanish  censor  saw  to  it  that-their  task  was-not-so  easy  ;  they-were  never 
sure  that-the  news  which-they-had  obtained  with  so-much  trouble  would  reach  their  papers. 
(6)  Within-(a)-week  after  that  eventful  day  it-was-almost-impossible  to-get  any  telegraphic 
news  at-all  from  Havana  owing  to  the  strictness  (of  the)  censor.  (7)  Then-the  great  journals 
hired  swift  little  boats  and  tugs,  which-in-some-cases  cost  as-much  (as)  $9,000  a  month  ;  in 
addition  to-this  the  papers  had  to-defray-the  running  expenses,  and  had  to  iusure-the  boats 
against-the  extra  risk.  (8)  They-also  had  to  pay  heavy  fees  for-the  pilot,  customs,  and 
light-house  service  at  every  port  where-they  stopped.  (9)  No  Bill  (of)  Lading  was  necessary 
for-their  cargo  ;  for  it  cousistea  only  of  a  little  package  of  "  Copy,"  which  a  man  could  easily 
put  in-his  vest  pocket,  and  which-was  telegraphed  to-the  editor.  (10)  As-the-rate  from  Key 
West  to  New- York  is  five  cents  a  word,  it-will-be-seen  that-an  account  of  2000  words  was  quite 
an  expensive  affair  ;  dispatches  sent  from  Cuba  were  still  more  expensive.  (11)  Although- 
the  censor  was  very  severe,  he-was-no-match-for-the  shrewd  American  news  gatherer,  and 
uuwittingly  allowed  telegrams  to  pass,  which,  if-their  true  contents  bad-been  known  to-him, 
would  certainly  have  caused  trouble  for-the  sender.  (12)  For-example,  the  request  of  a 
reporter  who  cables  to-his  editor,  "  Send-me  ?500  at  once,  wire  instructions,"  sounds  very 
harmless  to-the  officer,  who-is-glad  to-see  American  money  come  into-the  country.  (13)  In 
New- York,  however,  the  message  reads  something  quite  difTerent.  (14)  According  to-the 
code  arranged  before-hand  for-the-occasion,  it-means:  "  Battle  off  St.  Thomas,  Vizcaya 
sunk."  (15)  If-the  telegram  had  called  for  $600,  it-would-(have)  announced-the  same  battle, 
but-the  sinking  (of  a)  different  ship.  (16)  If,  instead  (of)  "  wire"  the  word  "  cable"  (instruc- 
tions) had-been  used,  it  would  indicate  that-the  battle  occurred  off-the  Haytian  coast,  etc. 
(17)  The  Spanish-American  War  has  again  shown  that-the  war  correspondent  is-not  only 
ready  to-endure  hardships,  but  to  face  danger  as-well,  and  todo  his-share  in  relieving-the 
sufferings  of-the  wounded. 

(18)  Speaking  of-the  deeds  of- these  heroes  (of  the)  Press,  reminds-me  (of)  a  feat  which- 
was-made-possible  only  bythe  quick  wit  of-the  reporter  and  by-the  liberal  management 
of-his  paper.  (19)  When-in-the  Franco-German  War  at  Sedan,  the  French  emperor  and  his 
army  had  capitulated,  the  correspondent  of  a  great  New  York  paper  luirried  to-the  nearest 
telegraph  station,  to-wire-the  news  home.  (20)  While-he-was  giving  his  dispatch  to-the 
operator,  he-saw-the  representative  of  a  rival  paper  enter,  who-was  also  very  anxious  to-get- 
the  important  news  across-the  ocean.  (21)  But-the  first  correspondent  was  determined 
that-his  paper  should-have-the  news  before  any  other  could-get  them.  (22)  Consequently, 
when  he-was-through  with-his  account  (of  the)  surrender,  he  immediately  started  another 
dispatch,  explaining-the  situation,  and  then  commenced  to  dictate  as-slowly  (as)-he-could 
a-few  chapter(s)  from  his  pocket  guide,  so-as-to  prevent  his  rival  from-using-the  wire,  while 
his  paper  could  get  out  the  news  by-means  (of  an)  "extra." 


126  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Annotations.— Notice  the  brief  outline  for  gathering,  wliere  e  (between  th  and  r)  is 
omitted. 

(1)  Wlien  it  occurs  the  second  time,  gathered  may  be  contracted  to  g  shaded  ;  for,  since 
the  ending  er  may  be  dropped,  tlae  word  becomes  a  monosyllable.  Notice  also  the  unaccented 
syllable  we  omitted  in  leisurely.  See  how  well  the  first  r  is  brought  out  in  the  group  from- 
all-over-the.  In  scarcely,  the  ending  ly  is  added  to  the  initial  contraction  ska.  Note  the 
phrasing  of  the  final  contraction  oi  first  with  the  initial  contraction  of  hand. 

(2)  Note  the  ence  stroke  placed  high  and  shaded  in  experience,  indicating  clearly  the 
sound  ience. 

(3)  Since  hloivn  and  up  belong  together  in  sense,  they  may  be  phrased.  As  all  shortening 
devices  are  justified  in  shorthand,  N.  Y.  crossed,  reading  actually  iVew- F.,  represents  the 
name  of  the  city.  See  how  clearly  the  initial  vowel-sound  is  shown  in  to-engage  and  to- 
examine. 

(4)  S}^  (for  spent)  shows  how  safe  these  contractions  are  ;  the  outline  can  hardly  be  taken 
for  speak  in  this  connection.  The  final  contraction  for  spot  (where  o  has  the  "a"  sound) 
represents  the  whole  word  with  tlie  exception  of  initial  sp.  Observe  r  and  m  blended  in 
government. 

(5)  Observe  the  complete  outline  for  catastrojjhe,  where  o  is  obscure  and  is,  therefore, 
replaced  by  e.     Observe  r  and  th  blended  in  where-the. 

(6)  In  within-a-week  the  article  is  omitted.  The  final  contraction  is  used  for  day.  Note 
the  group  it-ivas-almost-im2)ossihle.  It  is  not  advisable  to  drop  the  ing  from  owing,  as  stated 
in  a  previous  lesson. 

(7)  Observe  the  group  which-in-some-cases. 

(8)  Obscure  o  is  replaced  by  "e"  in  j^Hot.  The  unaccented  last  syllable  is  droi)ped  from 
service  without  impairing  the  legibility  of  the  outline. 

(9)  Bill  of  Lading  is  another  of  those  compound  words  which  may  be  represented  by 
the  first  syllable  of  the  first  word  and  the  last  syllable  of  the  last.  Note  v,  s.  and  t  blended 
in  vest;  the  vowel  must  be  read  between  v  and  ,sf,  since  no  word  can  start  with  the  com- 
bination vs. 

(10)  Expensive  reads  actually  "exp-iv;"  an  expiv  affair  will  hardly  read  anything  but 
"  expensive  affair."  See  how  s  is  added  to  the  singular  form  dispatch,  and  how  sent  is  safely 
contracted  initially. 

(11)  Note  the  convenient  blending  of  ch  and  /  in  the  group  he-ivas-no-match-for-the, 
where  match  is  written  in  full  to  better  advantage  than  if  it  were  contracted.  The  same 
applies  to  the  word  gatherer.    The  syllable  ing  is  omitted  from  unwittingly. 

(12)  The  group  for-ex{ample). 

(14)  In  ^S'^  Thomas,  the  abbreviation  St.  is  also  used  in  shorthand.  The  Spanish  pro- 
nunciation of  z  is  th,  which  explains  the  presence  of  this  sign  in  Vizcaya. 

(16)  Note  the  convenient  final  contraction  for  coast. 

(17)  Look  at  the  outline  for  corresp)ondent,  derived  from  correspond.  Since  the  bulk 
of  the  word  is  clearly  indicated  by  writing  coi-resp.,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  show  the 
vowel-sound  of  sx>ond  ;  and  as  the  context  here  clearly  implies  the  word  loar  corresi^ondent 
the  ending  ent  may  also  be  omitted,  leaving  ivar  corresp.  See  how  oo  is  substituted  for  u  in 
the  final  contraction  for  endure.  Observe  the  ending  ps  (for  ships)  in  hardships,  where 
har'd  is  contracted.     See  also  how  loounded  is  contracted  initiallj\ 

(18)  Observe  s  added  to  the  contraction  for  deed.  Note  the  frequent  group  i-eminds-me, 
actually  written  remi-me.  Look  also  carefully  at  the  group  ivhieh-ivas-made-p>ossihle.  See 
how  quick  and  tvit  are  contracted  finally  ;  and  how  liberal  (libral)  is  written  in  full. 

(19)  The  short  u  in  capitidated  is  replaced  by  e.  To-ire-the  news  is  unmistakably  "to- 
wire-the-news.' ' 

(21)  Determ.  will  be  safe  for  determined,  the  more  so  as  it  is  preceded  by  was.  Note 
other,  where  low  position  is  indicated  by  placing  it  under  the  ayiy  stroke. 

(22)  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  add  any  other  syllable  to  the  outline  conseq.  Note  the 
contraction  get  oid,  where  the  oid  dot  stands  under  the  g,  which  represents  the  word  get 
in  full  with  the  exception  of  final  t.  See  how  conveniently  ptr  blended  can  be  used  ir 
chapters,  where  s  is  omitted. 


Lesson  19. 


TxS' 


^^. 


p 


? 


(C 


9/ 


•^^  Z-/ 


Q^ 


/ 


A^ 


^ 


^ 


^'-/'-'^^'^^^^^ 


^.  (L  ^^  —-.1^  ^  :>d^  -f^  ^/^  ^  ^'^i^ 


y 


^ 


d' 


^ 


^9^y 


Pi- 


^A    .^^ 


/5 


7   ^  -^ 


^. 


'-^ 


-  V 


C- 


v-^ 


r 


(:: 


/  ^  "^-^  ^^^^   V*^-.   ^^  ^-  "^^ 


7^ 


"^/// V  ^  ^^^  = 


^~-.     -)    rU     ^1^  'V^"^^,^^     ^ 


^ 


>»^ 


'7 


/3 


^^ 


^^ — ^ 


^-^ 


9^ 


^ 


^^^ 


c^ 


a.  I 


/ 


^^ 


^^     ^-^    A^ 


y^- — 0 
o     "Z"^         O. — 


-     ^^ 


/ 


-^   zf-" 


"^///-V^ 


128  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Writing  Exercises. 
Origin  of-the  United  States  Navy. 
(The  figures  are  to  be  written  with  tlie  aid  of  the  shortening  devices.) 
Among-some  papers  found*  some-time-ago  in-an  old  mansion  in  Delaware  was  a  sheet* 
with-the  following  account : 

At  a  caucus  in  1794,  consist(ing)  of  Izard,  Morris,  and  Ellsworth  of-the  Senate,  Ames 
Sedgwick,  Smith,  Dayton,  and  others  of-the  Representatives,  and  of  Secretaries  Hamilton 
and  Knox,  to-*form  a  plan  for-a  national  navy,  Smith  *began-the  figuring  as  secretary 
of-the  *meeting.  Hamilton  then  took*-the  pen,  and  instead  (of)  minuting  the  *proceedings, 
he  amused-himself  by-mak(ing)  a  variety  of  flourishes  duriug-the  discussion. 

In-consequence  of-the  plan  adopt(ed)  at  this  *meeting,  a  *bill  was  *reported  for  *build- 
ing  six  frigates,  which  ■formed  the  *foundation  of-the  American  navy. 

The  figuring!  at-the  *top*  of-the  page  consists  of  five  lines,  and  is  as  follows  : 


First*  cost*  of  a  Frigate,  44  guns,  of  1300  tuns  and  provision 

for  6  months $150,000 

350  men 51,000 

Provisions  for  6  months 11,000 

Total 212,000 

Then  follows  an  estimate  of  the  annual  cost  of  such  a  vessel. 

Contract. 

This  Agreement*,  made  this  twenty-fifth  day*  (of)  January,  1899,  by  and  between 
the  John  F.  Collins  Co.,  of  Cliicago,  111.,  and  F.  D.  Camp,  of  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  witnesseth  : 

I.  Party  of  the  first  part^  agrees  to-eraploy  party  of  the  second  part*  in-the  capacity 
(of)  *General-*Manager,  for-the  territorj^  *comprising  Pennsylvania,*  New  York,  New 
Jersey,  Delaware,  and-the  District  of  Columbia. 

II.  Party  of  the  second  part  shall  open  an  office  in-the-city  of  Philadelphia,  to  be 
known  as-the  Eastern  Office  of  the  John  F.  Collins  Co. 

III.  The  *expense  of  opening  said  office  and  of  *conducting  it  shall-be-*borne  by  party 
of  the  first  part.  But  it-is  *expressly  under(stood)  that  party  of  the  second  part  shall-have- 
no  power  or  authority  to  *contract  debts  or  to-*make  contracts  *involving  a  *sum  in  excess 
of  §50,  without-having  first*  obtained  the  writ(ten)  *consent  (of  the)  party  of  the  first  i^art. 

IV.  *Perfect  and  complete*  records  and  books  (of)  account  shall-be-*kept®  at,  and 
*concerning  the  business  of  the  said  Eastern  Office ;  which  books  and  records  shall  at-all- 
times  be-open'  to-the  *inspection  (of  the)  party  of  the  first  part  or  its-duly^  *appointed  and 
authorized  *representative.  It-is-also  agreed  that-a  complete*  *stateraent  of  tlie  affairs  of 
said  office  shall-be  furnished  once  a  *mouth  to  party  of  the  first  part ;  and  that-a  *Cash 
*Statement  shall  be  furnished  not-*less-than  once  a  week*  to  party  of  the  first  part. 

V.  Party  of  the  second  part  shall-have-the  power*  to-*engage  salesmen  and  such  other 
help  as  he-may  *find  necessary  in-his  judgment*  to  *conduct  the  business  properly. 

VI.  Party  of  the  second  part  also  agrees  to-devote-his-entire-time  and  attention  to- 
said  business  in-the  inter(est)  of  party  of  the  first  part. 

VII.  Party  of  the  second  part  also  agrees  not  to-engage  in-the  same-line  (of)  business 
in-the  territory  above  mentioned  within  three  years*  after-the  expiration^  of-this  *contract. 

VIII.  In  consideration  of-his  serv(ices),  party  of  the  first  part  agrees  to  pay  to  party 
of  the  second  part  a  salary  of  $3000  per  year,  payable  in  *monthly  installments  of  $250. 

IX.  If  at  the  expiration  (of  the)  first*  year*,  the  business  *conducted  by-the  party 
of  the  second  part  shall  have  proved*  unprofitable,  this  *contract  shall  terminate.  If-the 
business  of  the  said  Eastern  Office  shall-have  proved  profitable,  this  contract  shall  remain 
in  *foree,  unless  dissolved  by  either  party,  notice  to-that-*effect  to  be  *given  in  writing  thirty 
days  prior  to-the  date  (of)  expiration. 

In  witness  whereof, i°  we  have  hereunto"  *set  our  hands  and  seals*  the  day*  and  year* 
first*  above  written.* 

Witness. 

(Seal) 

(Seal) 


GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND.  129 


Annotations.— 'i^;"£^?<ri»y/  is  written  figring.  '^Top  can  be  uicely  contracted  initially, 
placing  (large)  t  high  and  shading  it.  This  outline  offers  a  good  illustration  of  the  nice 
distinctions  made  possible  by  the  large  and  the  medium  t.  If  the  medium  t  were  shaded 
above  the  line,  we  should  know  that  it  must  be  the  end  of  the  word,  since  it  cannot  be 
used  initially  ;  and  as  large  t  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  traced  upward,  we  know  that  it  cannot 
be  shaded.  It  is  unnecessary,  therefore,  to  indicate  by  means  of  the  vowel-stroke  that  this 
is  the  initial  part  of  a  word.  Final  contraction  here  would  be  much  less  convenient ;  for 
p  (in  addition  to  being  shaded  and  in  high  position)  would  have  to  be  provided  with  an 
initial  vowel-stroke,  to  show  that  the  vowel-sound  precedes  it. 

'  The  commercial  stenographer  is  occasionally  required  to  write  out  contracts,  in  which 
the  vocabulary  is  usually  very  limited  ;  so  that,  if  the  stenographer  be  familiar  with  the 
matter,  the  outlines  may  be  shortened  considerably.  Two  stereotyped  phrases  in  these 
commercial  and  legal  forms  are  the  words  party  of  the  first  part,  and  party  of  the  second 
part.*  Although  the  Reporting  Style  for  these  phrases  is  quite  brief,  it  is  not  necessary 
to  use  it,  since  the  abbreviations  jj  1  and  2^  ^  may  be  employed,  writing  the  letter  p  in 
shorthand.  *As  said  before,  the  usual  abbreviations  (in  shorthand  cliaracters)  are  used 
for  names  of  states,  territories,  etc.     Compare  the  outlines  for  New  York. 

^Kc'AW  hardly  be  taken  for  anything  but  kept  in  this  connection.  ''B  and  0  may  be 
joined,  but  should  not  be  blended.  ^D  is  omitted  from  duly,  the  vowel-stroke  being  crossed 
with  t  (of  its).  ^Expiration  may  be  shortened  to  the  unmistakable  outline  expration.  '"Here 
where  and  0  must  not  be  blended,  as  of  would  thereby  lose  its  identity  ;  the  two  outlines 
may  be  joined,  however.  "We  have  seen  that  in  compounds  of  here,  such  as  heretofore, 
h  placed  high  is  used  for  here  ;  the  same  rule  applies  in  hereunto. 


130  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND. 


Lesson  No.  20. 


The  following  remarks,  while  offering 

Practical  Suggestions, 
form  at  the  same  time  a  writing  exercise. 

Graphic  Shorthand,  as  presented  in-the  preceding  pages,  is  now  brief  enough  for-the 
*requirements  of-the  Commercial^  or  Literary''  Amanuensis.  Those-who  *wish  to  fit-them- 
selves  for  verbatim  *reporting  are  referred  to-the  Reporting  Style,  which-will  supply-  simple 
and  logical  rules  for  *coutracting  the  outlines  (or-aH  words*,  so-that-they  will-be-able  to- 
follow  faithfully  and  rapidly  the  voice  of  the  orator. 

Having  naaster(ed)  the  principles  set  forth  in-this  book,  you  should  now  give  earnest 

attention  to 

Speed  Practice. 

A  *good  test  as-to-whether-3'ou-are  sufficiently  familiar  with  *shorthaud^  for-this  pur- 
pose, is  your  ability  to  write  without  hesitation*  the  outline  for-any  word*  f  you-may  *hear, 
and  to  phrase  naturally, — that  is,  you-must-be-able-to-*decide  readily  whether-or-uot-it-is 
advisable  to  phrase  certain  groups  of  words.*  These  conditions  are  absolutely^  essential, 
if  speed*  practice  is  to-have-the  desired  *results.  If-you-have-not-yet  *reached  this  stage, 
confine  your  efforts  to  writing  clear  and  neat  outlines. 

As-to  practice  material,  shorthand  is-an  exception  to-the  gene(ral)  rule,  in-as-much  as 
it  *admits  of  serv(ing)  two  masters  at-a  time ;  while  writing  for  speed,*  you-can  at-the- 
same-time  use  such  topics  as-are  of  inter(est)  to-j^ou,  or  such  as-are  of  practical  value  to-you 
in-your  career.  If-you-are  a  student  (of)  law,  legal  books  or  articles  are  of-most  service 
to-you  ;  if-you-are  fitting-yourself  for-the  railroad  service,  you-should  use  articles  or  books 
pertain(ing)  to  it;  if-you  intend  to-enter  business  life,  acquaint*-yourself  with  commercial 
*correspondence,  and-in  particular  with-the  vocabulary  of  any  special  line  (of)  business 
which-you-may-have  in-view.  The  larger  your  vocabularj',  the  better  your  *chance  of 
*becoming  an  efflc(ient)  stenographer,  for-you-cannot-do  *good  *work  if  you-meet  in  your 
dictation  many  words*  which-you-never  heard*  before.  A  *good  method  for  broaden(ing) 
your  vocabulary  is  *afforded  by-the  editorial  page  of  a  high-class  newspaper,  which  touches* 
upon  all  subjects  of  gene(ral)  inter(est). 

Having  selected  your  material,  write  at  first  slowly  from-the  text ;  then  copy  the  article 
several-times,  each-time  slightly  increasing  your  speed.  See  that-the  *outlines  are  as  briefs 
as  you-can-make-them,  without  los(ing)  in  legibility,  and  see  that-you-have-*made  good  use 
of  phrasing.  Again  we-say,  unless-the  *outlines  are  legible,  speed*  is  of  no  avail.  Having 
*assured-yourself  that-3'ou-have  written*  the  article  correct(ly),  have  it  dictated  to-you  at 
such  a  rate*  (of)  *speed  that-you-will  just  be-able  to-foUow.  In-other  words*,  the  dictator 
sliould-not  allow-you-time  enough  to-think  for-*more-than  a  fraction  of  a  second  before 
tracing  the  *outlines  of  the  words*  you  heard.*  This  *rate  may  vary:  it-may -be  only  60 1 
words*  (or  even  less)  at-the  start,  and  should  gra(d)ually  *increase.  The  minimum  speed* 
for  ac(t)ual  office  *\vork  is  75  words*  ;  but-you-should  *obtain  a  speed*  of  at-*least  100  words* 
(a)  minute,  and  should  *keep  on  practising  until-you-can-take  110  words.  If-you  *\vish 
to-go  beyond  that,  you-should  studj'  the  *complete  *Reporting  Style*  of-the  system.  When- 
the  dictation  is  finished,  do-not  *read  your  notes  at-once,  for-your  memory  would  assist-j'ou 
too-much,  so-that-the  trial*  would-not-be  a  true  test  of-the  legibility  of-your  notes.  *Let- 
them  "dry"  for  a- few-days,  and  then  see  if- you-can  *read  them.  If-you-*come  across  an 
*outline  which-isnot  intelligible  to-you  at-the-first*  glance,  look  at  it  closelj'  for  a-few 
seconds  ;  then  *read  on.  The  *context  will  probably  *give-you  a  clue  to-the  meaning  of-the 
doubtful  word*.  It-is  probable  that  in-the  rush  *caused  by-your  efforts  to-*keep  abreast  of 
the  dictator,  you-have-made  some  outlines  care(less)ly, — possibly  you-have-not-contracted 

+  This  applies  also  to  the  logograms,  which  should  be  thoroughly  mastered  before  speed  practice  begins. 
X  The  rate  refers  to  the  number  of  words  written  in  one  minute. 


GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND.  131 


them  as-much  (as)  you-would  had-you  written  them  at  leisure.  Such  points  should-be 
carefully'  noted  and  corrected.  Tlien  write-the  same  article  over  again  several-times,  being 
careful  to-avoid*-tlie  *mistakes  *made  at-tlie  first*  dictation  test.  Then  have-the'-raatter 
dictated  to-you  several-times,  eacli-time  at-a  speed*  slight(ly)  *increased,  provided  tliat- 
you-cau  *lieep-up  witli-tlie  speaker.  If-your  speed*  is  80  words*  (a)  minute,  for-example,  it- 
would-be  detrimental  to-your  practice  to-follow  a  speaker  who  utters  100  words*  a  minute. 
Tlie  expression  "words*  a  minute*"  refers  only  to  the  average  of  a  test  extending  over  at 
least  ten  minutes  ;  if-you-can  write  1120  words*  in  ten  minutes,  your  speed*  is  112,  but 
unless  you-can  sustain  your  speed*  for  at-least  *lialf  an  hour,  you-cannot-do  any  practical 
*work  at-tluit-*rate.  Witli  dilig(ent)  ])ractice,  however,  it-will-not-take*-you  long  until- 
you-can  maintain  your  speed*  for-oue  hour  or  even  longer. 

By  follow(ing)-tlie  above  suggestions,  you-will-be-able  to-increase  your  speed*  consider- 
{abl)y  when  writing  familiar  *matter.  You-should  then  *proceed  to  practice  writing  new- 
matter.  Have-some-one  dictate  to-you  something  which-j'ou-have-never  read  before.  This 
exercise  sliould  also  be  left  to  "  dry"  for  a-few  days,  and  should  then  be  read  with  careful 
*atteution  to-tlie  *mistakes ;  after-tliese  (have)  been  corrected  and  not(ed),  have-(tlie)-same- 
matter  dictated  to-you-again,  *applying  to  it  the  usual*  reading  test,  as  *suggested  in-tlie 
foregoing  paragraphs.'  You-will*find  tl)at,  undex'-this  training,  your  speed*  on  uew-*niatter 
will  gra(d)ually  become  almost  as-great  as  that  on  familiar  *matter. 

When  a  long  word*  occurs  more  tlian  once,  it-may-be  *shorteued  consider(abl)y  *more- 
than  at  first.  This  *applies  also  to  proper  names,  which-may-be  represented  bj'-the  initials 
alone,  which  should  be  underlined.  In-a  political  address,  for  example,  the  M'ords  Demo- 
cratic  Pariy  and  Eepublioan  Party  might  be  represented  conveniently  and  safely  by  D.  P. 
and  R.  P.  *respectively,  both  groups  being  underlined  ;  again,  in-a  letter  on  railroad  matters, 
when-the  word*  locomotive  occurs  frequently,  it-maj'-be  *represented  (after  its  first  occur- 
rence) by  V  shaded  at  the  *top  and  *standing  above-the  line,  the  outline  actually  reading 
ive,  the  position  above-the  line  indicating  that  it  is  the  end  of  a  word*.  The  abbreviation 
can  *hardly  be  taken*  for  anything  else  in-this  letter  ;  aud-tlie  safe(t)y  with-which  it-can-be 
used  will-be  *increased  by-the  *context.  The  same  abbreviation  may  *stand  for  Representa- 
tive in-a  political  letter.  Each  line  of  *work  will  *admit  of  abbreviations  peculiar  to  itself, 
and  as-said-before,  the  extent  to  which  ablireviation  may-be  applied,  *depends  entirely'  upon 
the  familiarity  of-the  stenographer  with-the  subject  of  his  notes. 

Another  help,  which-will  assist-you  in-the  acquirement*  of  *good  stenographic  *forms, 
is-the  reading^"  of  stenographic  literature".  It-is  surprising  how-much  influence  sucli 
reading  practice  (has)  in-the  *acquirement  of  speed*.  The  *mind  unconsciously  *absorbs 
correct  outlines,  which-will  at-once  occur  to-the  writer,  when-his'^  pen  is  trying  to  follow 
the  speaker. 

Since  all  super(fluous)  strokes*  and  flourishes  should-be  *omitted  in  shorthand,  it-is 
*hardly  necessary  to-mention  that-all  useless  movements  of-the  hand  should  also  be  elimi- 
nated. The  hand — that  is,  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  (the  rest  of  the  hand  should  never 
touch  the  paper)— should-not  *leave  the  paper  while  writing ;  and  in  passing  from-one 
outline  to-another  the  pen-or-pencil  should-be  lifted  only  enough  to-*avoid  making  any 
strokes*  on-tlie  paper.  Wlien  leaves  are  to  be  turned  over,  this  should-be  done  entirely  by- 
the  left  hand,  while  the  right  hand  is  writing. 

In-your  efforts  to  write  rapidly  the  hand  will-be  tempted*  to-*glide  rapidly  as-well,  and 
you-may  fall*  into-the  habit  of  *spreadiug  your  outlines  unnecessarily, — tliat-is,  you-may 
put*  only  five  words*  on  a  line  wliich  has  space  enough  for  eight.  It-is  obvious  that  for 
practical  reasons  the  space  between  the  different  outlines  should-not-be  too-large,  so-that  not 
much  time  is  wasted  in  moving  the  pen  from-one  to-the  other.  Neither  should-you  fall* 
into-the  opposite  extreme*,  and  *crowd  your  outlines  too-*close  together,  thus  impairing  the 
legibility  of  your  writing.  Just  enough  pressure  should-be  maintained  upon-the  pen-or- 
pencil  to-exert  complete*  control  over  it ;  additional  pressure  is  so-much  muscular  effort 
wasted,  and  will  soon  tire-you  out. 

Annotations. — '  Write  as  shown  in  Lesson  18.  '  Suppress  c,  and  omit  ar.  '  Both  short 
and  hand  should  be  contracted  initially  and  then  phrased.  *  Blend  h  and  s.  *  The  ah  dot  is 
sufficient  here.  ^  Shade/  at  the  top.  'Blend  h  and  th.  '^  Write  oozhl.  ^  Or  shaded  will 
stand  for  c/raph.  '"There  is  hardly  anything  gained  in  contracting  I'eading.  "  Suppress  e. 
'^  The  outline  for  his  may  remain  on  the  line. 


INDEX. 


Alphabet 

a  (AS  IN  bay),  called  ay 

STROKE 

a  (as  in  man) 

a  (AS  IN  mav) 

aw  (AS  IN  law) 

a  (SIGN,  INITIALLY  AND 
FINALLY) 

Affixes 

Basic  Syllable  .   .   .   . 

Blended  Letters  .   .   . 

Cardinal  Numbers  .   . 

Closed  Monosyllables 

Coalescent  Vowels 
{trial,  ideal,  etc.)  .    .    . 

colloquials   

Compound  Words    .   .   . 

Derivatives  (Contrac- 
tion of)     

Derivatives  (of  Logo- 
grams)     

ee  (initially) 

ee   (MEDIALLY) 

ee   (FINALLY) 

Ed  ENDINGS 

Endings  omitted    .   .   . 

Exclamations 

Final  Contractions     . 

Fractions 

General  Rules   . 

i  sign 


Lessons*    1  aud  3 


Lesson  1, 

word    16 

11 

2, 

"      14 

u 

1 1            Oi> 

II 

4, 

2 

11 

7, 

"     161 

Page    57 

"     104 

Pages 

22, 

27,  37,  45 
Page  59 

82 


Lesson  7,  word  166 
Page  100 

"        77 


104 


"       60 
Lesson  7,  word  120 


"       2, 

"      31 

"       7, 

"    129 

"       ", 

"      95 

"     11, 

"       12 

"     15, 

"      22 

Page  90 

Lesson  12, 

word  172 

Page  5 

Lesson  7, 

word  114 

i  stroke Lesson  1,  word     6 

i  (AS  in  sick) "      2,      "      29 

i   (INITIALLY) "         7,         "121 

i   (FINALLY) "         7,         "129 

Initial  Contraction    .  Page  82 

Ing  Endings             ...  Lesson  10,  word  37 

Logograms  (Alphabet- 
ical List) Page  115 

Long  Words   (How  to 

Write  them) "64 

o Lesson  4,  word    1 

O  (as  IN  to<— "  A"  SOUNDJ  "  4,  "      63 

oi  (AS  IN  boy) "        4,        "97 

Omissions Pages  59,  66,  75 

Open  Monosyllables  .  Page  114 

Ordinal  Numbers  ...  "69 

ow  (as  in  house)    ....  Lesson  2,  word    95 

OW   (SIGN,    initially)  .     .  "         8,        "       101 

ow  (SIGN,  finally)  ...       "      8,      "       95 

Phrasing     Pages  47,  60,  69,  75 

Prefixes Page   57 

Simple  Words  ....  "82 

Size    of    Letters    (See 

General  Rules)    ....  "5 

Speed  Practice   ....  "130 

Substitution     of     Re- 
lated Sounds  ....  Lesson  11,  word  50 
Symbolical     Vowel 
Representation  .  .   .  Page  11 

Terminations "57 

y  stroke  (final)  ....  Lesson  7,  word  144 


THE    SHORTHAND    PLATES 

have  been  so  inserted  as  to  cause  the  least  inconvenience  to  the  student.     They  will  be 
found  on  the  following  pages : 


Lesson  1  . 

Page    6 

2  . 

"      13 

3  . 

"      19 

4  . 

"      23 

"        5  . 

"      26 

Lesson    6 

7 

8 

9 

10 


u 
(1 


a? 

■e32 

u 

41 

(1 

44 

11 

52 

11 

63 

Lesson  11 
12 
13 
14 
15 


Page 


11 

u 
11 


73 

Lesson  16  . 

.  Page  109 

79 

n 

17. 

.      "     117 

87 

II 

18. 

.      "     120 

95 

11 

19. 

.      "     127 

101 

REVIEW    QUESTIONS 
will  be  found  on  the  following  pages:    20,  36,  56,  103,  119. 

notice.— When  only  the  page  is  given,  the  heading  will,  in  most  cases,  readily  indicate  the  paragraph  looked 
for.    When  the  number  of  the  lesson  and  the  word  is  given,  it  refers  to  the  first  example  of  the  rule  in  question. 

*  In  looking  up  the  lesson,  the  student  may  be  guided  by  the  page  number  of  the  Shorthand  Plate,  as  shown  in 
the  index. 


133 


GRAPHIC 


OF 


SHORTHAND  ,„,^,^^^^„,, 
INSTITUTE... 

REFERENCE : 

C.  R.  LippMANN,  Director  J.  B.  Lippincott  Company,  Publishers 

Robert  B.  Erb,  Secretary  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

INSTRUCTION   IN   GRAPHIC   SHORTHAND 
GIVEN   BY  MAIL 

We  also  give  Personal  Instruction.     Send  for  detailed  announcement. 


UR  standing  offer  of  Free  Courses  of  Instruction  : — With  a  view  to 
encouraging  painstaking,  conscientious  study,  we  offer  each  month 
one  free  scholarship,  to  be  awarded  to  the  student  who  sends  in 

the  most  correct  exercise  during  the  month  ;  if  the  tuition  fee  has  already 

been  paid,  it  will  be  refunded. 

For  other  Prize  Offers,  see  Special  Announcement. 


We  furnish  Dictionaries  and  other  Reference  Books,  Fountain  Pens, 
Note  Books,  Shorthand  Pencils,  and  all  supplies  for  Stenographers 
and  ofiFice-workers  ;  also  Graphic  Exercise  Paper,  especially  ruled 
for  beginners  in  Graphic  Shorthand. 

We  recommend  teachers  to  schools  who  wish  to  establish  a  course  in 
Graphic  Shorthand. 

P.  O.  Box  50 J,  or  Odd  Fellows'  Temple,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Any  questions  relating  to  Shorthand  or  kindred  branches  will  be  cheerfully  answered. 

i 


For  Rapid  and  especially  for  Stenographic  Writing 

A*  W*  Faber's  Reporting  Pencils 


lAI        A/w.  FABER.  REPORT/m P£A/C/L.   s< 


A.  W.  Faber's"  Shorthand"  or ''Stenographic"  Pencils 

They  take  fine,  durable  points,  and  write  smoothly  with  clear, 
clean  lines  and  agreeable  color.      Sold  at  moderate  prices. 


A*  W*  Faber^s  Siberian  Leadpencils 

are  drawing  pencils  of  the  highest  order,  cost  double,  but  out- 
last two  or  three  ordinary  pencils.  Their  medium  grades  HB, 
F,  or  H,  are  eminently  suitable  for  the  most  rapid  stenographic 
work.      There  is  nothing  better. 


FOR  SALE   BY  ALL  STATIONERS 


ESTABLISHED  1 76 J 


A,  W.   FABER 

78  Reade  Street,  New  York 


Duplicate  Shorthand  Plates 

The  study  of  the  Shorthand  Plates  alone,  ivithout 
the  aid  of  the  text,  is  of  great  assistance  i?i  the 
acquisition  of  the  System.     When  the  eye  sees  an 
outline,    the    mind    instinctively    recalls    the    rules 
according   to  which    the  outline    was    traced  a?id 
the  process  by  which  they  were  logically  evolved. 
We  have   therefore   issued  the   Shorthand   Plates 
alo7ie,  171  conve7iient  forin  for  the  pocket. 


Price,  Postpaid,  go  Cents 


J.  B.  I^ippincott  Company 


11 


Sample  Book  on  application. 


Mention  this  publication. 


THE  GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND  LIBRARY 


TO  WRITE  SHORTHAND  is  the  easiest  part  of  the  stenographer's  duties;  the 
real  test  of  his  competency  is  his  abilit>'  to  READ  SHORTHAND,— to  read  his 
notes  fluently.  This  can  easily  be  done  when  they  are  written  correctly.  After 
the  student  has  mastered  the  theor>'  of  the  system,  there  is  nothing  that  will  so  well  supple- 
ment his  practice  and  enable  him  to  acquire  a  good  style  of  writing,  as  reading  Graphic 
Shorthand  literature.  In  this  manner  his  mind  will  unconsciously  absorb  the  correct  out- 
lines, and  his  eye  will  be  trained  in  discriminating  between  good  and  bad  stenographic 
forms. 

With  this  object  in  view, 

THE   GRAPHIC  SHORTHAND    LIBRARY 

will  be  issued  from  time  to  time.  It  will  contain  interesting  reading  material  written 
in  Graphic  Shorthand,  and  will  be  adapted  to  the  needs  of  the  beginner  as  well  as  to 
those  of  the  advanced  student. 

No.  1  will  contain 

THE  DECLARATION   OF  INDEPENDENCE  and 

THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES   OF  AMERICA 

PRICE        -        -        -         13   CENTS 
ill 


4 4  IIJ|I  ff^\^r%  ' '     Typewriter  Ribbons 

and  Carbon  Papers 


(TRADE   MARK) 

are 


always  recognized  as  the  oest 


"Qallinipper"  Typewriter 

Carbon 


(TRADE  MARK) 


Our  New  Invention  ^X,':: 


MITTAG  &  VOLGER 

Largest  Manufacturers  Y'hSK    RIDGE,     N.  J. 

of  Typewnter  Supplies 

The  Reporting  Stylf> 

*  *  of  Graphic  Shorthand 

Will  pave  the  way  for  those  who 
wish  to  qualify  themselves  for 

Court^  Convention^  and  General  Reporting 

"Graphic  Shorthand         — 

■■•  A   32-page   Booklet 

in  a  Nutsheir'  — 

Contains  in  concise  form  the 
fundamental  principles  of  the 

Price,  Postpaid.  6  Cents         CorTespondcnce  Style 


IV 


HARDT 


TL_Jf  5 

n 


FAMOUS  PENCILS 


#      # 


"KOH-I-NOOR    Pencils  are  the  best   made,  and  the 
name  is  a  guarantee  of  quality." 


^tmj....j.:im^.M^MM.       m, 


"The  best  Fountain  Pen  is  a  KOH-I-NOOR  Copying 
Ink  Pencil." 


t  COPYlNGINmNCe  I 


-JCIL.1.4CHARDTMUTH   VlfNHAjLi 
faL^-lVCHARDTMUTH  VIENNA  " 


«n.rE  iSWoamWiWTOMK 


"  For  Uniformity,  Reliability,  Smooth  and  Easy  Writing, 
it  cannot  be  beaten." 


"  Invaluable  to  Shorthand  Writers." 


FOR   SALE   BY   ALL   STATIONERS 


L=  k  C.  HARDTiHUTH 


LONDON 


NBW     YORK 


VIKNNA 


THE  REMINGTON-SHOLES  CO. 

Manufacturers  of 

A  Machine  of  the  TYPEWRITER 

Very  riighest  Cirade 


^i^^f^ 


-^:-^:^.i.;#> 


r 


im. 


^.**** 


-  / 


^ 


Especially  desires  Representatives  among 

Schools  and  Teachers  of  Shorthand 
and  Typewriting  in  the  United  States 

Communications  addressed  to 

FRANKLIN   REMINGTON,  General  Manager 
J  27  Rees  Street,  Chicago 

will  receive  prompt  attention 


VI 


EXTRACT  FROM  "SHORTHAND  IN  FOREIGN  COUNTRIES,"  CIRCULAR 
OF  INFORMATION  ON  SHORTHAND  INSTRUCTION  AND  PRAC- 
TICE, BUREAU  OF  EDUCATION,  WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 


Argentine  Republic. — Gabelsberger  system  taught  at  Collegio  Nuevo,  Buenos  Ayres. 

Austria. — The  system  of  Gabelsberger  is  used  almost  exclusively;  is  taught  in  the  public 
schools  in  the  following  languages:  German,  Italian,  Czechish,  Polish,  Ruthenian,  Slavonian, 
and  Croatian,  and  is  used  exclusively  in  the  legislative  bodies,  the  Council  of  the  Realm  and 
the  Delegations,  and  in  the  seventeen  provincial  Diets,  for  the  official  stenographic  record.  For 
instruction  in  schools,  only  the  Gabelsberger  system  is  permitted. 

Brazil. — An  adaptation  of  the  Gabelsberger  system  has  been  issued  at  Rio  de  Janeiro. 

Bulgaria. — Gabelsberger  shorthand  introduced  and  taught  in  schools  by  the  government ; 
it  is  also  used  in  the  National  Assembly. 

Denmark. — Gabelsberger  shorthand  used  in  Parliament.  Instruction  in  the  system  given 
in  the  (Government)  Training  School  for  Parliamentary  Reporters,  also  in  the  Naval  Officers' 
School. 

Finland. — Gabelsberger  system  used  in  Parliament  and  in  the  High  Schools. 

Germany. — Gabelsberger  shorthand  taught  in  High  Schools,  used  in  the  Reichstag  and 
in  the  National  Assemblies  of  the  Federal  States  (with  one  exception).  Used  in  the  courts 
and  in  the  army.  The  Royal  Stenographic  Institute  at  Dresden  is  the  only  government  Short- 
hand University  (of  academic  rank)  in  the  world,  and  has  been  established  in  the  interest  of 
Gabelsberger  shorthand  exclusively. 

Hungary. — Gabelsberger  shorthand  introduced  in  High  Schools,  and  used  in  the  Hun- 
garian Parliament. 

Greece. — Gabelsberger  system  used  in  the  National  Council  at  Athens. 

Italy. — Stenography  is  hardly  used  in  this  country ;  but  in  a  few  Government  Technical 
Schools,  and  by  seventeen  societies,  the  Gabelsberger  system  is  taught. 

Norway. — Mr.  Chappelen,  Chief  Parliamentary  Shorthand  Writer  at  Christiana,  writes: 
"We  use  here  the  system  of  Gabelsberger  exclusively." 

Russia. — At  the  "  Government  Competition"  the  prize  was  equally  divided  between  the 
Gabelsberger  system  and  the  Stoize  (which  is  based  on  the  Gabelsberger)  system. 

Servia. — Gabelsberger  shorthand  is  used  in  the  Senate. 

Spain. — Gabelsberger  system  is  used  to  a  limited  extent. 

Sweden. — With  three  exceptions,  all  of  the  thirty-four  parliamentary  reporters  use  Gabels- 
berger shorthand. 

Switzerland. — From  1876  to  1S84,  thirty-six  larger  or  smaller  works,  by  official  commis- 
sion, were  executed  by  Swiss  stenographers  of  the  Gabelsberger  system. 

The  above  report  was  published  in  1893,  but  the  data  were  compiled  in  1889—90.  Since 
then,  the  system  has  spread  considerably.  According  to  the  Dresden  Year  Book, — which  fur- 
nishes official  statistics, — Gabelsberger's  system  of  shorthand  is  now  used  in  the  following 
languages:  English,  German,  French,  Spanish,  Portuguese,  Italian,  Swedish,  Norwegian, 
Danish,  Finnish,  Dutch,  Bohemian,  Polish.  Hungarian,  Croatian,  Slovenian,  Ruthenian, 
Servian,  Bulgarian,  and  Greek. 

vii 


FROM  PEOPLE  WHO  USE   THE  SYSTEM. 


C.  R.  LiPPMANN, 

Cj„  y.  B.  Lippincott  Company, 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Dear  Sir: — "We  take  pleasure  in  stating  to  you  herewith  that  all  of  the  stenographers 
employed  by  us  during  the  past  twelve  or  fifteen  years  have  used,  and  those  employed  by  us 
at  present  are  using,  the  Gabelsberger  system  of  shorthand,  to  our  entire  satisfaction." — 
Steinway  &  Sons,  A'ezu  York  City. 

"  I  take  pleasure  in  informing  you  that  Gabelsberger  Shorthand  has  been  used  in  the 
office  of  Messrs.  Heidelbach,  Ickelheimer  &  Co.  for  the  last  twelve  years  with  satisfactory 
results.  I  trust  that  the  text-book  which  you  are  publishing  will  gain  many  friends  to  that 
system  in  Philadelphia." — I.  J.  Adler,  Stenographer,  Heidelbach,  Ickelheimer  ^  Co.,  Bankers, 
Ne-M  York  City. 

"  I  take  much  pleasure  in  stating  that  I  use  the  Gabelsberger  Graphic  Shorthand  system 
to  my  own  and  to  my  employers'  satisfaction.  I  consider  the  system  the  best  of  all  existing 
ones." — Edward  Bernard,  -with  Kessler  <5r»  Co.,  Bankers,  ^4  Wall  Street,  N'eiu  York  City. 

"  I  would  like  advance  papers  on  Stenography,  as  I  have  written  Shorthand  for  many 
years,  but  think  the  Graphic  system  the  best  I  have  seen  thus  far." — Geo.  H.  Ervin,  Troy 
Sheet  Metal  Co.,  Troy,  N.  Y. 

"  I  have  been  a  student  of  Graham's,  Osgoodby's,  Munson's,  Longley's,  Burnz's,  etc., 
and  have  the  text-books  of  all  of  them,  besides  some  other  well  known  authors ;  but,  as  a 
system,  I  prefer  the  Gabelsberger  to  any  that  I  know  of." — R.  Barnard,  OJice  of  M.  P. 
Hayes,  Sheriff  and  Tax  Collector,  Bridgeport,  Mono  County,  Cal. 

"  I  have  practiced  Gabelsberger  Shorthand  for  a  number  of  years,  and  have  been  much 
impressed  with  its  beaut}',  legibility,  and  speed,  and  above  all  things,  its  educative  force. 
There  is  no  system,  so  far  as  I  know,  which  appeals  so  much  to  the  reasonijig  poiver  of  the 
student  as  does  the  Gabelsberger  system." — F.  M.  Wiemer,  principal.  First  District  School, 
Milwaukee,  Wis. 

"  I  am  an  old  Isaac  Pitman  Phonographer,  but  find  the  rising  generation  do  not  master  it 
as  well  as  they  should,  and  if  your  system  is  as  good  as  it  seems  to  be  from  the  sample  you 
sent  me,  I  think  I  can  use  it  to  advantage  among  students  who  are  not  willing  to  put  in  the 
necessarj'  time  on  the  Geometric  systems." — E.  Pring,  M.D.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

"I  have  been  getting  into  the  system  from  the  lessons  you  sent  me  .  .  .  and  so  far  am 
pleased  with  it.  I  must  say  here  that  I  have  practiced  and  taught  the  various  Pitmanic  styles 
for  nearly  fifteen  years ;  also  learned  and  taught  several  systems  radically  different  from  the 
Pitmanic,  which  knowledge  makes  it  easier  to  get  into  and  form  a  practical  idea  in  regard  to 
what  a  system  is  worth,  than  otherwise.  ...  I  would  like  verj'  much  to  pursue  the  Graphic 
with  your  kind  assistance." — W.  H.  Wagner,  Teacher  of  Shorthand,  High  School,  Los 
Angeles. 

"  I  began  to  study  the  Gabelsberger  system  a  little  over  a  year  ago,  and  I  can  now 
report  trials  with  much  greater  ease  than  I  could  after  ten  years'  practice  with  the  Pitman 
system.     The  Gabelsberger  Shorthand  is  the  system." — G.  F.  HOFF,  Anthracite,  Cal. 

(The  word  the  was  underlined  by  Mr.  HofiF.) 

viii 


"  I  like  the  system  very  well  so  far  as  I  have  examined  it,  and  I  hope  I  shall  be  more 
satisfied  with  it  as  I  advance.  I  have  studied  thoroughly  several  systems  of  shorthand,  but  I 
am  dissatisfied  with  all  the  Geometric  systems." — James  F.  Leddy,  Whitestone,  L.  I. 

"  I  am  sorry  I  am  not  yet  able  to  write  to  you  in  shorthand,  as  I  have  somewhat  neglected 
the  study  of  this  system,  owing  to  the  fact  that  I  can  write  Pitman  sufficiently  well  for  my 
present  needs.  I  am,  however,  so  well  impressed  with  the  Gabelsberger  system,  that  I 
shall  keep  at  it,  as  I  am  convinced  that  it  is  more  legil^le  than  the  Pitman  system,  and  I 
believe  that  I  personally  can  trace  the  characters  faster  than  the  Geometric  ones,  that  is,  I 
shall  be  able  to  after  a  little  practice,  as  I  can  write  longhand  very  rapidly." — W.  Loveday, 
Box  1326,  Tacoma,  Wash. 

"  I  am  now  studying  the  reporting  style,  and  am  even  more  pleased  with  it  than  with  the 
corresponding  style.  I  have  had  some  e.xperience  with  the  Pernin  system  with  its  uniform 
omissions  of  the  final  parts  of  the  words,  and  must  say  that  I  consider  the  varied  omissions 
of  your  system  far  superior.  I  also  find  Graphic  Shorthand  very  much  easier  on  my  hand 
than  the  Geometric  systems,  where  the  outlines  are  always  a  stumbling  block  by  reason  of 
their  awkwardness." — John  C.  Murdoch,  Golden  Valley,' CaL 

"Must  say  that  I  like  the  study  very  well,  and  I  think  that  it  has  at  least  one  great 
advantage  over  the  old  systems  of  shorthand,  not  having  so  many  intricate  characters  to  be 
committed  and  confuse  the  learner,  which  also  renders  it  capable  of  being  retained  when  not 
practically  employed. 

"  I  think,  too,  by  exercising  the  same  continuance  required  in  the  study  of  the  old  systems, 
any  one  should  become  equally  proficient  in  a  shorter  time  than  by  the  old  methods.  In  short, 
I  think  this  a  plain,  practicable  system." — P,  J.  Flood,  Agent,  Adams  Express  Co.,  Nobles- 
town,  Pa. 

"  I  have  done  all  the  problems  and  will  send  them  to  you  in  a  few  days  after  I  do  the 
lesson  in  Shorthand,  which  I  think  is  better  than  the  Pitman  system,  as  I  have  tried  it." — Wm. 
Ohm,  S»iithsoniatt  Institute,  Washington,  D.  C. 

•'  Thank  you  for  your  kind  expression  of  opinion  in  regard  to  the  legibility  of  my  writing. 
It  seems  to  me  that  the  system  ought  to  get  the  credit  for  this.  I  have  found  in  my  work  that 
the  legibility  of  the  system  is  beyond  praise." — J.  Black,  Denver,  Col. 

"  1  use  Grapnic  snorthand  now  in  place  of  my  Geometric  system,  and  I  am  sure  it  has 
many  advantages  over  the  latter.  It  is  certainly  more  legible,  and  easier  to  write.  I  have 
always  found  the  reading  of  my  notes  a  matter  of  great  annoyance ;  but  I  never,  as  yet,  had 
trouble  in  making  out  my  Graphic  notes." — Fred.  S.  Fleming,  Fruit  Vale,  Cal. 

"  Your  Graphic  course  of  stenography  1  consider  fine,  and  shall  study  it  with  pleasure, 
and,  I  hope,  with  profit." — Kate  Eagles,  Teacher,  Lancaster,  Pa. 

"I  like  the  system." — James  D.  Clifford,  .A'i  Y. 

"  Your  system  of  stenography  I  find  very  easy,  and  don't  find  any  trouble  in  keeping  the 
letters  in  mind.". — A.  Poeh.mann,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

"  I  have  just  started  in  on  the  stenography — I  am  delighted  with  it." — H.  H.  Day,  Zan- 
singburg,  JV.  V. 

"Would  that  all  shorthand  writers  knew  its  unequalled  advantages." — Rev.  P.  Walter 
Stahley,  Carrollto-wn,  Pa. 


"  I  gave  up  practicing  shorthand  until  a  month  ago,  when  I  began  to  take  it  up  again,  and 
to  my  surprise  found  that  I  had  practically  lost  nothing.  I  regard  this  as  the  highest  recom- 
mendation of  the  system,  for  I  had  practiced  it  only  four  months  last  year,  and  had  not  touched 
it  in  ten  months.  I  find  it  invaluable  in  taking  notes  while  interviewing,  and  one  night  last 
week  took  a  Column  interview  from  dictation  by  the  system." — Fred.  D.  Schrader,  IVask- 
ingtoti  Post,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"The  undersigned,  having  studied  and  taught  the  shorthand  system  invented  by  Gabels- 
berger  for  about  thirty  years,  is  exceedingly  glad  to  learn  that  in  its  adaptation  to  the  English 
language  it  is  to  be  pushed  in  this  country  by  the  well  known  publishing  house  of  J.  B.  LlP- 
PINCOTT  Company,  of  Philadelphia.  Success  to  the  new  undertaking !" — F.  W.  Stellhorn, 
President,  Capital  University,  Cohanbus,  Ohio. 

"  Having  studied  some  years  ago  the  German  system  of  Gabelsberger's  Stenography, 
which  I  understand  is  about  to  be  introduced  in  this  country  by  the  J.  B.  Lippincott  Com- 
pany, of  Philadelphia,  I  can  heartily  recommend  the  system,  and  hope  that  the  above  firm 
may  be  successful  in  introducing  the  same," — E.  P.  Mayser,  Pastor,  Zion's  Lutheran  Church, 
Lancaster,  Pa. 

" My  experience  has  been  a  very  satisfactory  one  as  regards  the  system  in  ques- 
tion. I  came  to  this  country  in  1882.  .  .  .  While  up  to  that  time  I  had  never  dreamt  of 
using  the  Gabelsberger  system  for  any  other  language  than  German,  force  of  necessity  made 
me  apply  it  to  the  English,  and  I  succeeded  beyond  expectation.  I  have  since  occupied,  at 
various  times,  positions  as  stenographer  for  German  and  English  in  the  best  mercantile  houses, 
such  as  Messrs.  Ladenburg,  Thalman  &  Co.,  Wm.  Steinway  &  Sons,  and  for  the  last  eleven 

years  I  have  been  with  the  banking  house  of  Messrs.  August  Belmont  &  Co I  welcome 

most  heartily  such  a  work  as  you  propose  to  publish,  since  it  will  no  doubt  tend  to  win  many 
new  friends  in  this  country  for  our  beautiful  and  well-tried  system." — Adolph  Frank,  Head 
Stenographer,  August  Behnont  ^f  Co.,  New  York  City. 

"  I  know  the  Gabelsberger-Richter  shorthand,  and  believe  it  has  a  fine  future  before  it. 
The  world's  universal  shorthand  will  be  a  script  system  with  joined  vowels;  there  is  no  doubt 
about  that.  It  admits  of  abbreviation  not  possible  with  Geometric  systems ;  and  the  latter,  as 
the  weaker,  will  evidently  drop  out.  Of  course  this  is  dreadful  heresy,  but  I  was  never  one 
of  those  prejudiced  people  who  think  that  wisdom  will  die  with  (Pitmanic)  phonography.  I 
think  the  Germans  have  laid  hold  of  the  best  end  of  the  stick,  and  that  the  universal  shorthand 
will  come  from  Germany,  or  be  based  upon  a  German  system." — y.  L.  Cobbin.  Court  Reporter, 
South  Africa. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


FormL9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 


UNIVERSITY  ot  CALIFOKWIa 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 

UBRARY 


^po  ijippincinn— 
L66  1     Lessons  in 
graphic 


shorthand. 


JAN 


1  1  ic1ri  OVERDuI 


Z56 
L66  1 


£^  ,«5  *j.  tf«.^«.-i- 1«, »/"  _^ 


try  >*•  •t>»v>t>M>-^t'>M 

>StW^ 


